EN / ACS580 drives standard control program firmware manual
File info: application/pdf · 540 pages · 4.46MB
EN / ACS580 drives standard control program firmware manual
This manual is compatible with the ACS-AP-x assistant control panel, the hardware version C or later and panel software version 5.02 or later. The images and instructions are based on the use of the assistant control pa…
Extracted Text
--
ABB GENERAL PURPOSE DRIVES
ACS480 standard control program Firmware manual
-- List of related manuals
Drive firmware manuals and guides ACS480 standard control program firmware manual ACS480-04 (0.75 to 11 kW) hardware manual ACS480-04 quick installation and start-up guide ACS-AP-x assistant control panels user's manual ACS-BP-S basic control panels user's manual
Code (English) 3AXD50000047399 3AXD50000047392 3AXD50000047400 3AUA0000085685 3AXD50000032527
Option manuals and guides DPMP-01 mounting platform for ACP-AP control panel DPMP-02/03 mounting platform for ACP-AP control panel FCAN-01 CANopen adapter module user's manual
FCNA-01 ControlNet adapter module user's manual FDNA-01 DeviceNetTM adapter module user's manual FECA-01 EtherCAT adapter module user's manual FENA-01/-11/-21 Ethernet adapter module user's manual FEPL-02 Ethernet POWERLINK adapter module user's manual FMBT-21 Modbus/TCP adapter module user's manual FPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP adapter module user's manual
FSCA-01 RS-485 adapter module user's manual Flange mounting kit installation supplement
3AUA0000100140 3AUA0000136205
3AFE68615500 3AUA0000141650 3AFE68573360 3AUA0000068940 3AUA0000093568
3AUA0000123527
3AXD50000158607 3AFE68573271 3AUA0000109533 3AXD50000019100
Option manuals and guides Drive composer PC tool user's manual Converter modules with electrolytic DC capacitors in the DC link, capacitor reforming instructions NETA-21 remote monitoring tool user's manual NETA-21 remote monitoring tool installation and startup guide
3AUA0000094606 3BFE64059629
3AUA0000096939 3AUA0000096881
You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet. See section Document library on the Internet on the inside of the back cover. For manuals not available in the Document library, contact your local ABB representative.
The code below opens an online listing of the manuals applicable to the product:
ACS480 manuals
Firmware manual
ACS480 standard control program
Table of contents
1. Introduction to the manual
2. Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
3. Control panel 4. Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 5. Control macros 6. Program features 7. Parameters 8. Additional parameter data 9. Fault tracing 10. Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus
interface (EFB) 11. Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 12. Control chain diagrams Further information
2019 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.
3AXD50000047399 Rev D EN EFFECTIVE: 2019-09-16
Table of contents
Table of contents 5
1. Introduction to the manual
Contents of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Purpose of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Contents of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Categorization by frame (size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S. . a. .f.e.t.y. . . 15
Related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Cybersecurity disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2. Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
Contents of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 How to start up the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
How to start up the drive using the First start assistant on the assistant control panel . . 20 How to control the drive through the I/O interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 How to perform the ID run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
ID run procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3. Control panel
Contents of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Removing and reinstalling the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Layout of the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Layout of the control panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Key shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4. Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Contents of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Primary settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Start, stop, reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Pump and fan control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Advanced functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Clock, region, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Reset to defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
6 Table of contents
I/O menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 System info menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Energy efficiency menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Backups menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5. Control macros
Contents of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 ABB standard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Default control connections for the ABB standard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ABB standard macro (vector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Default control connections for the ABB standard (vector) macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 ABB limited 2-wire macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Default control connections for the ABB limited 2-wire macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 3-wire macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Default control connections for the 3-wire macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Alternate macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Default control connections for the Alternate macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Motor potentiometer macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Default control connections for the Motor potentiometer macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Hand/Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Default control connections for the Hand/Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Hand/PID macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Default control connections for the Hand/PID macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 PID macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Default control connections for the PID macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Panel PID macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Default control connections for the Panel PID macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 PFC macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Default control connections for the PFC macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Parameter default values for different macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
6. Program features
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Local control vs. external control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Operating modes of the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Speed control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Torque control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Frequency control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Special control modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Drive configuration and programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Configuring via parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Adaptive programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Control interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Programmable analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Programmable analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Programmable digital inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Table of contents 7
Programmable frequency input and output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Programmable relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Programmable I/O extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Fieldbus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Application control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Reference ramping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Constant speeds/frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Critical speeds/frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Speed controller autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 User load curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Control macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Process PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Pump and fan control (PFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Timed functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Motor potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Mechanical brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Motor types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Motor identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Scalar motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Speed control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Torque control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Power loss ride-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 U/f ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Flux braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 DC magnetization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Energy optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Switching frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Rush control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Speed compensated stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 DC voltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Overvoltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Undervoltage control (power loss ride-through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Voltage control and trip limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Brake chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Safety and protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Fixed/Standard protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Motor thermal protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Motor overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Automatic fault resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Signal supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Energy saving calculators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Load analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Backup and restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8 Table of contents
User parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Data storage parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Parameter checksum calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 User lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
7. Parameters
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Summary of parameter groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Parameter listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
01 Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 03 Input references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 04 Warnings and faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 05 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 06 Control and status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 07 System info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 10 Standard DI, RO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 11 Standard DIO, FI, FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 12 Standard AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 13 Standard AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 15 I/O extension module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 19 Operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 20 Start/stop/direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 21 Start/stop mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 22 Speed reference selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 23 Speed reference ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 24 Speed reference conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 25 Speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 26 Torque reference chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 28 Frequency reference chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 30 Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 31 Fault functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 32 Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 34 Timed functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 35 Motor thermal protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 36 Load analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 37 User load curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 40 Process PID set 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 41 Process PID set 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 43 Brake chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 44 Mechanical brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 45 Energy efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 46 Monitoring/scaling settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 47 Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 49 Panel port communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 51 FBA A settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 52 FBA A data in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 53 FBA A data out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 58 Embedded fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Table of contents 9
71 External PID1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 76 PFC configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 77 PFC maintenance and monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 95 HW configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 96 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 97 Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 98 User motor parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 99 Motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Differences in the default values between 50 Hz and 60 Hz supply frequency settings . . . . 412
8. Additional parameter data
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Fieldbus addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Parameter groups 1...9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Parameter groups 10...99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
9. Fault tracing
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Warnings and faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Pure events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Editable messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Warning/fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Viewing warning/fault information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 QR code generation for mobile service application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
10. Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Connecting EIA-485 Modbus RTU terminal to the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Connecting the drive to the fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Setting up the embedded fieldbus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Setting the drive control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Basics of the embedded fieldbus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Control word and Status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Data input/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Register addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 About the control profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Control Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Control Word for the ABB Drives profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Control Word for the DCU Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
10 Table of contents
Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Status Word for the ABB Drives profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Status Word for the DCU Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
State transition diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 References for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Actual values for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Modbus holding register addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Modbus holding register addresses for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile . . . . . . 497
Modbus function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Exception codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Coils (0xxxx reference set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Discrete inputs (1xxxx reference set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 Error code registers (holding registers 400090...400100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
11. Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Basics of the fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Control word and Status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 Contents of the fieldbus Control word (ABB Drives profile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Contents of the fieldbus Status word (ABB Drives profile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 The state diagram (ABB Drives profile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Setting up the drive for fieldbus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Parameter setting example: FPBA (PROFIBUS DP) with ABB Drives profile . . . . . . . . 516 Automatic drive configuration for fieldbus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
12. Control chain diagrams
Contents of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Frequency reference selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 Frequency reference modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Speed reference source selection I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Speed reference source selection II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Speed reference ramping and shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Speed error calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Torque reference source selection and modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 Reference selection for torque controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 Torque limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 Process PID setpoint and feedback source selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 Process PID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 External PID setpoint and feedback source selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 External PID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 Direction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Further information
Table of contents 11
12 Table of contents
Introduction to the manual 13
1
Introduction to the manual
Contents of this chapter
The chapter describes applicability, target audience and purpose of this manual. It also describes the contents of this manual and refers to a list of related manuals for more information.
Applicability
The manual applies to the ACS480 standard control program (ASDKA version 2.09 or later). To check the firmware version of the control program in use, see system information (select Menu - System info - Drive) or parameter 07.05 Firmware version (see page 194) on the control panel.
Compatibility
This manual is compatible with the ACS-AP-x assistant control panel, the hardware version C or later and panel software version 5.02 or later. The images and instructions are based on the use of the assistant control panel with an ACS480 drive equipped with the Standard control program.
14 Introduction to the manual
Safety instructions
Follow all safety instructions. � Read the complete safety instructions in the Hardware manual of the drive
before you install, commission, or use the drive. � Read the firmware function-specific warnings and notes before changing
parameter values. These warnings and notes are included in the parameter descriptions presented in chapter Parameters on page 177.
Target audience
The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity, wiring, electrical components and electrical schematic symbols.
The manual is written for readers worldwide. Both SI and imperial units are shown. Special US instructions for installations in the United States are given.
Purpose of the manual
This manual provides information needed for designing, commissioning, or operating the drive system.
Contents of this manual
The manual consists of the following chapters: � Introduction to the manual (this chapter, page 13) describes applicability, target
audience, purpose and contents of this manual. At the end, it lists terms and abbreviations. � Start-up, control with I/O and ID run (page 19) describes how to start up the drive as well as how to start, stop, change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the motor speed through the I/O interface. � Control panel (page 39) contains instructions for removing and reinstalling the assistant control panel and briefly describes its display, keys and key shortcuts. � Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel (page 45) describes the simplified settings and diagnostic functions provided on the assistant control panel. � Control macros (page 73) contains a short description of each macro together with a connection diagram. Macros are pre-defined applications which will save the user time when configuring the drive. � Program features (page 105) describes program features with lists of related user settings, actual signals, and fault and warning messages. � Parameters (page 177) describes the parameters used to program the drive. � Additional parameter data (page 415) contains further information on the parameters.
Introduction to the manual 15
� Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) (page 475) describes the communication to and from a fieldbus network using the drive embedded fieldbus interface with the Modbus RTU protocol.
� Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter (page 505) describes the communication to and from a fieldbus network using an optional fieldbus adapter module.
� Fault tracing (page 451) lists the warning and fault messages with possible causes and remedies.
� Control chain diagrams (page 523) describes the parameter structure within the drive.
� Further information (inside of the back cover, page 539) describes how to make product and service inquiries, get information on product training, provide feedback on ABB Drives manuals and find documents on the Internet.
Categorization by frame (size)
The drive is manufactured in several frames (frame sizes), which are denoted as RN, where N is an integer. Some information which only concern certain frames are marked with the symbol of the frame (RN).
The frame is marked on the type designation label attached to the drive, see chapter Operation principle and hardware description, section Type designation label in the Hardware manual of the drive.
Related documents
See List of related manuals on page 2 (inside of the front cover).
16 Introduction to the manual
Terms and abbreviations
Term/abbreviation ACS-BP-S
ACX-AP-x
AI AO BIO-01
Brake chopper
Brake resistor
BREL-01 Control board Control unit CDPI-01 CCA-01 CHDI-01 DC link DC link capacitors DI DO DPMP-01 DPMP-02/03 Drive EFB FBA FECA-01 FENA-21
FEPL-02 FMBT-21 FPBA-01
Explanation Basic control panel, basic operator keypad for communication with the drive.
Assistant control panel, advanced operator keypad for communication with the drive. The ACS480 supports types ACS-AP-I, ACS-AP-S and ACS-AP-W (with a Bluetooth interface). Analog input; interface for analog input signals Analog output; interface for analog output signals Frontal I/O extension module. Can be used simultaneously with a fieldbus adapter module. Conducts the surplus energy from the intermediate circuit of the drive to the brake resistor when necessary. The chopper operates when the DC link voltage exceeds a certain maximum limit. The voltage rise is typically caused by deceleration (braking) of a high inertia motor. Dissipates the drive surplus braking energy conducted by the brake chopper to heat. Essential part of the brake circuit. See chapter Brake chopper in the Hardware manual of the drive. Optional side-mounted relay output extension module Circuit board in which the control program runs. Control board built in a housing Communication adapter module
Configuration adapter Optional 115/230 V digital input extension module DC circuit between rectifier and inverter Energy storage which stabilizes the intermediate circuit DC voltage Digital input; interface for digital input signals
Digital output; interface for digital output signals Mounting platform for ACX-AP control panel (flange mounting) Mounting platform for ACX-AP control panel (surface mounting) Frequency converter for controlling AC motors Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus adapter
Optional EtherCAT adapter module Optional Ethernet adapter module for EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP and PROFINET IO protocols
Ethernet POWERLINK adapter module Optional Modbus/TCP adapter module Optional PROFIBUS DP adapter module
Introduction to the manual 17
Term/abbreviation Frame (size)
FSCA-01 ID run IGBT Intermediate circuit Inverter I/O LSW Macro
NETA-21 Network control
Parameter PID controller PLC PROFIBUS, PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET IO PTC R1, ... RIIO-01 RO Rectifier STO
Explanation Refers to drive physical size. The type designation label attached to the drive shows the frame of the drive, see chapter Operation principle and hardware description, section Type designation label in the drive hardware manual. Optional RSA-485 adapter module
Motor identification run. During the identification run, the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. Insulated gate bipolar transistor
See DC link. Converts direct current and voltage to alternating current and voltage. Input/Output Least significant word Pre-defined default values of parameters in drive control program. Each macro is intended for a specific application. See chapter Control macros on page 73. Remote monitoring tool With fieldbus protocols based on the Common Industrial Protocol (CIPTM), such as DeviceNet and Ethernet/IP, denotes the control of the drive using the Net Ctrl and Net Ref objects of the ODVA AC/DC Drive Profile. For more information, see www.odva.org, and the following manuals: � FDNA-01 DeviceNet adapter module user's manual (3AFE68573360
[English]), and � FENA-01/-11/-21 Ethernet adapter module user's manual
(3AUA0000093568 [English]). User-adjustable operation instruction to the drive, or signal measured or calculated by the drive Proportional�integral�derivative controller. Drive speed control is based on PID algorithm. Programmable logic controller Registered trademarks of PI - PROFIBUS & PROFINET International
Positive temperature coefficient, thermistor whose resistance is dependent on temperature, Frame (size)
Frontal standard I/O extension. Cannot be used simultaneously with a fieldbus adapter Relay output; interface for a digital output signal. Implemented with a relay. Converts alternating current and voltage to direct current and voltage. Safe torque off. See chapter The Safe torque off function in the Hardware manual of the drive.
18 Introduction to the manual
Cybersecurity disclaimer
This product is designed to be connected to and to communicate information and data via a network interface. It is Customer's sole responsibility to provide and continuously ensure a secure connection between the product and Customer network or any other network (as the case may be). Customer shall establish and maintain any appropriate measures (such as but not limited to the installation of firewalls, application of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of anti-virus programs, etc) to protect the product, the network, its system and the interface against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information. ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to such security breaches, any unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information.
See also section User lock on page 175.
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 19
2
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
Contents of this chapter
The chapter describes how to: � perform the start-up � start, stop, change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the speed of the
motor through the I/O interface � perform an Identification run (ID run) for the drive.
20 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
How to start up the drive
How to start up the drive using the First start assistant on the assistant control panel
Safety
Do not start-up the drive unless you are a qualified electrician.
Read and obey the instructions in chapter Safety instructions at the beginning of the Hardware manual of the drive. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment
Check the installation. See chapter Installation checklist in the Hardware manual of the drive.
Make sure there is no active start on (DI1 in factory settings, that is, ABB standard macro). The drive will start up automatically at power-up if the external run command is on and the drive is in the remote control mode.
Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger.
De-couple the driven machine if
� there is a risk of damage in case of an incorrect direction of rotation, or
� a Normal ID run is required during the drive start-up, when the load torque is higher than 20% or the machinery is not able to withstand the nominal torque transient during the ID run.
Hints on using the assistant control panel
The two commands at the bottom of the display
(Options and Menu in the figure on the right),
show the functions of the two softkeys
and
located below the display. The commands
assigned to the softkeys vary depending on the
context.
Use keys , , and to move the cursor and/or change values depending on the active view.
Key ? shows a context-sensitive help page.
For more information, see ACS-AP-x assistant control panels user's manual (3AUA0000085685 [English]).
1 � First start assistant guided settings: Language, date and time, and motor nominal values
Have the motor name plate data at hand. Power up the drive.
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 21
The First start assistant guides you through the first start-up.
The assistant begins automatically. Wait until the control panel enters the view shown on the right.
Select the language you want to use by
highlighting it (if not already highlighted) and
pressing
(OK).
Note: After you have selected the language, it takes a few minutes to download the language file to the control panel.
Select Start set-up and press
(Next).
Select the localization you want to use and press (Next).
Change the units shown on the panel if needed.
� Go to the edit view of a selected row by pressing .
� Scroll the view with and .
Go to the next view by pressing
(Next).
Set the date and time as well as date and time display formats.
� Go to the edit view of a selected row by pressing .
� Scroll the view with and .
Go to the next view by pressing
(Next).
22 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
In an edit view:
� Use and right.
to move the cursor left and
� Use and to change the value.
� Press
(Save) to accept the new setting,
or press
(Cancel) to go back to the
previous view without making changes.
To give the drive a name that will be shown at the
top, press .
If you do not want to change the default name
(ACS480), continue straight to the set-up of the
motor nominal values by pressing
(Next).
Enter the name:
� To select the character mode (lower case / upper case / numbers / special characters), press until symbol is highlighted and then select the mode with and . Now you can start adding characters. The mode remains selected until you select another one.
� To add a character, highlight it with and press .
and ,
� To remove a letter, press .
� Press
(Save) to accept the new setting,
or press
(Cancel) to go back to the
previous view without making changes.
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 23
Refer to the motor nameplate for the following nominal value settings of the motor. Enter the values exactly as shown on the motor nameplate.
Example of a nameplate of an induction (asynchronous) motor:
ABB Motors
3 motor
M2AA 200 MLA 4
IEC 200 M/L 55
No
Ins.cl. F
V 690 Y
Hz kW r/min A cos 50 30 1475 32.5 0.83
400 D 50 30 1475 56 0.83
660 Y 50 30 1470 34 0.83
380 D 415 D
50 30 1470 59 0.83 50 30 1475 54 0.83
440 D 60 35 1770 59 0.83
Cat. no 3GAA 202 001 - ADA
IP 55 IA/IN t E/s
6312/C3
6210/C3
180
IEC 34-1
Select the motor type.
Check that the motor data is correct. Values are predefined on the basis of the drive size but you should verify that they correspond to the motor.
Start with the motor nominal current.
If you have to change the value, go to the edit view of the selected row by pressing (when this symbol is shown at the end of the row).
Set the correct value:
� Use and right.
to move the cursor left and
� Use and to change the value.
Press
(Save) to accept the new setting, or
press
(Cancel) to go back to the previous
view without making changes.
Continue to check/edit the nominal values and select scalar or vector control mode.
Motor nominal cos and nominal torque are optional.
Roll down with to see the last row in the view.
After editing the last row, the panel goes to the
next view.
To go directly to the next view, press
(Next).
24 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
Direction test is optional, and requires rotating the motor. Do not do this if it could cause any risk, or if the mechanical set-up does not allow it.
To do the direction test, select Spin the motor
and press
(Next).
Press the Start key drive.
on the panel to start the
Check the direction of the motor.
If it is forward, select Yes, motor is spinning
forward and press
(Next) to continue.
If the direction is not forward, select No, fix
direction and press
(Next) to continue.
Forward direction
Reverse direction
If you want to make a backup of the settings made
so far, select Backup and press
(Next).
If you do not want to make a backup, select Not
now and press
(Next).
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 25
The first start is now complete and the drive is ready for use.
Press
(Done) to enter the Home view.
The Home view monitoring the values of the selected signals is shown on the panel.
2 � Additional settings in the Primary settings menu
Make any additional adjustments, for example,
macro, ramps, and limits, starting from the Main
menu � press
(Menu) to enter the Main
menu.
Select Primary settings and press (or ).
(Select)
ABB recommends that you make at least these additional settings:
� Choose a macro or set start, stop and reference values individually
� Ramps � Limits
With the Primary settings menu, you can also adjust settings related to the motor, PID, fieldbus, advanced functions and clock, region and display. In addition, the menu contains an item to reset the panel Home view.
To get more information on Primary settings
menu items, press ? to open the help page.
26 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
2 � Additional settings: Macro
Select Macro: and press
(Select) (or ).
To change the macro in use, select the new macro
and press
(Select), or to go back without
changes, press
(Back).
Notes:
� Changing macro resets all settings except motor data to the default values of the selected macro.
� When you change the macro, you also change the use of the I/O signals in the drive. Make sure the actual I/O wiring and the use of I/O in the control program match each other. You can check the current I/O use in the I/O menu under the Main menu (see page 28).
To get information on a selected macro, press
? .The help page shows the use of signals and
I/O connections. For detailed I/O connection diagrams, see chapter Control macros on page 73.
Scroll the page with and . To return to the Control macro submenu, press
(Exit). � All macros, except the ABB standard (vector)
macro, use scalar motor control by default. At the first start you can select to use scalar or vector motor control. If you later want to change the selection, Select Menu - Primary settings Motor - Control mode and follow the instructions.
Note: Most of the macros uses I/O that exist only when I/O module is installed. If you do not use it, choose ABB limited macro or change the default use of the I/O by parameters.
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 27
2 � Additional settings: Start, stop and reference values If you do not wish to use a macro, define the settings for start, stop and reference: Select Start, stop, reference and press (Select) (or ).
Adjust the parameters according to your needs.
Select parameter and press
(Select).
When you change the settings, you also change the use of the I/O signals in the drive. Make sure the actual I/O wiring and the use of I/O in the control program match each other. You can check the current I/O use in the I/O menu under the Main menu (see page 28).
After making the adjustments, go back to the Primary settings menu by pressing (Back).
2 � Additional settings: Ramps (acceleration and deceleration times for the motor)
Select Ramps and press
(Select) (or ).
Adjust the parameters according to your needs.
Select a parameter and press
(Edit).
After making the adjustments, go back to the Primary settings menu by pressing (Back).
28 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
2 � Additional settings: Limits
Select Limits and press
(Select) (or ).
Adjust the parameters according to your needs.
Select a parameter and press
(Select).
After making the adjustments, go back to the Primary settings menu by pressing (Back).
3 � I/O menu
After the additional adjustments, make sure that the actual I/O wiring matches the I/O use in the control program.
In the Main menu, select a I/O and press (Select) to enter the I/O menu.
Select a the connection you want to check and
press
(Select) (or ).
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 29
To view the details of a parameter that cannot be
adjusted via the I/O menu, press
(View).
To adjust the value of a parameter, press
(Edit), adjust the value using , , and
keys and press
(Save). Note that the actual
wiring must match the new value.
Go back to the Main menu by pressing (Back) repeatedly.
4 � Diagnostics menu
After making the additional adjustments and checking the I/O connections, use the Diagnostics menu to make sure that the setup is functioning correctly.
In the Main menu, select Diagnostics and press (Select) (or ).
Select the diagnostics item you want to view and
press
(Select).
Return to the Diagnostics menu by pressing (Back).
30 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
5 � Backup After you have finished start-up ABB recommends that you make a backup. In the Main menu, select Backups and press
(Select) (or ).
Press
(Select) to start backup.
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 31
How to control the drive through the I/O interface
The table below describes how to operate the drive through the digital and analog inputs when: � the motor start-up is performed, and � the default parameter settings of the ABB standard macro are in use.
Preliminary settings
If you need to change the direction of rotation, check that limits allow reverse direction: Go to Menu Primary settings - Limits and make sure that the minimum limit has a negative value and the maximum limit has a positive value.
Make sure that the control connections are wired according to the connection diagram given for the ABB standard macro.
Note: Most of the macros uses I/O that exist only when I/O module is installed. If you do not use it, choose ABB limited macro or change the default use of the I/O by parameters.
See section ABB standard macro on page 75.
Make sure that the drive is in remote control. Press key Loc/Rem to switch between remote and local control.
In remote control, the panel display shows text Remote at the top left.
Starting and controlling the speed of the motor
Start by switching digital input DI1 on.
The arrow starts rotating. It is dotted until the setpoint is reached.
Regulate the drive output frequency (motor speed) by adjusting voltage of analog input AI1.
Changing the direction of the motor rotation Reverse direction: Switch digital input DI2 on. Forward direction: Switch digital input DI2 off.
32 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
Stopping the motor Switch digital input DI1 off. The arrow stops rotating.
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 33
How to perform the ID run
The drive automatically estimates motor characteristics using Standstill ID run when the drive is started for the first time in vector control and after any motor parameter (group 99 Motor data) is changed. This is valid when � parameter 99.13 ID run requested selection is Standstill and � parameter 99.04 Motor control mode selection is Vector.
In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID run. The ID run should be selected manually if: � vector control mode is used (parameter 99.04 Motor control mode is set to
Vector), and � permanent magnet motor (PM) is used (parameter 99.03 Motor type is set to
Permanent magnet motor), or � synchronous reluctance motor (SynRM) is used (parameter 99.03 Motor type is
set to SynRM), or � drive operates near zero speed references, or � operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque, over a wide speed
range is needed.
Do the ID run with the ID run assistant by selecting Menu - Primary settings - Motor - ID run (see page 34) or with parameter 99.13 ID run requested (see page 36).
Note: If motor parameters (group 99 Motor data) are changed after the ID run, it must be repeated.
Note: If you have already parameterized your application using the scalar motor control mode (99.04 Motor control mode is set to Scalar) and you need to change motor control mode to Vector, � change the control mode to vector with the Control mode assistant (go to Menu -
Primary settings - Motor - Control mode) and follow the instructions. The ID run assistant then guides you through the ID run.
or � set parameter 99.04 Motor control mode to Vector, and
� for I/O controlled drive, check parameters in groups 22 Speed reference selection, 23 Speed reference ramp, 12 Standard AI, 30 Limits and 46 Monitoring/scaling settings.
� for torque controlled drive, check also parameters in group 26 Torque reference chain.
34 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
ID run procedure
With the ID run assistant
Pre-check
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50...80% of the nominal speed during the ID run. The motor will rotate in the forward direction. Make sure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID run.
Do not do ID run on a rotating motor. Make sure that the motor is stopped before starting the ID run.
De-couple the motor from the driven equipment
Check that the values of the motor data parameters are equivalent to those on the motor nameplate.
Check that the STO circuit is closed.
The assistant will ask if you want to use temporary motor limits. They must meet the following conditions:
Minimum speed < 0 rpm
Maximum speed = motor rated speed (Normal ID run procedure needs the motor to be run at 100% speed.)
Maximum current > 0.5 x motor nominal current
Maximum torque > 50%
Make sure that the panel is in local control (text Local shown at the top left). Press key Loc/Rem to switch between local and remote control.
ID run
Go to the Main menu by pressing in the Home view.
Select Primary settings and press (Select) (or ).
(Menu)
Select Motor and press
(Select) (or ).
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 35
Select ID run (shown only when the drive is in
vector control mode) and press
(Select) (or
).
Select the type of ID run you want to do and
press
(Select) (or ).
Warning message Identification run is shown at the top for a few seconds.
Panel LED starts blinking green to indicate an active warning.
Check the motor limits shown on the panel. If you need other limits during the ID run you can enter them here. The originals limits will be restored after the ID run.
Press
(Next).
Press the start key (
) to start the ID run.
In general, ABB recommends not to press any
control panel keys during the ID run. However,
you can stop the ID run at any time by pressing
the stop key (
).
During the ID run a progress view is shown.
After the ID run is completed, text ID run done is shown. The LED stops blinking.
If the ID run fails, fault FF61 ID run is shown. See chapter Fault tracing on page 451 for more information.
36 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
With parameter 99.13 ID run requested
Pre-check
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50...80% of the nominal speed during the ID run. The motor will rotate in the forward direction. Make sure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID run.
Do not do ID run on a rotating motor. Make sure that the motor is stopped before starting the ID run.
De-couple the motor from the driven equipment
Check that the values of the motor data parameters are equivalent to those on the motor nameplate.
Check that the STO circuit is closed.
If parameter values (from group 10 Standard DI, RO to group 99 Motor data) are changed before the ID run, check that the new settings meet the following conditions:
30.11 Minimum speed < 0 rpm
30.12 Maximum speed = motor rated speed (Normal ID run procedure needs the motor to be run at 100% speed.)
30.17 Maximum current > 0.5 x motor nominal current
30.20 Maximum torque 1 > 50% or 30.24 Maximum torque 2 > 50%, depending on which torque limit set is in use according to parameter 30.18 Torq lim sel.
Check that signals
run enable (parameter 20.12 Run enable 1 source) is active
start enable (parameter 20.19 Enable start command) is active
enable to rotate (parameter 20.22 Enable to rotate) is active.
Make sure that the panel is in local control (text Local shown at the top left). Press key Loc/Rem to switch between local and remote control.
ID run
Go to the Main menu by pressing in the Home view.
Press .
(Menu)
Start-up, control with I/O and ID run 37
Select Parameters and press ).
(Select) (or
Select Complete list and press (or ).
(Select)
Scroll the page with and , and select parameter group 99 Motor data and press (Select) (or ).
Scroll the page with and , and select
parameter 99.13 ID run requested (99.13 ID run
requested) and press
(Select) (or ).
Select the ID run type and press ).
(Save) (or
38 Start-up, control with I/O and ID run
The panel returns to the previous view and warning message Identification run is shown at the top for a few seconds.
Panel LED starts blinking green to indicate an active warning (AFF6).
The AFF6 warning view is shown when no key
has been pressed for one minute. Pressing
(How to fix) shows text informing that the ID run
will be done at the next start. You can hide the
warning view by pressing
(Hide).
Press the start key (
) to start the ID run.
In general, ABB recommends not to press any control panel keys during the ID run. However,
you can stop the ID run at any time by pressing
the stop key (
).
During the ID run the arrow is rotating at the top.
After the ID run is completed, text ID run done is shown. The LED stops blinking.
If the ID run fails, fault FF61 ID run is shown. See chapter Fault tracing on page 451 for more information.
Control panel 39
3
Control panel
Contents of this chapter
This chapter contains instructions for removing and reinstalling the assistant control panel and briefly describes its display, keys and key shortcuts. For more information, see ACX-AP-x assistant control panels user's manual (3AUA0000085685 [English]).
Removing and reinstalling the control panel
To remove the control panel, press the retaining clip at the top (1a) and pull it forward from the top edge (1b).
1a
1b
40 Control panel
To reinstall the control panel, put the bottom of the container in position (1a), press the retaining clip at the top (1b) and push the control panel in at the top edge (1c).
1c 1b
1a
Layout of the control panel
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
1 Layout of the control panel display
2 Left softkey
3 Right softkey
4 Status LED, see chapter Maintenance and hardware diagnostics, section LEDs in the Hardware manual of the drive.
5 Help
6 The arrow keys 7 Stop (see Start and Stop) 8 Start (see Start and Stop) 9 Local/Remote (see Loc/Rem)
10 USB connector
Control panel 41
Layout of the control panel display
In most views, the following elements are shown on the display:
2 1 1
3 4
1 5
6
7
8
7
1. Control location and related icons: Indicates how the drive is controlled:
� No text: The drive is in local control, but controlled from another device. The icons in the top pane indicate which actions are allowed:
Text/Icons
Starting from this control panel
Stopping from this Giving reference
control panel
from this panel
Not allowed
Not allowed
Not allowed
� Local: The drive is in local control, and controlled from this control panel. The icons in the top pane indicate which actions are allowed:
Text/Icons Local
Starting from this control panel
Allowed
Stopping from this control panel
Allowed
Giving reference from this panel
Allowed
42 Control panel
� Remote: The drive is in remote control, ie, controlled through I/O or fieldbus. The icons in the top pane indicate which actions are allowed with the control panel:
Text/Icons
Remote Remote Remote Remote
Starting from this control panel Not allowed Allowed
Not allowed Allowed
Stopping from this control panel Not allowed Allowed
Allowed Allowed
Giving reference from this panel Not allowed Not allowed
Allowed Allowed
2. Panel bus: Indicates that there are more than one drive connected to this panel. To switch to another drive, go to Options - Select drive.
3. Status icon: Indicates the status of the drive and the motor. The direction of the arrow indicates forward (clockwise) or reverse (counter-clockwise) rotation.
Status icon
Animation -
Drive status Stopped
-
Stopped, start inhibited
Blinking Blinking
Stopped, start command given but start inhibited. See Menu - Diagnostics on the control panel
Faulted
Blinking
Running, at reference, but the reference value is 0
Rotating
Running, not at reference
Rotating
Running, at reference
-
Pre-heating (motor heating) active
-
PID sleep mode active
4. Drive name: If a name has been given, it is displayed in the top pane. By default, it is "ACS480". You can change the name on the control panel by selecting Menu - Primary settings - Clock, region, display (see page 62).
5. Reference value: Speed, frequency, etc. is shown with its unit. For information on changing the reference value in the Primary settings menu (see page 46).
6. Content area: The actual content of the view is displayed in this area. The content varies from view to view. The example view on page 41 is the main view of the control panel which is called the Home view.
7. Softkey selections: Displays the functions of the softkeys (
and
) in a
given context.
8. Clock: The clock displays the current time. You can change the time and time format on the control panel by selecting Menu - Primary settings - Clock, region, display (see page 62).
Control panel 43
You can adjust the display contrast and back light functionality on the control panel by selecting Menu - Primary settings - Clock, region, display (see page 62).
Keys
The keys of the control panel are described below.
Left softkey The left softkey ( ) is usually used for exiting and canceling. Its function in a given situation is shown by the softkey selection in the bottom left corner of the display.
Holding
down exits each view in turn until you are back in the Home view. This
function does not work in special screens.
Right softkey The right softkey ( ) is usually used for selecting, accepting and confirming. The function of the right softkey in a given situation is shown by the softkey selection in the bottom right corner of the display.
The arrow keys The up and down arrow keys ( and ) are used to highlight selections in menus and selection lists, to scroll up and down on text pages, and to adjust values when, for example, setting the time, entering a passcode or changing a parameter value.
The left and right arrow keys ( and ) are used to move the cursor left and right in
parameter editing and to move forward and backward in assistants. In menus, and
function the same way as
and
, respectively.
Help The help key ( ? ) opens a help page. The help page is context-sensitive, in other words, the content of the page is relevant to the menu or view in question.
Start and Stop In local control, the start key ( respectively.
) and the stop key (
) start and stop the drive,
Loc/Rem The location key ( Loc/Rem ) is used for switching the control between the control panel (Local) and remote connections (Remote). When switching from Remote to Local while the drive is running, the drive keeps running at the same speed. When switching from Local to Remote, the status of the remote location is adopted.
44 Control panel
Key shortcuts
The table below lists key shortcuts and combinations. Simultaneous key presses are indicated by the plus sign (+).
Shortcut
+ +
Available in any view
+ , any view +
+ , any view +
Effect
Save a screenshot. Up to fifteen images may be stored in the control panel memory. To transfer images to PC, connect the assistant control panel to PC with a USB cable and the panel will mount itself as an MTP (media transfer protocol) device. Pictures are stored in the screen shots folder. For more instructions, see ACX-AP-x assistant control panels user's manual (3AUA0000085685 [English]).
Adjust backlight brightness.
Adjust display contrast.
or
Home view
Adjust reference.
+
parameter edit views Revert an editable parameter to its default value.
+
view showing a list Show/hide selection index numbers.
of selections for a
parameter
any view (keep down)
Return to the Home view by pressing down the key until the Home view is shown.
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 45
4
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Contents of this chapter
This chapter provides detailed information about the Primary settings, I/O and Diagnostics menus on the control panel. To get to the Primary settings, I/O or Diagnostic menu from the Home view, first select Menu to go the Main menu, and in the Main menu, select Primary settings, I/O or Diagnostics.
46 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Primary settings menu
To go the Primary settings menu from the Home view, select Menu - Primary settings. The Primary settings menu enables you to adjust and define additional settings used in the drive. After making the guided settings using the first start assistant, ABB recommends that you make at least these additional settings: � Select a Macro or set Start, stop, reference values � Ramps � Limits With the Primary settings menu, you can also adjust settings related to the motor, PID, fieldbus, advanced functions and clock, region and display. In addition, you can reset the fault and event logs, panel Home view, parameters not related to hardware, fieldbus settings, motor data and ID run results, all parameters, end user texts as well as reset everything to factory defaults. Note that the Primary settings menu only enables you to modify some of the settings: more advanced configuration is done via the parameters: Select Menu - Parameters. For more information on the different parameters, see chapter Parameters on page 177. In the Setting menu, the symbol indicates multiple connected signals/parameters. The symbol indicates that the setting provides an assistant when modifying the parameters. To get more information on Primary settings menu items, press the ? key to open the help page.
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 47 The figure below shows how to navigate in the Primary settings menu.
. . .
48 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel The sections below provide detailed information about the contents of the different submenus available in the Primary settings menu.
Macro
Use the Macro submenu to quickly set up drive control and reference source by selecting from a set of predefined wiring configurations. Note: For detailed information about the available macros, see Control macros on page 73. If you do not wish to use a macro, manually define the settings for Start, stop, reference. Note that even if you select to use a macro, you can also modify the other settings to suit your needs.
Motor
Use the Motor submenu to adjust motor-related settings, such as nominal values, control mode or thermal protection. Note that settings that are visible depend on other selections, for example vector or scalar control mode, used motor type or selected start mode. Three assistants are available: Control mode, Nominal value and ID run (for vector control mode only).
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 49
The table below provides detailed information about the available setting items in the Motor menu.
Menu item Control mode
Nominal values Thermal protection estimated
Thermal protection measured
Start mode: Flux braking: U/f ratio: IR compensation: Pre-heating Phase order:
Description
Corresponding parameter
Selects whether to use scalar or vector control mode.
99.04 Motor control mode
For information on scalar control mode, see Speed compensated stop on page 153.
For information on vector control mode, see Rush control on page 150.
Enter the motor's nominal values from the motor's 99.06 Motor nominal
nameplate.
current ...
99.12 Motor nominal
torque
The settings in this submenu are meant to protect 35 Motor thermal
the motor from overheating by automatically
protection
triggering a fault or warning above a certain
temperature.
By default, motor thermal estimate protection is on. ABB recommends checking the values for the protection to function properly.
For more information, see Motor thermal protection on page 160.
The settings in this submenu are meant to protect the motor with a thermal measurement from overheating by automatically triggering a fault or warning above a certain temperature.
35 Motor thermal protection
For more information, see Motor thermal protection on page 160.
Sets how the drive starts the motor (e.g. premagnetize or not).
21 Start/stop mode
Sets how much current to use for braking, ie. how 97.05 Flux braking the motor is magnetized before starting. For more information, see Flux braking on page 145.
The form of voltage to frequency ratio below field 97.20 U/F ratio weakening point.
Sets how much to boost voltage at zero speed. Increase this for higher break-away torque. For more information, see IR compensation for scalar motor control on page 142.
97.13 IR compensation
Turns pre-heating on or off. The drive can prevent condensation in a stopped motor by feeding it a fixed current (% of motor nominal current). Use in humid or cold conditions to prevent condensation.
21.14 Pre-heating input source
21.16 Pre-heating current
If the motor turns in the wrong direction, change 99.16 Motor phase order this setting to fix the direction instead of changing the phase order on the motor cable.
50 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Start, stop, reference
Use the Start, stop, reference submenu to set up start/stop commands, reference, and related features, such as constant speeds or run permissions.
The table below provides detailed information about the available setting items in the Start, stop, reference menu.
Menu item
Description
Corresponding parameter
Reference from
Sets where the drive gets its reference when remote control (EXT1) is active.
28.11 Ext1 frequency
ref1 or 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1
12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min
Reference-related settings (e.g. AI
The voltage or current fed to the input is converted 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1
into a value the drive can use (e.g. reference).
max
scaling, AI2 scaling,
Motor potentiometer
settings) depending
on the selected
reference
Start/stop/dir from: Sets where the drive gets start, stop, and
20.01 Ext1 commands
(optionally) direction commands when remote
control (EXT1) is active.
Secondary control location
Settings for the secondary remote control location, 19.11 Ext1/Ext2
EXT2. These settings include reference source, selection
start, stop, direction and command sources for EXT2.
28.15 Ext2 frequency
ref1 or 22.18 Ext2 speed ref1
By default, EXT2 is set to Off.
12.17 AI1 min 12.18 AI1 max
12.27 AI2 min
12.28 AI2 max
20.06 Ext2 commands
20.08 Ext2 in1 source
20.09 Ext2 in2 source
20.10 Ext2 in3 source
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 51
Menu item
Description
Constant speeds / These settings are for using a constant value as Constant frequencies the reference. By default, this is set to On. For
more information, see Constant speeds/frequencies on page 122.
Jogging Run permissions
These settings allow you to use a digital input to briefly run the motor using predefined speed and acceleration/deceleration ramps. By default, jogging is disabled and it can only be used in the Vector control mode. For more information, see Jogging on page 150.
Settings to prevent the drive from running or starting when a specific digital input is low.
Corresponding parameter
28.21 Constant frequency function or 22.21 Constant speed function 28.26 Constant frequency 1 28.27 Constant frequency 2 28.28 Constant frequency 3 22.26 Constant speed 1 22.27 Constant speed 2 22.28 Constant speed 3
20.25 Jogging enable 22.42 Jogging 1 ref 22.43 Jogging 2 ref 23.20 Acc time jogging 23.21 Dec time jogging
20.12 Run enable 1 source 20.11 Run enable stop mode 20.19 Enable start command 20.22 Enable to rotate 21.05 Emergency stop source 21.04 Emergency stop mode 23.23 Emergency stop time
52 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Ramps
Use the Ramps submenu to set up acceleration and deceleration settings.
Note: To set ramps, you also have to specify parameter 46.01 Speed scaling (in speed control mode) or 46.02 Frequency scaling (in frequency control mode).
The table below provides detailed information about the available setting items in the Ramps menu.
Menu item Acceleration time:
Deceleration time:
Frequency scaling for ramps: Shape time: Stop mode: Use two ramp sets
Description
Corresponding parameter
This is the time between standstill and "scaling speed" when using the default ramps (set 1).
23.12 Acceleration time 1
28.72 Freq acceleration time 1
This is the time between standstill and "scaling speed" when using the default ramps (set 1).
23.13 Deceleration time 1
28.73 Freq deceleration time 1
This is the he maximum speed/frequency value for 46.02 Frequency scaling
acceleration ramp rate and the initial value for
deceleration ramp rate. Applies to both ramp sets.
Sets the shape of the default ramps (set 1).
23.32 Shape time 1 28.82 Shape time 1
Sets how the drive stops the motor.
21.03 Stop mode
Sets the use of a second acceleration/deceleration
ramp set. If unselected, only one ramp set is used.
Activate ramp set 2: Acceleration time 2: Deceleration time 2:
Note that if this selection is not enabled, the selection below are not available. To switch ramp sets, you can either: � use a digital input (low = set 1; high = set 2), or � automatically switch to set 2 above a certain
frequency/speed. Sets the time between standstill and "scaling speed" when using ramp set 2.
Sets the time between standstill and "scaling speed" when using ramp set 2.
23.11 Ramp set selection 28.71 Freq ramp set selection
23.14 Acceleration time 2 28.74 Freq acceleration time 2
23.15 Deceleration time 2 28.75 Freq deceleration time 2
Menu item Shape time 2:
Limits
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 53
Description Sets the shape of ramps in set 2.
Corresponding parameter
23.33 Shape time 2 28.83 Shape time 2
Use the Limits submenu to set the allowed operating range. This function is intended to protect the motor, connected hardware and mechanics. The drive stays within these limits, no matter what reference value it gets.
Note: To set ramps, you also have to specify parameter 46.01 Speed scaling (in speed control mode) or 46.02 Frequency scaling (in frequency control mode); these limit parameters have no effect on ramps.
The table below provides detailed information about the available setting items in the Limits menu.
Menu item
Description
Corresponding parameter
Minimum frequency Sets the minimum operating frequency. Affects scalar control only.
30.13 Minimum frequency
Maximum frequency Sets the maximum operating frequency. Affects scalar control only.
30.14 Maximum frequency
Minimum speed
Sets the minimum operating speed. Affects vector 30.11 Minimum speed
control only.
Maximum speed
Sets the maximum operating speed. Affects vector 30.12 Maximum speed
control only.
Minimum torque
Sets the minimum operating torque. Affects vector 30.19 Minimum torque 1 control only.
Maximum torque
Sets the maximum operating torque. Affects vector 30.20 Maximum torque
control only.
1
Maximum current Sets the maximum output current.
30.17 Maximum current
54 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
PID
The PID submenu contains settings and actual values for the process PID controller for controlling multiple pumps or fans through the drive's relay outputs.
The table below provides detailed information about the available setting items in the PID menu.
Menu item PID controls:
Description
Sets what to use PID output for: � Not selected: PID not used.
Corresponding parameter
40.07 Process PID operation mode
PID output: Unit: Deviation: Setpoint:
Feedback:
� Frequency reference (or Speed reference,
depending on the motor control mode): Uses
PID output as a frequency (speed) reference when remote control (EXT1) is active.
View the process PID output or set its range.
40.01 Process PID output actual
40.36 Set 1 output min
40.37 Set 1 output max
PID customer unit. Sets the text shown as the unit
for setpoint, feedback and deviation.
View or invert process PID deviation.
40.04 Process PID deviation actual
40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion
View or configure the process PID setpoint, ie. the 40.03 Process PID
target process value.
setpoint actual
You can also use a constant setpoint value instead
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source
of (or in addition to) an external setpoint source.
When a constant setpoint is active, it overrides the
normal setpoint.
View or configure process PID feedback, ie. the measured value.
40.02 Process PID feedback actual
40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source
40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time
Menu item Tuning
Sleep function
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 55
Description
Corresponding parameter
The Tuning submenu contains settings for gain, 40.32 Set 1 gain
integration time and derivation time.
40.33 Set 1 integration
1. Make sure it is safe to start the motor and run the
time 40.34 Set 1 derivation
actual process.
time
2. Start the motor in remote control. 3. Change setpoint by a small amount.
40.35 Set 1 derivation filter time
4. Watch how feedback reacts.
5. Adjust gain/integration/derivation.
6. Repeat steps 3-5 until feedback reacts as desired.
The sleep function can be used to save energy by 40.43 Set 1 sleep level
stopping the motor during low demand. By default, 40.44 Set 1 sleep delay
sleep function is disabled. If d, the motor automatically stops when demand is low, and starts again when deviation grows too large. This saves
40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time
40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step
energy when rotating the motor at low speeds
40.47 Set 1 wake-up
would be useless.
deviation
See section Sleep and boost functions for process PID control on page 130.
40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay
56 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Pump and fan control
The Pump and fan control submenu contains settings for the Pump and fan control logic. The Pump and fan control is supported in external control location EXT2 only.
The table below provides detailed information about the available setting items in the Pump and fan control menu.
Menu item PFC mode:
Description
See section Pump and fan control (PFC) on page 132.
Corresponding parameter
76.21 Multipump configuration
Configure PFC I/O
Configure PFC control
Configure Autochange
Selects the PFC or SPFC control.
Configures PFC/SPFC I/O.
76.25 Number of motors
� ROs
76.27 Max number of motors allowed
� Interlocks
76.59 PFC contactor
� Check I/O configuration (See I/O menu on page delay
65.)
10.24 RO1 source 10.27 RO2 source
10.30 RO3 source
76.81 PFC 1 interlock
76.82 PFC 2 interlock
76.83 PFC 3 interlock
76.84 PFC 4 interlock
76.85 PFC 5 interlock
76.86 PFC 6 interlock
Configures PFC/SPFC control
76.30 Start point 1 76.31 Start point 2
76.32 Start point 3
76.33 Start point 4
76.34 Start point 5
76.41 Stop point 1
76.42 Stop point 2
76.43 Stop point 3
76.44 Stop point 4
76.45 Stop point 5
76.55 Start delay
76.56 Stop delay
Configures Autochange
76.70 PFC autochange
76.71 PFC autochange interval
76.72 Maximum wear imbalance
76.73 Autochange level
Fieldbus
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 57
Use the settings in the Fieldbus submenu to use the drive with a fieldbus. � CANopen � ControlNet � DeviceNetTM � Ethernet POWERLINK � EtherCAT � Ethernet/IPTM � Modbus RTU � Modbus (TCP) � PROFIBUS DP � PROFINET IO
You can also configure all the fieldbus related settings via the parameters (parameter groups 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA), 51 FBA A settings, 52 FBA A data in, 53 FBA A data out, 58 Embedded fieldbus), but the purpose of the Fieldbus menu is to make the protocol configurations easier.
Note that only Modbus RTU is embedded into I/O module and the other fieldbus modules are optional adapters. For the optional modules, the following adapters are required to the needed protocols: � CANopen: FCAN-01 � ControlNet: FCNA-01 � DeviceNetTM: FDNA-01 � Ethernet POWERLINK: FEPL-02 � EtherCAT: FECA-01 � Ethernet/IPTM: FENA-21 � Modbus/TCP: FMBT-21, FENA-21 � PROFIBUS DP: FPBA-01 � PROFINET IO: FENA-21
58 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
The table below provides detailed information about the available setting items in the Fieldbus menu. Note that some of the items only become active once you have enabled fieldbus.
Menu item Fieldbus selection Communication setup
Drive control setup
Received data from master
Description
Corresponding parameter
Select this if you want to use the drive with a
51.01 FBA A type
fieldbus.
58.01 Protocol enable
To set up communication between the drive and 51 FBA A settings
the fieldbus master, define these settings and then 51.01 FBA A type
select Apply settings to fieldbus module.
51.02 FBA A Par2
51.27 FBA A par refresh
51.31 D2FBA A comm status 50.13 FBA A control
word
50.16 FBA A status word
58 Embedded fieldbus
58.01 Protocol enable
58.03 Node address
58.04 Baud rate
58.05 Parity
58.25 Control profile
Sets how a fieldbus master can control this drive, and how the drive reacts if the fieldbus communication fails.
20.01 Ext1 commands
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1
28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1
22.41 Speed ref safe
28.41 Frequency ref safe
50.03 FBA A comm loss t out
46.01 Speed scaling
46.02 Frequency scaling
23.12 Acceleration time 1
23.13 Deceleration time 1
28.72 Freq acceleration time 1
28.73 Freq deceleration time 1
51.27 FBA A par refresh
58.14 Communication loss action
58.15 Communication loss mode
58.16 Communication loss time
Sets what the drive's fieldbus module expects to 50.13 FBA A control
receive from the fieldbus master (PLC). After
word
changing these settings, select Apply settings to fieldbus module.
53 FBA A data out 51.27 FBA A par refresh 58.18 EFB control word
03.09 EFB reference 1
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 59
Menu item
Description
Corresponding parameter
Send data to master Sets what the drive's fieldbus module sends to the 50.16 FBA A status
fieldbus master (PLC). After changing these
word
settings, select Apply settings to fieldbus module.
52 FBA A data in 51.27 FBA A par refresh 58.19 EFB status word
Apply settings to fieldbus module
Applies modified settings to the fieldbus module.
51.27 FBA A par refresh
58.06 Communication control
Advanced functions
The Advanced functions submenu contains settings for advanced functions, such as triggering or resetting faults via I/O, signal supervision, using the drive with timed functions, or switching between several entire sets of settings.
The table below provides detailed information about the available setting items in the Advanced functions menu.
Menu item
Description
Corresponding parameter
External events
Enables you to define custom faults or warnings 31.01 External event 1
you can trigger via digital input. The texts of these source
messages are customizable.
31.02 External event 1 type
31.03 External event 2 source
31.04 External event 2 type
31.05 External event 3
source
31.06 External event 3
type
Additional fault reset You can reset an active fault via I/O: a rising pulse 31.11 Fault reset
in the selected input means reset.
selection
A fault can be reset from the fieldbus even if Reset faults manually is unselected.
Reset from keypad and...
Define from where you want to reset faults manually. Note that this submenu is active only if you have selected to reset faults manually.
31.11 Fault reset selection
60 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Menu item Autoreset faults Supervision
Stall protection
Description
Corresponding parameter
Reset faults automatically. For more information, see Automatic fault resets on page 168.
31.12 Autoreset selection 31.14 Number of trials
31.15 Total trials time 31.16 Delay time
You can select three signals to be supervised. If a 32.01 Supervision
signal is outside predefined limits a fault or warning status
is generated. For complete settings, see group 32 Supervision on page 299.
32.05 Supervision 1 function
32.06 Supervision 1
action
32.07 Supervision 1
signal
32.09 Supervision 1 low
32.10 Supervision 1 high
32.11 Supervision 1 hysteresis
...
32.25 Supervision 3
function
32.26 Supervision 3
action
32.27 Supervision 3
signal
32.29 Supervision 3 low
32.30 Supervision 3 high
32.31 Supervision 3 hysteresis
The drive can detect a motor stall and
31.24 Stall function
automatically fault or show a warning message. Stall condition is detected when: � current is high (above certain % of motor
31.25 Stall current limit
31.26 Stall speed limit 31.27 Stall frequency limit
nominal current), and
31.28 Stall time
� output frequency (scalar control) or motor speed (vector control) is below a certain limit, and
� the conditions above have been true for a certain minimum duration.
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 61
Menu item Timed functions
User sets
Description
Corresponding parameter
Enables using the drive with timed functions. For complete settings, see group 34 Timed functions on page 307.
34.100 Timed function 1
34.101 Timed function 2 34.102 Timed function 3
34.11 Timer 1 configuration
34.12 Timer 1 start time
34.13 Timer 1 duration ...
34.44 Timer 12 configuration
34.45 Timer 12 start time
34.46 Timer 12 duration
34.111 Boost time activation source
34.112 Boost time duration
This submenu enables you to save multiple sets of 96.11 User set
settings for easy switching. For more information save/load
about user sets, see User parameter sets on page 173.
96.10 User set status
96.12 User set I/O mode in1
96.13 User set I/O mode in2
62 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Clock, region, display
The Clock, region, display submenu contains settings for language, date and time, display (such as brightness) and settings for changing how information is displayed on screen.
The table below provides detailed information about the available setting items in the Clock, region, display menu.
Menu item Language Date & time Units Drive name:
Contact info in fault view
Display settings Show in lists
Show inhibit pop-up
Description
Corresponding parameter
Change the language used on the control panel 96.01 Language screen. Note that the language is loaded from the drive so this takes some time.
Set the time and date, and their formats.
Select the units used for power, temperature and torque.
The drive name defined in this setting is shown in the status bar at the top of the screen while using the drive. If more than one drives are connected to the control panel, the drive names make it easy to identify each drive. It also identifies any backups you create for this drive.
Define a fixed text that is shown during any fault (for example, who to contact in case of a fault).
If a fault occurs, this information appears on the panel screen (in addition to the fault-specific information).
Adjust the brightness, contrast and display power save delay of the panel screen or to invert white and black.
Show or hide the numeric IDs of:
� parameters and groups
� option list items
� bits
� devices in Options > Select drive
Enables or disables pop-up views showing information on inhibits, for example when you try to start the drive but it is prevented.
Reset to defaults
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 63
The Reset to defaults submenu enables you to reset parameters and other settings.
Menu item
Description
Reset fault and event Clears all events from the drive's fault and event
logs
logs.
Reset home view Restores the Home view layout back to show the
layout
values of the default parameters defined by the
control macro in use.
Reset non-HW
Restores all editable parameter values to default
parameters
values, except
� motor data and ID run results
Corresponding parameter 96.51 Clear fault and event logger
96.06 Parameter restore, selection Reset home view
96.06 Parameter restore, selection Restore defaults
� I/O extension module settings
� end user texts, such as customized warnings and faults, and the drive name
� control panel/PC communication settings
� fieldbus adapter settings
� control macro selection and the parameter defaults
� parameter 95.01 Supply voltage
� differentiated defaults implemented by parameters 95.20 HW options word 1 and 95.21 HW options word 2
Reset all fieldbus settings
Reset motor data and IR run results
� user lock configuration parameters 96.100...96.102.
Restores all fieldbus and communication related settings to default values.
Note: Fieldbus, control panel and PC tool communication are interrupted during the restore. Restores all motor nominal values and motor ID run results to default values.
96.06 Parameter restore, selection Reset all fieldbus settings
96.06 Parameter restore, selection Reset motor data
64 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Menu item
Description
Corresponding parameter
Reset all parameters Restores all editable parameter values to default values, except
� end user texts, such as customized warnings and faults, and the drive name
96.06 Parameter restore, selection Clear all
� control panel/PC communication � settings control macro selection and the
parameter defaults
� parameter 95.01 Supply voltage � differentiated defaults implemented by
parameters 95.20 HW options word 1 and 95.21 HW options word 2 � user lock configuration parameters 96.100...96.102
� group 49 Panel port communication parameters.
Reset end user texts Restores all end user texts to default values,
96.06 Parameter
including the drive name, contact info, customized
restore, selection Reset end user texts
fault and warning texts, PID unit and currency unit.
Reset all to factory defaults
Restores all drive parameters and settings back to 96.06 Parameter
initial factory values, except
restore, selection All to factory defaults
� differentiated defaults implemented by
parameters 95.20 HW options word 1 and 95.21
HW options word 2.
I/O menu
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 65
To go the I/O menu from the Home view, select Menu - I/O.
Use the I/O menu to make sure that the actual I/O wiring matches the I/O use in the control program. It answers the questions:
� What is each input being used for?
� What is the meaning of each output?
In the I/O menu, each row provides the following information: � Terminal name and number � Electrical status � Logical meaning of the drive
Each row also provides a submenu that provides further information on the menu item and lets you make changes to the I/O connections.
The table below provides detailed information about the contents of the different submenus available in the I/O menu.
Menu item DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5
DI6 AI1 AI2 RO1 RO2 RO3 AO1 AO2
Description This submenu lists the functions that use DI1 as input. This submenu lists the functions that use DI2 as input. This submenu lists the functions that use DI3 as input. This submenu lists the functions that use DI4 as input. This submenu lists the functions that use DI5 as input. The connector can be used as either digital input or frequency input. This submenu lists the functions that use DI6 as input. This submenu lists the functions that use AI1 as input. This submenu lists the functions that use AI2 as input. This submenu lists what information goes into relay output 1. This submenu lists what information goes into relay output 2. This submenu lists what information goes into relay output 3. This submenu lists what information goes into AO1. This submenu lists what information goes into AO2.
66 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Diagnostics menu
To go the Diagnostics menu from the Home view, select Menu - Diagnostics.
The Diagnostics menu provides you with diagnostic information, such as faults and warnings, and helps you to resolve potential problems. Use the menu to make sure that the drive setup is functioning correctly.
The table below provides detailed information about the contents of the different views available in the Diagnostics menu.
Menu item
Description
Start, stop, reference This view shows where the drive is currently taking its start and stop
summary
commands and reference. The view is updated in real time.
If the drive is not starting or stopping as expected, or runs at an undesired speed, use this view to find out where the control comes from.
Limit status
This view describes any limits currently affecting operation.
If the drive is running at undesired speed, use this view to find out if any limitations are active.
Active faults
This view shows the currently active faults and provides instructions on how to fix and reset them.
Active warnings
This view shows the currently active warnings and provides instructions on how to fix them.
Active inhibits
This view shows the active start inhibits and how to fix them.
Fault & event log
This view lists the faults, warnings and other events that have occurred in the drive.
Press Details to see, for each stored fault, the fault code, time and values of parameters (actual signals and status words) 05.80...05.88 stored at the time of the fault.
Fieldbus
This view provides status information and sent and received data from fieldbus for troubleshooting.
Load profile
This view provides status information regarding load distribution (that is, how much of the drive's running time was spent on each load level) and peak load levels.
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 67
System info menu
To go the System info menu from the Home view, select Menu - System info.
The System info menu shows information about the drive and the control panel. In problem situations you can also request the drive to generate a QR code for ABB service, so they can better assist you.
The table below shows the different views in the System info menu.
Menu item Drive
Description Shows the following information about the drive:
Corresponding parameter
07.05 Firmware version 07.07 Loading package version
Control panel
Shows the following information about the control panel:
68 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Menu item QR code
Description
Corresponding parameter
The drive generates a QR code (or a series of QR
codes), which contains drive identification data,
information on the latest events, and values of
status and counter parameters. You can read the
QR code with a mobile device containing the ABB
service application, which then sends the QR code
to ABB for analysis.
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 69
Energy efficiency menu
To go the Energy efficiency menu from the Home view, select Menu - Energy efficiency.
The Energy efficiency menu provides you with information about energy efficiency, such as saved energy and energy consumption. You can also configure energy calculation settings.
The table below lists the energy efficiency values shown in the Energy efficiency menu, as well as configurable energy calculation settings.
Menu item Saved energy Saved amount
Description
Energy saved in kWh compared to direct-on-line motor connection. Corresponding money saved compared to directon-line motor connection.
Corresponding parameter 45.04 Saved energy
45.07 Saved amount
Total saved CO2 Current hour kWh
Previous hour kWh Current day kWh
Previous day kWh Configuration
You can define the currency unit you want to use in
submenu Configuration.
Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons
45.10 Total saved CO2
compared to direct-on-line motor connection.
Current hour energy consumption. This is the
01.50 Current hour kWh
energy of the last 60 minutes (not necessarily
continuous) the drive has been running, not the
energy of a calendar hour.
Previous hour energy consumption. The value
01.51 Previous hour
01.51 Previous hour kWh is stored here when its kWh
values has been cumulated for 60 minutes.
Current day energy consumption. This is the
01.52 Current day kWh
energy of the last 24 hours (not necessarily
continuous) the drive has been running, not the
energy of a calendar day.
Previous day energy consumption. The value
01.53 Previous day kWh
01.53 Previous day kWh is stored here when its
value has been cumulated for 24 hours.
In this submenu, you can configure energy
calculation settings.
70 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Menu item Energy optimizer
Energy tariff 1
Energy tariff 1 Tariff selection CO2 conversion factor Comparison power
Energy calculations reset Currency
Description
Corresponding parameter
Enables/disables the energy optimization function. 45.11 Energy optimizer
The function optimizes the motor flux so that total
energy consumption and motor noise level are
reduced when the drive operates below the
nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and drive) can be improved by 1...20% depending on load
torque and speed
Defines energy tariff 1 (price of energy per kWh). 45.12 Energy tariff 1
Depending on the setting of parameter 45.14 Tariff selection, either this value or 45.13 Energy tariff 2
is used for reference when monetary savings are
calculated.
Defines energy tariff 2 (price of energy per kWh). 45.13 Energy tariff 2
Selects (or defines a source that selects) which 45.14 Tariff selection
pre-defined energy tariff is used.
Defines a factor for conversion of saved energy into CO2 emissions (kg/kWh or tn/MWh).
45.18 CO2 conversion factor
Actual power that the motor absorbs when connected direct-on-line and operating the
45.19 Comparison power
application. The value is used for reference when
energy savings are calculated.
Resets the savings counter parameters, eg. 45.04 45.21 Energy
Saved energy...45.10 Total saved CO2.
calculations reset
Defines the currency unit you want to use in energy
calculations.
Backups menu
Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel 71
To go the Backups menu from the Home view, select Menu - Backups. For backups and restores, see section Backup and restore on page 172.
72 Settings, I/O and diagnostics on the control panel
Control macros 73
5
Control macros
Contents of this chapter
This chapter describes the intended use, operation and default control connections of the application. At the end of chapter there are tables showing those parameter default values that are not the same for all macros.
General
Control macros are sets of default parameter values suitable for a certain control configuration. When starting up the drive, the user typically selects the best-suited control macro as a starting point, then makes any necessary changes to tailor the settings to their purpose. This usually results in a much lower number of user edits compared to the traditional way of programming a drive. Note: Most of the macros uses I/O that exist only when I/O module is installed. If you do not use it, choose ABB limited macro or change the default use of the I/O by parameters. Control macros can be selected in the Primary settings menu: Menu - Primary settings - Macro or with parameter 96.04 Macro select (page 392).
74 Control macros
Note: All macros are made for scalar control except ABB standard which exists in two versions. If you want to use vector control, do as follows: � Select the macro. � Check nominal values of the motor: Menu -
Primary settings - Motor - Nominal values. � Change motor control mode to vector: Menu - Primary settings - Motor - Control mode, and follow the instructions (see the figure on the right).
Control macros 75
ABB standard macro
This is the default macro. It provides a general purpose, 2-wire I/O configuration with three constant frequencies. One signal is used to start or stop the motor and another to select the direction. The ABB standard macro uses scalar control; for vector control, use the ABB standard (vector) macro on page 77.
This macro uses I/O that exist only when I/O module is installed.
Default control connections for the ABB standard macro
1...10 kohm
Max. 500 ohm
3)
4)
5)
4) See the notes on the next page.
X1
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
I/O available in base unit
1
SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2
AI1 Output frequency reference: 0...10 V
3
AGND Analog input circuit common
4
+10V Reference voltage 10 V DC
5
AI2 Not configured
6
AGND Analog input circuit common
7
AO1 Output frequency: 0...20 mA
8
AO2 Motor current: 0...20 mA
9
AGND Analog output circuit common
X2 and X3 Aux. voltage output and programmable DIs
10
+24V Aux. voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
x
11
DGND Aux. voltage output common for DIs
x
12
DCOM Digital input common for all
x
13
DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1)
x
14
DI2 Forward (0) / reverse (1)
x
15
DI3 Constant frequency selection1)
16
DI4 Constant frequency selection1)
17
DI5 Ramp set 1 (0) / Ramp set 2 (1)2)
18
DI6 Not configured
X6, X7, X8 Relay output
19
RO1C
Ready run
x
20
RO1A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
x
21
RO1B
2 A
x
22
RO2C
Running
23
RO2A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
24
RO2B
2 A
25
RO3C
Fault (-1)
26
RO3A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
27
RO3B
2 A
X5
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
29
B+ Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See
30 31
ADGND
chapter Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) on page
S100
TERM Serial data link termination switch
Safe torque off
34
SGND Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both
x
35
OUT circuits must be closed for the drive to start.
x
36
IN1 See chapter Delete safe torque in drive
x
37
IN2 hardware manual.
x
X11 Redundancy auxiliary voltage output
42
+24 V Aux. voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
43
DGND Auxiliary voltage output common
44
DCOM Digital input common for all
76 Control macros
Terminal size: 0.14...1.5 mm2 Tightening torque: 0.5 N�m (0.4 lbf�ft)
Notes:
1) See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant frequencies or parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain.
DI3
DI4
Operation/Parameter
0
0
Set frequency through AI1
1
0
28.26 Constant frequency 1
0
1
28.27 Constant frequency 2
1
1
28.28 Constant frequency 3
2) See Menu - Primary settings - Ramps or parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain.
DI5 Ramp set 01
12
Parameters 28.72 Freq acceleration time 1 28.73 Freq deceleration time 1 28.74 Freq acceleration time 2 28.75 Freq deceleration time 2
3) Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the grounding shelf for the control cables.
4) Connected with jumpers at the factory.
5) Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals
� Analog frequency reference (AI1) � Start/stop selection (DI1) � Forward/reverse (DI2) � Constant frequency selection (DI3, DI4) � Ramp set selection (DI5)
Output signals
� Analog output AO1: Output frequency � Analog output AO2: Motor current � Relay output 1: Ready run � Relay output 2: Running � Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
Control macros 77
ABB standard macro (vector)
The ABB standard (vector) uses vector control; otherwise it is similar to the ABB standard macro, providing a general purpose, 2-wire I/O configuration with three constant speeds. One signal is used to start or stop the motor and another to select the direction. To enable the macro, select it in the Primary settings menu or set parameter 96.04 Macro select to ABB standard (vector).
This macro uses I/O that exist only when I/O module is installed.
78 Control macros
Default control connections for the ABB standard (vector) macro
1...10 kohm
X1
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
I/O available in base unit
1
SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2
AI1 Output speed reference: 0...10 V1)
3
AGND Analog input circuit common
4
+10V Reference voltage 10 V DC
5
AI2 Not configured
6
AGND Analog input circuit common
7
AO1 Output frequency: 0...20 mA
8
AO2 Motor current: 0...20 mA
Max. 500 ohm
3)
9 X2, X3
AGND Analog output circuit common Aux. voltage output and programmable DIs
10
+24V Aux. voltage output +24 VDC, max. 250 mA
x
4)
11 12
DGND Aux. voltage output common for DIs DCOM Digital input common for all
x x
13
DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1)
x
14
DI2 Forward (0) / reverse (1)
x
15
DI3 Constant speed sel 11)
16
DI4 Constant speed sel 21)
17
DI5 Ramp 1 (0) / Ramp 2 (1)2)
5
18
DI6 Not configured
X6, X7, X8 Relay outputs
19
RO1C
Ready Run
x
20
RO1A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
x
21
RO1B
2 A
x
22
RO2C
Running
23
RO2A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
24
RO2B
2 A
25
RO3C
Fault(-1)
26
RO3A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
27
RO3B
2 A
X5 EIA-485 Modbus RTU
29
B+ Internal Modbus RTU (EIA-485), see chapter
30
A- Fieldbus control through the embedded
31
DGND fieldbus interface (EFB) on page 475.
S100
TERM Serial data link termination switch
X4 Safety torque off
34
SGND Safety torque off function. Factory
x
35
OUT connection. Both circuits must be closed for
x
4)
36
IN1 the drive to start. See Safe torque off
x
37
IN2 function in the drive hardware manual.
x
X11 Redundancy auxiliary voltage
42
+24 V Aux. voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
43
DGND Aux. voltage output common
44
DCOM Digital input common for all
Control macros 79
Notes: Terminal sizes: 0.14 ... 1.5 mm2
Tightening torques: 0.5 N�m (0.4 lbf�ft).
Terminals DGND, AGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential.
Reference from the integrated panel.
1) See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant speeds or parameter group 22 Speed reference selection.
Select the correct control mode from the Motor data view or with parameter 99.04 Motor control mode.
DI3 DI4 Operation/Parameter 0 0 Set speed through AI1 1 0 22.26 Constant speed 1 0 1 22.27 Constant speed 2 1 1 22.28 Constant speed 3
2) See Menu - Primary settings - Ramps or parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp.
DI5 Ramp set Parameters
01
23.12 Acceleration time 1
12
23.13 Deceleration time 1 23.14 Acceleration time 2
23.15 Deceleration time 2
3) Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the grounding shelf for the control cables. Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the grounding shelf for the control cables.
4) Connected with jumpers at the factory. 5) Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals � Analog speed reference (AI1) � Start/Stop selection (DI1) � Forward (0) / Reverse (1) (DI2) � Constant speed selection (DI3, DI4) � Ramp set 1 (0) / Ramp set 2 (1) selection (DI5)
80 Control macros
Output signals � Analog output AO1: Output frequency � Analog output AO2: Motor current � Relay output 1: Ready run � Relay output 2: Running � Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
Control macros 81
ABB limited 2-wire macro
This macro is used for limited amount of I/Os that exist only in the base unit.
To enable the macro, select the macro in the Primary settings menu or set parameter 96.04 Macro select to ABB limited 2-wire.
Default control connections for the ABB limited 2-wire macro
X2, X3 Aux. voltage output and programmable digital inputs
10
+24V
Aux. voltage output +24 VDC, max. 200 mA
11
1)
12
DGND DCOM
Aux. voltage output common for DIs Digital input common for all
13
DI1
Stop (0) / Start (1)
14
DI2
Speed (1) / frequency selection (2)
X6, X7, X8 Relay outputs
19
RO1C
20
RO1A
2
21
RO1B
Relay output 1 No fault [Fault (-1)]
X4 Safety torque off
34
SGND
Safety torque off function. Factory connection.
35
1
36
OUT IN1
Drive starts only if both circuits are closed. See Safe torque off function in the drive
37
IN2
hardware manual.
Notes: Terminal sizes: 0.14 ... 1.5 mm2 Tightening torque: 0.5 N�m (0.4 lbf�ft).
Terminals DGND and SGND are internally connected to same reference potential. 1) Connected with jumpers at the factory. 2) Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals. Input signals � Start / Stop (DI1) � Output frequency or motor speed reference (DI2) Output signals � Relay output 1: Fault (-1)
82 Control macros
3-wire macro
This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push-buttons. It provides three constant speeds. To enable the macro, select it in the Primary settings menu or set parameter 96.04 Macro select to 3-wire.
Default control connections for the 3-wire macro
1...10 kohm
Max. 500 ohm
3) 4)
5)
4) See the notes on the next page.
XI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X2 and X3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 X6, X7, X8 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 X5 29 30 31 S100 X4 34 35 36 37 X11 42 43 44
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
I/O available in base unit
SCR Signal cable shield (screen) AI1 Ext. speed/frequency ref 1: 0... 10 V1)
AGND Analog input circuit, common use
+10V Reference voltage 10 V DC
AI2 Not configured
AGND Analog input circuit common
AO1 Output frequency: 0...20 mA
AO2 Motor current: 0...20 mA
AGND Analog output circuit common
Aux. voltage output and programmable digital
+24V Aux. voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
x
DGND Aux. voltage output, common for DIs.
x
DCOM Digital input common for all
x
DI1 Start (pulse )
x
DI2 Stop (pulse )
x
DI3 Forward (0) / reverse (1) DI4 Constant speed/frequency selection2) DI5 Constant speed/frequency selection2)
DI6 Not configured
Relay output
RO1C
Ready run
x
RO1A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
x
RO1B
2 A
x
RO2C
Running
RO2A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO2B
2 A
RO3C
Fault (-1)
RO3A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO3B
2 A
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
B+ Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See A- chapter Fieldbus control through the DGND embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) page 475.
TERM Serial data link termination switch
Safe torque off
SGND Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both
x
OUT circuits must be closed for the drive to start.
x
IN1 See chapter Delete safe torque in drive
x
IN2 hardware manual.
x
Redundancy auxiliary voltage output
+24 V Aux. voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
DGND Auxiliary voltage output common
DCOM Digital input common for all
Control macros 83
Terminal size: 0.14...1.5 mm2 Tightening torque: 0.5 (0.4 lbf�ft)
Notes:
1) AI1 is used as a speed reference if vector control is selected.
2) In scalar control (default): See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference Constant frequencies or parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain.
In vector control: See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant speeds or parameter group 22 Speed reference selection.
DI4 DI5
Operation/Parameter
Scalar control (default)
Vector control
0 0 Set frequency through AI1
Set speed through AI1
1 0 28.26 Constant frequency 1
22.26 Constant speed 1
0 1 28.27 Constant frequency 2
22.27 Constant speed 2
1 1 28.28 Constant frequency 3
22.28 Constant speed 3
3) Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the grounding shelf for the control cables.
4) Connected with jumpers at the factory.
5) Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals � Analog speed/frequency reference (AI1) � Start, pulse (DI1) � Stop, pulse (DI2) � Direction selection (DI3) � Constant speed/frequency selection (DI4, DI5)
Output signals
� Analog output AO1: Output frequency � Analog output AO2: Motor current � Relay output 1: Ready run � Relay output 2: Running � Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
84 Control macros
Alternate macro
This macro provides an I/O configuration where one signal starts the motor in the forward direction and another signal to start the motor in the reverse direction. To enable the macro, select it in the Primary settings menu or set parameter 96.04 Macro select to Alternate.
Default control connections for the Alternate macro
1...10 kohm
Max.
3)
500 ohm
4)
5)
4) See the notes on the next page.
XI
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
1
SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2
AI1 External speed/frequency ref 1: 0...10 V
3
AGND Analog input circuit common
4
+10V Reference voltage 10 V DC
5
AI2 Not configured
6
AGND Analog input circuit common
7
AO1 Output frequency: 0...20 mA
8
AO2 Motor current: 0...20 mA
9
AGND Analog output circuit common
X2 and X3 Aux. voltage output and programmable DIs
10
+24V Aux. voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
11
DGND Aux. voltage output common for DIs
12
DCOM Digital input common for all
13
DI1 Start forward; if DI1 = DI2: stop
14
DI2 Start reverse
15
DI3 Constant speed/frequency selection1)
16
DI4 Constant speed/frequency selection1)
17
DI5 Ramp set 1 (0) / Ramp set 2 (1)2)
18
DI6 Running is permitted, if it is 0, drive operation is for bidden.
X6, X7, X8 Relay output
19
RO1C
Ready run
20
RO1A
21
RO1B
250 V AC / 30 V DC 2 A
22
RO2C
Running
23
RO2A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
24
RO2B
2 A
25
RO3C
Fault (-1)
26
RO3A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
27
RO3B
2 A
X5 EIA-485 Modbus RTU
29
B+ Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See
30 31
ADGND
chapter Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) on page
S100 TERM& Serial data link bias resistors switch
X4 Safe torque off
34
SGND Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both
35
OUT circuits must be closed for the drive to start.
36
IN1 See chapter The Safe torque off function in
37
IN2 the Hardware manual of the drive.
X11 Redundancy auxiliary voltage output
42
+24 V Aux. voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
43
DGND Aux. voltage output common
44
DCOM Digital input for common all
I/O available in base unit
x x x x x
x x x
x x x x
Control macros 85
Terminal size: 0.14...1.5 mm2 Tightening torque: 0.5 N�m (0.4 lbf�ft)
Notes:
1) In scalar control (default): See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference Constant frequencies or parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain.
In vector control: See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant speeds or parameter group 22 Speed reference selection.
DI3 DI4
Operation/Parameter
Scalar control (default)
Vector control
0 0 Set frequency through AI1
Set speed through AI1
1 0 28.26 Constant frequency 1
22.26 Constant speed 1
0 1 28.27 Constant frequency 2
22.27 Constant speed 2
1 1 28.28 Constant frequency 3
22.28 Constant speed 3
2) In scalar control (default): See Menu - Primary settings - Ramps or parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain.
In vector control: See Menu - Primary settings - Ramps or parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp.
DI5 Ramp set
01
12
Parameters
Scalar control (default)
Vector control
28.72 Freq acceleration time 1 23.12 Acceleration time 1
28.73 Freq deceleration time 1 23.13 Deceleration time 1
28.74 Freq acceleration time 2 23.14 Acceleration time 2
28.75 Freq deceleration time 2 23.15 Deceleration time 2
3) Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the grounding shelf for the control cables.
4) Connected with jumpers at the factory.
5) Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals
� Analog speed/frequency reference (AI1) � Start motor forward (DI1) � Start motor in reverse (DI2) � Constant speed/frequency selection (DI3, DI4) � Ramp set (1 of 2) selection (DI5) � Run enable (DI6)
Output signals
� Analog output AO1: Output frequency � Analog output AO2: Motor current � Relay output 1: Ready run � Relay output 2: Running � Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
86 Control macros
Motor potentiometer macro
This macro provides a way to adjust the speed with the help of two-push buttons, or a cost-effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the motor using only digital signals. To enable the macro, select it in the Primary settings menu or set parameter 96.04 Macro select to Motor potentiometer.
Default control connections for the Motor potentiometer macro
Max. 500 ohm
3) 4) 5)
4) See the notes on the next page.
XI Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
I/O available in base unit
1
SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2
AI1 Not configured
3
AGND Analog input circuit common
4
+10V Reference voltage 10 V DC
5
AI2 Not configured
6
AGND Analog input circuit common
7
AO1 Output frequency: 0...20 mA
8
AO2 Motor current: 0...20 mA
9
AGND Analog output circuit common
X2 and X3 Aux. voltage output and programmable DIs
10
+24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
x
11
DGND Auxiliary voltage output common for DIs.
x
12
DCOM Digital input common for all
x
13
DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1)
x
14
DI2 Forward (0) / Reverse (1)
x
15
DI3 Reference up1)
16
DI4 Reference down1)
17
DI5 Constant frequency/speed 12)
18
DI6 Run enable; if 0, drive stops
X6, X7, X8 Relay output
19
RO1C
Ready run
x
20
RO1A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
x
21
RO1B
2 A
x
22
RO2C
Running
23
RO2A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
24
RO2B
2 A
25
RO3C
Fault (-1)
26
RO3A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
27
RO3B
2 A
X5 EIA-485 Modbus RTU
29
B+ Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See
30
A- chapter Fieldbus control through the embedded
31
DGND fieldbus interface (EFB) on page 475.
S100 TERM Serial data link termination switch
X4 Safe torque off
34
SGND Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both
x
35
OUT circuits must be closed for the drive to start. See
x
36
IN1 chapter The Safe torque off function in the
x
37
IN2 Hardware manual of the drive.
x
X11 Redundancy auxiliary voltage output
42
+24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
43
DGND Auxiliary voltage output common
44
DCOM Digital input common for all
Control macros 87
Terminal size: 0.14...1.5 mm2
Tightening torque: 0.5 N�m (0.4 lbf�ft)
Notes: 1) If DI3 and DI4 are both active or inactive, the frequency/speed reference is unchanged. The existing frequency/speed reference is stored during stop and power down. 2) In scalar control (default): See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference Constant frequencies or parameter 28.26 Constant frequency 1.
In vector control: See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant speeds or parameter 22.26 Constant speed 1. 3) Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the grounding shelf for the control cables. 4) Connected with jumpers at the factory. 5) Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals
� Start/Stop selection (DI1) � Direction selection (DI2) � Reference up (DI3) � Reference down (DI4) � Constant frequency/speed 1 (DI5) � Run enable (DI6)
Output signals
� Analog output AO1: Output frequency � Analog output AO2: Motor current � Relay output 1: Ready run � Relay output 2: Running � Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
88 Control macros
Hand/Auto macro
This macro can be used when switching between two external control devices is needed. Both external control device have their own control and reference signals. One signal is used to switch between these two. To enable the macro, select it in the Primary settings menu or set parameter 96.04 Macro select to Hand/Auto.
Default control connections for the Hand/Auto macro
1...10 kohm
Max.
500 ohm
2)
3)
4)
3) See the notes on the next page.
XI
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
I/O available in base unit
1
SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2
AI1 Output speed/freq, ref (Hand): 0...10 V
3
AGND Analog input circuit common
4
+10V Reference voltage 10 V DC
5
AI2 Output speed/freq, ref (Auto): 4...20 mA1)
6
AGND Analog input circuit common
7
AO1 Output frequency: 0...20 mA
8
AO2 Motor current: 0...20 mA
9
AGND Analog output circuit common
X2 and X3 Aux. voltage output and programmable DIs
10
+24V Aux. voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
x
11
DGND Aux. voltage output, common for DIs
x
12
DCOM Digital input common for all
x
13
DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1) (Hand)
x
14
DI2 Forward (0) / Reverse (1) (Hand)
x
15
DI3 Hand control (0) / Auto control (1)
16
DI4 Run enable; if 0, drive stops
17
DI5 Forward (0) / Reverse (1) (Auto)
18
DI6 Stop (0) / Start (1) (Auto)
X6, X7, X8 Relay output
19
RO1C
Ready run
x
20
RO1A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
x
21
RO1B
2 A
x
22
RO2C
Running
23
RO2A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
24
RO2B
2 A
25
RO3C
Fault (-1)
26
RO3A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
27
RO3B
2 A
X5 EIA-485 Modbus RTU
29
B+ Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See
30
A- chapter Fieldbus control through the
31
DGND embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) on page
S100 TERM Serial data link bias resistors switch
X4 Safe torque off
34
SGND Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both
x
36
OUT circuits must be closed for the drive to start.
x
37
IN1 See chapter The Safe torque off function in
x
38
IN2 the Hardware manual of the drive.
x
X11 Redundancy auxiliary voltage output
42
+24 V Aux. voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
43
DGND Aux. voltage output common
44
DCOM Digital input common for all
Control macros 89
Terminal size: 0.14...1.5 mm2
Tightening torque: 0.5 N�m (0.4 lbf�ft)
Notes: 1) The signal source is powered externally. See the manufacturer's instructions. To use sensors supplied by the drive aux. voltage output, see chapter Electrical installation, section Connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors in the Hardware manual of the drive. 2) Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the grounding shelf for the control cables. 3) Connected with jumpers at the factory. 4) Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals
� Two speed/frequency analog reference (AI1, AI2) � Control location (Hand or Auto) selection (DI3) � Start/stop selection, Hand (DI1) � Direction selection, Hand (DI2) � Start/stop selection, Auto (DI6) � Direction selection, Auto (DI5) � Run enable (DI4)
Output signals
� Analog output AO1: Output frequency � Analog output AO2: Motor current � Relay output 1: Ready run � Relay output 2: Running � Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
90 Control macros
Hand/PID macro
This macro controls the drive with the built-in process PID controller. In addition this macro has a second control location for the direct speed/frequency control mode. To enable the macro, select it in the Primary settings menu or set parameter 96.04 Macro select to Hand/PID.
Default control connections for the Hand/PID macro
1...10 kohm
Max. 500 ohm
4) 5)
6)
5) See the notes on the next page.
XI
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
I/O available in base unit
1
SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2
AI1 Ext. Hand ref. or Ext. PID ref.: 0...10 V1)
3
AGND Analog input circuit common
4
+10V Reference voltage 10 V DC
5
AI2 Actual PID feedback: 4...20 mA2)
6
AGND Analog input circuit common
7
AO1 Output frequency: 0...20 mA
8
AO2 Motor current: 0...20 mA
9
AGND Analog output circuit common
X2 and X3 Aux. voltage output and programmable DIs
10
+24V Aux. voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
x
11
DGND Aux. voltage output common for DIs
x
12
DCOM Digital input common for all
x
13
DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1) Hand
x
14
DI2 Hand (0) / PID (1) selection
x
15
DI3 Constant frequency selection3)
16
DI4 Constant frequency selection3)
17
DI5 Run enable; if 0, drive stops
18
DI6 Stop (0) / Start (1) PID
X6, X7, X8 Relay output
19
RO1C
Ready run
x
20
RO1A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
x
21
RO1B
2 A
x
22
RO2C
Running
23
RO2A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
24
RO2B
2 A
25
RO3C
Fault (-1)
26
RO3A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
27
RO3B
2 A
X5 EIA-485 Modbus RTU
29
B+ Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See
30
A- chapter Fieldbus control through the
31
DGND embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) on page
S100 TERM Serial data link termination switch
X4 Safe torque off
34
SGND Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both
x
35
OUT circuits must be closed for the drive to start.
x
36
IN1 See chapter The Safe torque off function in
x
37
IN2 the Hardware manual of the drive.
x
X10 Redundancy auxiliary voltage output
42
+24 V Aux. voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
43
DGND Aux. voltage output common
44
DCOM Digital input common for all
Control macros 91
Terminal size: 0.14...1.5 mm2
Tightening torque: 0.5 N�m (0.4 lbf�ft)
Notes:
1) Hand: 0...10 V -> frequency reference. PID: 0...10 V -> 0...100% PID setpoint.
2) The signal source is powered externally. See the manufacturer's instructions. To use sensors supplied by the drive auxiliary voltage output, see chapter Electrical installation, section Connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors in the Hardware manual of the drive.
3) In scalar control (default): See Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference Constant frequencies or parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain..
DI3 DI4 Operation (parameter) 0 0 Set frequency through AI1 1 0 28.26 Constant frequency 1 0 1 28.27 Constant frequency 2 1 1 28.28 Constant frequency 3
4) Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the grounding shelf for the control cables.
5) Connected with jumpers at the factory.
6) Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals
� Analog reference (AI1) � Actual feedback from PID (AI2) � Control location (Hand or PID) selection (DI2) � Start/stop selection, Hand (DI1) � Start/stop selection, PID (DI6) � Constant frequency selection (DI3, DI4) � Run enable (DI5)
Output signals
� Analog output AO1: Output frequency � Analog output AO2: Motor current � Relay output 1: Ready run � Relay output 2: Running � Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
92 Control macros
PID macro
This macro provides parameter settings for closed-loop control systems such as pressure control, flow control, etc. To enable the macro, select it in the Primary settings menu or set parameter 96.04 Macro select to PID.
Default control connections for the PID macro
1...10 kohm
Max.
500 ohm
4)
5)
6)
5) See the notes on the next page.
XI
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
I/O available in base unit
1
SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2
AI1 External PID reference: 0...10 V
3
AGND Analog input circuit common
4
+10V Reference voltage 10 V DC
5
AI2 Actual PID feedback: 4...20 mA1)
6
AGND Analog input circuit common
7
AO1 Output frequency: 0...20 mA
8
AO2 Motor current: 0...20 mA
9
AGND Analog output circuit common
X2 and X3 Aux. voltage output and programmable DIs
10
+24V Aux. voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
x
11
DGND Aux. voltage output common for DIs
x
12
DCOM Digital input common for all
x
13
DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1) PID
x
14
DI2 Internal setpoint sel13)
x
15
DI3 Internal setpoint sel23)
16
DI4 Constant frequency 12)
17
DI5 Run enable; if 0, drive stops
18
DI6 Not configured
X6, X7, X8 Relay output
19
RO1C
Ready run
x
20
RO1A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
x
21
RO1B
2 A
x
22
RO2C
Running
23
RO2A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
24
RO2B
2 A
25
RO3C
Fault (-1)
26
RO3A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
27
RO3B
2 A
X5 EIA-485 Modbus RTU
29
B+ Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See
30
A- chapter Fieldbus control through the
31
DGND embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) on page
S100 TERM Serial data link termination switch
X4 Safe torque off
34
SGND Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both
x
35
OUT circuits must be closed for the drive to start.
x
36
IN1 See chapter Delete safe torque in drive
x
37
IN2 hardware manual.
x
X11 Redundancy auxiliary voltage output
42
+24 V Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC, max.
43
DGND Auxiliary voltage output, common use
44
DCOM Digital input common for all
Control macros 93
Terminal size: 0.14...1.5 mm2 Tightening torque: 0.5 N�m (0.4 lbf�ft)
Notes:
1) The signal source is powered externally. See the manufacturer's instructions. To use sensors supplied by the drive auxiliary voltage output, see chapter Electrical installation, section Connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors in the Hardware manual of the drive.
2) If Constant frequency is activated it overrides the reference from the PID controller output.
3) See parameters 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1 and 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2 source table.
Source defined by par. 40.19
DI2 0 1 0 1
Source defined by par. 40.20
DI3 0 0 1 1
Internal setpoint active
Setpoint source: AI1 (par. 40.16) 1 (parameter 40.21) 2 (parameter 40.22) 3 (parameter 40.23)
4) Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the grounding shelf for the control cables.
5) Connected with jumpers at the factory.
6) Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals
� Analog reference (AI1) � Actual feedback from PID (AI2) � Start/Stop selection, PID (DI1) � Constant setpoint 1 (DI2) � Constant setpoint 1 (DI3) � Constant frequency 1 (DI4) � Run enable (DI5)
Output signals
� Analog output AO1: Output frequency � Analog output AO2: Motor current � Relay output 1: Ready run � Relay output 2: Running � Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
94 Control macros
Panel PID macro
This macro is suitable for applications where the drive is always controlled by PID and the setpoint is defined with the control panel. To enable the macro, select it in the Primary settings menu or set parameter 96.04 Macro select to Panel PID.
Default control connections for the Panel PID macro
1...10 kohm max. 500 ohm
See the notes on the next page.
3) 5)
4)
XI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X2 and X3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 X6, X7, X8 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 X5 29 30 31 S100 X4 34 35 36 37 X10 42 43 44
Reference voltage and analog inputs and outputs
SCR
Signal cable shield (screen)
AI1
Not configured
AGND Analog input circuit common
+10V AI2
Reference voltage 10 V DC Actual PID feedback: 4...20 mA 1)
AGND Analog input circuit common
AO1
Output frequency: 0...20 mA
AO2
Motor current: 0...20 mA
AGND Analog output circuit common
Aux. voltage output and programmable DIs
+24V
Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
DGND Auxiliary voltage output common for DIs
DCOM Digital input common for all
DI1
Stop (0) / Start (1) PID
DI2
Not configured
DI3
Not configured
DI4
Constant frequency 1: parameter 28.26 2)
DI5
Run enable; if 0, drive stops
DI6
Not configured
Relay outputs
RO1C
Ready run
RO1A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO1B
2 A
RO2C
Running
RO2A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO2B
2 A
RO3C
Fault (-1)
RO3A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
RO3B
2 A
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
B+ ADGND
Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See chapter Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) on page 475.
TERM Serial data link bias resistors switch
Safe torque off
SGND Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both circuits
IN1
IN2
IN1
Redundancy auxiliary voltage output
+24
Aux. voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
DGND Aux. voltage output common
DCOM Digital input common for all
Control macros 95
Terminal sizes: 0.14...1.5 mm2 Tightening torques: 0.5...0.6 N�m (0.4 lbf�ft)
Notes: 1) The signal source is powered externally. See the manufacturer's instructions. To use sensors
supplied by the drive aux. voltage output, see chapter Electrical installation, section Connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors in the Hardware manual of the drive. 2) If Constant frequency is activated it overrides the reference from the PID controller output. 3) Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the grounding shelf for the control cables. 4) Connected with jumpers at the factory.
Input signals
� PID setpoint given from the control panel � Actual feedback from PID (AI2) � Start/Stop selection, PID (DI1) � Constant setpoint 1 (DI2) � Constant setpoint 1 (DI3) � Constant frequency 1 (DI4) � Run enable (DI5)
Output signals
� Analog output AO1: Output frequency � Analog output AO2: Motor current � Relay output 1: Ready run � Relay output 2: Running � Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
96 Control macros
PFC macro
Pump and fan control logic for controlling multiple pumps or fans through the drive relay outputs. To enable the macro, select it in the Primary settings menu or set parameter 96.04 Macro select to PFC.
Default control connections for the PFC macro
1...10 kohm
Max.
500 ohm
2)
3)
4)
3) See the notes on the next page
XI
Reference voltage and analog input and output
I/O available in base unit
1
SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2
AI1 PID setpoint source: 0...10 V
3
AGND Analog input circuit common
4
+10V Reference voltage 10 V DC
5
AI2 Actual PID feedback: 4...20 mA1)
6
AGND Analog input circuit common
7
AO1 Output frequency: 0...20 mA
8
AO2 Motor current: 0...20 mA
9
AGND Analog output circuit common
X2 & X3 Aux. voltage output and programmable DIs
10
+24V Aux. voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
x
11
DGND Aux. voltage output address common for DIs
x
12
DCOM Digital input common for all
x
13
DI1 Stop (0) / start (1) (EXT1)
x
14
DI2 Running permitted; if it is 0, transmission stops
x
15
DI3 Not configured
16
DI4 Not configured
17
DI5 Not configured
18
DI6 Stop (0) / start (1) (EXT2)
X6, X7, X8 Relay output
19
RO1C
Running
x
20
RO1A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
x
21
RO1B
2 A
x
22
RO2C
Fault (-1)
23
RO2A
250 V AC / 30 V DC
24
RO2B
2 A
25
RO3C
PFC2 (the 2nd motor = the first
26
RO3A
auxiliary motor)
27
RO3B
250 V AC / 30 V DC
X5 EIA-485 Modbus RTU
29
B+ Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485). See
30
A- Chapter Fieldbus control through the embedded
31
DGND fieldbus interface (EFB) on page 475.
S100 TERM Serial data link termination switch
X4 Safe torque off
34 35 36 37
SGND OUT IN1 IN2
Safe torque off. Factory connection. Both circuits must be closed for the drive to start. See chapter Delete safe torque in drive hardware manual.
x x x x
X11 Redundancy auxiliary voltage output
42
+24 V Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC, max. 250 mA
43
DGND Auxiliary voltage output common
44
DCOM Digital input common for all
Control macros 97
Terminal size: 0.14...1.5 mm2 Tightening torque: 0.5 N�m (0.4 lbf�ft)
Notes: 1) The signal source is powered externally. See the manufacturer's instructions. See chapter Electrical installation in the Hardware manual in case of supplying power by relay with drive auxiliary voltage output. 2) Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees by controlling grounding clamp on the grounding shelf for the control cables. 3) Connected with jumpers at the factory. 4) Use shielded twisted-pair cables for digital signals.
Input signals � Setpoint for PID (AI1) � PID actual feedback (AI2) � Start/stop selection, EXT1 (DI1) � Activate running (DI2) � EXT1/EXT2 selection (DI3) � Start/Stop selection EXT2 (DI6)
Output signals � Analog output AO1: Output frequency � Analog output AO2: Motor current � Relay output 1: Running � Relay output 2: Fault (-1) � Relay output 3: PFC2 (first PFC auxiliary motor)
98
Parameter default values for different macros
Chapter Parameters on page 177 shows the default values of all parameters for the ABB standard macro (factory macro). Some parameters have different default values for other macros. The tables below lists the default values for those parameter for each macro.
96.04 Macro select 10.24 RO1 source
1 =
17 =
11 =
ABB standard ABB stan-
3-wire
dard (vector)
12 = Alternate
13 = Motor potenti-
ometer
2 = Ready run 2 = Ready run 2 = Ready run 2 = Ready run 2 = Ready run
10.27 RO2 source
7 = Running 7 = Running 7 = Running 7 = Running 7 = Running
10.30 RO3 source
15 = Fault (-1) 15 = Fault (-1) 15 = Fault (-1) 15 = Fault (-1) 15 = Fault (-1)
12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max
13.12 AO1 source
13.18 AO1 source max
50.000
2 = Output frequency 50.0
1500.000
50.000
1 = Motor speed used
1500.0
2 = Output frequency
50.0
50.000
2 = Output frequency 50.0
50.000
2 = Output frequency 50.0
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection
20.01 Ext1 commands
20.03 Ext1 in1 source
0 = EXT1
2 = In1 Start; In2 Dir 2 = DI1
0 = EXT1
2 = In1 Start; In2 Dir 2 = DI1
0 = EXT1
0 = EXT1
0 = EXT1
5 = In1P Start; 3 = In1 Start fwd; 2 = In1 Start; In2 Stop; In3 Dir In2 Start rev In2 Dir
2 = DI1
2 = DI1
2 = DI1
20.04 Ext1 in2 source 3 = DI2
3 = DI2
3 = DI2
3 = DI2
3 = DI2
20.05 Ext1 in3 source 0 = Always off 0 = Always off 4 = DI3
0 = Always off 0 = Always off
20.06 Ext2 commands 20.08 Ext2 in1 source
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Always off 0 = Always off 0 = Always off 0 = Always off 0 = Always off
20.09 Ext2 in2 source 0 = Always off 0 = Always off 0 = Always off 0 = Always off 0 = Always off
20.12 Run enable 1 source
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1
1 = Selected 1 = Selected 1 = Selected 7 = DI6
7 = DI6
1 = AI1 scaled 1 = AI1 scaled 1 = AI1 scaled 1 = AI1 scaled 15 = Motor potentiometer
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
22.22 Constant speed sel1
22.23 Constant speed sel2
4 = DI3 5 = DI4
4 = DI3 5 = DI4
5 = DI4 6 = DI5
4 = DI3 5 = DI4
6 = DI5 0 = Always off
99
96.04 Macro select
2 = Hand/Auto
3 = Hand/PID
14 = PID
15 =
16 =
Panel PID
PFC
10.24 RO1 source
2 = Ready run 2 = Ready run 2 = Ready run 2 = Ready run 7 = Running
10.27 RO2 source
7 = Running 7 = Running 7 = Running 7 = Running 15 = Fault (-1)
10.30 RO3 source
15 = Fault (-1) 15 = Fault (-1) 15 = Fault (-1) 15 = Fault (-1) 46 = PFC2
12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max
13.12 AO1 source
13.18 AO1 source max
50.000
2 = Output frequency 50.0
50.000
2 = Output frequency 50.0
50.000
2 = Output frequency 50.0
50.000
2 = Output frequency 50.0
50.000
2 = Output frequency 50.0
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection
20.01 Ext1 commands
20.03 Ext1 in1 source
5 = DI3
2 = In1 Start; In2 Dir 2 = DI1
4 = DI2 1 = In1 Start 2 = DI1
0 = EXT1 1 =In1 Start 2 = DI1
0 = EXT1 1 =In1 Start 2 = DI1
5 = DI3 1 =In1 Start 2 = DI1
20.04 Ext1 in2 source 3 = DI2
0 = Always off 0 = Always off 0 = Always off 0 = Always off
20.05 Ext1 in3 source 0 = Always off 0 = Always off 0 = Always off 0 = Always off 0 = Always off
20.06 Ext2 commands 20.08 Ext2 in1 source
2 = In1 Start; In2 Dir
7 = DI6
1 = In1 Start 7 = DI6
0 = Not selected
0 = Always off
0 = Not selected
0 = Always off
1 = In1 Start 7 = DI6
20.09 Ext2 in2 source 6 = DI5
0 = Always off 0 = Always off 0 = Always off 0 = Always off
20.12 Run enable 1 source
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1
5 = DI4
6 = DI5
6 = DI5
1 = AI1 scaled 1 = AI1 scaled 16 = PID
6 = DI5 16 = PID
3 = DI2 1 = AI1 scaled
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1 2 = AI2 scaled 16 = PID
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
16 = PID
22.22 Constant speed sel1
22.23 Constant speed sel2
0 = Always off 4 = DI3 0 = Always off 5 = DI4
5 = DI4
5 = DI4
0 = Always off
0 = Always off 0 = Always off 0 = Always off
100
96.04
10.24
10.27
10.30
12.20 13.12 13.18 19.11 20.01 20.03 20.04 20.05 20.06 20.08 20.09 20.12 22.11 22.18 22.22 22.23
Macro select
RO1 source
RO2 source
RO3 source
AI1 scaled at AI1 max AO1 source AO1 source max Ext1/Ext2 selection Ext1 commands Ext1 in1 source Ext1 in2 source Ext1 in3 source Ext2 commands Ext2 in1 source Ext2 in2 source Run enable 1 source Ext1 speed ref1 Ext2 speed ref1 Constant speed sel1 Constant speed sel2
4 = ABB limited 2-wire
2 = Ready run
7 = Running
15 = Fault (-1)
50.000 3 = Output frequency 50.0 0 = EXT1 1 = In1 Start 2 = DI1 0 = Always off 0 = Always off 0 = Not selected 0 = Always off 0 = Always off 1 = Selected 18 = Control panel (ref saved) 0 = Zero 3 = DI2 0 = Always off
101
96.04 Macro select
22.71 Motor potentiometer function
22.73 Motor potentiometer up source
22.74 Motor potentiometer down source
23.11 Ramp set selection
1 =
17 =
ABB standard ABB stan-
dard (vector)
0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled
0 = Not used 0 = Not used
0 = Not used 0 = Not used
6 = DI5
6 = DI5
11 = 3-wire 0 = Disabled
0 = Not used
0 = Not used
0 = Acc/Dec time 1
12 = Alternate 0 = Disabled
0 = Not used
0 = Not used
6 = DI5
13 = Motor potentiometer 1 = Enabled (init at stop /power-up) 4 = DI3
5 = DI4
0 = Acc/Dec time 1
28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1
28.15 Ext1 frequency ref2
28.22 Constant frequency sel1
28.23 Constant frequency sel2
28.71 Freq ramp set selection
40.07 Process PID operation mode
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source
40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1
40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2
40.32 Set 1 gain
1 = AI1 scaled 1 = AI1 scaled 1 = AI1 scaled 1 = AI1 scaled 15 = Motor potentiometer
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
4 = DI3
4 = DI3
5 = DI4
4 = DI3
6 = DI5
5 = DI4
5 = DI4
6 = DI5
5 = DI4
0 = Always off
6 = DI5 0 = Off
6 = DI5 0 = Off
0 = Acc/Dec time 1
0 = Off
6 = DI5 0 = Off
0 = Acc/Dec time 1
0 = Off
11 = AI1 percent
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
1.00
11 = AI1 percent
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
1.00
11 = AI1 percent
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
1.00
11 = AI1 percent
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
1.00
11 = AI1 percent
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
1.00
40.33 Set 1 integration 60.0 time
76.21 Multipump configuration
0 = Off
76.25 Number of motors 1
60.0 0 = Off 1
60.0 0 = Off 1
60.0 0 = Off 1
60.0 0 = Off 1
76.27 Max number of motors allowed
99.04 Motor control mode
1 1 = Scalar
1 0 = Vector
1 1 = Scalar
1 1 = Scalar
1 1 = Scalar
102
96.04 Macro select
2 =
3 =
14 =
Hand/Auto Hand/PID
PID
15 = Panel PID
16 = PFC
22.71 Motor
potentiometer function
0 = Disabled
22.73 Motor
0 = Not used
potentiometer up
source
22.74 Motor potentiometer down source
0 = Not used
23.11 Ramp set selection
0 = Acc/Dec time 1
0 = Disabled
0 = Not used
0 = Not used
0 = Acc/Dec time 1
0 = Disabled
0 = Not used
0 = Not used
0 = Acc/Dec time 1
0 = Disabled
0 = Not used
0 = Not used
0 = Acc/Dec time 1
0 = Disabled
0 = Not used
0 = Not used
0 = Acc/Dec time 1
28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1
28.15 Ext1 frequency ref2
28.22 Constant frequency sel1
28.23 Constant frequency sel2
28.71 Freq ramp set selection
40.07 Process PID operation mode
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source
40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1
40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2
40.32 Set 1 gain
1 = AI1 scaled 1 = AI1 scaled 16 = PID
16 = PID
1 = AI1 scaled
2 = AI2 scaled 16 = PID
0 = Zero
0 = Zero
16 = PID
0 = Always off 4 = DI3
5 = DI4
5 = DI4
0 = Always off
0 = Always off 5 = DI4
0 = Always off 0 = Always off 0 = Always off
0 = Acc/Dec time 1
0 = Off
11 = AI1 percent
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
1.00
0 = Acc/Dec time 1
2 = On when drive running
11 = AI1 percent
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
1.00
0 = Acc/Dec time 1 2 = On when drive running 11 = AI1 percent 2 = Internal setpoint 3 = DI2
4 = DI3
1.00
0 = Acc/Dec time 1
2 = On when drive running
13 = Control panel (ref
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
1.00
0 = Acc/Dec time 1
2 = On when drive running
11 = AI1 percent
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
0 = Not selected
2.50
40.33 Set 1 integration 60.0 time
76.21 Multipump configuration
0 = Off
76.25 Number of motors 1
60.0 0 = Off 1
60.0 0 = Off 1
60.0 0 = Off 1
3.0 2 = PFC 2
76.27 Max number of motors allowed
99.04 Motor control mode
1 1 = Scalar
1 1 = Scalar
1 1 = Scalar
1 1 = Scalar
2 1 = Scalar
96.04
22.71
22.73
22.74
28.11 28.15 28.22 28.23 28.71 40.07 40.08 40.16 40.17 40.19 40.20 40.32 40.33 41.08 41.16 50.01 58.01 71.08 71.16
103
Macro select
Motor potentiometer function
Motor potentiometer up source
Motor potentiometer down source
Ext1 frequency ref1 Ext1 frequency ref2 Constant frequency sel1 Constant frequency sel2 Freq ramp set selection Process PID operation mode Set 1 feedback 1 source Set 1 setpoint 1 source Set 1 setpoint 2 source Set 1 internal setpoint sel1 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2 Set 1 gain Set 1 integration time Set 2 feedback 1 source Set 2 setpoint 1 source FBA A enable Protocol enable Feedback 1 source Setpoint 1 source
4 = ABB limited 2-wire
0 = Disabled
0 = Not used
0 = Not used
18 = Control panel (ref saved) 0 = Zero 3 = DI2 0 = Always off 0 = Acc/Dec time 1 0 = Off 0 = Not selected 0 = Not selected 0 = Not selected 0 = Not selected 0 = Not selected 1.00 60.0 0 = Not selected 0 = Not selected 1 = Enable 0 = None 0 = Not selected 0 = Not selected
104
96.04 76.21 76.25 76.27
Macro select
Multipump configuration Number of motors Max number of motors allowed
4 = ABB limited 2-wire
0 = Off 1 1
Program features 105
6
Program features
What this chapter contains
This chapter describes some of the more important functions within the control program, how to use them and how to program them to operate. It also explains the control locations and operating modes.
Local control vs. external control
The ACS480 has two main control locations: external and local. The control location is selected with the Loc/Rem key on the control panel or in the PC tool.
106 Program features
Local control
Drive
Control panel or Drive composer PC tool (optional)
External control
I/O 1)
PLC (= Programmable
logic controller)
Embedded fieldbus interface
Fieldbus adapter (Fxxx)
M 3~
MOTOR
1) Extra inputs/outputs can be added by installing an optional I/O extension module in drive slot.
Local control
The control commands are given from the control panel keypad or from a PC equipped with Drive composer when the drive is in local control. Speed and torque control mode are available in vector motor control mode; frequency mode is available when scalar motor control mode is used (see parameter 19.16).
Local control is mainly used during commissioning and maintenance. The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local control. Changing the control location to local can be prevented by parameter 19.17.
The user can select by a parameter (49.05) how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool communication break. (The parameter has no effect in external control.)
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 19.16 Local control mode...19.17 Local control disable (page 228) and 49.05 Communication loss action (page 362).
Events: -
Program features 107
External control
When the drive is in external (remote) control, control commands are given through � the I/O terminals (digital and analog inputs), or optional I/O extension modules � the fieldbus interface (via the embedded fieldbus interface or an optional fieldbus
adapter module).
Two external control locations, EXT1 and EXT2, are available. The user can select the sources of the start and stop commands separately for each location in the Primary settings menu (Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference) or by setting parameters 20.01...20.10. The operating mode can be selected separately for each location, which enables quick switching between different operating modes, for example speed and torque control. Selection between EXT1 and EXT2 is done via any binary source such as a digital input or fieldbus control word (Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Secondary control location or parameter 19.11). The source of reference is selectable for each operating mode separately.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 20.01 Ext1 commands...20.10 Ext2 in3 source (page 228), and 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection (page 227).
Events: -
Communication fail functionality
The communication fail functionality ensures continuous process without interruptions. If there is a communication loss, the drive automatically changes the control location from EXT1 to EXT2. This enables process to be controlled, for example, with the drive PID controller. When the original control location recovers, the drive automatically switches control back to the communication network (EXT1).
108 Program features
Block diagram: EXT1/EXT2 selection for speed control
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3
Ext1 speed ref1 22.11
Ext1 speed ref2 22.12
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3
Ext2 speed ref1 22.18
Ext2 speed ref2 22.19
Function Ext1 speed ref1 or a math. function of Ext1 speed ref1 and Ext1 speed ref2
22.13
Function Ext2 speed ref1 or a math. function of Ext2 speed ref1 and Ext2 speed ref2
22.20
EXT1
Select
Default = EXT1
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection
EXT2
Block diagram: EXT1/EXT2 selection for frequency control
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3
Ext1 frequency ref1 28.11
Ext1 frequency ref2 28.12
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3
Ext2 frequency ref1 28.15
Ext2 frequency ref2 28.16
Function Ext1 frequency ref1 or a math. function of Ext1 frequency ref1 and Ext1 frequency ref2
28.13
Function Ext2 frequency ref1 or a math. function of Ext2 frequency ref1 and Ext2 frequency ref2
28.17
EXT1
Select
Default = EXT1
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection
EXT2
Program features 109
Block diagram: Run enable source for EXT1
The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for run enable for external control location EXT1.
0
Not selected
Select
1
Selected
DI1
DI1
EXT1
DI6
DI6
Run
Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus adapter Timed function
Supervision A bit in a parameter
EFB MCW bit 3 FBA A MCW bit 3 Timed function 1...3
Supervision 1...3 Other [bit]
20.12
Settings and diagnostics
Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Secondary control location; Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference
Parameters: 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection (page 227) and 20.01 Ext1 commands...20.10 Ext2 in3 source (page 228).
Events: -
110 Program features
Operating modes of the drive
The drive can operate in several operating modes with different types of reference. The mode is selectable for each control location (Local, EXT1 and EXT2) in parameter group 19 Operation mode. An overview of the different reference types and control chains is shown below.
PID
Torque reference
Parameter group 26 Torque reference chain
Speed reference
Parameter group 22 Speed reference selection
Frequency reference
Parameter group 28 Frequency reference
chain
Vector motor control mode Scalar motor control mode
Torque controller
Frequency controller
The following is a more detailed representation of the reference types and control chains. The page numbers refer to detailed diagrams in chapter Control chain diagrams.
Program features 111
Process PID setpoint and feedback source selection (p 534)
Process PID controller (p 535))
Torque reference source selection and
modification
(p 531)
Speed reference source selection I
(p 526))
Speed reference source selection II (p 527)
Speed reference ramping and shaping (p 528)
Speed error calculation (p 529)
Speed controller (p 530)
Frequency reference source selection and
modification
(p 524...525)
Reference selection for torque controller
(p 531)
Torque limitation (p 533)
Vector motor control mode Scalar motor control mode
Torque controller
Frequency controller
112 Program features
Speed control mode
The motor follows a speed reference given to the drive. This mode can be used either with estimated speed used as feedback. Speed control mode is available in both local and external control. It is supported in vector motor control only. Speed control uses speed reference chain. Select speed reference with parameters in group 22 Speed reference selection on page 247.
Settings and diagnostics Parameter group: 22 Speed reference selection (page 247). Events: -
Torque control mode
Motor torque follows a torque reference given to the drive. Torque control mode is available in both local and external control. It is supported in vector motor control only. Torque control uses torque reference chain. Select torque reference with parameters in group 26 Torque reference chain on page 266.
Settings and diagnostics Parameter group: 26 Torque reference chain (page 266) Events: -
Frequency control mode
The motor follows a frequency reference given to the drive. Frequency control is available in both local and external control. It is supported in scalar motor control only. Frequency control uses frequency reference chain. Select frequency reference with parameters in group 28 Frequency reference chain on page 271.
Settings and diagnostics Parameter group: 28 Frequency reference chain (page 271) Events: -
Program features 113
Special control modes
In addition to the above-mentioned control modes, the following special control modes are available: � Process PID control. For more information, see section Process PID control (page
129). � Emergency stop modes OFF1 and OFF3: Drive stops along the defined
deceleration ramp and drive modulation stops. � Jogging mode: Drive starts and accelerates to the defined speed when the
jogging signal is activated. For more information, see section Jogging (page 150). � Pre-magnetization: DC magnetization of the motor before start. For more
information, see section Pre-magnetization (page 146). � DC hold: Locking the rotor at (near) zero speed in the middle of normal operation.
For more information, see section DC hold (page 147). � Pre-heating (motor heating): Keeping the motor warm when the drive is stopped.
For more information, see section Pre-heating (Motor heating) (page 148).
Settings and diagnostics
Parameter groups: 06 Control and status words (page 189), 20 Start/stop/direction (page 228), 22 Speed reference selection (page 247), 23 Speed reference ramp (page 256 and 40 Process PID set 1 (page 332).
Events: -
114 Program features
Drive configuration and programming
The drive control program performs the main control functions, including speed, torque and frequency control, drive logic (start/stop), I/O, feedback, communication and protection functions. Control program functions are configured and programmed with parameters.
Drive control program
Speed control
Torque control
Frequency control
PID control Drive logic
M
I/O interface
Fieldbus interface
Protections
Configuring via parameters
Parameters configure all of the standard drive operations and can be set via � the control panel, as described in chapter Control panel � the Drive composer PC tool, as described in Drive composer user's manual
(3AUA0000094606 [English]), or � the fieldbus interface, as described in chapters Fieldbus control through the
embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) and Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter.
All parameter settings are stored automatically to the permanent memory of the drive. However, if an external +24 V DC power supply is used for the drive control unit, ABB highly recommends to force a save by using parameter 96.07 Parameter save manually before powering down the control unit after any parameter changes have been made.
If necessary, the default parameter values can be restored by parameter 96.06 Parameter restore.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 96.06 Parameter restore...96.07 Parameter save manually (page 393).
Events: -
Program features 115
Adaptive programming
Conventionally, the user can control the operation of the drive by parameters. However, the standard parameters have a fixed set of choices or a setting range. To further customize the operation of the drive, an adaptive program can be constructed out of a set of function blocks.
The Drive composer pro PC tool (version 1.10 or later, available separately) has an Adaptive programming feature with a graphical user interface for building the custom program. The function blocks include the usual arithmetic and logical functions, as well as for example, selection, comparison and timer blocks.
The physical inputs, drive status information, actual values, constants and parameters can be used as the input for the program. The output of the program can be used for example, as a start signal, external event or reference, or connected to the drive outputs. See the table below for a listing of the available inputs and outputs.
If you connect the output of the adaptive program to a selection parameter that is a pointer parameter, the selection parameter will be write-protected.
Example
If parameter 31.01 External event 1 source is connected to an adaptive programming block output, the parameter value is shown as Adaptive program on a control panel or PC tool. The parameter is write-protected (= the selection cannot be changed).
The status of the adaptive program is shown by parameter 07.30 Adaptive program status.The adaptive program can be disabled by 96.70 Disable adaptive program.
For more information, see the Adaptive programming application guide (3AXD50000028574 [English].
Inputs available to the adaptive program
Input
Source
I/O
DI1
10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0
DI2
10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1
DI3
10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2
DI4
10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3
DI5
10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4
DI6
10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5
AI1
12.11 AI1 actual value
AI2
12.21 AI2 actual value
Actual signals
Motor speed
01.01 Motor speed used
Output frequency
01.06 Output frequency
Motor current
01.07 Motor current
Motor torque
01.10 Motor torque
Motor shaft power
01.17 Motor shaft power
Status
Enabled
06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 0
Inhibited
06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 1
116 Program features
Inputs available to the adaptive program
Input
Source
Ready to start
06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 3
Tripped
06.11 Main status word, bit 3
At setpoint
06.11 Main status word, bit 8
Limiting
06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 7
Ext1 active
06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 10
Ext2 active
06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 11
Data storage
Data storage 1 real32
47.01 Data storage 1 real32
Data storage 2 real32
47.02 Data storage 2 real32
Data storage 3 real32
47.03 Data storage 3 real32
Data storage 4 real32
47.04 Data storage 4 real32
Outputs available to the adaptive program
Output
Target
I/O
RO1
10.24 RO1 source
RO2
10.27 RO2 source
RO3
10.30 RO3 source
AO1
13.12 AO1 source
AO2
13.22 AO2 source
Start control
Ext1/Ext2 selection
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection
Run enable 1
20.12 Run enable 1 source
Ext1 in1 cmd
20.03 Ext1 in1 source
Ext1 in2 cmd
20.04 Ext2 in2 source
Ext1 in3 cmd
20.05 Ext1 in3 source
Ext2 in1 cmd
20.08 Ext2 in1 source
Ext2 in2 cmd
20.09 Ext2 in2 source
Ext2 in3 cmd
20.10 Ext2 in3 source
Fault reset
31.11 Fault reset selection
Speed control
Ext1 speed reference
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1
Speed proportional gain
25.02 Speed proportional gain
Speed integration time
25.03 Speed integration time
Acceleration time 1
23.12 Acceleration time 1
Deceleration time 1
23.13 Deceleration time 1
Frequency control
Ext1 frequency reference
28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1
Torque control
Ext1 torque reference
26.11 Torque ref1 source
Ext2 torque reference
26.12 Torque ref2 source
Limit function
Minimum torque 2
30.21 Min torque 2 source
Maximum torque 2
30.22 Max torque 2 source
Events
External event 1
31.01 External event 1 source
External event 2
31.03 External event 2 source
External event 3
31.05 External event 3 source
Program features 117
Outputs available to the adaptive program
Output
Target
External event 4
31.07 External event 4 source
External event 5
31.09 External event 5 source
Data Storage
Data storage 1 real32
47.01 Data storage 1 real32
Data storage 2 real32
47.02 Data storage 2 real32
Data storage 3 real32
47.03 Data storage 3 real32
Data storage 4 real32
47.04 Data storage 4 real32
Process PID
Set 1 setpoint 1
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source
Set 1 setpoint 2
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source
Set 1 feedback 1
40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source
Set 1 feedback 2
40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source
Set 1 gain
40.32 Set 1 gain
Set 1 integration time
40.33 Set 1 integration time
Set 1 tracking mode
40.49 Set 1 tracking mode
Set 1 track reference
40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection
Adaptive program fault and aux code formats
The format of the aux code:
Bits 24-31: State number
Bits 16-23: block number
Bits 0-15: error code
If the state number is zero but the block number has a value, the fault is related to a function block in the base program. If both state number and block number are zero, the fault is a generic fault that is not related to a specific block.
See fault 64A6.
Sequence program
An adaptive program can contain base program and sequence program parts. Base program is run continuously when adaptive program is in running mode. The functionality of the base program is programmed using function blocks and system inputs and outputs.
Sequence program is a state machine. This means that only one state of the sequence program is run at a time. You can create a sequence program by adding states and programming the state programs using the same program elements as in the base program. You can program state transitions by adding state transition outputs to the state programs. The state transition rules are programmed using function blocks.
The number of the active state of the sequence program is shown by parameter 07.31 AP sequence state.
118 Program features
Settings and diagnostics
Parameter groups: 01 Actual values (page 181), 06 Control and status words (page 189), 07 System info (page 194), 10 Standard DI, RO (page 196), 12 Standard AI (page 211), 13 Standard AO (page 216), 19 Operation mode (page 226), 20 Start/stop/direction (page 228), 23 Speed reference ramp (page 256), 25 Speed control (page 260), 26 Torque reference chain (page 266), 30 Limits (page 282), 31 Fault functions (page 290), 40 Process PID set 1 (page 332), 47 Data storage (page 361), and 96 System (page 391).
Event: 64A6 Adaptive program (page 467).
Program features 119
Control interfaces
Programmable analog inputs
The control unit has two programmable analog inputs. Each of the inputs can be independently set as a voltage (0/2...10 V) or current (0/4...20 mA) input with parameters. Each input can be filtered, inverted and scaled.
Settings and diagnostics Parameter group: 12 Standard AI (page 211). Events: -
Programmable analog outputs
The control unit has two current (0...20 mA) analog outputs. Analog output 1 can be set as a voltage (0/2...10 V) or current (0/4...20 mA) output with a parameter. Analog output 2 always uses current. Each output can be filtered, inverted and scaled.
Settings and diagnostics Parameter group: 13 Standard AO (page 216). Events: -
Programmable digital inputs and outputs
The control unit has six digital inputs. Digital input DI5 can be used as a frequency input. The panel shows the appropriate selection only.
Settings and diagnostics Parameter groups: 10 Standard DI, RO (page 196) and 11 Standard DIO, FI, FO (page 205). Events: -
Programmable frequency input and output
Digital input DI5 can be used as a frequency input.
Settings and diagnostics Parameter groups: 10 Standard DI, RO (page 196) and 11 Standard DIO, FI, FO (page 205). Events: -
120 Program features
Programmable relay outputs
The control unit has three relay outputs. The signal to be indicated by the outputs can be selected by parameters.
Settings and diagnostics Parameter group: 10 Standard DI, RO (page 196). Events: -
Programmable I/O extensions
Inputs and outputs can be added by using a BIO-01 multifunction extension module or digital input extension module. The module is mounted on option slot of the control unit.
The table below shows the number of I/O on the base unit, on the I/O module of the standard drive variant (RIIO-01) as well as optional BIO-01 and BREL-01 modules.
Location
Base unit RIIO-01 BREL BIO-01
Digital inputs
(DI)
2
4
-
3
Digital outputs
(DO)
-
-
-
1
Digital I/Os (DIO)
-
-
-
-
Analog inputs
(AI)
-
2
-
1
Analog outputs
(AO)
-
2
-
-
Relay outputs
(RO)
1
2
4
-
Note: The configuration parameter group contains parameters that display the values of the inputs on the extension module. These parameters are the only way of utilizing the inputs on an I/O extension module as signal sources.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameter groups: 10 Standard DI, RO (page 196), 11 Standard DIO, FI, FO (page 205), 12 Standard AI (page 211) and 13 Standard AO (page 216).
Events: -
Program features 121
Fieldbus control
The drive can be connected to several different automation systems through its fieldbus interfaces. See chapters Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) (page 475) and Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter (page 505).
Settings and diagnostics
Parameter groups: 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) (page 364), 51 FBA A settings (page 368), 52 FBA A data in (page 370), and 53 FBA A data out (page 370) and 58 Embedded fieldbus (page 371).
Events: -
Application control
Reference ramping
Acceleration and deceleration ramping times can be set individually for speed, torque and frequency reference (Menu - Primary settings - Ramps).
With a speed or frequency reference, the ramps are defined as the time it takes for the drive to accelerate or decelerate between zero speed or frequency and the value defined by parameter 46.01 or 46.02. The user can switch between two preset ramp sets using a binary source such as a digital input. For speed and frequency reference, also the shape of the ramp can be controlled.
With a torque reference, the ramps are defined as the time it takes for the reference to change between zero and nominal motor torque (parameter 01.30).
Variable slope
Variable slope controls the slope of the speed ramp during a reference change. With this feature a constantly variable ramp can be used. See parameters 23.28 and 23.29.
Variable slope is only supported in remote control.
Special acceleration/deceleration ramps
The acceleration/deceleration times for the jogging function can be defined separately; see section Jogging (page 150).
The change rate of the motor potentiometer function (page 135) is adjustable. The same rate applies in both directions.
A deceleration ramp can be defined for emergency stop ("Off3" mode).
122 Program features
Settings and diagnostics
Menu - Primary settings - Ramps
Parameters: � Speed reference ramping: Parameters 23.11 Ramp set selection...23.15 Deceleration time 2 (page 256) and 46.01 Speed scaling (pages 358). � Torque reference ramping: Parameters 01.30 Nominal torque scale (page 182), 26.18 Torque ramp up time and 26.19 Torque ramp down time(pages 269). � Frequency reference ramping: Parameters 28.71 Freq ramp set selection...28.75 Freq deceleration time 2 (page 279) and 46.02 Frequency scaling (pages 358). � Jogging: Parameters 23.20 Acc time jogging and 23.21 Dec time jogging (page 257). � Motor potentiometer: Parameter 22.75 Motor potentiometer ramp time (page 255). � Emergency stop ("Off3" mode): Parameter 23.23 Emergency stop time (page 257). � Variable slope: Parameters 23.28 Variable slope enable (page 258) and 23.29 Variable slope rate (page 258).
Events: -
Constant speeds/frequencies
Constant speeds and frequencies are predefined references that can be quickly activated, for example, through digital inputs. It is possible to define up to 7 speeds for speed control and 7 constant frequencies for frequency control.
WARNING: Speeds and frequencies override the normal reference irrespective of where the reference is coming from.
Settings and diagnostics
Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant frequencies, Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Constant speeds
Parameter groups: 22 Speed reference selection (page 247) and 28 Frequency reference chain (page 271).
Events: -
Program features 123
Critical speeds/frequencies
Critical speeds (sometimes called "skip speeds") can be predefined for applications where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds or speed ranges because of, for example, mechanical resonance problems.
The critical speeds function prevents the reference from dwelling within a critical band for extended times. When a changing reference (22.87 Speed reference act 7) enters a critical range, the output of the function (22.01 Speed ref unlimited) freezes until the reference exits the range. Any instant change in the output is smoothed out by the ramping function further in the reference chain.
When the drive is limiting the allowed output speeds/frequencies, it limits to the absolutely lowest critical speed (critical speed low or critical frequency low) when accelerating from standstill, unless the speed reference is over the upper critical speed/ frequency limit.
The function is also available for scalar motor control with a frequency reference. The input of the function is shown by 28.96 Frequency ref act 7.
Example
A fan has vibrations in the range of 540...690 rpm and 1380...1560 rpm. To make the drive avoid these speed ranges,
� the critical speeds function by turning on bit 0 of parameter 22.51 Critical speed function, and
� set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below.
22.01 Speed ref unlimited (rpm) (output of function)
1560 1380
690 540
1 Par. 22.52 = 540 rpm 2 Par. 22.53 = 690 rpm 3 Par. 22.54 = 1380 rpm 4 Par. 22.55 = 1560 rpm
1234
22.87 Speed reference act 7 (rpm) (input of function)
124 Program features
Settings and diagnostics Parameters: � Critical speeds: Parameters 22.01 Speed ref unlimited (page 247), 22.51 Critical
speed function...22.57 Critical speed 3 high (page 253) and 22.87 Speed reference act 7 (page 255). � Critical frequencies: Parameters 28.51 Critical frequency function...28.57 Critical frequency 3 high (page 278) and 28.96 Frequency ref act 7 (page 282). Events: -
Speed controller autotune
The speed controller of the drive can be automatically adjusted using the autotune function. Autotuning is based on an estimation of the mechanical time constant (inertia) of the motor and machine. The autotune routine will run the motor through a series of acceleration/deceleration cycles, the number of which can be adjusted by parameter 25.40. Higher values will produce more accurate results, especially if the difference between initial and maximum speeds is small. The maximum torque reference used during autotuning will be the initial torque (ie. torque when the routine is activated) plus 25.38, unless limited by the maximum torque limit (parameter group 30 Limits) or the nominal motor torque (99 Motor data). The calculated maximum speed during the routine is the initial speed (ie. speed when the routine is activated) + 25.39, unless limited by parameter 30.12 or 99.09. The diagram below shows the behavior of speed and torque during the autotune routine. In this example, 25.40 is set to 2.
Initial torque + [25.38]
Initial torque
t Initial speed + [25.39]
Initial speed
Program features 125
Notes: � If the drive cannot produce the requested braking power during the routine, the
results will be based on the acceleration stages only, and not as accurate as with full braking power. � The motor will exceed the calculated maximum speed slightly at the end of each acceleration stage.
Before activating the autotune routine
The prerequisites for performing the autotune routine are: � The motor identification run (ID run) has been successfully completed � Speed and torque limits (parameter group 30 Limits) have been set � The drive has been started and is running in speed control mode.
After these conditions have been fulfilled, autotuning can be activated by parameter 25.33 (or the signal source selected by it).
Autotune modes
Autotuning can be performed in three different ways depending on the setting of parameter 25.34. The selections Smooth, Normal and Tight define how the drive torque reference should react to a speed reference step after tuning. The selection Smooth will produce a slow but robust response; Tight will produce a fast response
126 Program features
but possibly too high gain values for some applications. The figure below shows speed responses at a speed reference step (typically 1...20%).
n nN
%
A
B
C
D
t A: Undercompensated B: Normally tuned (autotuning) C: Normally tuned (manually). Better dynamic performance than with B D: Overcompensated speed controller
Autotune results
At the end of a successful autotune routine, its results are automatically transferred into parameters � 25.02 (proportional gain of the speed controller) � 25.03 (integration time of the speed controller) � 25.37 (mechanical time constant of the motor and machine).
Nevertheless, it is still possible to manually adjust the controller gain, integration time and derivation time.
Program features 127
The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller. The controller output is the reference for the torque controller.
Derivative acceleration compensation
Speed reference
+ Error - value
Actual speed
Proportional, integral
+ + Torque + reference
Derivative
Warning indications
A warning message AF90, will be generated if the autotune routine does not complete successfully. See chapter Fault tracing (page 451) for further information.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters groups: 25 Speed control (page 260), 30 Limits (page 282) and 99 Motor data (page 406).
Parameters: 25.02 Speed proportional gain (page 261), 25.03 Speed integration time (page 262), 25.33 Speed controller autotune...25.40 Autotune repeat times (page 265), 30.12 Maximum speed (page 284) and 99.09 Motor nominal speed (page 407).
Events: AF90 Speed controller autotuning (page 462).
User load curve
The User load curve provides a supervisory function that monitors an input signal as a function of frequency or speed, and load. It shows the status of the monitored signal and can give a warning or fault based on the violation of a user defined profile.
The user load curve consists of an overload and an underload curve, or just one of them. Each curve is formed by five points that represent the monitored signal as a function of frequency or speed.
In the example below, the user load curve is constructed from the motor nominal torque to which a 10% margin is added and subtracted. The margin curves define a
128 Program features
working envelope for the motor so that excursions outside the envelope can be supervised, timed and detected.
Motor torque / Nominal torque 1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
1
2
0.0
3
-0.2
0
10
20
1 = Overload curve (five points) 2 = Nominal process load curve 3 = Underload curve (five points)
30
40
50
Output frequency (Hz)
An overload warning and/or fault can be set to occur if the monitored signal stays continuously over the overload curve for a defined time. An underload warning and/or fault can be set to occur if the monitored signal stays continuously under the underload for a defined time.
Overload can be for example used to monitor for a saw blade hitting a knot or fan load profiles becoming too high.
Underload can be for example used to monitor for load dropping and breaking of conveyer belts or fan belts.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameter group: 37 User load curve (page 329).
Events: -
Control macros
Control macros are predefined parameter edits and I/O configurations. See chapter Control macros (page 35).
Program features 129
Process PID control
There are two built-in process PID controllers (PID set 1 and PID set 2) in the drive. The controller can be used to control process variables such as pressure or flow in the pipe or fluid level in the container.
In process PID control, a process reference (setpoint) is connected to the drive instead of a speed reference. An actual value (process feedback) is also brought back to the drive. The process PID control adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity (actual value) at the desired level (setpoint). This means that user does not need to set a frequency/speed/torque reference to the drive but the drive adjust its operation according to the process PID.
The simplified block diagram below illustrates the process PID control. For more detailed block diagrams, see pages 534 and 535.
Setpoint
AI1 AI2
Process actual
� � �
values
FBA
Filter
Process PID
Limitation
Speed or frequency
reference chain
The drive contains two complete sets of process PID controller settings that can be alternated whenever necessary; see parameter 40.57 PID set1/set2 selection.
Note: Process PID control is only available in external control; see section Local control vs. external control (page 105).
130 Program features
Quick configuration of the process PID controller
1. Activate the process PID controller: Menu - Primary settings - PID - PID controls
2. Select a feedback source: Menu - Primary settings - PID - Feedback
3. Select a setpoint source: Menu - Primary settings - PID - Setpoint
4. Set the gain, integration time, derivation time: Menu - Primary settings - PID Tuning
5. Set the PID output limits: Menu - Primary settings - PID - PID output
6. Select the PID controller output as the source of, for example, 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1: Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Reference from
Sleep and boost functions for process PID control
The sleep function is suitable for PID control applications where the consumption varies, such as clean water pumping systems. When used, it stops the pump completely during low demand, instead of running the pump slowly below its efficient operating range. The following example visualizes the operation of the function.
Example: The drive controls a pressure boost pump. The water consumption falls at night. As a consequence, the process PID controller decreases the motor speed. However, due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds, the motor would never stop rotating. The sleep function detects the slow rotation and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed. The drive shifts into sleep mode, still monitoring the pressure. The pumping resumes when the pressure falls under the predefined minimum level and the wakeup delay has passed.
The user can extend the PID sleep time by the boost functionality. The boost functionality increases the process setpoint for a predetermined time before the drive enters the sleep mode.
Program features 131
Setpoint Sleep boost step (40.46)
Sleep boost time (40.45)
Actual value Non-inverted (40.31 = Not inverted (Ref - Fbk))
Wake-up level (Setpoint - Wake-up deviation [40.47])
Actual value Wake-up level (Setpoint + Wake-up deviation [40.47])
Inverted (40.31 = Inverted (Fbk - Ref))
Motor speed
Wake-up delay (40.48)
tsd = Sleep delay (40.44)
t < tsd
tsd
Sleep mode
Sleep level (40.43)
STOP
START
Time Time Time
Time
132 Program features
Tracking
In tracking mode, the PID block output is set directly to the value of parameter 40.50 (or 41.50) Set 1 tracking ref selection. The internal I term of the PID controller is set so that no transient is allowed to pass on to the output, so when the tracking mode is left, normal process control operation can be resumed without a significant bump.
Settings and diagnostics
Menu - Primary settings - PID
Parameter: 96.04 Macro select (page 392) (macro selection)
Parameter groups: 40 Process PID set 1 (page 332) and 41 Process PID set 2 (page 348).
Events:-
Pump and fan control (PFC)
The Pump and fan control (PFC) is used in pump or fan systems consisting of one drive and multiple pumps or fans. The drive controls the speed of one of the pumps/fans and in addition connects (and disconnects) the other pumps/fans directly to the supply network through contactors.
The PFC control logic switches auxiliary motors on and off as required by the capacity changes of the process. In a pump application for example, the drive controls the motor of the first pump, varying the motor speed to control the output of the pump. This pump is the speed regulated pump. When the demand (represented by the process PID reference) exceeds the capacity of the first pump (a user defined speed/frequency limit), the PFC logic automatically starts an auxiliary pump. The logic also reduces the speed of the first pump, controlled by the drive, to account for the addition to the total system output by the auxiliary pump. Then, as before, the PID controller adjusts the speed/frequency of the first pump in such a way that the system output meets the process needs. If the demand continues to increase, the PFC logic adds further auxiliary pumps, in a similar manner as just described.
As the demand drops, making the speed of the first pump fall below a minimum limit (user defined as a speed/frequency limit), the PFC logic automatically stops an auxiliary pump. The PFC logic also increases the speed of the drive controlled pump to account for the missing output of the stopped auxiliary pump.
The Pump and fan control (PFC) is supported in external control location EXT2 only.
Program features 133
Autochange
Automatic rotation of the start order, or Autochange functionality, serves two main purposes in many PFC type setups. One is to keep the run times of the pumps/fans equal over time to even their wear. The other is to prevent any pump/fan from standing still for too long, which would clog up the unit. In some cases it is desirable to rotate the start order only when all units are stopped, for example to minimize the impact on the process.
The Autochange can also be triggered by the Timed function (see page 141).
Interlock
There is an option to define interlock signals for each motor in the PFC system. When the interlock signal of a motor is Available, the motor participates in the PFC starting sequence. If the signal is Interlocked, the motor is excluded. This feature can be used for informing the PFC logic that a motor is not available (for example due to maintenance or manual direct-on-line starting).
Soft pump and fan control (SPFC)
The Soft pump and fan control (SPFC) logic is a variant of the PFC logic for pump and fan alternation applications where lower pressure peaks are desirable when a new auxiliary motor is to be started. The SPFC logic is an easy way to implement soft starting of direct on line (auxiliary) motors.
The main difference between traditional PFC and SPFC logic is how the SPFC logic connects auxiliary motors on-line. When the criteria for starting a new motor is fulfilled (see above) the SPFC logic connects the drive controlled motor to the supply network in a flying start, that is, while the motor is still coasting. The drive then connects to the next pump/fan unit to be started and starts controlling the speed of that one, while the previously controlled unit now is connected directly on line through a contactor. Further (auxiliary) motors are started in a similar manner. The motor stopping routine is the same as for the normal PFC routine.
In some cases SPFC makes it possible to soften the start-up current while connecting auxiliary motors on-line. Lower pressure peaks on the pipelines and pumps may be achieved as a result.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameter: 96.04 Macro select (page 392) (macro selection)
Parameter groups: 10 Standard DI, RO (page 196), 40 Process PID set 1 (page 332), 76 PFC configuration (page 380) and 77 PFC maintenance and monitoring (page 388).
Events: -
134 Program features
Timed functions
A Timer can be active based on time of the day, day of the week and season of the year. In addition to these time related parameters, the Timer activation can be influenced by so called exceptional days (configurable as holiday or workday). A Timer can be set to be active or inactive during the exceptional days. Several Timers can be connected to a Timed function with the OR function. Thus if any of the Timers connected to a Timed function is active, the Timed function is also active. Timed function is then in turn controlling normal drive functions like starting the drive, choosing the right speed or right setpoint for the PID loop controller. In many cases where a fan or pump is controlled with a Timed function, it is often required that there is a possibility to override the time program for a short while. The overriding functionality is called Boost. The Boost is directly affecting selected Timed function(s) and switches it (them) on for a predefined time. The Boost mode is typically activated through a digital input and its operation time is set in parameters. A diagram illustrating the relations of the Timed functions entities is shown below.
Drive control, e.g. start, control speed
Timed function (3)
Timer (12)
Boost
Time of the day
Exception
Holiday
Workday
Time of the day
Day of the week
Season
Settings and diagnostics Parameter group: 34 Timed functions (page 307). Events: -
Program features 135
Motor potentiometer
The motor potentiometer is, in effect, a counter whose value can be adjusted up and down using two digital signals selected by parameters 22.73 Motor potentiometer up source and 22.74 Motor potentiometer down source.
When enabled by 22.71 Motor potentiometer function, the motor potentiometer assumes the value set by 22.72 Motor potentiometer initial value. Depending on the mode selected in 22.71, the motor potentiometer value is either retained or reset over a power cycle.
The change rate is defined in 22.75 Motor potentiometer ramp time as the time it would take for the value to change from the minimum (22.76 Motor potentiometer min value) to the maximum (22.77 Motor potentiometer max value) or vice versa. If the up and down signals are simultaneously on, the motor potentiometer value does not change.
The output of the function is shown by 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act, which can directly be set as the reference source in the main selector parameters, or used as an input by other source selector parameters, both in scalar and vector control.
The following example shows the behavior of the motor potentiometer value.
1 22.73
0
22.74
1
0
22.77
22.80 0
22.76
22.75
Parameters 22.73 Motor potentiometer up source and 22.74 Motor potentiometer down source control speed or frequency from zero to maximum speed or frequency.
136 Program features
The running direction can be changed with parameter 20.04 Ext1 in2 source. See the following example.
*
20.04 1 Ext2 in1
source 0 20.04 1 Ext2 in2 source 0
1 22.73
0 1 22.74 0
* Output speed or frequency has reached the reference value.
Settings and diagnostics Parameters: 20.04 Ext2 in2 source (page 231) and 22.71 Motor potentiometer function ...22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (page 253). Events: -
Mechanical brake control
A mechanical brake can be used for holding the motor and driven machinery at zero speed when the drive is stopped, or not powered. The brake control logic observes the settings of parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control as well as several external signals, and moves between the states presented in the diagram on page 137. The tables below the state diagram detail the states and transitions. The timing diagram on page 139 shows an example of a close-open-close sequence.
Inputs of the brake control logic The start command of the drive (bit 5 of 06.16 Drive status word 1) is the main control source of the brake control logic.
Outputs of the brake control logic The mechanical brake is to be controlled by bit 0 of parameter 44.01 Brake control status. This bit should be selected as the source of a relay output (or a digital input/output in output mode) which is then wired to the brake actuator through a relay. See the wiring example on page 140.
Program features 137
The brake control logic, in various states, will request the drive control logic to hold the motor or ramp down the speed. These requests are visible in parameter 44.01 Brake control status.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameter group: 44 Mechanical brake control (page 352).
Parameters: 06.16 Drive status word 1 (page 191) and 44.01 Brake control status (page 352).
Events: -
Brake state diagram
(from any state) 1
BRAKE DISABLED
9
(from any state) 2
BRAKE CLOSED
3
BRAKE OPENING
6
7 BRAKE CLOSING
BRAKE CLOSING DELAY
3 5
4 BRAKE OPEN
6 BRAKE CLOSING WAIT
5 8
State descriptions State name
BRAKE DISABLED BRAKE OPENING:
BRAKE OPEN
Description
Brake control is disabled (parameter 44.06 Brake control enable = 0, and 44.01 Brake control status b4 = 0). The open signal is active (44.01 Brake control status b0 = 1).
Brake has been requested to open. (44.01 Brake control status b2 = 1). Open signal has been activated (44.01 Brake control status b0 is set). The load is held in place by the speed control of the drive until 44.08 Brake open delay elapses.
The brake is open (44.01 Brake control status b0 = 1). Hold request is removed (44.01 Brake control status b2 = 0), and the drive is allowed to follow the reference.
138 Program features
State name BRAKE CLOSING: BRAKE CLOSING WAIT
BRAKE CLOSING DELAY
BRAKE CLOSED
Description
Brake has been requested to close. The drive logic is requested to ramp down the speed to a stop (44.01 Brake control status b3 = 1). The open signal is kept active (44.01 Brake control status b0 = 1). The brake logic will remain in this state until the motor speed is below 44.14 Brake close level. Closing conditions have been met. The open signal is deactivated (44.01 Brake control status b0 0). The ramp-down request is maintained (44.01 Brake control status b3 = 1). The brake logic will remain in this state until 44.13 Brake close delay has elapsed. At this point, the logic proceeds to BRAKE CLOSED state. The brake is closed (44.01 Brake control status b0 = 0). The drive is not necessarily modulating.
State change conditions ( n )
1 Brake control disabled (parameter 44.06 Brake control enable 0). 2 06.11 Main status word, bit 2 = 0. 3 Brake has been requested to open. 4 44.08 Brake open delay has elapsed. 5 Brake has been requested to close. 6 Motor speed is below closing speed 44.14 Brake close level. 7 44.13 Brake close delay has elapsed. 8 Brake has been requested to open. 9 Brake control enabled (parameter 44.06 Brake control enable 1).
Program features 139
Timing diagram The simplified timing diagram below illustrates the operation of the brake control function. Refer to the state diagram above.
Start command (06.16 b5)
Modulating (06.16 b6) tmd
Ready ref (06.11 b2)
Speed reference ncs
Brake control signal
(44.01 b0)
tod
Hold stopped request (44.01 b2)
Ramp to stopped request (44.01 b3)
State
BRAKE CLOSED
BRAKE OPENING
12 3
4
BRAKE OPEN
BCW
BCD
BRAKE CLOSING
5
6
BRAKE CLOSED
7
8
tmd tod ncs tcd BCW
BCD
Motor magnetization delay Brake open delay (parameter 44.08 Brake open delay) Brake close speed (parameter 44.14 Brake close level) Brake close delay (parameter 44.13 Brake close delay) BRAKE CLOSING WAIT BRAKE CLOSING DELAY
140 Program features
Wiring example
The figure below shows a brake control wiring example. The brake control hardware and wiring is to be sourced and installed by the customer.
WARNING! Make sure that the machinery into which the drive with brake control function is integrated fulfils the personnel safety regulations. Note that the frequency converter (a Complete Drive Module or a Basic Drive Module, as defined in IEC/EN 61800-2), is not considered as a safety device mentioned in the European Machinery Directive and related harmonised standards. Thus, the personnel safety of the complete machinery must not be based on a specific frequency converter feature (such as the brake control function), but it has to be implemented as defined in the application specific regulations.
The brake is controlled by bit 0 of parameter 44.01 Brake control status. In this example, parameter 10.24 RO1 source is set to Brake command (ie. bit 0 of 44.01 Brake control status.
Brake control hardware
115/230 VAC
Emergency brake
Drive control unit X8
20 RO1A 19 RO1C 21 RO1B
M Motor
Mechanical brake
Program features 141
Motor control
Motor types
The drive supports asynchronous AC induction, permanent magnet (PM) and synchronous reluctance motors (SynRM).
Motor identification
The performance of vector control is based on an accurate motor model determined during the motor start-up.
A motor Identification magnetization is automatically performed the first time the start command is given. During this first start-up, the motor is magnetized at zero speed for several seconds and the motor and motor cable resistance are measured to allow the motor model to be created. This identification method is suitable for most applications.
In demanding applications a separate Identification run (ID run) can be performed.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameter: 99.13 ID run requested (page 409).
Events: -
Scalar motor control
Scalar motor control is the default motor control method. In scalar control mode, the drive is controlled with a frequency reference. However, the excellent performance of vector control is not achieved in scalar control.
ABB recommends to activate scalar motor control mode in the following situations: � If the exact nominal motor values are not available or the drive needs to run
different motor after the commissioning phase � If a short commissioning time is needed or no ID run is wanted � In multimotor systems: 1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors, 2)
if the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after motor identification (ID run) � If the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of the drive � If the drive is used without a motor connected (for example, for test purposes) � If the drive runs a medium-voltage motor through a step-up transformer. � If the drive is equipped with a sine filter.
In scalar control, some standard features are not available.
See also section Operating modes of the drive (page 110).
142 Program features
IR compensation for scalar motor control
IR compensation (also known as voltage boost) is available only when the motor control mode is scalar. When IR compensation is activated, the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds. IR compensation is useful in applications, such as positive displacement pumps, that require a high break-away torque.
Motor voltage IR compensation
No compensation
In vector control, no IR compensation is possible or needed as it is applied automatically.
f (Hz)
Settings and diagnostics Menu - Primary settings - Motor - IR compensation Parameter group: 28 Frequency reference chain (page 271). Parameters: 97.13 IR compensation (page 403) and 99.04 Motor control mode (page 406). Events: -
Vector control
Vector control is the motor control mode that is intended for applications where high control accuracy is needed. It offers better control over the whole speed range, in particular in applications where slow speed with high torque is needed. It requires an identification run at startup. Vector control cannot be used in all applications, e.g. when sine filters are being used or there are multiple motors connected to single drive.
The switching of the output semiconductors is controlled to achieve the required stator flux and motor torque. The reference value for the torque controller comes from the speed controller or directly from an external torque reference source.
Stator flux is calculated by integrating the motor voltage in vector space. Rotor flux can be calculated from stator flux and the motor model. Motor torque is produced by controlling current 90 degrees from the rotor flux.By utilizing the identified motor model, the rotor flux estimate is improved. Actual motor shaft speed is not needed for the motor control.
See also section Speed compensated stop (page 153).
Program features 143
Settings and diagnostics Menu - Primary settings - Motor - Control mode Parameters: 99.04 Motor control mode (page 406) and 99.13 ID run requested (page 409). Events: -
Speed control performance figures
The table below shows typical performance figures for speed control.
Speed control Static accuracy
Dynamic accuracy
Dynamic accuracy with tuned speed controller
Performance
20% of motor nominal slip
< 10% s with 100% torque step (with default speed controller tuning)
< 2% s with 100% torque step
TTN(%) 100
Tload
t (s)
nact-nref nN
Area < 10% s
TN = rated motor torque nN = rated motor speed nact = actual speed nref = speed reference
Settings and diagnostics Parameter group: 25 Speed control (page 260). Events: -
144 Program features
Torque control performance figures
The drive can perform precise torque control without any speed feedback from the motor shaft. The table below shows typical performance figures for torque control.
Torque control
Performance
Non-linearity
� 5% with nominal torque
(� 20% at the most demanding operating point)
Torque step rise time < 10 ms with nominal torque
TTN(%) 100
90
Tref Tact
10
t (s)
< 5 ms
TN = rated motor torque Tref = torque reference Tact = actual torque
Power loss ride-through
See section Undervoltage control (power loss ride-through) on page 154.
U/f ratio
The U/f function is only available in scalar motor control mode, which uses frequency control.
The function has two modes: linear and squared.
In linear mode, the ratio of voltage to frequency is constant below the field weakening point. This is used in constant torque applications where it may be necessary to produce torque at or near the rated torque of the motor throughout the frequency range.
In squared mode (default), the ratio of the voltage to frequency increases as the square of the frequency below the field weakening point. This is typically used in centrifugal pump or fan applications. For these applications, the torque required follows the square relationship with frequency. Therefore, if the voltage is varied using the square relationship, the motor operates at improved efficiency and lower noise levels in these applications.
The U/f function cannot be used with energy optimization; if parameter 45.11 Energy optimizer is set to Enable, parameter 97.20 U/F ratio is ignored.
Program features 145
Settings and diagnostics Menu - Primary settings - Motor - U/f ratio Parameters: 45.11 Energy optimizer (page 355) and 97.20 U/F ratio (page 404). Events: -
Flux braking
The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetization in the motor. By increasing the motor flux, the energy generated by the motor during braking can be converted to motor thermal energy.
Motor speed
No flux braking
TBr TN
(%)
60
TBr = Braking torque TN = 100 Nm
Flux braking
40
Flux braking
20 No flux braking
t (s)
f (Hz)
The drive monitors the motor status continuously, also during flux braking. Therefore, flux braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the speed. The other benefits of flux braking are:
� The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given. The function does not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking.
� The cooling of the induction motor is efficient. The stator current of the motor increases during flux braking, not the rotor current. The stator cools much more efficiently than the rotor.
� Flux braking can be used with induction motors and permanent magnet synchronous motors.
Two braking power levels are available:
� Moderate braking provides faster deceleration compared to a situation where flux braking is disabled. The flux level of the motor is limited to prevent excessive heating of the motor.
� Full braking exploits almost all available current to convert the mechanical braking energy to motor thermal energy. Braking time is shorter compared to moderate braking. In cyclic use, motor heating may be significant.
WARNING: The motor needs to be rated to absorb the thermal energy generated by flux braking.
146 Program features
Settings Menu - Primary settings - Motor - Flux braking Parameter: 97.05 Flux braking (page 401). Events: -
DC magnetization
The drive has different magnetization functions for different phases of motor start/rotation/stop: pre-magnetization, DC hold, post-magnetization and pre-heating (motor heating).
Pre-magnetization Pre-magnetization refers to DC magnetization of the motor before start. Depending on the selected start mode (21.01 Start mode or 21.19 Scalar start mode), premagnetization can be applied to guarantee the highest possible breakaway torque, up to 200% of the nominal torque of the motor. By adjusting the pre-magnetization time (21.02 Magnetization time), it is possible to synchronize the motor start and, for example, the release of a mechanical brake.
Settings and diagnostics Parameters: 21.01 Start mode (page 238), 21.02 Magnetization time (page 239) and 21.19 Scalar start mode (page 243). Events: -
Program features 147
DC hold
The function makes it possible to lock the rotor at (near) zero speed in the middle of normal operation. DC hold is activated by parameter 21.08 DC current control. When both the reference and motor speed drop below a certain level (parameter 21.09 DC hold speed), the drive will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC into the motor. The current is set by parameter 21.10 DC current reference. When the reference exceeds parameter 21.09 DC hold speed, normal drive operation continues.
Motor speed
DC hold
Reference
t
21.09 DC hold speed
t
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 21.08 DC current control (page 242) and 21.09 DC hold speed (page 242).
Events: -
Post-magnetization
The function keeps the motor magnetized for a certain period (parameter 21.11 Post magnetization time) after stopping. This is to prevent the machinery from moving under load, for example before a mechanical brake can be applied. Postmagnetization is activated by parameter 21.08 DC current control. The magnetization current is set by parameter 21.10 DC current reference.
Note: Post-magnetization is only available when ramp stop is selected (see parameter 21.03 Stop mode).
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 21.03 Stop mode (page 239), 21.08 DC current control (page 242) and 21.11 Post magnetization time (page 242).
Events: -
148 Program features
Pre-heating (Motor heating)
The pre-heating function keeps the motor warm and prevents condensation inside the motor by feeding it with DC current when the drive has been stopped. The heating can only be on when the drive is in the stopped state, and starting the drive stops the heating.
When pre-heating is activated and the stop command is given, pre-heating starts immediately if the drive is running below the zero speed limit (see bit 0 in parameter 06.19 Speed control status word). If the drive is running above the zero speed limit, pre-heating is delayed by 60 seconds to prevent excessive current.
The function can be defined to be always active when the drive is stopped or it can be activated by a digital input, fieldbus, timed function or supervision function. For example, with the help of signal supervision function, the heating can be activated by a thermal measurement signal from the motor.
The pre-heating current fed to the motor can be defined as 0...30% of the nominal motor current.
When the pre-heating is active, an icon is shown on the status bar to indicate that current is being fed to the motor, see page 42.
Notes: � In applications where the motor keeps rotating for a long time after the modulation
is stopped, ABB recommends to use ramp stop with pre-heating to prevent a sudden pull at the rotor when the pre-heating is activated. � The heating function requires that the STO circuit is closed or not triggered open. � The heating function requires that the drive is not faulted. � Pre-heating uses DC hold to produce current.
Settings and diagnostics
Menu - Primary settings - Motor - Pre-heating
Parameters: 21.14 Pre-heating input source (page 242) and 21.16 Pre-heating current (page 243).
Events: -
Program features 149
Energy optimization
The function optimizes the motor flux so that total energy consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and drive) can be improved by 1...20% depending on load torque and speed.
Note: With permanent magnet and synchronous reluctance motors, energy optimization is always enabled.
Settings and diagnostics
Menu - Energy efficiency
Parameter: 45.11 Energy optimizer (page 355).
Events: -
Switching frequency
The drive has two switching frequencies: reference switching frequency and minimum switching frequency. The drive tries to keep the highest allowed switching frequency (= reference switching frequency) if thermally possible, and then adjusts dynamically between the reference and minimum switching frequencies depending on the drive temperature. When the drive reaches the minimum switching frequency (= lowest allowed switching frequency), it starts to limit output current as the heating up continues.
For derating, see chapter Technical data, section Switching frequency derating in the drive hardware manual.
Example 1: If you need to fix the switching frequency to a certain value as with some external filters, e.g. with EMC C1 or sine filters (see the Hardware manual of the drive), set both the reference and the minimum switching frequency to this value and the drive will retain this switching frequency.
Example 2: If the reference switching frequency is set to 12 kHz and the minimum switching frequency is set to the smallest available value, the drive maintains the highest possible switching frequency to reduce motor noise and only when the drive heats it will decrease the switching frequency. This is useful, for example, in applications where low noise is necessary but higher noise can be tolerated when the full output current is needed.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 97.01 Switching frequency reference and 97.02 Minimum switching frequency (page 389).
Events: -
150 Program features
Rush control
In torque control, the motor could potentially rush if the load were suddenly lost. The control program has a rush control function that decreases the torque reference whenever the motor speed exceeds 30.11 Minimum speed or 30.12 Maximum speed.
Motor speed Overspeed trip level
30.12
31.30 Overspeed trip margin
0 30.11
Rush control active
Overspeed trip level
Time 31.30 Overspeed trip margin
The function is based on a PI controller. The proportional gain and integration time can be defined by parameters. Setting these to zero disables rush control.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 30.11 Minimum speed (page 284), 30.12 Maximum speed (page 284) and 31.30 Overspeed trip margin (page 288).
Events: -
Jogging
The jogging function enables the use of a momentary switch to briefly rotate the motor. The jogging function is typically used during servicing or commissioning to control the machinery locally.
Two jogging functions (1 and 2) are available, each with their own activation sources and references. The signal sources are selected by parameters 20.26 Jogging 1 start source and 20.27 Jogging 2 start source (Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Jogging). When jogging is activated, the drive starts and accelerates to the defined jogging speed (22.42 Jogging 1 ref or 22.43 Jogging 2 ref) along the defined jogging acceleration ramp (23.20 Acc time jogging). After the activation signal switches off, the drive decelerates to a stop along the defined jogging deceleration ramp (23.21 Dec time jogging).
Program features 151
The figure and table below provide an example of how the drive operates during jogging. In the example, the ramp stop mode is used (see parameter 21.03 Stop mode).
Jog cmd = State of source set by 20.26 Jogging 1 start source or 20.27 Jogging
2 start source
Jog =
State of source set by 20.25 Jogging enable
Start cmd = State of drive start command.
Jog cmd Jog
Start cmd Speed
12 34 56 78 9
10 11
12 13
14 15 16 1718
t
Phase
Jog cmd
1-2
1
2-3
1
3-4
0
4-5
0
5-6
1
6-7
1
7-8
0
8-9
0
9-10 x
10-11 x 11-12 x
Jog 1
1 1
1 1
1 1 1->0
0
0 0
Start cmd
Description
0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function.
0 Drive follows the jog reference.
0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
0 Drive is stopped.
0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function.
0 Drive follows the jog reference.
0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
0 Drive is stopped. As long as the jog signal is on, start commands are ignored. After jog switches off, a fresh start command is required.
1 Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the selected acceleration ramp (parameters 23.11...23.15).
1 Drive follows the speed reference.
0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the selected deceleration ramp (parameters 23.11...23.15).
152 Program features
Phase
12-13 13-14
Jog cmd
x x
14-15 x
15-16 0->1
16-17 1 17-18 0
Jog 0 0
0->1
1
1 1->0
Start cmd
0 1 1
0
0 0
Description
Drive is stopped.
Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the selected acceleration ramp (parameters 23.11...23.15).
Drive follows the speed reference. As long as the start command is on, the jog signal is ignored. If the jog signal is on when the start command switches off, jogging is enabled immediately.
Start command switches off. The drive starts to decelerate along the selected deceleration ramp (parameters 23.11...23.15). When the jog command switches on, the decelerating drive adopts the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
Drive follows the jog reference.
Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
See also the block diagram on page 528.
Notes:
� Jogging is not available when the drive is in local control.
� Jogging cannot be enabled when the drive start command is on, or the drive started when jogging is disabled. Starting the drive after the jog switches off requires a fresh start command.
WARNING! If jogging is enabled and activated while the start command is on, jogging will activate as soon as the start command switches off.
� If both jogging functions are activated, the one that was activated first has priority. � Jogging uses vector control. � The inching functions activated through fieldbus (see 06.01 Main control word,
bits 8...9) use the references and ramp times defined for jogging, but do not require the jog signal.
Settings and diagnostics
Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Jogging
Parameters: 20.25 Jogging enable...20.27 Jogging 2 start source (page 236), 22.42 Jogging 1 ref...22.43 Jogging 2 ref (page 252) and 23.20 Acc time jogging...23.21 Dec time jogging (page 257).
Events: -
Program features 153
Speed compensated stop
Speed compensation stop is available for example for applications where a conveyer needs to travel a certain distance after receiving the stop command. At maximum speed, the motor is stopped normally along the defined deceleration ramp, after the application of a user defined delay to adjust the distance traveled. Below maximum speed, stop is delayed still more by running the drive at current speed before the motor is ramped to a stop. As shown in the figure, the distance traveled after the stop command is the same in both cases, that is, area A + area B equals area C.
Motor speed
Max. speed
Stop command
D1
D1 = Delay defined by parameter 21.31
D2 = Additional delay calculated by speed compensated stop
Used speed
A
B
Area A + Area B = Area C
D2 C
t (s)
Speed compensation does not take into account shape times (parameters 23.32 Shape time 1 and 23.33 Shape time 2). Positive shape times lengthen the distance traveled.
Speed compensation can be restricted to forward or reverse rotating direction.
Speed compensation is supported in both vector and scalar motor control.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 21.30 Speed compensated stop mode...21.32 Speed comp stop threshold (page 246).
Events: -
154 Program features
DC voltage control
Overvoltage control
Overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link is typically needed when the motor is in generating mode. The motor can generate when it decelerates or when the load overhauls the motor shaft, causing the shaft to turn faster than the applied speed or frequency. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the overvoltage control limit, the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the generating torque when the limit is reached. The overvoltage controller also increases any programmed deceleration times if the limit is reached; to achieve shorter deceleration times, a brake chopper and resistor may be required.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameter: 30.30 Overvoltage control (page 288).
Events: A3A1 DC link overvoltage (page 455) and 3210 DC link overvoltage (page 465).
Undervoltage control (power loss ride-through)
If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by utilizing the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue operation after the break if the main contactor (if present) remained closed.
Program features 155
Note: Units equipped with a main contactor must be equipped with a hold circuit (e.g. UPS) to keep the contactor control circuit closed during a short supply break.
TM fout UDC (N�m) (Hz) (Vdc) 160 80 520
120 60 390
80 40 260
40 20 130
Uinput power UDC
fout TM
1.6
5.8
t (s)
8
11.2
15.4
UTMDC=
= Intermediate Motor torque
circuit
voltage
of
the
drive,
fout
=
Output
frequency
of
the
drive,
dLroospssotfostuhpepmlyinviomltuamgeliamt int.oTmhienaclolnotardoll(eforukt e=e4p0s
Hz). The intermediate the voltage steady as
circuit DC voltage long as the input
power is switched off. The drive runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but
the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy.
Implementing the undervoltage control (power loss ride-through)
Implement the undervoltage control function as follows: � Check that the undervoltage control function of the drive is enabled with
parameter 30.31 Undervoltage control. � Parameter 21.01 Start mode must be set to Automatic (in vector mode) or
parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode to Automatic (in scalar mode) to make flying start (starting into a rotating motor) possible.
If the installation is equipped with a main contactor, prevent its tripping at the input power break. For example, use a time delay relay (hold) in the contactor control circuit.
WARNING! Make sure that the flying restart of the motor will not cause any danger. If you are in doubt, do not implement the undervoltage control function.
156 Program features
Automatic restart
It is possible to restart the drive automatically after a short (max. 10 seconds) power supply failure by using the Automatic restart function, provided that the drive is allowed to run for 10 seconds without the cooling fans operating.
When enabled, the function takes the following actions upon a supply failure to a successful restart: � The undervoltage fault is suppressed (but a warning is generated). � Modulation and cooling is stopped to conserve any remaining energy. � DC circuit pre-charging is enabled.
If the DC voltage is restored before the expiration of the period defined by parameter 21.18 Auto restart time and the start signal is still on, normal operation will continue. However, if the DC voltage remains too low at that point, the drive trips on a fault, 3220 DC link undervoltage.
If parameter 21.34 Force auto restart is set to Enable, the drive never trips on the undervoltage fault and the start signal is on forever. When he DC voltage is restored, the normal operation continues.
WARNING! Before you activate the function, make sure that no dangerous situations can occur. The function restarts the drive automatically and continues operation after a supply break.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 21.01 Start mode (page 238), 21.18 Auto restart time...21.19 Scalar start mode (page 243), 21.34 Force auto restart (page 246) and 30.31 Undervoltage control (page 288).
Events: A3A2 DC link undervoltage (page 455) and 3220 DC link undervoltage (page 465).
Voltage control and trip limits
The control and trip limits of the intermediate DC voltage regulator are relative to the supply voltage as well as drive/inverter type. The DC voltage (UDC) is approximately 1.35 times the line-to-line supply voltage, and is displayed by parameter 01.11 DC voltage.
Program features 157
The following table shows the values of selected DC voltage levels. Note that the absolute voltages vary according to the drive/inverter type and AC supply voltage range.
DC voltage level [V]
See 95.01 Supply voltage.
AC supply voltage range [V] AC supply voltage range [V]
380...415
440...480
Overvoltage fault limit
840
840
Overvoltage control limit
780
780
Internal brake chopper start limit
780
780
Internal brake chopper stop limit
760
760
Overvoltage warning limit Undervoltage warning limit Undervoltage control limit Charging relay closing limit Charging relay opening limit
745 0.85�1.41�par 95.03 value 1)
0.85�1.41�380 = 455 2) 0.75�1.41�par 95.03 value 1)
0.75�1.41�380 = 402 2) 0.78�1.41�par 95.03 value 1)
0.78�1.41�380 = 402 2) 0.73�1.41�par 95.03 value 1)
0.73�1.41�380 = 348 2)
745 0.85�1.41�par 95.03 value 1)
0.85�1.41�440 = 527 2) 0.75�1.41�par 95.03 value 1)
0.75�1.41�440 = 465 2) 0.78�1.41�par 95.03 value 1)
0.78�1.41�440 = 465 2) 0.73�1.41 �par 95.03 value 1)
0.73�1.41�440 = 403 2)
DC voltage at upper bound of supply voltage range (UDCmax)
560
648
DC voltage at lower bound of supply voltage range (UDCmin)
Charging activation/standby limit 3)
513 0.73�1.41�par 95.03 value 1)
594 0.73�1.41�par 95.03 value 1)
0.73�1.41�380 = 348 2)
0.73�1.41�440 = 403 2)
Undervoltage fault limit
0.45�1.41�par 95.03 value 1) 0.45�1.41�par 95.03 value 1)
0.45�1.41�380 = 241 2)
0.45�1.41�440 = 279 2)
1) If parameter 95.01 Supply voltage is set to Automatic / not selected and 95.02 Adaptive voltage limits is set to Enable, the value of parameter 95.03 Estimated AC supply voltage is used,
2) otherwise the lower limit of the range selected with parameter 95.01 Supply voltage is used. 3) When standby is activated, drive modulation is stopped, the fan is stopped and the pre-charge circuit is
activated. If the voltage exceeds this level again, the drive has to complete charging before it will
automatically continue operation.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters 01.11 DC voltage (page 181), 30.30 Overvoltage control...30.31 Undervoltage control (page 288) and 95.01 Supply voltage...95.02 Adaptive voltage limits (page 389).
Events: -
158 Program features
Brake chopper
A brake chopper can be used to handle the energy generated by a decelerating motor. When the DC voltage rises high enough, the chopper connects the DC circuit to an external brake resistor. The chopper operation is based on hysteresis. The internal brake choppers in the drive (in frames R1...R4) start conducting at internal brake chopper start limit 780 V and stop conducting at internal brake chopper stop limit 760 V (AC supply 380...480 V). For information on external brake choppers, refer to their documentation. Note: Overvoltage control needs to be disabled for the chopper to operate.
Settings and diagnostics Parameter group: 43 Brake chopper (page 350). Parameter: 01.11 DC voltage (page 181). Events: A792 Brake resistor wiring (page 458), A793 BR excess temperature (page 458), A79C BC IGBT excess temperature (page 459), 7183 BR excess temperature (page 469) and 7192 BC IGBT excess temperature (page 470).
Program features 159
Safety and protections
Fixed/Standard protections
Overcurrent
If the output current exceeds the internal overcurrent limit, the IGBTs are shut down immediately to protect the drive.
DC overvoltage
See section Overvoltage control on page 154.
DC undervoltage
See section Undervoltage control (power loss ride-through) on page 154.
Drive temperature
If the temperature rises high enough, the drive first starts to limit the switching frequency and then the current to protect itself. If it is still keeps heating up, for example because of a fan failure, an overtemperature fault is generated.
Short circuit
In case of a short circuit, the IGBTs are shut down immediately to protect the drive.
Emergency stop
The emergency stop signal is connected to the input selected by parameter 21.05 Emergency stop source. An emergency stop can also be generated through fieldbus (parameter 06.01 Main control word, bits 0...2).
The mode of the emergency stop is selected by parameter 21.04 Emergency stop mode. The following modes are available: � Off1: Stop along the standard deceleration ramp defined for the particular
reference type in use � Off2: Stop by coasting � Off3: Stop by the emergency stop ramp defined by parameter 23.23 Emergency
stop time.
With Off1 or Off3 emergency stop modes, the ramp-down of the motor speed can be supervised by parameters 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision and 31.33 Emergency ramp supervision delay.
160 Program features
Notes: � The installer of the equipment is responsible for installing the emergency stop
devices and all additional devices needed for the emergency stop function to fulfill the required emergency stop categories. For more information, contact your local ABB representative. � After an emergency stop signal is detected, the emergency stop function cannot be canceled even though the signal is canceled. � If the minimum (or maximum) torque limit is set to 0%, the emergency stop function may not be able to stop the drive.
Settings and diagnostics
Menu - Primary settings - Start, stop, reference - Run permissions
Parameters: 21.04 Emergency stop mode...21.05 Emergency stop source (page 239), 23.23 Emergency stop time (page 257) and 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision...31.33 Emergency ramp supervision delay (page 298).
Events: AFE1 Emergency stop (off2)...AFE2 Emergency stop (off1 or off3) (page 462) and 73B0 Emergency ramp failed (page 470).
Motor thermal protection
The control program features two separate motor temperature monitoring functions. The temperature data sources and warning/trip limits can be set up independently for each function.
The motor temperature can be monitored using � the motor thermal protection model (estimated temperature derived internally
inside the drive), or � sensors installed in the windings. This will result in a more accurate motor model.
Motor thermal protection model
The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions:
1. When power is applied to the drive for the first time, the motor is assumed to be at ambient temperature (defined by parameter 35.50 Motor ambient temperature). After this, when power is applied to the drive, the motor is assumed to be at the estimated temperature.
2. Motor temperature is calculated using the user-adjustable motor thermal time and motor load curve. The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature exceeds 30 �C.
Note: The motor thermal model can be used when only one motor is connected to the inverter.
Program features 161
Implementing a motor temperature sensor connection
WARNING! IEC 60664 and IEC 61800-5-1 require double or reinforced insulation between live parts and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non-conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth.
You have four implementation alternatives: � If there is double or reinforced insulation between the sensor and the live parts of
the motor, you can connect the sensor directly to the analog/digital input(s) of the drive. � If there is basic insulation between the sensor and the live parts of the motor, you can connect the sensor to the analog/digital input(s) of the drive if all other circuits connected to the digital and analog inputs (typically extra-low voltage circuits) are protected against contact and insulated with basic insulation from other lowvoltage circuits. The insulation must be rated for the same voltage level as the drive main circuit. Note that extra-low voltage circuits (such as 24 V DC) typically do not meet these requirements. � Alternative: You can connect the sensor with a basic insulation to the
analog/digital input(s) of the drive if you do not connect any other external control circuits to drive digital and analog inputs. � You can connect a sensor to a digital input of the drive via an external thermistor relay. The insulation of the relay of must be rated for the main circuit voltage of the motor.
Temperature monitoring using PTC sensors
1...3 PTC sensors can be connected in series to an analog input and an analog output. The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 1.6 mA through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor. The temperature measurement function calculates the resistance of the sensor and generates an indication if overtemperature is detected.
Leave the sensor end of the cable shield unconnected.
For wiring of the sensor, refer to the drive hardware manual.
162 Program features
The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance value as a function of temperature.
Ohm
4000
1330
550
100
T
When an analog output is not available or used for other purposes, it is possible to setup a voltage divider connection that uses the internal resistance of a digital input. 1...3 PTC sensors can be connected in series with 10 V reference and digital and analog inputs. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage over the internal resistance of the digital input from the analog input and calculates the PTC resistance. For wiring of the sensor, refer to the drive hardware manual. Make sure that the DI used is not configured to any other use in the drive control program.
Temperature monitoring using Pt100 sensors 1...3 Pt100 sensors can be connected in series to an analog input and an analog output. The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 9.1 mA through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius. It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how the drive reacts when overtemperature is detected. See section Implementing a motor temperature sensor connection on page 161. For the wiring of the sensor, see chapter Electrical installation, section AI1 and AI2 as Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000, KTY83 and KTY84 sensor inputs (X1) in the drive hardware manual.
Program features 163
Temperature monitoring using Pt1000 sensors
1...3 Pt1000 sensors can be connected in series to an analog input and an analog output.
The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 0.1 mA through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius.
See section Implementing a motor temperature sensor connection on page 161.
For the wiring of the sensor, see chapter Electrical installation, AI1 and AI2 as Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000, KTY83 and KTY84 sensor inputs (X1) in the drive hardware manual.
Temperature monitoring using Ni1000 sensors
One Ni1000 sensor can be connected to an analog input and an analog output on the control unit.
The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 9.1 mA through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius.
See section Implementing a motor temperature sensor connection on page 161.
For the wiring of the sensor, see chapter Electrical installation, AI1 and AI2 as Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000, KTY83 and KTY84 sensor inputs (X1) in the drive hardware manual.
Temperature monitoring using KTY84 sensors
One KTY84 sensor can be connected to an analog input and an analog output on the control unit.
The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 2.0 mA through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius.
The figure and table on page 164 show typical KTY84 sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature.
See section Implementing a motor temperature sensor connection on page 161.
For the wiring of the sensor, see chapter Electrical installation, AI1 and AI2 as Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000, KTY83 and KTY84 sensor inputs (X1) in the drive hardware manual.
Temperature monitoring using KTY83 sensors
One KTY83 sensor can be connected to an analog input and an analog output on the control unit.
164 Program features
The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 1.0 mA through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius.
The figure and table below show typical KTY83 sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature.
Scaling
KTY84 KTY83
�C
ohm
ohm
90
936
1569
110
1063
1774
130
1197
1993
150
1340
2225
Ohm 3000
2000
KTY83 KTY84
1000
0 -100
T (oC)
0
100 200 300
It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how the drive reacts when overtemperature is detected.
See section Implementing a motor temperature sensor connection on page 161.
For the wiring of the sensor, see chapter Electrical installation, AI1 and AI2 as Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000, KTY83 and KTY84 sensor inputs (X1) in the drive hardware manual.
Connection of motor temperature sensor to the drive via a relay
PTC alternative A: This table shows the insulation requirement for a customer's external relay, and the insulation requirement for the sensor to fulfill decisive voltage class A (double insulation) of IEC 60800-5-1.
Type External relay
PTC relay Insulation
Basic insulation 6 kV
Temperature sensor insulation requirement Basic insulation
PTC alternative B: Decisive voltage class B of IEC 60800-5-1 (basic insulation) is provided with a 6 kV relay. Circuits connected to all motor protection relay inputs and outputs must be protected against direct contact.
Program features 165
Pt100 alternative A: This table shows the insulation requirement for a customer's external relay, and the insulation requirement for the sensor to fulfill decisive voltage class A (double insulation) of IEC 60800-5-1.
Pt100 relay
Type
Insulation
External relay
Basic insulation 6 kV
Temperature sensor insulation requirement between sensor and live parts of motor
Basic insulation
Pt100 alternative B: Decisive voltage class B of IEC 60800-5-1 (basic insulation) can be achieved when there is basic insulation between the sensor and live parts of the motor. Circuits connected to all motor protection relay inputs and outputs must be protected against direct contact.
Settings and diagnostics
Menu - Primary settings - Motor - Thermal protection estimated, Menu - Primary settings - Motor - Thermal protection measured
Parameter group: 35 Motor thermal protection (page 316).
Events: -
Motor overload protection
This section describes motor overload protection without using motor thermal protection model, either with estimated or measured temperature. For protection with the motor thermal protection model, see section Motor thermal protection on page 160.
Motor overload protection is required and specified by multiple standards including the US National Electric Code (NEC), UL 508C and the common UL\IEC 61800-5-1 standard in conjunction with IEC 60947-4-1. The standards allow for motor overload protection without external temperature sensors.
The protection feature allows the user to specify the class of operation in the same manner as the overload relays are specified in standards IEC 60947-4-1 and NEMA ICS 2.
Motor overload protection requires that you specify a motor current tripping level. This is defined by a curve using parameters 35.51, 35.52 and 35.53. The tripping level is the motor current at which the overload protection will ultimately trip if the motor current remains at this level continuously.
The motor overload class (class of operation), parameter 35.57 Motor overload class, is given as the time required for the overload relay to trip when operating at 7.2 times
the tripping level in the case of IEC 60947-4-1 and 6 times the tripping level in the case of NEMA ICS 2. The standards also specify the time to trip for current levels between the tripping level and the 6 times tripping level. The drive satisfies the IEC standard and NEMA standard trip times.
166 Program features
Using class 20 satisfies the UL 508C requirements.
The motor overload algorithm monitors the squared ratio (motor current / tripping level)2 and accumulates this over time. This is sometimes to as I2t protection. The accumulated value is shown with parameter 35.05.
You can define with parameter 35.56 that when 35.05 reaches 88%, a motor overload warning will be generated, and when it reaches 100%, the drive will trip on the motor overload fault. The rate at which this internal value is increased depends on the actual current, tripping level current and overload class selected.
Parameters 35.51, 35.52 and 35.53 serve a dual purpose. They determine the load curve for temperature estimate as well as specify the overload tripping level.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters common to motor thermal protection and motor overload protection: 35.51 Motor load curve...35.53 Break point (page 323).
Parameters specific to motor overload protection: 35.05 Motor overload level (page 316), 35.56 Motor overload action...35.57 Motor overload class (page 325).
Events: A783 Motor overload (page 458) and 7122 Motor overload (page 469).
Programmable protection functions
External events (parameters 31.01...31.10)
Five different event signals from the process can be connected to selectable inputs to generate trips and warnings for the driven equipment. When the signal is lost, an external event (fault, warning, or a mere log entry) is generated. The contents of the messages can be edited on the control panel by selecting Menu - Primary settings Advanced functions - External events.
Motor phase loss detection (parameter 31.19)
The parameter selects how the drive reacts whenever a motor phase loss is detected.
Earth (Ground) fault detection
Note that � an earth fault in the supply cable does not activate the protection � in a grounded supply, the protection activates within 2 milliseconds � in an ungrounded supply, the supply capacitance must be 1 microfarad or more � the capacitive currents caused by shielded motor cables up to 300 meters will not
activate the protection � the protection is deactivated when the drive is stopped.
Program features 167
Supply phase loss detection (parameter 31.21)
The parameter selects how the drive reacts whenever a supply phase loss is detected.
Safe torque off detection (parameter 31.22)
The drive monitors the status of the Safe torque off input, and this parameter selects which indications are given when the signals are lost. (The parameter does not affect the operation of the Safe torque off function itself). For more information on the Safe torque off function, see chapter Planning the electrical installation, section Implementing the Safe torque off function in the Hardware manual of the drive.
Swapped supply and motor cabling (parameter 31.23)
The drive can detect if the supply and motor cables have accidentally been swapped (for example, if the supply is connected to the motor connection of the drive). The parameter selects if a fault is generated or not.
Stall protection (parameters 31.24...31.28)
The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision limits (current, frequency and time) and choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition.
Overspeed protection (parameter 31.30 and 31.31)
The user can set overspeed and overfrequency limits by specifying a margin that is added to the currently-used maximum and minimum speed or frequency limits.
Local control loss detection (parameter 49.05)
The parameter selects how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool communication break.
AI supervision (parameters 12.03...12.04)
The parameters select how the drive reacts when an analog input signal moves out of the minimum and/or maximum limits specified for the input. This can be due to broken I/O wiring or sensor.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 12.03 AI supervision function...12.04 AI supervision selection (page 211), 31.01 External event 1 source...31.31 Frequency trip margin (page 290) and 49.05 Communication loss action (page 362).
Events: -
168 Program features
Automatic fault resets
The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage and external faults. The user can also specify a fault that is automatically reset. By default, automatic resets are off and must be specifically activated by the user.
WARNING! Before you activate the function, make sure that no dangerous situations can occur. The function resets the drive automatically and continues operation after a fault.
Settings and diagnostics Menu - Primary settings - Advanced functions - Autoreset faults Parameters: 31.12 Autoreset selection...31.16 Delay time (page 292) Events: -
Diagnostics
Signal supervision
Six signals can be selected to be supervised by this function. Whenever a supervised signal exceeds or falls below predefined limits, a bit in 32.01 Supervision status is activated, and a warning or fault generated. The supervised signal is low-pass filtered.
Settings and diagnostics Parameter group: 32 Supervision (page 299). Parameter: 32.01 Supervision status (page 299). Events: -
Energy saving calculators
This feature consists of the following functionalities: � An energy optimizer that adjusts the motor flux in such a way that the total system
efficiency is maximized � A counter that monitors used and saved energy by the motor and displays them in
kWh, currency or volume of CO2 emissions, and � A load analyzer showing the load profile of the drive (see separate section on
page 169).
Program features 169
In addition, there are counters that show energy consumption in kWh of the current and previous hour as well as the current and previous day.
The amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either direction) is counted and shown full as GWh, MWh and kWh. The cumulative energy is also shown as full kWh. All these counters are resettable.
Note: The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is directly dependent on the accuracy of the reference motor power given in parameter 45.19 Comparison power.
Settings and diagnostics
Menu - Energy efficiency
Parameter group: 45 Energy efficiency (page 353).
Parameters: 01.50 Current hour kWh...01.53 Previous day kWh (page 182), 01.55 Inverter GWh counter (resettable)...01.58 Cumulative inverter energy (resettable) (page 183)
Events: -
Load analyzer
Peak value logger
The user can select a signal to be monitored by a peak value logger. The logger records the peak value of the signal along with the time the peak occurred, as well as motor current, DC voltage and motor speed at the time of the peak. The peak value is sampled at 2 ms intervals.
Amplitude loggers
The control program has two amplitude loggers.
For amplitude logger 2, the user can select a signal to be sampled at 200 ms intervals, and specify a value that corresponds to 100%. The collected samples are sorted into 10 read-only parameters according to their amplitude. Each parameter represents an amplitude range 10 age points wide, and displays the age of the collected samples that have fallen within that range.
age of samples
170 Program features You can view this graphically with the assistant panel or the Drive composer PC tool.
Amplitude ranges (parameters 36.40...36.49) Amplitude logger 1 is fixed to monitor motor current, and cannot be reset. With amplitude logger 1, 100% corresponds to the maximum output current of the drive (Imax), which is listed in the Hardware manual. The measured current is logged continuously. The distribution of samples is shown by parameters 36.20...36.29. Settings and diagnostics Menu - Diagnostics - Load profile Parameter group: 36 Load analyzer (page 326).
0...10% 10...20% 20...30% 30...40% 40...50% 50...60% 60...70% 70...80% 80...90%
>90%
Program features 171
Diagnostics menu
The Diagnostics menu provides quick information about active faults, warnings and inhibits in the drive and how to fix and reset them. It also helps you to find out why the drive is not starting, stopping or running at the desired speed.
� Start/stop/reference summary: Use this view to find out where the control comes from if the drive is not starting or stopping as expected, or runs at an undesired speed.
� Limit status: Use this view to find out whether any limitations are active if the drive is running at undesired speed.
� Active faults: Use this view to see currently active faults and how to fix and reset them.
� Active warnings: Use this view to see currently active warnings and how to fix them.
� Active inhibits: Use this view to see the active inhibits and how to fix them. In addition, in the Clock, region, display menu you can disable (enabled by default) and pop-up views showing information on inhibits when you try to start the drive but it is prevented.
� Fault and event log: Shows lists faults and other events. � Fieldbus: Use this view to find out status information and sent and received data
from fieldbus. � Load profile: Use this view to see the status information of load distribution (that
is, drive running time spent on each load level) and peak load levels. Settings and diagnostics Menu - Diagnostics Menu - Primary settings - Clock, region, display - Show inhibit pop-up.
172 Program features
Miscellaneous
Backup and restore
You can make backups of the settings manually to the assistant panel. The assistant panel also keeps one automatic backup. You can restore a backup to another drive, or a new drive replacing a faulty one. You can make backups and restore on the panel or with the Drive composer PC tool.
Backup
Manual backup
Make a backup when necessary, for example, after you have started up the drive or when you want to copy the settings to another drive.
Parameter changes from fieldbus interfaces are ignored unless you have forced parameter saving with parameter 96.07 Parameter save manually.
Automatic backup
The assistant panel has a dedicated space for one automatic backup. An automatic backup is created two hours after the last parameter change. After completing the backup, the panel waits for 24 hours before checking if there are additional parameter changes. If there are, it creates a new backup overwriting the previous one when two hours have passed after the latest change.
You cannot adjust the delay time or disable the automatic backup function.
Parameter changes from fieldbus interfaces are ignored unless you have forced parameter saving with parameter 96.07 Parameter save manually.
Restore
The backups are shown on the panel. Automatic backups are marked with icon and manual backups with . To restore a backup, select it and press . In the following display you can view backup contents and restore all parameters or select a subset to be restored.
Note: To restore a backup, the drive has to be in Local control.
Program features 173
Note: There is a risk of removing the QR code menu entry permanently if a backup from a drive with an old firmware or old panel firmware is restored to a drive with a new firmware.
Settings and diagnostics Menu - Backups Parameter: 96.07 Parameter save manually (page 393). Events: -
User parameter sets
The drive supports four user parameter sets that can be saved to the permanent memory and recalled using drive parameters. It is also possible to use digital inputs to switch between user parameter sets. To change a user parameter set, the drive has to be stopped. A user parameter set contains all editable values in parameter groups 10...99 except � forced I/O values such as parameters 10.03 DI force selection and 10.04 DI
forced data � I/O extension module settings (group 15) � data storage parameters (group 47) � fieldbus communication settings (groups 50...53 and 58) � parameter 95.01 Supply voltage. As the motor settings are included in the user parameter sets, make sure the settings correspond to the motor used in the application before recalling a user set. In an application where different motors are used with the drive, the motor ID run needs to be performed with each motor and the results saved to different user sets. The appropriate set can then be recalled when the motor is switched.
174 Program features
Settings and diagnostics
Menu - Primary settings - Advanced functions - User sets
Parameters: 10.03 DI force selection...10.04 DI forced data (page 197), 95.01 Supply voltage (page 389) and 96.10 User set status...96.13 User set I/O mode in2 (page 394).
Events: -
Data storage parameters
Twelve (eight 32-bit, four 16-bit) parameters are reserved for data storage. These parameters are unconnected by default and can be used for linking, testing and commissioning purposes. They can be written to and read from using other parameters' source or target selections.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameter group: 47 Data storage (page 361).
Events: -
Parameter checksum calculation
Two parameter checksums, A and B, can be calculated from a set of parameters to monitor changes in the drive configuration. The sets are different for checksums A and B. Each of these checksum is compared to the corresponding reference checksum; in case of a mismatch, an event (a pure event, warning or fault) is generated. The calculated checksum can be set as the new reference checksum.
The set of parameters for checksum A does not include fieldbus settings.
The parameters included in the checksum A calculation are user editable parameters in parameter groups 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 28, 30, 31, 32, 34, 35, 36, 37, 40, 41, 43, 45, 46, 71, 76, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99.
The set of parameters for checksum B does not include � fieldbus settings � motor data settings � energy data settings.
The parameters included in the checksum B calculation are user editable parameters in parameter groups 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 28, 30, 31, 32, 34, 35, 36, 37, 40, 41, 43, 46, 71, 76, 95, 96, 97.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters: 96.54 Checksum action...96.69 Actual checksumB (page 397) and 96.71 Approved checksum A...96.72 Approved checksum B (page 399).
Events: -
Program features 175
User lock
For better cybersecurity, ABB highly recommends that you set a master pass code to prevent e.g. the changing of parameter values and/or the loading of firmware and other files.
WARNING! ABB will not be liable for damages or losses caused by the failure to activate the user lock using a new pass code. See Cybersecurity disclaimer (page 18).
� To activate the user lock for the first time: � Enter the default pass code, 10000000, into 96.02 Pass code.This will make
parameters 96.100...96.102 visible. � Enter a new pass code into 96.100 Change user pass code. Always use eight
digits; if using Drive composer, finish with Enter. � Confirm the new pass code in 96.101 Confirm user pass code.
WARNING! Store the pass code in a safe place � the user lock cannot be opened even by ABB if the pass code is lost.
� In 96.102 User lock functionality, define the actions that you want to prevent (ABB recommends you select all the actions unless otherwise required by the application).
� Enter an invalid pass code into 96.02 Pass code to close the user lock. � Activate 96.08 Control board boot, or cycle the power to the drive. Check that parameters 96.100...96.102 are hidden. If they are not, enter another random pass code into 96.02. To reopen the lock, enter your pass code into 96.02 Pass code. This will again make parameters 96.100...96.102 visible.
Settings and diagnostics Parameters: 96.02 Pass code (page 392) and 96.100 Change user pass code...96.102 User lock functionality (page 399). Events: -
176 Program features
Parameters 177
7
Parameters
What this chapter contains
The chapter describes the parameters, including actual signals, of the control program. At the end of the chapter, on page 412, there is a separate list of the parameters whose default values are different between 50 Hz and 60 Hz supply frequency settings.
178 Parameters
Terms and abbreviations
Term Actual signal Def
FbEq16
Other Other [bit] Parameter p.u. [parameter number]
Definition
Type of parameter that is the result of a measurement or calculation by the drive, or contains status information. Most actual signals are readonly, but some (especially counter-type actual signals) can be reset.
(In the following table, shown on the same row as the parameter name) The default value of a parameter when used in the Factory macro. For information on other macro-specific parameter values, see chapter Control macros (page 35).
(In the following table, shown on the same row as the parameter range, or for each selection) 16-bit fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in communication when a 16-bit value is selected for transmission to an external system. A dash (-) indicates that the parameter is not accessible in 16-bit format. The corresponding 32-bit scalings are listed in chapter Additional parameter data (page 415).
The value is taken from another parameter. Choosing "Other" displays a parameter list in which the user can specify the source parameter.
The value is taken from a specific bit in another parameter. Choosing "Other" displays a parameter list in which the user can specify the source parameter and bit.
Either a user-adjustable operating instruction for the drive, or an actual signal.
Per unit
Value of the parameter
Parameters 179
Summary of parameter groups
Group
Contents
01 Actual values
Basic signals for monitoring the drive.
03 Input references
Values of references received from various sources.
04 Warnings and faults
Information on warnings and faults that occurred last.
05 Diagnostics
Various run-time-type counters and measurements related to drive maintenance.
06 Control and status words Drive control and status words.
07 System info
Drive hardware and firmware information.
10 Standard DI, RO
Configuration of digital inputs and relay outputs.
11 Standard DIO, FI, FO
Configuration of the frequency input.
12 Standard AI
Configuration of standard analog inputs.
13 Standard AO
Configuration of standard analog outputs.
15 I/O extension module
Configuration of the I/O extension module installed in slot 2.
19 Operation mode
Selection of local and external control location sources and operating modes.
20 Start/stop/direction
Start/stop/direction and run/start/jog enable signal source selection; positive/negative reference enable signal source selection.
21 Start/stop mode
Start and stop modes; emergency stop mode and signal source selection; DC magnetization settings.
22 Speed reference selection Speed reference selection; motor potentiometer settings.
23 Speed reference ramp
Speed reference ramp settings (programming of the acceleration and deceleration rates for the drive).
24 Speed reference conditioning
Speed error calculation; speed error window control configuration; speed error step.
25 Speed control
Speed controller settings.
26 Torque reference chain
Settings for the torque reference chain.
28 Frequency reference chain Settings for the frequency reference chain.
30 Limits
Drive operation limits.
31 Fault functions
Configuration of external events; selection of behavior of the drive upon fault situations.
32 Supervision
Configuration of signal supervision functions 1...6.
34 Timed functions
Configuration of the timed functions.
35 Motor thermal protection
Motor thermal protection settings such as temperature measurement configuration, load curve definition and motor fan control configuration.
36 Load analyzer
Peak value and amplitude logger settings.
37 User load curve
Settings for user load curve.
40 Process PID set 1
Parameter values for process PID control.
41 Process PID set 2
A second set of parameter values for process PID control.
43 Brake chopper
Settings for the internal brake chopper.
44 Mechanical brake control Configuration of mechanical brake control.
45 Energy efficiency
Settings for the energy saving calculators as well as peak and energy loggers.
Page 181 184 185 186
189 194 196 205 211 216 221 226
228
238
247 256
260
260 266 271 282 290
299 307 316
326 329 332 348 350 352 353
180 Parameters
Group 46 Monitoring/scaling settings
47 Data storage
49 Panel port communication 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) 51 FBA A settings 52 FBA A data in
53 FBA A data out
58 Embedded fieldbus 71 External PID1 76 PFC configuration
77 PFC maintenance and monitoring
95 HW configuration 96 System
97 Motor control
98 User motor parameters
99 Motor data
Contents
Speed supervision settings; actual signal filtering; general scaling settings.
Data storage parameters that can be written to and read from using other parameters' source and target settings.
Communication settings for the control panel port on the drive.
Fieldbus communication configuration.
Fieldbus adapter A configuration.
Selection of data to be transferred from drive to fieldbus controller through fieldbus adapter A.
Selection of data to be transferred from fieldbus controller to drive through fieldbus adapter A.
Configuration of the embedded fieldbus (EFB) interface.
Configuration of external PID.
PFC (Pump and fan control) and Autochange configuration parameters. See also section Pump and fan control (PFC) on page 132.
PFC (Pump and fan control) and Autochange configuration parameters. See also section Pump and fan control (PFC) on page 132.
Various hardware-related settings.
Language selection; access levels; macro selection; parameter save and restore; control unit reboot; user parameter sets; unit selection.
Switching frequency; slip gain; voltage reserve; flux braking; anticogging (signal injection); IR compensation.
Motor values supplied by the user that are used in the motor model.
Motor configuration settings.
Page 358 361 362 364 368 370 370 371 378 380
388
389 391
400 404 406
Parameters 181
Parameter listing
No. Name/Value 0011 Actual values
01.01 Motor speed used
01.02
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Motor speed estimated
01.03 01.06
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Motor speed %
-1000.00... 1000.00%
Output frequency
01.07 01.08 01.09 01.10
-500.00...500.00 Hz
Motor current
0.00...30000.00 A
Motor current % of motor nom
0.0...1000.0%
Motor current % of drive nom
0.0...1000.0%
Motor torque
-1600.0...1600.0%
01.11 01.13
DC voltage 0.00...2000.00 V Output voltage 0...2000 V
Description
Def/FbEq16
Basic signals for monitoring the drive. All parameters in this group are read-only unless otherwise noted. Note: Values of these actual signals are filtered with the filter time defined in group 46 Monitoring/scaling settings. The selection lists for parameters in other groups mean the raw value of the actual signal instead. For example, if a selection is "Output frequency" it does not point to the value of parameter 01.06 Output frequency but to the raw value.
Estimated motor speed. A filter time constant for this signal can be defined by parameter 46.11 Filter time motor speed.
Estimated motor speed.
Estimated motor speed in rpm. A filter time constant for this signal can be defined by parameter 46.11 Filter time motor speed.
Estimated motor speed.
Motor speed in percent of the synchronous motor speed.
Motor speed.
-
See par. 46.01 -
See par. 46.01 10 = 1%
Estimated drive output frequency in Hz. A filter time constant for this signal can be defined by parameter 46.12 Filter time output frequency. Estimated output frequency.
Measured (absolute) motor current in A. Motor current. Motor current (drive output current) in percent of the nominal motor current. Motor current. Motor current (drive output current) in percent of the nominal drive current. Motor current. Motor torque in percent of the nominal motor torque. See also parameter 01.30 Nominal torque scale. A filter time constant for this signal can be defined by parameter 46.13 Filter time motor torque. Motor torque.
Measured DC link voltage. DC link voltage. Calculated motor voltage in V AC. Motor voltage.
-
See par. 46.02 10 = 1A -
1 = 1% -
1 = 1% -
See par. 46.03 10 = 1 V 1 = 1 V
182 Parameters
No. 01.14
01.15 01.16 01.17 01.18 01.19
01.20
01.24 01.30
01.50
Name/Value Output power
-32768.00... 32767.00 kW Output power % of motor nom -300.00... 300.00% Output power % of drive nom -300.00... 300.00% Motor shaft power -32768.00... 32767.00 kW or hp Inverter GWh counter 0...65535 GWh Inverter MWh counter
0...1000 MWh Inverter kWh counter
0...1000 kWh Flux actual % 0...200% Nominal torque scale
0.000... 4000000.000 N�m or lb�ft Current hour kWh
0.00... 1000000.00 kWh
Description Drive output power. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection. A filter time constant for this signal can be defined by parameter 46.14 Filter time power. Output power.
Output power in percent of the nominal motor power.
Output power. Output power in percent of the nominal drive power.
Output power. Estimated mechanical power at motor shaft. Motor shaft power.
Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either direction) in full gigawatt-hours. The minimum value is zero. Energy in GWh. Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either direction) in full megawatt-hours. Whenever the counter rolls over, 01.18 Inverter GWh counter is incremented. The minimum value is zero. Energy in MWh. Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either direction) in full kilowatt-hours. Whenever the counter rolls over, 01.19 Inverter MWh counter is incremented. The minimum value is zero. Energy in kWh. Used flux reference in percent of nominal flux of motor. Flux reference. Torque that corresponds to 100% of nominal motor torque. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection. Note: This value is copied from parameter 99.12 Motor nominal torque if entered. Otherwise the value is calculated from other motor data. Nominal torque.
Current hour energy consumption. This is the energy of the last 60 minutes (not necessarily continuous) the drive has been running, not the energy of a calendar hour. If the power is cycled, after the drive is again up and running, the parameter value is set to the value it had before the power cycle. Energy.
Def/FbEq16 -
See par. 46.04 10 = 1% 10 = 1% See par. 46.04 1 = 1 GWh -
1 = 1 MWh -
10 = 1 kWh 1 = 1% -
1 = 100 unit
-
1 = 1 kWh
Parameters 183
No. 01.51
01.52
01.53
01.54 01.55 01.56 01.57 01.58
Name/Value Previous hour kWh
0.00... 1000000.00 kWh Current day kWh
0.00... 1000000.00 kWh Previous day kWh
0.00... 1000000.00 kWh Cumulative inverter energy -200000000.0... 200000000.0 kWh Inverter GWh counter (resettable)
0...65535 GWh Inverter MWh counter (resettable)
0...1000 MWh Inverter kWh counter (resettable)
0...1000 kWh Cumulative inverter energy (resettable)
-200000000.0... 200000000.0 kWh
Description
Previous hour energy consumption. The value 01.50 Current hour kWh is stored here when its values has been cumulated for 60 minutes. If the power is cycled, after the drive is again up and running, the parameter value is set to the value it had before the power cycle.
Energy.
Current day energy consumption. This is the energy of the last 24 hours (not necessarily continuous) the drive has been running, not the energy of a calendar day. If the power is cycled, after the drive is again up and running, the parameter value is set to the value it had before the power cycle.
Energy.
Previous day energy consumption. The value 01.52 Current day kWh is stored here when its value has been cumulated for 24 hours. If the power is cycled, after the drive is again up and running, the parameter value is set to the value it had before the power cycle.
Energy.
Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either direction) in full kilowatt-hours. The minimum value is zero.
Energy in kWh.
Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either direction) in full gigawatt-hours. The minimum value is zero. You can reset the value by setting it to zero. Resetting any of parameters 01.55...01.58 resets all of them.
Energy in GWh.
Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either direction) in full megawatt-hours. Whenever the counter rolls over, 01.55 Inverter GWh counter (resettable) is incremented. The minimum value is zero. You can reset the value by setting it to zero. Resetting any of parameters 01.55...01.58 resets all of them.
Energy in MWh.
Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either direction) in full kilowatt-hours. Whenever the counter rolls over, 01.56 Inverter MWh counter (resettable) is incremented. The minimum value is zero. You can reset the value by setting it to zero. Resetting any of parameters 01.55...01.58 resets all of them.
Energy in kWh.
Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either direction) in full kilowatt-hours. The minimum value is zero. You can reset the value by setting it to zero. Resetting any of parameters 01.55...01.58 resets all of them.
Energy in kWh.
Def/FbEq16 -
1 = 1 kWh -
1 = 1 kWh -
1 = 1 kWh 10 = 1 kWh -
1 = 1 GWh -
1 = 1 MWh -
10 = 1 kWh -
10 = 1 kWh
184 Parameters
No. 01.61
01.62 01.63
Name/Value
Abs motor speed used
0.00... 30000.00 rpm
Abs motor speed %
0.00...1000.00%
Abs output frequency
0.00...500.00 Hz
01.64 Abs motor torque 0.0...1600.0%
01.65 Abs output power
0.00... 32767.00 kW
01.66
Abs output power % motor nom
0.00... 300.00%
01.67 Abs output power % drive nom
0.00... 300.00%
01.68 Abs motor shaft power
0.00... 32767.00 kW or hp
03 03 Input references
03.01 03.02 03.05
Panel reference
-100000.00... 100000.00
Panel reference remote
-100000.00... 100000.00
FB A reference 1
03.06
-100000.00... 100000.00
FB A reference 2
-100000.00... 100000.00
Description Absolute value of parameter 01.01 Motor speed used.
Estimated motor speed.
Absolute value of parameter 01.03 Motor speed %. Estimated motor speed. Absolute value of parameter 01.06 Output frequency.
Estimated output frequency.
Absolute value of parameter 01.10 Motor torque. Motor torque.
Absolute value of parameter 01.14 Output power. Output power.
Absolute value of parameter 01.15 Output power % of motor nom.
Output power. Absolute value of parameter 01.16 Output power % of drive nom. Output power. Absolute value of parameter 01.17 Motor shaft power.
Motor shaft power.
Values of references received from various sources. All parameters in this group are read-only unless otherwise noted. Reference 1 given from the control panel or PC tool. Control panel or PC tool reference.
Reference 2 given from the control panel or PC tool.
Control panel or PC tool reference.
Reference 1 received through fieldbus adapter A. See also chapter Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter (page 505). Reference 1 from fieldbus adapter A.
Reference 2 received through fieldbus adapter A. Reference 2 from fieldbus adapter A.
Def/FbEq16 -
See par. 46.01 10 = 1% -
See par. 46.02 See par. 46.03 1 = 1 kW
-
1 = 1% -
1 = 1% -
1 = 1 kW
1 = 10
-
1 = 10
-
1 = 10
1 = 10
Parameters 185
No. Name/Value 03.09 EFB reference 1
03.10
-30000.00... 30000.00
EFB reference 2
-30000.00... 30000.00
0044 Warnings and faults
04.01 Tripping fault
04.02 04.03 04.06 04.07 04.08 04.11 04.12 04.13 04.16 04.17 04.18
0000h...FFFFh Active fault 2 0000h...FFFFh Active fault 3 0000h...FFFFh Active warning 1 0000h...FFFFh Active warning 2 0000h...FFFFh Active warning 3 0000h...FFFFh Latest fault 0000h...FFFFh 2nd latest fault 0000h...FFFFh 3rd latest fault 0000h...FFFFh Latest warning 0000h...FFFFh 2nd latest warning 0000h...FFFFh 3rd latest warning 0000h...FFFFh
Description Scaled reference 1 received through the embedded fieldbus interface. Scaled reference 1 received through the embedded fieldbus interface. Scaled reference 2 received through the embedded fieldbus interface. Scaled reference 2 received through the embedded fieldbus interface.
Information on warnings and faults that occurred last. For explanations of individual warning and fault codes, see chapter Fault tracing. All parameters in this group are read-only unless otherwise noted. Code of the 1st active fault (the fault that caused the current trip). 1st active fault. Code of the 2nd active fault. 2nd active fault. Code of the 3rd active fault. 3rd active fault. Code of the 1st active warning. 1st active warning. Code of the 2nd active warning. 2nd active warning. Code of the 3rd active warning. 3rd active warning. Code of the 1st stored (non-active) fault. 1st stored fault. Code of the 2nd stored (non-active) fault. 2nd stored fault. Code of the 3rd stored (non-active) fault. 3rd stored fault. Code of the 1st stored (non-active) warning. 1st stored warning. Code of the 2nd stored (non-active) warning. 2nd stored warning. Code of the 3rd stored (non-active) warning. 3rd stored warning.
Def/FbEq16 1 = 10
1 = 10
1 = 10
1 = 10
-
1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1
186 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
04.40 Event word 1
Description
Shows the user-defined event word. This word collects the status of the events (warnings, faults or pure events) selected by parameters 04.41...04.71. This parameter is read-only.
Def/FbEq16 -
Bit
Name
0
User bit 0
1
User bit 1
...
...
15
User bit 15
Description 1 = Event selected by parameter 04.41 is active 1 = Event selected by parameter 04.43 is active ... 1 = Event selected by parameter 04.71 is active
04.41
0000h...FFFFh
Event word 1 bit 0 code
04.43
0000h...FFFFh
Event word 1 bit 1 code
04.45, 04,47, 04,49, ...
04.71
0000h...FFFFh ...
Event word 1 bit 15 code
0000h...FFFFh 0055 Diagnostics
05.01 On-time counter
0...65535 d 05.02 Run-time counter
0...65535 d 05.03 Hours run
05.04
0.0... 429496729.5 h
Fan on-time counter
0...65535 d
User-defined event word. Selects the hexadecimal code of an event (warning, fault or pure event) whose status is shown as bit 0 of 04.40 Event word 1. The event codes are listed in chapter Fault tracing (page 451). Code of event. Selects the hexadecimal code of an event (warning, fault or pure event) whose status is shown as bit 1 of 04.40 Event word 1. The event codes are listed in chapter Fault tracing (page 451). Code of event. ...
Selects the hexadecimal code of an event (warning, fault or pure event) whose status is shown as bit 15 of 04.40 Event word 1. The event codes are listed in chapter Fault tracing (page 451). Code of event.
Various run-time-type counters and measurements related to drive maintenance. All parameters in this group are read-only unless otherwise noted. On-time counter. The counter runs when the drive is powered. On-time counter. Motor run-time counter in full days. The counter runs when the inverter modulates. Motor run-time counter. Corresponding parameter to 05.02 Run-time counter in hours, that is, 24 * 05.02 value + fractional part of a day. Hours.
Running time of the drive cooling fan. Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down for over 3 seconds. Cooling fan run-time counter.
1 = 1 0x2310h
1 = 1 0x3210h
1 = 1 ...
0x2330h
1 = 1
1 = 1 d 1 = 1 d 1 = 1 h 1 = 1 d
Parameters 187
No. 05.10 05.11
05.20
Name/Value Control board temperature -100... 300 �C or �F Inverter temperature
-40.0...160.0% Diagnostic word 1
Description Measured temperature of the control unit.
Control unit temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit. Estimated drive temperature in percent of fault limit. The fault limit varies according to the type of the drive. 0.0% = 0 �C (32 �F) 100.0% = Fault limit Drive temperature in percent. Diagnostic word 1. For possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing.
Def/FbEq16 1 = unit -
1 = 1% -
Bit 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10...15
Name
Any warning or fault
Any warning Any fault
Reserved
Overcurrent fault Reserved
DC overvoltage
DC undervoltage Reserved
Device overtemperature fault Reserved
Value Yes = Drive has generated a warning or tripped on a fault.
Yes = Drive has generated a warning. Yes = Drive has tripped on a fault.
Yes = Drive has tripped on fault 2310 Overcurrent.
Yes = Drive has tripped on fault 3210 DC link overvoltage. Yes = Drive has tripped on fault 3220 DC link undervoltage.
Yes = Drive has tripped on fault 4310 Excess temperature.
0000h...FFFFh 05.21 Diagnostic word 2
Diagnostic word 1.
Diagnostic word 2. For possible causes and remedies, see chapter Fault tracing.
1 = 1 -
Bit 0...9 10
11...15
Name
Reserved
Motor overtemperature fault
Reserved
Value
Yes = Drive has tripped on fault 4981 External temperature 1 and 4982 External temperature 2.
0000h...FFFFh
Diagnostic word 2.
1 = 1
188 Parameters
No. 05.22
Name/Value Diagnostic word 3
Description Diagnostic word 3.
Def/FbEq16 -
Bit 0...8 9 10 11 12...15
Name Reserved kWh pulse Reserved Fan command Reserved
Value Yes = kWh pulse is active. On = Drive fan is rotating above idle speed.
05.80
05.81 05.82 05.83 05.84 05.85 05.86 05.87 05.88
0000h...FFFFh
Diagnostic word 3.
Motor speed at fault Shows the value of copy of parameter 28.01 Frequency ref ramp input (in scalar control mode) or 23.01 Speed ref ramp
input (in speed control mode) at the occurrence of the latest fault.
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Estimated motor speed.
Output frequency at Shows the value of copy of parameter 01.06 Output
fault
frequency at the occurrence of the latest fault.
-500.00...500.00 Hz Estimated output frequency.
DC voltage at fault Shows the value of copy of parameter 01.11 DC voltage at the occurrence of the latest fault.
0.00...2000.00 V DC link voltage.
Motor current at fault
Shows the value of copy of parameter 01.07 Motor current at the occurrence of the latest fault.
0.00...30000.00 A Motor current.
Motor torque at fault Shows the value of copy of parameter 01.10 Motor torque at the occurrence of the latest fault.
-1600.0...1600.0 % Motor torque.
Main status word at Shows the value of copy of parameter 06.11 Main status word
fault
at the occurrence of the latest fault.
0000h...FFFFh
Main status word.
DI delayed status at Shows the value of copy of parameter 10.02 DI delayed
fault
status at the occurrence of the latest fault.
0000h...FFFFh
Delayed status for digital inputs.
Inverter
Shows the value of copy of parameter 05.11 Inverter
temperature at fault temperature at the occurrence of the latest fault.
-40...160 �C
Drive temperature in �C.
Reference used at fault
Shows the value of copy of parameter 28.01 Frequency ref ramp input (in scalar control mode) or 23.01 Speed ref ramp
input (in speed control mode) at the occurrence of the latest fault.
-30000.00... 30000.00 Hz
Frequency or speed reference.
1 = 1 -
10 = 1 rpm -
10 = 1 V 10 = 1 V 1 = 1 % 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 �C -
1 = 1 Hz
Parameters 189
No. Name/Value
0066 Control and status words
06.01 Main control word
Description Drive control and status words.
Def/FbEq16
Shows the control signals as received from the selected
-
sources (such as digital inputs, the fieldbus interfaces and the
application program).
The main control word of the drive.
For the bit descriptions see page 511. The related status word
and state diagram are presented on pages 513 and 514
respectively.
Note: When using fieldbus control, this parameter value is
not same as Control word value that drive receives from PLC.
For the exact value, see parameter 50.12 FBA A debug
mode.
This parameter is read-only.
Bit
Name
0
Off1 control
1
Off2 control
2
Off3 control
3
Run
4
Ramp out zero
5
Ramp hold
6
Ramp in zero
7
Reset
8
Inching 1
9
Inching 2
10
Remote cmd
11
Ext ctrl loc
12
User bit 0
13
User bit 1
14
User bit 2
15
User bit 3
0000h...FFFFh
Main control word.
1 = 1
190 Parameters
No. 06.11
Name/Value Main status word
Description
Main status word of the drive. For the bit descriptions see page 513. The related control word and state diagram are presented on pages 511 and 514 respectively. Note: When using fieldbus control, this parameter value is not same as Status word value that drive sends to PLC. For the exact value, see parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode. This parameter is read-only.
Def/FbEq16 -
Bit
Name
0
Ready to switch ON
1
Ready run
2
Ready ref
3
Tripped
4
Off 2 inactive
5
Off 3 inactive
6
Switch-on inhibited
7
Warning
8
At setpoint
9
Remote
10
Above limit
11
User bit 0
12
User bit 1
13
User bit 2
14
User bit 3
15
Reserved
0000h...FFFFh
Main status word.
1 = 1
Parameters 191
No. 06.16
Name/Value Drive status word 1
Description
Drive status word 1. This parameter is read-only.
Def/FbEq16 -
Bit
Name
Description
0
Enabled
1 = Both run enable (see par. 20.12) and start enable (20.19) signals are present.
Note: This bit is not affected by the presence of a fault.
1
Inhibited
1 = Start inhibited. To start the drive, the inhibiting signal (see par. 06.18) must be removed and the start signal cycled.
2
DC charged
1 = DC circuit has been charged
3
Ready to start 1 = Drive is ready to receive a start command
4
Following
reference
1 = Drive is ready to follow given reference
5
Started
1 = Drive has been started
6
Modulating
1 = Drive is modulating (output stage is being controlled)
7
Limiting
1 = Any operating limit (speed, torque, etc.) is active
8
Local control
1 = Drive is in local control
9
Network control 1 = Drive is in network control (see page 17).
10
Ext1 active
1 = Control location EXT1 active
11
Ext2 active
1 = Control location EXT2 active
12
Reserved
13
Start request
1 = Start requested. 0 = When Enable to rotate signal (see par.
20.22) is 0 (rotating of the motor is disabled).
14
Running
1 = Drive is running.
15
Reserved
0000h...FFFFh
Drive status word 1.
1 = 1
192 Parameters
No. 06.17
Name/Value Drive status word 2
Description
Drive status word 2. This parameter is read-only.
Def/FbEq16 -
Bit
Name
Description
0
Identification run done 1 = Motor identification (ID) run has been performed
1
Magnetized
1 = The motor has been magnetized
2
Torque control
1 = Torque control mode active
3
Speed control
1 = Speed control mode active
4
Reserved
5
Safe reference active 1 = A "safe" reference is applied by functions such as
parameters 49.05 and 50.02
6
Last speed active
1 = A "last speed" reference is applied by functions such as
parameters 49.05 and 50.02
7
Reserved
8
Emergency stop failed 1 = Emergency stop failed (see parameters 31.32 and 31.33)
9
Jogging active
1 = Jogging enable signal is on
10
Above limit
1 = Actual speed or frequency equals or exceeds limit
(defined by parameters 46.31...46.32). Valid in both directions of
rotation.
11...12 Reserved
13
Start delay active
1 = Start delay (par. 21.22) active.
14...15 Reserved
0000h...FFFFh
Drive status word 2.
1 = 1
Parameters 193
No. 06.18
Name/Value
Start inhibit status word
Description
Start inhibit status word. This word specifies the source of the inhibiting signal that is preventing the drive from starting. The conditions marked with an asterisk (*) only require that the start command is cycled. In all other instances, the inhibiting condition must be removed first. See also parameter 06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 1. This parameter is read-only.
Def/FbEq16 -
Bit
Name
Description
0
Not ready run
1 = DC voltage is missing or drive has not been parametrized correctly. Check the parameters in groups 95 and 99.
1
Ctrl location changed * 1 = Control location has changed
2
SSW inhibit
1 = Control program is keeping itself in inhibited state
3
Fault reset
* 1 = A fault has been reset
4
Lost start enable
1 = Start enable signal missing
5
Lost run enable
1 = Run enable signal missing
6
Reserved
7
STO
1 = Safe torque off function active
8
Current calibration * 1 = Current calibration routine has finished
ended
9
ID run ended
* 1 = Motor identification run has finished
10
Reserved
11
Em Off1
1 = Emergency stop signal (mode off1)
12
Em Off2
1 = Emergency stop signal (mode off2)
13
Em Off3
1 = Emergency stop signal (mode off3)
14
Auto reset inhibit
1 = The autoreset function is inhibiting operation
15
Jogging active
1 = The jogging enable signal is inhibiting operation
06.19
0000h...FFFFh
Speed control status word
Start inhibit status word.
Speed control status word. This parameter is read-only.
1 = 1 -
Bit
Name
0
Zero speed
1
Forward
2 3...6 7 8...15
Reverse
Reserved Any constant speed request Reserved
Description 1 = Drive has been running below zero speed limit (par. 21.06) for a time defined by parameter 21.07 Zero speed delay 1 = Drive is running in forward direction above zero speed limit (par. 21.06) 1 = Drive is running in reverse direction above zero speed limit (par. 21.06)
1 = A constant speed or frequency has been selected; see par. 06.20.
0000h...FFFFh
Speed control status word.
1 = 1
194 Parameters
No. 06.20
Name/Value
Constant speed status word
Description
Constant speed/frequency status word. Indicates which constant speed or frequency is active (if any). See also parameter 06.19 Speed control status word, bit 7, and section Constant speeds/frequencies (page 122). This parameter is read-only.
Def/FbEq16 -
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7...15
Name Constant speed 1 Constant speed 2 Constant speed 3 Constant speed 4 Constant speed 5 Constant speed 6 Constant speed 7 Reserved
Description 1 = Constant speed or frequency 1 selected 1 = Constant speed or frequency 2 selected 1 = Constant speed or frequency 3 selected 1 = Constant speed or frequency 4 selected 1 = Constant speed or frequency 5 selected 1 = Constant speed or frequency 6 selected 1 = Constant speed or frequency 7 selected
06.21
0000h...FFFFh Drive status word 3
Constant speed/frequency status word.
Drive status word 3. This parameter is read-only.
1 = 1 -
Bit 0 1
2
3
4 5 6...15
Name
Description
DC hold active 1 = DC hold is active
Post-magnetizing 1 = Post-magnetizing is active active
Motor pre-heating 1 = Motor pre-heating is active active
PM smooth start 1 = PM smooth start active active
Reserved
DC brake active 1 = brake is active
Reserved
06.29 06.30
0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh MSW bit 10 selection False True Above limit Other [bit] MSW bit 11 selection False True Ext ctrl loc Other [bit]
Drive status word 1.
1 = 1
Start inhibit status word.
1 = 1
Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit 10 Above limit (User bit 0) of 06.11 Main status word.
0.
0
1.
1
Bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 191).
2
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit 11 Ext ctrl loc (User bit 0) of 06.11 Main status word.
0.
0
1.
1
Bit 11 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 190).
2
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Parameters 195
No. 06.31
Name/Value MSW bit 12 selection False True Ext run enable
Other [bit] 06.32 MSW bit 13
selection False True Other [bit] 06.33 MSW bit 14 selection False True Other [bit] 0077 System info
07.03 07.04 07.05 07.06
07.07
07.11
07.25
Drive rating id
Firmware name
Firmware version
Loading package name
Loading package version
Cpu usage
0...100%
Customization package name
07.26 Customization package version
Description
Def/FbEq16
Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit 12 Ext run
(User bit 1) of 06.11 Main status word.
enable
0.
0
1.
1
Status of the external run enable signal (see parameter 20.12 2 Run enable 1 source).
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit 13 False (User bit 2) of 06.11 Main status word.
0.
0
1.
1
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit 14 False (User bit 3) of 06.11 Main status word.
0.
0
1.
1
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Drive hardware and firmware information. All parameters in this group are read-only.
Type of the drive. (Rating ID in brackets.)
-
Firmware identification.
-
Version number of the firmware.
-
Name of the firmware loading package.
-
Version number of the firmware loading package.
-
Microprocessor load in percent.
-
Microprocessor load.
1 = 1%
First five ASCII letters of the name given to the customization -
package. The full name is visible in the System info menu under the Main menu on the control panel or the Drive composer PC tool. _N/A_ = None.
Customization package version number. Also visible in the -
System info menu under the Main menu on the control panel or the Drive composer PC
tool.
196 Parameters
No. 07.30
Name/Value
Adaptive program status
Description
Shows the status of the adaptive program. See section Adaptive programming (page 115).
Def/FbEq16 -
Bit 0 1 2 3 4...13 14 15
Name Initialized Editing Edit done Running Reserved State changing Faulted
Description 1 = Adaptive program initialized 1 = Adaptive program is being edited 1 = Editing of adaptive program finished 1 = Adaptive program running
1 = State change in progress in adaptive programming engine 1 = Error in adaptive program
07.31 07.35
0000h...FFFFh AP sequence state
0...20 Drive configuration
Adaptive program status.
Shows the number of the active state of the sequence program part of the adaptive program (AP). If adaptive programming is not running, or it does not contain a sequence program, the parameter is zero.
Performs HW initialization, and shows the detected option module configuration of the drive. Plug `n' play configuration during the HW initialization, if the drive is not able to detect any option module, the value is set to 1, Base unit. For information on automatic setting of parameters after detecting a module, see section Automatic drive configuration for fieldbus control on page 518.
1 = 1
1 = 1 0000h
Bit
Name
Description
0
Not initialized 1 = Drive configuration has not been initialized
1
Base unit
1 = Drive has not detected any option modules.
2
Reserved
3
FENA-21
1 = FENA-21 Two-port Ethernet adapter module included
4
FECA-01
1 = FECA-01 EtherCAT adapter module included
5
FPBA-01
1 = FPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP adapter module included
6
FCAN-01
1 = FCAN-01 CANopen adapter module included
7
Reserved
8
BIO-01
1 = Frontal I/O extension
9
RIIO-01
1 = Frontal standard I/O extension
10
FSCA-01
1 = FSCA-01 Modbus/RTU adapter module included
11
FEIP-21
1 = FEIP-21 Two-port EtherNet/IP adapter module included
12
FMBT-21
1 = FMBT-21 Two-port Modbus/TCP adapter module included
13
Reserved
14
FPNO-21
1 = FPNO-21 Two-port PROFINET IO adapter module included
15
FEPL-02
1 = FEPL-02 Ethernet POWERLINK adapter module included
07.36
000h...FFFh
Drive configuration 2
Drive configuration
Shows the detected module configuration. See parameter 07.35 Drive configuration.
1 = 1 0000h
Parameters 197
No. Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8...15
Name Reserved FDNA-01 FCNA-01 CMOD-01 CMOD-02 CPTC-02 CHDI-01 FSPS-21 Reserved
Description
1 = FDNA-01 DeviceNetTM adapter module included 1 = FCNA-01 ControlNetTM adapter module included 1 = CMOD-01 adapter module included 1 = CMOD-02 adapter module included 1 = CPTC-02 adapter module included 1 = CHDI-01 adapter module included 1 = FSPS-21 adapter module included
0000h...FFFFh 1100 Standard DI, RO 10.01 DI status
Drive configuration
Configuration of digital inputs and relay outputs. Displays the status of digital inputs DI1...DI6. This parameter is read-only.
1 = 1 -
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6...15
Name DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved
Description 1 = Digital input 1 is ON. 1 = Digital input 2 is ON. 1 = Digital input 3 is ON. 1 = Digital input 4 is ON. 1 = Digital input 5 is ON. 1 = Digital input 6 is ON.
0000h...FFFFh 10.02 DI delayed status
Status for digital inputs.
Displays the status of digital inputs DI1...DI6. Bits 0...5 reflect the delayed status of DI1...DI6. Example: 0000000000010011b = DI5, DI2 and DI1 are on, DI3, DI4 and DI6 are off. This word is updated only after a 2 ms activation/deactivation delay. When the value of a digital input changes, it must remain the same in two consecutive samples, that is for 2 ms, for the new value to be accepted.
This parameter is read-only.
1 = 1 -
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6...15
Name DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved
Description 1 = Digital input 1 is ON. 1 = Digital input 2 is ON. 1 = Digital input 3 is ON. 1 = Digital input 4 is ON. 1 = Digital input 5 is ON. 1 = Digital input 6 is ON.
0000h...FFFFh
Delayed status for digital inputs.
1 = 1
198 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
10.03 DI force selection
Description
The electrical statuses of the digital inputs can be overridden for e.g. testing purposes. A bit in parameter 10.04 DI forced data is provided for each digital input, and its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1.
Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections (parameters 10.03 and 10.04).
Def/FbEq16 0000h
Bit Name Value
0
DI1 1 = Force DI1 to value of bit 0 of parameter 10.04 DI forced data. (0 = Normal mode)
1
DI2 1 = Force DI2 to value of bit 1 of parameter 10.04 DI forced data. (0 = Normal mode)
2
DI3 1 = Force DI3 to value of bit 2 of parameter 10.04 DI forced data. (0 = Normal mode)
3
DI4 1 = Force DI4 to value of bit 3 of parameter 10.04 DI forced data. (0 = Normal mode)
4
DI5 1 = Force DI5 to value of bit 4 of parameter 10.04 DI forced data. (0 = Normal mode)
5
DI6 1 = Force DI6 to value of bit 5 of parameter 10.04 DI forced data. (0 = Normal mode)
6...15 Reserved
0000h...FFFFh 10.04 DI forced data
Override selection for digital inputs.
Allows the data value of a forced digital input to be changed from 0 to 1. It is only possible to force an input that has been selected in parameter 10.03 DI force selection.
1 = 1 0000h
Bit Name Value
0
DI1 Force the value of this bit to D1, if so defined in parameter 10.03 DI force selection.
1
DI2 Force the value of this bit to D3, if so defined in parameter 10.03 DI force selection.
2
DI3 Force the value of this bit to D3, if so defined in parameter 10.03 DI force selection.
3
DI4 Force the value of this bit to D4, if so defined in parameter 10.03 DI force selection.
4
DI5 Force the value of this bit to D5, if so defined in parameter 10.03 DI force selection.
5
DI6 Force the value of this bit to D6, if so defined in parameter 10.03 DI force selection.
6...15 Reserved
0000h...FFFFh 10.05 DI1 ON delay
Forced values of digital inputs. Defines the activation delay for digital input DI1.
*DI status
**Delayed DI status
10.06
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 10.05 DI1 ON delay tOff = 10.06 DI1 OFF delay *Electrical status of digital input. Indicated by 10.01 DI status. **Indicated by 10.02 DI delayed status.
0.00 ... 3000.00 s Activation delay for DI1.
DI1 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI1. See parameter 10.05 DI1 ON delay.
0.00 ... 3000.00 s Deactivation delay for DI1.
1 = 1 0.00 s
1 0 1 0 Time
10 = 1 s 0.00 s 10 = 1 s
Parameters 199
No. Name/Value 10.07 DI2 ON delay
Description Defines the activation delay for digital input DI2.
*DI status
**Delayed DI status
10.08 10.09
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 10.07 DI2 ON delay tOff = 10.08 DI2 OFF delay *Electrical status of digital input. Indicated by 10.01 DI status. **Indicated by 10.02 DI delayed status.
0.00 ... 3000.00 s Activation delay for DI2.
DI2 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI2. See parameter 10.07 DI2 ON delay.
0.00 ... 3000.00 s Deactivation delay for DI2.
DI3 ON delay
Defines the activation delay for digital input DI3.
*DI status
**Delayed DI status
10.10
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 10.09 DI3 ON delay tOff = 10.10 DI3 OFF delay *Electrical status of digital input. Indicated by 10.01 DI status. **Indicated by 10.02 DI delayed status.
0.00 ... 3000.00 s Activation delay for DI3.
DI3 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI3. See parameter 10.09 DI3 ON delay.
0.00 ... 3000.00 s Deactivation delay for DI3.
Def/FbEq16 0.00 s
1 0 1 0 Time
10 = 1 s 0.00 s 10 = 1 s 0.00 s
1 0 1 0 Time
10 = 1 s 0.00 s 10 = 1 s
200 Parameters
No. 10.11
Name/Value DI4 ON delay
Description Defines the activation delay for digital input DI4.
*DI status
**Delayed DI status
10.12 10.13
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 10.11 DI4 ON delay tOff = 10.12 DI4 OFF delay *Electrical status of digital input. Indicated by 10.01 DI status. **Indicated by 10.02 DI delayed status.
0.00 ... 3000.00 s Activation delay for DI4.
DI4 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI4. See parameter 10.11 DI4 ON delay.
0.00 ... 3000.00 s Deactivation delay for DI4.
DI5 ON delay
Defines the activation delay for digital input DI5.
*DI status
**Delayed DI status
10.14
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 10.13 DI5 ON delay tOff = 10.14 DI5 OFF delay *Electrical status of digital input. Indicated by 10.01 DI status. **Indicated by 10.02 DI delayed status.
0.00 ... 3000.00 s Activation delay for DI5.
DI5 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI5. See parameter 10.13 DI5 ON delay.
0.00 ... 3000.00 s Deactivation delay for DI5.
Def/FbEq16 0.00 s
1 0 1 0 Time
10 = 1 s 0.00 s 10 = 1 s 0.00 s
1 0 1 0 Time
10 = 1 s 0.00 s 10 = 1 s
Parameters 201
No. Name/Value 10.15 DI6 ON delay
Description Defines the activation delay for digital input DI6.
*DI status
**Delayed DI status
10.16 10.21
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 10.15 DI6 ON delay tOff = 10.16 DI6 OFF delay *Electrical status of digital input. Indicated by 10.01 DI status. **Indicated by 10.02 DI delayed status.
0.00 ... 3000.00 s Activation delay for DI6.
DI6 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for digital input DI6. See parameter 10.15 DI6 ON delay.
0.00 ... 3000.00 s Deactivation delay for DI6.
RO status
Status of relay outputs RO3...RO1.
Bit 0 1 2 3...15
Name Value RO1 1 = energized, 0 = de-energized. RO2 1 = energized, 0 = de-energized RO3 1 = energized, 0 = de-energized Reserved
Def/FbEq16 0.00 s
1 0 1 0 Time
10 = 1 s 0.00 s 10 = 1 s -
10.22
0000h...FFFFh RO force selection
Status of relay outputs.
The signals connected to the relay outputs can be overridden for e.g. testing purposes. A bit in parameter 10.23 RO forced data is provided for each relay output, and its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1. Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections (parameters 10.22 and 10.23).
1 = 1 0000h
Bit Name Value
0
RO1 1 = Force RO1 to value of bit 0 of parameter 10.23 RO forced data. (0 = Normal mode)
1
RO2 1 = Force RO2 to value of bit 1 of parameter 10.23 RO forced data. (0 = Normal mode)
2
RO3 1 = Force RO3 to value of bit 2 of parameter 10.23 RO forced data. (0 = Normal mode)
3...15 Reserved
0000h...FFFFh
Override selection for relay outputs.
1 = 1
202 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
10.23 RO forced data
Description
Contains the values of relay outputs that are used instead of the connected signals if selected in parameter 10.22 RO force selection. Bit 0 is the forced value for RO1.
Def/FbEq16
Bit Name Value
0
RO1
Force the value of this bit to RO1, if so defined in parameter 10.22 RO force selection.
1
RO2
Force the value of this bit to RO2, if so defined in parameter 10.22 RO force selection.
2
RO3
Force the value of this bit to RO3, if so defined in parameter 10.22 RO force selection.
3...15 Reserved
10.24
0000h...FFFFh RO1 source Not energized Energized Ready run Enabled Started Magnetized Running Ready ref At setpoint Reverse Zero speed Above limit Warning Fault Fault (-1) Fault/Warning
Overcurrent Overvoltage Drive temp
Undervoltage Motor temp
Brake command Ext2 active Remote control Reserved
Forced RO values. Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO1. Output is not energized. Output is energized. Bit 1 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190). Bit 0 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 191). Bit 5 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 191). Bit 1 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 191). Bit 6 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 191). Bit 2 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190). Bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190). Bit 2 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 192). Bit 0 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 192). Bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 191). Bit 7 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190). Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190). Inverted bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190). Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word OR bit 7 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190). Fault 2310 Overcurrent has occurred. Fault 3210 DC link overvoltage has occurred. Fault 2381 IGBT overload or 4110 Control board temperature or 4210 IGBT overtemperature or 4290 Cooling or 42F1 IGBT temperature or 4310 Excess temperature or 4380 Excess temperature difference has occurred. Fault 3220 DC link undervoltage has occurred. Fault 4981 External temperature 1 or 4982 External temperature 2 has occurred. Bit 0 of 44.01 Brake control status (see page 352). Bit 11 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 191). Bit 9 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190).
1 = 1 Ready run 0 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19
20 21
22 23 24 25...26
Parameters 203
No. Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
27
Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
28
Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
29
Reserved
30...32
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
33
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
34
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
35
Reserved
36...38
Start delay
Bit 13 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 191).
39
RO/DIO control
Bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 204).
40
word bit0
RO/DIO control
Bit 1 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 204).
41
word bit1
RO/DIO control
Bit 2 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 204).
42
word bit2
Reserved
43...44
PFC1
Bit 0 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380).
45
PFC2
Bit 1 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380).
46
PFC3
Bit 2 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380).
47
PFC4
Bit 3 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380).
48
PFC5
Bit 3 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380).
49
PFC6
Bit 3 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380).
50
User load curve
Bit 3 (Outside load limit) of 37.01 ULC output status word (see 61 page 329).
RO/DIO control word
For 10.24 RO1 source: Bit 0 (RO1) of 10.99 RO/DIO control 62 word (see page 204).
For 10.27 RO2 source: Bit 1 (RO2) of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 204).
For 10.30 RO3 source: Bit 2 (RO3) of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 204).
Event word 1
Event word 1 = 1 if any bit of 04.40 Event word 1 (see page 53 186) is 1, that is, if any warning, fault or pure event that has been defined with parameters 04.41...04.71 is on.
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
204 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
10.25 RO1 ON delay
Description Defines the activation delay for relay output RO1.
Def/FbEq16 0.0 s
Status of selected source
RO status
10.26 10.27 10.28
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 10.25 RO1 ON delay tOff = 10.26 RO1 OFF delay
0.0 ... 3000.0 s
Activation delay for RO1.
RO1 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO1. See parameter 10.25 RO1 ON delay.
0.0 ... 3000.0 s
Deactivation delay for RO1.
RO2 source
Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO2.
For the available selections, see parameter 10.24 RO1 source.
RO2 ON delay
Defines the activation delay for relay output RO2.
1 0 1 0 Time
10 = 1 s 0.0 s 10 = 1 s Running
0.0 s
Status of selected source
RO status
10.29 10.30
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 10.28 RO2 ON delay tOff = 10.29 RO2 OFF delay
0.0 ... 3000.0 s
Activation delay for RO2.
RO2 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO2. See parameter 10.28 RO2 ON delay.
0.0 ... 3000.0 s
Deactivation delay for RO2.
RO3 source
Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO3.
For the available selections, see parameter 10.24 RO1 source.
1 0 1 0 Time
10 = 1 s 0.0 s 10 = 1 s Fault (-1)
Parameters 205
No. Name/Value 10.31 RO3 ON delay
Description Defines the activation delay for relay output RO3.
Def/FbEq16 0.0 s
10.32 10.99
1 Status of selected
source 0
1
RO status 0
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOn = 10.31 RO3 ON delay tOff = 10.32 RO3 OFF delay
0.0 ... 3000.0 s
Activation delay for RO3.
Time tOff
10 = 1 s
RO3 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO3. See parameter 10.31 RO3 ON delay.
0.0 s
0.0 ... 3000.0 s
Deactivation delay for RO3.
10 = 1 s
RO/DIO control word
Storage parameter for controlling the relay outputs e.g. through the embedded fieldbus interface. To control the relay outputs (RO) of the drive, send a control word with the bit
assignments shown below as Modbus I/O data. Set the target selection parameter of that particular data (58.101...58.114) to RO/DIO control word. In the source selection parameter of
the desired output, select the appropriate bit of this word.
0000h
Bit 0 1 2 3...15
Name RO1 RO2 RO3 Reserved
Description
Source bits for relay outputs RO1...RO3. See parameters 10.24, 10.27 and 10.30.
10.101 10.102 10.103
0000h...FFFFh RO1 toggle counter
0...4294967000 RO2 toggle counter
0...4294967000 RO3 toggle counter
0...4294967000
RO/DIO control word.
Displays the number of times relay output RO1 has changed states. Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down for over 3 seconds.
State change count.
Displays the number of times relay output RO2 has changed states. Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down for over 3 seconds.
State change count.
Displays the number of times relay output RO3 has changed states. Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down for over 3 seconds.
State change count.
1 = 1 -
1 = 1 -
1 = 1 -
1 = 1
206 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
1111 Standard DIO, FI, FO
11.02 DIO delayed status
Description
Configuration of the frequency input.
Displays the status of digital or frequency output DIO1 (terminal DO1 on BIO-01). Bit 0 reflects the delayed status of DIO1. Example: 0000000000000001b = DIO1 is on. This word is updated only after a 2 ms activation/deactivation delay. When the value of a digital input changes, it must remain the same in two consecutive samples, that is for 2 ms, for the new value to be accepted. This parameter is read-only.
Def/FbEq16 -
Bit 0 1...15
Name DIO1 Reserved
Description 1 = Digital or frequency output DIO1 is ON.
11.03
0000h...FFFFh DIO force selection
Delayed status for digital or frequency output DIO1.
The signal connected to the digital output can be overridden for example, testing purposes. A bit in parameter 11.04 DIO force data is provided for digital or frequency output DIO1 (terminal DO1 on BIO-01), and its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1. Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections (parameters 10.22 and 10.23).
1 = 1 0000h
Bit 0 1...15
Value 1 = Force DIO1 to value of bit 0 of parameter 11.04 DIO force data. (0 = Normal mode) Reserved
11.04
0000h...FFFFh DIO force data
Override selection for digital or frequency output DIO1.
Contains the value of for digital or frequency output DIO1 (terminal DO1 on BIO-01) that is used instead of the connected signals if selected in parameter 11.04 DIO force data. Bit 0 is the forced value for DIO1.
1 = 1 0000h
Bit 0 1...15
Value 1 = Force the value of this bit to DIO1, if so defined in parameter 11.04 DIO force data. Reserved
11.05 11.06
0000h...FFFFh DIO1 configuration
Digital output Frequency output DIO1 output source
Not energized
Forced value of digital or frequency output DIO1.
Selects whether output DIO1 (terminal DO1 on BIO-01) is used as a digital output or frequency output.
DIO1 is used as a digital output.
DIO1 is used as a frequency output.
Selects a drive signal to be connected to output DIO1 (terminal DO1 on BIO-01) when it is configured to digital output by parameter 11.06 DIO1 configuration.
Output is not energized.
1 = 1 Digital output
0 2 Not energized
0
Parameters 207
No. Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Energized
Output is energized.
1
Ready run
Bit 1 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190).
2
Enabled
Bit 0 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 191).
4
Started
Bit 5 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 191).
5
Magnetized
Bit 1 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 191).
6
Running
Bit 6 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 191).
7
Ready ref
Bit 2 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190).
8
At setpoint
Bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190).
9
Reverse
Bit 2 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 192).
10
Zero speed
Bit 0 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 192).
11
Above limit
Bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 191).
12
Warning
Bit 7 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190).
13
Fault
Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190).
14
Fault (-1)
Inverted bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190).
15
Fault/Warning
Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word OR bit 7 of 06.11 Main status 16 word (see page 190).
Overcurrent
Fault has occurred.
17
Overvoltage
Fault has occurred.
18
Drive temp
Fault , , , , , or has occurred.
19
Undervoltage
Fault has occurred.
20
Motor temp
Fault or has occurred.
21
Reserved
22
Ext2 active
Bit 11 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 191).
23
Remote control
Bit 9 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190).
24
Reserved
25...26
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
27
Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
28
Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
29
Reserved
30...32
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
33
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
34
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
35
Reserved
36...38
Start delay
Bit 13 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 191).
39
RO/DIO control
Bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 204).
40
word bit0
RO/DIO control
Bit 1 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 204).
41
word bit1
RO/DIO control
Bit 2 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 204).
42
word bit2
Reserved
43...44
PFC1
Bit 0 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380).
45
208 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
PFC2
PFC3
PFC4
PFC5
PFC6
Reserved
Event word 1
Description Bit 1 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380). Bit 2 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380). Bit 3 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380). Bit 4 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380). Bit 5 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380).
Event word 1 = 1 if any bit of 04.40 Event word 1 (see page 186) is 1, that is, if any warning, fault or pure event that has been defined with parameters 04.41...04.71 is on.
Def/FbEq16 46 47 48 48 48 49...52 53
No. Name/Value Damper control
Description See the figure below.
Drive started
Parameters 209
Def/FbEq16 54
Start/stop command (Group20 Start/stop/directio n)
Start interlock signal
Relay
deenergized
Relay energized
Damper open
Damper control
relay status (Group10 Standard DI, RO)
Damper closed
Damper opening time
Damper closed Damper status
Damper
closing time
Run permissive signal from the damper end
switch when the damper is fully opened.
User load curve
Acceleration
time (par 23.12)
Drive coasts to a stop
Motor status
Bit 3 (Outside load limit) of 37.01 ULC output status word (see 61 page 329).
210 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
RO/DIO control word
11.07
Other [bit] DIO1 ON delay
11.08
0.0...3000.0 s DIO1 OFF delay
11.17 11.21 11.38
0.0...3000.0 s DI4 configuration Digital input Frequency input DI5 configuration Digital input Frequency input Freq in 1 actual value
11.39
0 ... 16000 Hz
Freq in 1 scaled value
-32768.000... 32767.000
Description
Def/FbEq16
For 10.24 RO1 source: Bit 0 (RO1) of 10.99 RO/DIO control 62 word (see page 204).
For 10.27 RO2 source: Bit 1 (RO2) of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 204).
For 10.30 RO3 source: Bit 2 (RO3) of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 204).
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Defines the activation delay for DO1 on BIO-01 when it is used as a digital output.
0.00 s
Activation delay for DO1.
10 = 1 s
Defines the deactivation delay for DO1 on BIO-01 when it is 0.00 s used as a digital output.
Deactivation delay for DO1.
10 = 1 s
Selects how digital input 4 is used.
Digital input
DI4 is used as a digital input.
0
DI4 is used as a frequency input 1.
1
Selects how digital input 5 is used.
Digital input
DI5 is used as a digital input.
0
DI5 is used as a frequency input.
1
Displays the value of frequency input 1 (via DI5 when it is
-
used as a frequency input) before scaling. See parameter
11.42 Freq in 1 min.
This parameter is read-only.
Unscaled value of frequency input 1.
1 = 1 Hz
Displays the value of frequency input 1 (via DI5 when it is
-
used as a frequency input) after scaling. See parameter 11.42
Freq in 1 min.
This parameter is read-only.
Scaled value of frequency input 1 (DI5).
1 = 1
Parameters 211
No. 11.42
Name/Value Freq in 1 min
Description
Defines the minimum for the frequency actually arriving at frequency input 1 (DI5 when it is used as a frequency input). The incoming frequency signal (11.38 Freq in 1 actual value) is scaled into an internal signal (11.39 Freq in 1 scaled value) by parameters 11.42...11.45 as follows:
11.39
Def/FbEq16 0 Hz
11.45
11.44
11.42
11.43
fin (11.38)
11.43 11.44 11.45
0 ... 16000 Hz Freq in 1 max
0 ... 16000 Hz Freq in 1 at scaled min
-32768.000... 32767.000 Freq in 1 at scaled max
-32768.000... 32767.000
Minimum frequency of frequency input 1 (DI5).
1 = 1 Hz
Defines the maximum for the frequency actually arriving at frequency input 1 (DI5 when it is used as a frequency input).
See parameter 11.42 Freq in 1 min.v
16000 Hz
Maximum frequency for frequency input 1 (DI5).
1 = 1 Hz
Defines the value that is required to correspond internally to 0.000 the minimum input frequency defined by parameter 11.42 Freq in 1 min. See diagram at parameter 11.42 Freq in 1 min.
Value corresponding to minimum of frequency input 1.
1 = 1
Defines the value that is required to correspond internally to 50.00 the maximum input frequency defined by parameter 11.43 Freq in 1 max. See diagram at parameter 11.42 Freq in 1 min.
Value corresponding to maximum of frequency input 1.
1 = 1
212 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
1122 Standard AI
12.02 AI force selection
Description
Def/FbEq16
Configuration of standard analog inputs.
The true readings of the analog inputs can be overridden for e.g. testing purposes. A forced value parameter is provided for each analog input, and its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1.
Note: AI filter times (parameters 12.16 AI1 filter time and 12.26 AI2 filter time) have no effect on forced AI values (parameters 12.13 AI1 forced value and 12.23 AI2 forced value). Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections (parameters 12.02 and 12.03).
0000h
Bit 0 1 2...15
Name Value
AI1
1 = Force AI1 to value of parameter 12.13 AI1 forced value.
AI2
1 = Force AI2 to value of parameter 12.23 AI2 forced value.
Reserved
12.03
0000h...FFFFh
AI supervision function
No action Fault Warning Last speed
Speed ref safe
Forced values selector for analog inputs AI1 and AI2.
1 = 1
Selects how the drive reacts when an analog input signal moves out of the minimum and/or maximum limits specified for the input.
The supervision applies a margin of 0.5 V or 1.0 mA to the limits. For example, if the maximum limit for the input is 7.000 V, the maximum limit supervision activates at 7.500 V.
The inputs and the limits to be observed are selected by parameter 12.04 AI supervision selection.
No action
No action taken.
0
Drive trips on 80A0 AI supervision.
1
Drive generates an A8A0 AI supervision warning.
2
Drive generates a warning (A8A0 AI supervision) and freezes 3 the speed (or frequency) to the level the drive was operating at. The speed/frequency is determined on the basis of actual speed using 850 ms low-pass filtering.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.
Drive generates a warning (A8A0 AI supervision) and sets the 4 speed to the speed defined by parameter 22.41 Speed ref safe (or 28.41 Frequency ref safe when frequency reference is being used).
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.
Parameters 213
No. 12.04
Name/Value
AI supervision selection
Description
Specifies the analog input limits to be supervised. See parameter 12.03 AI supervision function.
Bit 0 1 2 3 4...15
Name AI1 < MIN AI1 > MAX AI2 < MIN AI2 > MAX Reserved
Description 1 = Minimum limit supervision of AI1 active. 1 = Maximum limit supervision of AI1 active. 1 = Minimum limit supervision of AI2 active. 1 = Maximum limit supervision of AI2 active.
Def/FbEq16 0000h
12.11 12.12 12.13 12.15
0000h...FFFFh AI1 actual value
0.000...22.000 mA or 0.000...11.000 V AI1 scaled value
-32768.000... 32767.000 AI1 forced value
0.000...22.000 mA or 0.000...11.000 V AI1 unit selection
V mA
Activation of analog input supervision. Displays the value of analog input AI1 in mA or V (depending on whether the input is set to current or voltage with parameter 12.15 AI1 unit selection). This parameter is read-only. Value of analog input AI1.
Displays the value of analog input AI1 after scaling. See parameters 12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min and 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max. This parameter is read-only. Scaled value of analog input AI1.
Forced value that can be used instead of the true reading of the input. See parameter 12.02 AI force selection. Forced value of analog input AI1.
Selects the unit for readings and settings related to analog input AI1. Volts. Milliamperes.
1 = 1 -
1000 = 1 unit -
1 = 1 1000 = 1 unit V 2 10
214 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
12.16 AI1 filter time
Description Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI1.
%
Unfiltered signal
100
63
Filtered signal
Def/FbEq16 0.100 s
t T
O = I � (1 - e-t/T)
I = filter input (step) O = filter output t = time T = filter time constant
12.17 12.18
0.000...30.000 s AI1 min
0.000...22.000 mA or 0.000...11.000 V AI1 max
0.000...22.000 mA or 0.000...11.000 V
Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware (approximately 0.25 ms time constant). This cannot be changed by any parameter.
Filter time constant.
Defines the minimum site value for analog input AI1. Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog signal from plant is wound to its minimum setting. See also parameter 12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min.
Minimum value of AI1.
Defines the maximum site value for analog input AI1. Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog signal from plant is wound to its maximum setting. See also parameter 12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min.
Maximum value of AI1.
1000 = 1 s 4.000 mA or 0.000 V
1000 = 1 unit 20.000 mA or 10.000 V
1000 = 1 unit
Parameters 215
No. 12.19
Name/Value
AI1 scaled at AI1 min
Description
Defines the real internal value that corresponds to the minimum analog input AI1 value defined by parameter 12.17 AI1 min. (Changing the polarity settings of 12.19 and 12.20 can effectively invert the analog input.)
AIscaled (12.12)
Def/FbEq16 0.000
12.20
12.17
12.18
AIin (12.11)
12.19
12.20 12.21 12.22 12.23 12.25 12.26
-32768.000... 32767.000 AI1 scaled at AI1 max
-32768.000... 32767.000 AI2 actual value
0.000...22.000 mA or 0.000...11.000 V AI2 scaled value
-32768.000... 32767.000 AI2 forced value
0.000...20.000 mA or 0.000...10.000 V AI2 unit selection
V mA AI2 filter time
0.000...30.000 s
Real value corresponding to minimum AI1 value.
Defines the real internal value that corresponds to the maximum analog input AI1 value defined by parameter 12.18 AI1 max. See the drawing at parameter 12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min. Real value corresponding to maximum AI1 value.
Displays the value of analog input AI2 in mA or V (depending on whether the input is set to current or voltage with parameter 12.25 AI2 unit selection). This parameter is read-only. Value of analog input AI2.
Displays the value of analog input AI2 after scaling. See parameters 12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min and 12.101 AI1 percent value. This parameter is read-only. Scaled value of analog input AI2.
Forced value that can be used instead of the true reading of the input. See parameter 12.02 AI force selection. Forced value of analog input AI2.
Selects the unit for readings and settings related to analog input AI2. Volts. Milliamperes. Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI2. See parameter 12.16 AI1 filter time. Filter time constant.
1 = 1 50.000
1 = 1 -
1000 = 1 unit -
1 = 1 1000 = 1 unit mA 2 10 0.100 s 1000 = 1 s
216 Parameters
No. 12.27
12.28
12.29
Name/Value AI2 min
0.000...22.000 mA or 0.000...11.000 V AI2 max
0.000...22.000 mA or 0.000...11.000 V AI2 scaled at AI2 min
Description Defines the minimum site value for analog input AI2. Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog signal from plant is wound to its minimum setting. Minimum value of AI2.
Defines the maximum site value for analog input AI2. Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog signal from plant is wound to its maximum setting. Maximum value of AI2.
Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum analog input AI2 value defined by parameter 12.27 AI2 min. (Changing the polarity settings of 12.29 and 12.101 can effectively invert the analog input.)
AIscaled (12.22)
Def/FbEq16 4.000 mA or 0.000 V
1000 = 1 unit
20.000 mA or 10.000 V
1000 = 1 unit
0.000
12.101
12.27
12.28
AIin (12.21)
12.29
12.30
-32768.000... 32767.000
AI2 scaled at AI2 max
12.101
-32768.000... 32767.000
AI1 percent value
0.00...100.00% 12.102 AI2 percent value
0.00...100.00%
Real value corresponding to minimum AI2 value.
1 = 1
Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum
50.000
analog input AI2 value defined by parameter 12.28 AI2 max.
See the drawing at parameter of 12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min.
Real value corresponding to maximum AI2 value.
1 = 1
Value of analog input AI1 in percent of AI1 scaling (12.18 AI1 max - 12.17 AI1 min).
AI1 value
Value of analog input AI2 in percent of AI2 scaling (12.28 AI2 max - 12.27 AI2 min).
AI2 value
-
100 = 1% -
100 = 1%
Parameters 217
No. Name/Value 1133 Standard AO 13.02 AO force selection
Description
Configuration of standard analog outputs.
The source signals of the analog outputs can be overridden for e.g. testing purposes. A forced value parameter is provided for each analog output, and its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1. Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections (parameters 13.02 and 13.11).
Def/FbEq16 0000h
Bit Name Value
0
AO1 1 = Force AO1 to value of parameter 13.13 AO1 forced value. (0 = Normal mode)
1
AO2 1 = Force AO2 to value of parameter 13.23 AO2 forced value. (0 = Normal mode)
2...15 Reserved
13.11 13.12
0000h...FFFFh
Forced values selector for analog outputs AO1 and AO2.
AO1 actual value
Displays the value of AO1 in mA or V (depending on whether the input is set to current or voltage with parameter 13.15 AO1 unit selection).
This parameter is read-only.
0.000...22.000 mA / Value of AO1. 0.000...11.000 V
AO1 source
Selects a signal to be connected to analog output AO1.
Zero Motor speed used Reserved Output frequency Motor current Motor current % of motor nominal Motor torque DC voltage Output power Reserved Speed ref ramp in Speed ref ramp out Speed ref used Reserved Freq ref used Reserved Process PID out Reserved Temp sensor 1 excitation
None. 01.01 Motor speed used (page 181).
01.06 Output frequency (page 181). 01.07 Motor current (page 181). 01.08 Motor current % of motor nom (page 181).
01.10 Motor torque (page 181). 01.11 DC voltage (page 181). 01.14 Output power (page 182).
23.01 Speed ref ramp input (page 256). 23.02 Speed ref ramp output (page 256). 24.01 Used speed reference (page 260).
28.02 Frequency ref ramp output (page 271).
40.01 Process PID output actual (page 332).
The output is used to feed an excitation current to the temperature sensor 1, see parameter 35.11 Temperature 1 source. See also section Motor thermal protection (page 160).
1 = 1 -
1 = 1 mA
Output frequency 0 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17...19 20
218 Parameters
No.
13.13 13.15 13.16
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Temp sensor 2 excitation
The output is used to feed an excitation current to the
21
temperature sensor 2, see parameter 35.21 Temperature 2
source. See also section Motor thermal protection (page
160).
Reserved
21...25
Abs motor speed 01.61 Abs motor speed used (page 184).
26
used
Abs motor speed % 01.62 Abs motor speed % (page 184).
27
Abs output
01.63 Abs output frequency (page 184).
28
frequency
Reserved
29
Abs motor torque 01.64 Abs motor torque (page 184).
30
Abs output power 01.65 Abs output power (page 184).
31
Abs motor shaft
01.68 Abs motor shaft power (page 184).
32
power
External PID1 out 71.01 External PID act value ((page 378).
33
Reserved
34...36
AO1 data storage 13.91 AO1 data storage (page 221).
37
AO2 data storage 13.92 AO2 data storage (page 221).
38
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
AO1 forced value
Forced value that can be used instead of the selected output 0.000 mA signal. See parameter 13.02 AO force selection.
0.000...22.000 mA / Forced value for AO1. 0.000...11.000 V
1 = 1 unit
AO1 unit selection Selects the unit for readings and settings related to analog mA input AO1.
V
Volts.
2
mA
Milliamperes.
10
AO1 filter time
Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO1.
0.100 s
%
Unfiltered signal
100
63
Filtered signal
T O = I � (1 - e-t/T)
I = filter input (step) O = filter output t = time T = filter time constant
0.000 ... 30.000 s Filter time constant.
t 1000 = 1 s
Parameters 219
No. Name/Value 13.17 AO1 source min
Description
Defines the real minimum value of the signal (selected by parameter 13.12 AO1 source) that corresponds to the minimum required AO1 output value (defined by parameter 13.19 AO1 out at AO1 src min).
Def/FbEq16 0.0
IAO1 (mA)
13.20
13.19
13.17
13.18
Signal (real)
selected by 13.12
Programming 13.17 as the maximum value and 13.18 as the minimum value inverts the output.
IAO1 (mA) 13.20
13.19
13.18
13.17
Signal (real)
selected by 13.12
220 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
AO has automatic scaling. Every time the source for the AO is changed, the scaling range is changed accordingly. User given minimum and maximum values override the automatic values.
13.12 AO1 source, 13.22 AO2 source
13.17 AO1 source min, 13.27 AO2 source min
13.18 AO1 source max, 13.28 AO2 source max
0 Zero
N/A (Output is constant zero.)
1 Motor speed used
0
46.01 Speed scaling
3 Output frequency
0
46.02 Frequency scaling
4 Motor current
0
30.17 Maximum current
5 Motor current % of motor 0% nominal
100%
6 Motor torque
0
46.03 Torque scaling
7 DC voltage
Min. value of 01.11 DC voltage
Max. value of 01.11 DC voltage
8 Output power
0
46.04 Power scaling
10 Speed ref ramp in
0
46.01 Speed scaling
11 Speed ref ramp out
0
46.01 Speed scaling
12 Speed ref used
0
46.01 Speed scaling
14 Freq ref used
0
46.02 Frequency scaling
16 Process PID out
Min. value of 40.01 Process Max. value of 40.01 Process
PID output actual
PID output actual
20 Temp sensor 1 excitation 21 Temp sensor 2 excitation
N/A (Analog output is not scaled; it is determined by the sensor's triggering voltage.)
26 Abs motor speed used
0
46.01 Speed scaling
27 Abs motor speed %
0
46.01 Speed scaling
28 Abs output frequency
0
46.02 Frequency scaling
30 Abs motor torque
0
46.03 Torque scaling
31 Abs output power
0
46.04 Power scaling
32 Abs motor shaft power
0
46.04 Power scaling
33 External PID1 out
Min. value of 71.01 External Max. value of 71.01 External
PID act value
PID act value
Other
Min. value of the selected parameter
Max. value of the selected parameter
13.18
13.19 13.20
-32768.0...32767.0 Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO1 output value.
AO1 source max
Defines the real maximum value of the signal (selected by parameter 13.12 AO1 source) that corresponds to the
maximum required AO1 output value (defined by parameter 13.20 AO1 out at AO1 src max). See parameter 13.17 AO1 source min.
-32768.0...32767.0 Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO1 output value.
AO1 out at AO1 src Defines the minimum output value for analog output AO1.
min
See also drawing at parameter 13.17 AO1 source min.
0.000...22.000 mA / Minimum AO1 output value. 0.000...11.000 V
AO1 out at AO1 src Defines the maximum output value for analog output AO1.
max
See also drawing at parameter 13.17 AO1 source min.
0.000...22.000 mA / Maximum AO1 output value. 0.000...11.000 V
1 = 1 50.0
1 = 1 0.000 mA 1000 = 1 unit 20.000 mA 1000 = 1 unit
Parameters 221
No. 13.21 13.22
13.23 13.26 13.27
Name/Value
Description
AO2 actual value
Displays the value of AO2 in mA. This parameter is read-only.
0.000 ... 22.000 mA Value of AO2.
AO2 source
Selects a signal to be connected to analog output AO2. Alternatively, sets the output to excitation mode to feed a constant current to a temperature sensor.
For the selections, see parameter 13.12 AO1 source.
AO2 forced value
Forced value that can be used instead of the selected output signal. See parameter 13.02 AO force selection.
0.000 ... 22.000 mA Forced value for AO2.
AO2 filter time
Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO2. See parameter 13.16 AO1 filter time.
0.000 ... 30.000 s Filter time constant.
AO2 source min
Defines the real minimum value of the signal (selected by parameter 13.22 AO2 source) that corresponds to the minimum required AO2 output value (defined by parameter
13.29 AO2 out at AO2 src min). See parameter 13.17 AO1 source min about the AO automatic scaling.
Def/FbEq16 -
1000 = 1 mA Motor current
0.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA 0.100 s 1000 = 1 s 0.0
IAO2 (mA)
13.30
13.29
13.27
13.28
Signal (real)
selected by 13.22
Programming 13.27 as the maximum value and 13.28 as the minimum value inverts the output.
IAO2 (mA) 13.30
13.29
13.28
13.27
Signal (real)
selected by 13.22
-32768.0...32767.0 Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO2 output value.
1 = 1
222 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
13.28 AO2 source max
Defines the real maximum value of the signal (selected by
parameter 13.22 AO2 source) that corresponds to the maximum required AO2 output value (defined by parameter 13.30 AO2 out at AO2 src max). See parameter 13.27 AO2
source min. See parameter 13.17 AO1 source min about the AO automatic scaling.
-32768.0...32767.0 Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO2 output value.
13.29 AO2 out at AO2 src Defines the minimum output value for analog output AO2.
min
See also drawing at parameter 13.27 AO2 source min.
0.000 ... 22.000 mA Minimum AO2 output value.
13.30 AO2 out at AO2 src Defines the maximum output value for analog output AO2.
max
See also drawing at parameter 13.27 AO2 source min.
0.000 ... 22.000 mA Maximum AO2 output value.
13.91 AO1 data storage
Storage parameter for controlling analog output AO1, for example, through the embedded fieldbus interface.
In parameter 13.12 AO1 source, select AO1 data storage. Then set this parameter as the target of the incoming value data. With the embedded fieldbus interface, simply set the target selection parameter of that particular data (58.101...58.114) to AO1 data storage.
-327.68...327.67 Storage parameter for AO1.
13.92 AO2 data storage
Storage parameter for controlling analog output AO2, for example, through the embedded fieldbus interface.
In parameter 13.22 AO2 source, select AO2 data storage. Then set this parameter as the target of the incoming value data. With the embedded fieldbus interface, simply set the target selection parameter of that particular data (58.101...58.114) to AO2 data storage.
-327.68...327.67 Storage parameter for AO2.
15 15 I/O extension module
Configuration of the I/O extension module installed in slot 2.
See also section Programmable I/O extensions (page 120). Note: The contents of the parameter group vary according to the selected I/O extension module type.
15.01
Extension module type
Activates (and specifies the type of) I/O extension module. If the value is None, when an extension module has been installed and the drive is powered, the drive automatically
sets the value to the type it has detected (= value of parameter 15.02 Detected extension module); otherwise warning A7AB Extension I/O configuration failure is
generated and you have to set the value of this parameter manually.
None
Inactive.
BREL
External relay option BREL-01.
BAPO-01
Auxiliary power extension module option BAPO-01.
15.02 Detected extension I/O extension module detected on the drive. module
None
Inactive.
BREL
External relay option BREL-01.
BAPO-01
Auxiliary power extension module option BAPO-01.
Def/FbEq16 3.2
1 = 1 4.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA 20.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA 0.00
100 = 1 0.00
100 = 1
None
0 5 6 None 0 5 6
Parameters 223
No. Name/Value 15.04 RO status
Description
Displays the status of the relay outputs RO4 and RO75 and digital output DO1 on the extension module. Bits 0...1 indicates the status of RO4...RO7. Example: 100101b = RO4 is on, RO5 is off. This parameter is read-only.
Def/FbEq16 -
Bit 0 1 2 3 4...15
Name RO4 RO5 RO6 RO7 Reserved
Description 1 = Relay output 4 is ON. 1 = Relay output 5 is ON 1 = Relay output 6 is ON 1 = Relay output 7 is ON
15.05
0000h...FFFFh RO force selection
Status of relay/digital outputs.
The electrical statuses of the relay/digital outputs can be overridden for e.g. testing purposes. A bit in parameter 15.06 RO forced data is provided for each relay or digital output, and its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1. Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections (parameters 15.05 and 15.06).
1 = 1 0000h
Bit 0 1 2 3 4...15
Name Value RO4 1 = Force RO4 to value of bit 0 of parameter 15.06 RO forced data. RO5 1 = Force RO5 to value of bit 1 of parameter 15.06 RO forced data. RO6 1 = Force RO6 to value of bit 2 of parameter 15.06 RO forced data. RO7 1 = Force RO7 to value of bit 3 of parameter 15.06 RO forced data. Reserved
0000h...FFFFh
Override selection for relay/digital outputs.
1 = 1
224 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
15.06 RO forced data
Description
Allows the data value of a forced relay or digital output to be changed from 0 to 3. It is only possible to force an output that has been selected in parameter 15.05 RO force selection. Bits 0...3 are the forced values for RO4...RO7.
Def/FbEq16 0000h
Bit
Name
0
RO4
1
RO5
2
RO6
3
RO7
4...15 Reserved
Description
Force the value of this bit to RO4, if so defined in parameter 15.05 RO force selection.
Force the value of this bit to RO5, if so defined in parameter 15.05 RO force selection.
Force the value of this bit to RO6, if so defined in parameter 15.05 RO force selection.
Force the value of this bit to RO7, if so defined in parameter 15.05 RO force selection.
0000h...FFFFh 15.07 RO4 source
Not energized Energized Ready run Reserved Enabled Started Magnetized Running Ready ref At setpoint Reverse Zero speed Above limit Warning Fault Fault (-1) Fault/Warning
Overcurrent Overvoltage Drive temp
Undervoltage
Forced values of relay/digital outputs. Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO4.
Output is not energized. Output is energized. Bit 1 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190).
Bit 0 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 191). Bit 5 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 191). Bit 1 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 191). Bit 6 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 191). Bit 2 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190). Bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190). Bit 2 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 192). Bit 0 of 06.19 Speed control status word (see page 192). Bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 191). Bit 7 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190). Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190). Inverted bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190). Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word OR bit 7 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190). Fault 2310 Overcurrent has occurred. Fault 3210 DC link overvoltage has occurred. Fault 2381 IGBT overload or 4110 Control board temperature or 4210 IGBT overtemperature or 4290 Cooling or 42F1 IGBT temperature or 4310 Excess temperature or 4380 Excess temperature difference has occurred. Fault 3220 DC link undervoltage has occurred.
1 = 1 Not energized 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19
20
Parameters 225
No. Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Motor temp
Fault 4981 External temperature 1 or 4982 External
21
temperature 2 has occurred.
Brake command Bit 0 of 44.01 Brake control status (see page 352).
22
Ext2 active
Bit 11 of 06.16 Drive status word 1 (see page 191).
23
Remote control
Bit 9 of 06.11 Main status word (see page 190).
24
Reserved
25...26
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
27
Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
28
Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
29
Reserved
30...32
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
33
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
34
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
35
Reserved
36...38
Start delay
Bit 13 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 (see page 191).
39
RO/DIO control
Bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 204).
40
word bit0
RO/DIO control
Bit 1 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 204).
41
word bit1
RO/DIO control
Bit 2 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 204).
42
word bit2
Reserved
43...44
PFC1
Bit 0 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380).
45
PFC2
Bit 1 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380).
46
PFC3
Bit 2 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380).
47
PFC4
Bit 3 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380).
48
PFC5
Bit 4 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380).
49
PFC6
Bit 5 of 76.01 PFC status (see page 380).
50
Reserved
51...52
Event word 1
Event word 1 = 1 if any bit of 04.40 Event word 1 (see page 53 186) is 1, that is, if any warning, fault or pure event that has been defined with parameters 04.41...04.71 is on.
User load curve
Bit 3 (Outside load limit) of 37.01 ULC output status word (see 61 page 329).
RO/DIO control word
For 15.07 RO4 source: Bit 3 (RO4) of 10.99 RO/DIO control 62 word (see page 204).
For 15.10 RO5 source: Bit 4 (RO5) of 10.99 RO/DIO control word (see page 204).
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
226 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
15.08 RO4 ON delay
Description Defines the activation delay for relay output RO4.
Def/FbEq16 0.0 s
Status of selected source
RO status
15.09 15.10 15.11
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 15.08 RO4 ON delay tOff = 15.09 RO4 OFF delay
0.0 ... 3000.0 s
Activation delay for RO4.
RO4 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO4. See parameter 15.08 RO4 ON delay.
0.0 ... 3000.0 s
Deactivation delay for RO4.
RO5 source
Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO5.
For the available selections, see parameter 15.07 RO4 source.
RO5 ON delay
Defines the activation delay for relay output RO5.
1 0 1 0 Time
10 = 1 s 0.0 s 10 = 1 s Not energized
0.0 s
Status of selected source
RO status
15.12 15.13
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 15.11 RO5 ON delay tOff = 15.12 RO5 OFF delay
0.0 ... 3000.0 s
Activation delay for RO5.
RO5 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO5. See parameter 15.11 RO5 ON delay.
0.0 ... 3000.0 s
Deactivation delay for RO5.
RO6 source
Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO6.
For the available selections, see parameter 15.07 RO4 source.
1 0 1 0 Time
10 = 1 s 0.0 s 10 = 1 s Not energized
Parameters 227
No. Name/Value 15.14 RO6 ON delay
Description Defines the activation delay for relay output RO6.
Def/FbEq16 0.0 s
Status of selected source
RO status
15.15 15.16 15.17
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 15.11 RO5 ON delay tOff = 15.12 RO5 OFF delay
0.0 ... 3000.0 s
Activation delay for RO6.
RO6 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO6. See parameter 15.11 RO5 ON delay.
0.0 ... 3000.0 s
Deactivation delay for RO6.
RO7 source
Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO7.
For the available selections, see parameter 15.07 RO4 source.
RO7 ON delay
Defines the activation delay for relay output RO7.
1 0 1 0 Time
10 = 1 s 0.0 s 10 = 1 s Not energized
0.0 s
Status of selected source
RO status
tOn
tOff
tOn
tOff
tOn = 15.11 RO5 ON delay tOff = 15.12 RO5 OFF delay
0.0 ... 3000.0 s
Activation delay for RO7.
15.18 RO7 OFF delay
Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO7. See parameter 15.11 RO5 ON delay.
0.0 ... 3000.0 s
Deactivation delay for RO7.
1199 Operation mode
Selection of local and external control location sources and operating modes.
See also section Operating modes of the drive (page 110).
19.01 Actual operation mode
Displays the operating mode currently used. See parameter 19.1119.14. This parameter is read-only.
Zero
None.
Speed
Speed control (in vector motor control mode).
Torque
Torque control (in vector motor control mode).
1 0 1 0 Time
10 = 1 s 0.0 s 10 = 1 s
Scalar (Hz)
1 2 3
228 Parameters
No. 19.11
19.12
Name/Value Min
Max
Add
Reserved Scalar (Hz) Forced magn. Ext1/Ext2 selection
EXT1 EXT2 FBA A MCW bit 11 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Reserved Supervision 1 Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Reserved EFB MCW bit 11
FBA A connection loss EFB connection loss Other [bit] Ext1 control mode
Zero
Description
Def/FbEq16
The torque selector is comparing the output of the speed
4
controller (25.01 Torque reference speed control) and torque
reference (26.74 Torque ref ramp out) and the smaller of the
two is used (in vector motor control mode).
The torque selector is comparing the output of the speed
5
controller (25.01 Torque reference speed control) and torque
reference (26.74 Torque ref ramp out) and the greater of the
two is used (in vector motor control mode).
The speed controller output is added to the torque reference 6 (in vector motor control mode).
7...9
Frequency control in scalar motor control mode.
10
Motor is in magnetizing mode.
20
Selects the source for external control location EXT1/EXT2 selection.
0 = EXT1 1 = EXT2
EXT1
EXT1 (permanently selected).
0
EXT2 (permanently selected).
1
Control word bit 11 received through fieldbus interface A.
2
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
3
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
4
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
5
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
6
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
7
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
8
9...18
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
19
Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
20
Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
21
22...24
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
25
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
26
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
27
28...31
Control word bit 11 received through the embedded fieldbus 32 interface.
Detected communication loss of fieldbus interface A changes 33 control mode to EXT2.
Detected communication loss of embedded fieldbus interface 34 changes control mode to EXT2.
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Selects the operating mode for external control location EXT1 Speed in vector motor control mode.
None.
1
Parameters 229
No. Name/Value Speed Torque Minimum
Maximum
19.14 Ext2 control mode 19.16 Local control mode
Speed Torque 19.17 Local control disable No Yes 20 20 Start/stop/direction
20.01 Ext1 commands
Not selected
Description
Def/FbEq16
Speed control. The torque reference used is 25.01 Torque 2
reference speed control (output of the speed reference chain).
Torque control. The torque reference used is 26.74 Torque ref 3 ramp out (output of the torque reference chain).
Combination of selections Speed and Torque: the torque
4
selector compares the speed controller output (25.01 Torque
reference speed control) and the torque reference (26.74
Torque ref ramp out) and selects the smaller of the two.
If speed error becomes negative, the drive follows the speed
controller output until speed error becomes positive again.
This prevents the drive from accelerating uncontrollably if the
load is lost in torque control.
Combination of selections Speed and Torque: the torque
5
selector compares the speed controller output (25.01 Torque
reference speed control) and the torque reference (26.74
Torque ref ramp out) and selects the greater of the two.
If speed error becomes positive, the drive follows the speed
controller output until speed error becomes negative again.
This prevents the drive from accelerating uncontrollably if the
load is lost in torque control.
Selects the operating mode for external control location EXT2 Speed in vector motor control mode.
For the selections, see parameter 19.12 Ext1 control mode.
Selects the operating mode for local control in vector motor Speed control mode.
Speed control. The torque reference used is 25.01 Torque 0 reference speed control (output of the speed reference chain).
Torque control. The torque reference used is 26.74 Torque ref 1 ramp out (output of the torque reference chain).
Enables/disables local control (start and stop buttons on the No control panel, and the local controls on the PC tool).
WARNING! Before disabling local control, ensure that the control panel is not needed for stopping the drive.
Local control enabled.
0
Local control disabled.
1
Start/stop/direction and run/start/jog enable signal source selection; positive/negative reference enable signal source selection. For information on control locations, see section Local control vs. external control (page 105).
Selects the source of start, stop and direction commands for external control location 1 (EXT1). See parameter 20.21 for the determination of the actual direction. See also parameters 20.02...20.05.
No start or stop command sources selected.
In1 Start; In2 Dir
0
230 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
In1 Start
Description
The source of the start and stop commands is selected by parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 source. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
Def/FbEq16 1
State of source 1 (20.03) 0 -> 1 (20.02 = Edge) 1 (20.02 = Level)
0
Command Start Stop
In1 Start; In2 Dir
The source selected by 20.03 Ext1 in1 source is the start
2
signal; the source selected by 20.04 Ext1 in2 source
determines the direction. The state transitions of the source
bits are interpreted as follows:
State of source 1 (20.03)
0
0 -> 1 (20.02 = Edge) 1 (20.02 = Level)
State of source 2 (20.04) Any
0
1
Command
Stop Start forward Start reverse
In1 Start fwd; In2 Start rev
The source selected by 20.03 Ext1 in1 source is the forward 3
start signal; the source selected by 20.04 Ext1 in2 source is the reverse start signal. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
State of source 1 (20.03) 0
0 -> 1 (20.02 = Edge) 1 (20.02 = Level)
0
1
State of source 2 (20.04)
0
Command Stop
0
Start forward
0 -> 1 (20.02 = Edge) 1 (20.02 = Level)
Start reverse
1
Stop
In1P Start; In2 Stop The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by 4 parameters 20.03 Ext1 in1 source and 20.04 Ext1 in2 source. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as
follows:
State of source 1 (20.03)
0 -> 1
Any
State of source 2 (20.04)
1
0
Command
Start Stop
Notes:
� Parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type has no effect with this setting.
� When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on the control panel are disabled.
Parameters 231
No. Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
In1P Start; In2 Stop; The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by 5
In3 Dir
parameters 20.03 Ext1 in1 source and 20.04 Ext1 in2 source.
The source selected by 20.05 Ext1 in3 source determines the
direction. The state transitions of the source bits are
interpreted as follows:
State of source 1 (20.03)
0 -> 1
0 -> 1
Any
State of source 2 (20.04)
1
1
0
State of source 3 (20.05)
0
1
Any
Command
Start forward Start reverse
Stop
Notes: � Parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type has no effect with
this setting.
� When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on the control panel are disabled.
In1P Start fwd; In2P The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by 6 Start rev; In3 Stop parameters 20.03 Ext1 in1 source, 20.04 Ext1 in2 source and
20.05 Ext1 in3 source. The source selected by 20.05 Ext1 in3 source determines the stop. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
State of source 1 (20.03)
0 -> 1
Any
Any
State of source 2 (20.04)
Any 0 -> 1
Any
State of source 3 (20.05)
1
1
0
Command
Start forward Start reverse
Stop
20.02 20.03
Reserved Control panel Fieldbus A
Reserved Embedded fieldbus
Ext1 start trigger type
Edge Level Ext1 in1 source Always off Always on
Note: Parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type has no effect with this setting.
The start and stop commands are taken from the control panel (or PC connected to the panel connector). The start and stop commands are taken from fieldbus adapter A. Note: Set also 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type to Level.
The start and stop commands are taken from the embedded fieldbus interface. Note: Set also 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type to Level. Defines whether the start signal for external control location EXT1 is edge-triggered or level-triggered. Note: This parameter is not effective if a pulse-type start signal is selected. See the descriptions of the selections of parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands. The start signal is edge-triggered. The start signal is level-triggered. Selects source 1 for parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands. Always off. Always on.
7...10 11 12
13 14
Level
0 1 DI1 0 1
232 Parameters
No. 20.04
Name/Value DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Reserved Supervision 1 Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Other [bit] Ext1 in2 source
20.05 Ext1 in3 source
20.06 Ext2 commands
Not selected In1 Start
In1 Start; In2 Dir
Description
Def/FbEq16
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
8...17
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
18
Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
19
Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
20
21...23
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
24
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
25
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
26
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Selects source 2 for parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands.
DI2
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1
source.
Selects source 3 for parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands.
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 source.
Always off
Selects the source of start, stop and direction commands for external control location 2 (EXT2).
See parameter 20.21 for the determination of the actual direction. See also parameters 20.07...20.10.
Not selected
No start or stop command sources selected.
0
The source of the start and stop commands is selected by 1
parameter 20.08 Ext2 in1 source. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
State of source 1 (20.08) 0 -> 1 (20.07 = Edge) 1 (20.07 = Level) 0
Command Start Stop
The source selected by 20.08 Ext2 in1 source is the start
2
signal; the source selected by 20.09 Ext2 in2 source
determines the direction. The state transitions of the source
bits are interpreted as follows:
State of source 1 (20.08)
0
0 -> 1 (20.07 = Edge) 1 (20.07 = Level)
State of source 2 (20.09)
Any
0 1
Command
Stop Start forward Start reverse
Parameters 233
No. Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
In1 Start fwd; In2 Start rev
The source selected by 20.08 Ext2 in1 source is the forward 3
start signal; the source selected by 20.09 Ext2 in2 source is the reverse start signal. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
State of source 1 (20.08) 0
0 -> 1 (20.07 = Edge) 1 (20.07 = Level)
0
1
State of source 2 (20.09)
0
Command Stop
0
Start forward
0 -> 1 (20.07 = Edge) 1 (20.07 = Level)
Start reverse
1
Stop
In1P Start; In2 Stop The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by 4
parameters 20.08 Ext2 in1 source and 20.09 Ext2 in2 source. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
State of source 1 (20.08)
0 -> 1
Any
State of source 2 (20.09)
1
0
Command
Start Stop
Notes:
� Parameter 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type has no effect with this setting.
� When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on the control panel are disabled.
In1P Start; In2 Stop; The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by 5
In3 Dir
parameters 20.08 Ext2 in1 source and 20.09 Ext2 in2 source.
The source selected by 20.10 Ext2 in3 source determines the
direction. The state transitions of the source bits are
interpreted as follows:
State of source 1 (20.08)
0 -> 1
0 -> 1
Any
State of source 2 (20.09)
1
1
0
State of source 3 (20.10)
0
1
Any
Command
Start forward Start reverse
Stop
Notes:
� Parameter 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type has no effect with this setting.
� When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on the control panel are disabled.
234 Parameters
No.
20.07 20.08 20.09 20.10 20.11
Name/Value
In1P Start fwd; In2P Start rev; In3 Stop
Description
The sources of the start and stop commands are selected by parameters 20.08 Ext2 in1 source, 20.09 Ext2 in2 source and 20.10 Ext2 in3 source. The source selected by 20.10 Ext2 in3 source determines the direction. The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
Def/FbEq16 6
State of source 1 (20.08)
0 -> 1
Any
Any
State of source 2 (20.09)
Any 0 -> 1
Any
State of source 3 (20.10)
1
1
0
Command
Start forward Start reverse
Stop
Reserved Control panel Fieldbus A
Reserved Embedded fieldbus
Ext2 start trigger type
Edge Level Ext2 in1 source
Ext2 in2 source
Ext2 in3 source
Run enable stop mode
Coast
Ramp Torque limit
Note: Parameter 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type has no effect with this setting.
7...10
The start and stop commands are taken from the control
11
panel (or PC connected to the panel connector).
The start and stop commands are taken from fieldbus adapter 12 A.
Note: Set also 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type to Level.
13
The start and stop commands are taken from the embedded 14 fieldbus interface.
Note: Set also 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type to Level.
Defines whether the start signal for external control location EXT2 is edge-triggered or level-triggered.
Note: This parameter is not effective if a pulse-type start signal is selected. See the descriptions of the selections of parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands.
Level
The start signal is edge-triggered.
0
The start signal is level-triggered.
1
Selects source 1 for parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands.
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 source.
Always off
Selects source 2 for parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands.
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 source.
Always off
Selects source 3 for parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands.
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 source.
Always off
Selects the way the motor is stopped when the run enable signal switches off.
The source of the run enable signal is selected by parameter 20.12 Run enable 1 source.
Coast
Stop by switching off the output semiconductors of the drive. 0 The motor coasts to a stop.
WARNING! If a mechanical brake is used, ensure it is safe to stop the drive by coasting.
Stop along the active deceleration ramp. See parameter
1
group 23 Speed reference ramp on page 256.
Stop according to torque limits (parameters 30.19 and 30.20). 2
Parameters 235
No. 20.12
Name/Value
Run enable 1 source
Not selected Selected DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Reserved Supervision 1 Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Reserved FBA A MCW bit 3 Reserved EFB MCW bit 3
20.19
Other [bit]
Enable start command
Not selected Selected DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved Timed function 1
Description
Def/FbEq16
Selects the source of the external run enable signal. If the run enable signal is switched off, the drive will not start. If already running, the drive will stop according to the setting of parameter 20.11 Run enable stop mode.
1 = Run enable signal on.
See also parameter 20.19 Enable start command.
Selected
0.
0
1.
1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
8...17
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
18
Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
19
Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
20
21...23
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
24
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
25
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
26
27...29
Control word bit 3 received through fieldbus interface A.
30
31
Control word bit 3 received through the embedded fieldbus 31 interface.
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Selects the source for the start enable signal.
1 = Start enable.
With the signal switched off, any drive start command is inhibited. (Switching the signal off while the drive is running will not stop the drive.)
See also parameter 20.12 Run enable 1 source.
Selected
0.
0
1.
1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
8...17
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
18
236 Parameters
No. 20.21
Name/Value Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Reserved Supervision 1 Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Other [bit] Direction
Description
Def/FbEq16
Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
19
Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
20
21...23
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
24
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
25
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
26
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Reference direction lock. Defines the direction of the drive rather than the sign of the reference, except in some cases.
In the table the actual drive rotation is shown as a function of parameter 20.21 Direction and Direction command (from parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands or 20.06 Ext2 commands).
Request
Direction command = Forward
Direction command = Reverse
Direction command not defined
Par. 20.21 Direction = Forward Forward
Forward
Forward
Par. 20.21 Direction = Reverse
Reverse
Reverse
Reverse
Par. 20.21
Direction = Request
Forward, but
� If reference from Constant, Motor potentiometer, PID, Last, Jogging or Panel reference, reference used as is.
� If reference from the network, reference used as is.
Reverse, but
� If reference from Constant, PID or Jogging reference, reference used as is.
� If reference from the network, reference, reference multiplied by -1.
Forward
Request
Forward Reverse
In external control the direction is selected by a direction
0
command (parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands or 20.06 Ext2
commands).
If the reference comes from Constant (constant
speeds/frequencies), Motor potentiometer, PID, Speed ref
safe, Last speed reference, Jogging speed or Panel
reference, the reference is used as is.
If the reference comes from a fieldbus:
� if the direction command is forward, the reference is used
as is
� if the direction command is reverse, the reference is
multiplied by -1.
Motor rotates forward regardless of the sign of the external 1
reference. (Negative reference values are replaced by zero. Positive reference values are used as is.)
Motor rotates reverse regardless of the sign of the external 2 reference. (Negative reference values are replaced by zero.
Positive reference values are multiplied by -1.)
Parameters 237
No. Name/Value 20.22 Enable to rotate
20.25
Not selected Selected DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Reserved Supervision 1 Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Other [bit] Jogging enable
Not selected Selected DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved
Description
Def/FbEq16
Setting this parameter to 0 stops motor rotating but does not affect any other conditions for rotating. Setting the parameter back to 1 starts motor rotating again.
This parameter can be used for example with a signal from some external equipment to prevent the motor rotating before the equipment is ready.
When this parameter is 0 (rotating of the motor is disabled), bit 13 of parameter 06.16 Drive status word 1 is set to 0.
Selected
0 (always off).
0
1 (always on).
1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
8...17
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
18
Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
19
Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
20
21...23
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
24
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
25
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
26
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Selects the source for a jog enable signal.
(The sources for jogging activation signals are selected by parameters 20.26 Jogging 1 start source and 20.27 Jogging 2 start source.)
1 = Jogging is enabled. 0 = Jogging is disabled.
Notes:
� Jogging is supported in vector control mode only.
� Jogging can be enabled only when no start command from an external control location is active. On the other hand, if jogging is already enabled, the drive cannot be started from an external control location (apart from inching commands through fieldbus).
Not selected
0.
0
1.
1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
8...17
238 Parameters
No. 20.26
Name/Value Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Reserved Supervision 1 Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Other [bit] Jogging 1 start source
Not selected Selected DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Reserved Supervision 1 Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Other [bit]
Description
Def/FbEq16
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
18
Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
19
Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
20
21...23
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
24
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
25
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
26
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
If enabled by parameter 20.25 Jogging enable, selects the source for the activation of jogging function 1. (Jogging function 1 can also be activated through fieldbus regardless of parameter 20.25.)
1 = Jogging 1 active.
Notes:
� Jogging is supported in vector control mode only.
� If both jogging 1 and 2 are activated, the one that was activated first has priority.
� This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Not selected
0.
0
1.
1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
8...17
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
18
Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
19
Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
20
21...23
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
24
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
25
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
26
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Parameters 239
No. 20.27
Name/Value
Jogging 2 start source
21 21 Start/stop mode 21.01 Start mode
Fast Const time
Automatic
Description
If enabled by parameter 20.25 Jogging enable, selects the source for the activation of jogging function 2. (Jogging function 2 can also be activated through fieldbus regardless of parameter 20.25.)
1 = Jogging 2 active. For the selections, see parameter 20.26 Jogging 1 start source. Notes:
� Jogging is supported in vector control mode only. � If both jogging 1 and 2 are activated, the one that was
activated first has priority. � This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Def/FbEq16 Not selected
Start and stop modes; emergency stop mode and signal source selection; DC magnetization settings.
Selects the motor start function for the vector motor control mode, ie. when 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Vector.
Notes:
� The start function for the scalar motor control mode is selected by parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode.
� Starting into a rotating motor is not possible when DC magnetizing is selected (Fast or Const time).
� With permanent magnet motors, Automatic start mode must be used.
� This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
See also section DC magnetization (page 146).
The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. The premagnetizing time is determined automatically, being typically 200 ms to 2 s depending on motor size. This mode should be selected if a high break-away torque is required.
The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. The premagnetizing time is defined by parameter 21.02 Magnetization time. This mode should be selected if constant pre-magnetizing time is required (e.g. if the motor start must be synchronized with the release of a mechanical brake). This setting also guarantees the highest possible break-away torque when the pre-magnetizing time is set long enough.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set magnetizing time has passed even if motor magnetization is not completed. In applications where a full break-away torque is essential, ensure that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque.
Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most cases. It includes the flying start function (starting into a rotating motor) and the automatic restart function. The drive motor control program identifies the flux as well as the mechanical state of the motor and starts the motor instantly under all conditions.
Note: If parameter 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Scalar, no flying start or automatic restart is possible unless parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode is set to Automatic.
Automatic
0 1
2
240 Parameters
No. 21.02
Name/Value Magnetization time
Description
Defines the pre-magnetization time when
� parameter 21.01 Start mode is set to Const time (in vector motor control mode), or
� parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode is set to Const time or Torque boost (in scalar motor control mode).
After the start command, the drive automatically premagnetizes the motor for the set time. To ensure full magnetizing, set this parameter to the same value as, or higher than, the rotor time constant. If not known, use the rule-of-thumb value given in the table below:
Def/FbEq16 500 ms
Motor rated power < 1 kW 1 to 10 kW 10 to 200 kW 200 to 1000 kW
Constant magnetizing time > 50 to 100 ms > 100 to 200 ms > 200 to 1000 ms > 1000 to 2000 ms
0...10000 ms 21.03 Stop mode
Coast Ramp Torque limit 21.04 Emergency stop mode Ramp stop (Off1)
Coast stop (Off2)
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Constant DC magnetizing time.
1 = 1 ms
Selects the way the motor is stopped when a stop command is received.
Additional braking is possible by selecting flux braking (see parameter 97.05 Flux braking).
Coast
Stop by switching off the output semiconductors of the drive. 0 The motor coasts to a stop.
WARNING! If a mechanical brake is used, ensure it is safe to stop the drive by coasting.
Stop along the active deceleration ramp. See parameter
1
group 23 Speed reference ramp on page 256 or 28
Frequency reference chain on page 271.
Stop according to torque limits (parameters 30.19 and 30.20). 2 This mode is only possible in vector motor control mode.
Selects the way the motor is stopped when an emergency stop command is received.
The source of the emergency stop signal is selected by parameter 21.05 Emergency stop source.
Ramp stop (Off1)
With the drive running:
0
� 1 = Normal operation.
� 0 = Normal stop along the standard deceleration ramp
defined for the particular reference type (see section Rush
control [page 150]). After the drive has stopped, it can be
restarted by removing the emergency stop signal and
switching the start signal from 0 to 1.
With the drive stopped:
� 1 = Starting allowed.
� 0 = Starting not allowed.
With the drive running:
1
� 1 = Normal operation.
� 0 = Stop by coasting.
With the drive stopped:
� 1 = Starting allowed.
� 0 = Starting not allowed.
Parameters 241
No. Name/Value
Eme ramp stop (Off3)
21.05 Emergency stop source
21.06
Active (false) Inactive (true) Reserved DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Other [bit] Zero speed limit
0.00...30000.00 rpm
Description
Def/FbEq16
With the drive running:
2
� 1 = Normal operation
� 0 = Stop by ramping along emergency stop ramp defined
by parameter 23.23 Emergency stop time. After the drive
has stopped, it can be restarted by removing the
emergency stop signal and switching the start signal from
0 to 1.
With the drive stopped:
� 1 = Starting allowed
� 0 = Starting not allowed
Selects the source of the emergency stop signal. The stop mode is selected by parameter 21.04 Emergency stop mode.
0 = Emergency stop active 1 = Normal operation
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Inactive (true)
0.
0
1.
1
2
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
3
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
4
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
5
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
6
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
7
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
8
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Defines the zero speed limit. The motor is stopped along a speed ramp (when ramped stop is selected or emergency
stop time is used) until the defined zero speed limit is reached. After the zero speed delay, the motor coasts to a stop.
30.00 rpm
Zero speed limit.
See par. 46.01
242 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
21.07 Zero speed delay
Description
Defines the delay for the zero speed delay function. The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential. During the delay, the drive knows the rotor position accurately.
Without zero speed delay: The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When actual motor speed falls below the value of parameter 21.06 Zero speed limit, inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to a standstill.
Speed
Def/FbEq16 0 ms
Speed controller switched off: Motor coasts to a stop.
21.06 Zero speed limit Time
With zero speed delay:
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When actual motor speed falls below the value of parameter 21.06 Zero speed limit, the zero speed delay function activates. During the delay the function keeps the speed controller live: the inverter modulates, motor is magnetized and the drive is ready for a quick restart. Zero speed delay can be used e.g. with the jogging function.
Speed
Speed controller remains active. Motor is decelerated to true zero speed.
0...30000 ms
Delay Zero speed delay.
21.06 Zero speed limit Time
1 = 1 ms
Parameters 243
No. 21.08
Name/Value DC current control
Description
Activates/deactivates the DC hold and post-magnetization functions. See section DC magnetization (page 146).
Note: DC magnetization causes the motor to heat up. In applications where long DC magnetization times are required, externally ventilated motors should be used. If the DC magnetization period is long, DC magnetization cannot prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the motor.
Def/FbEq16 0000b
21.09 21.10 21.11 21.14
Bit 0 1
2 3...15
Name
Value
DC hold
1 = Enable DC hold. See section DC hold (page 147).
Note: The DC hold function has no effect if the start signal is switched off.
Post-
1 = Enable post-magnetization. See section Settings and diagnostics
magnetization (page 147).
Notes:
� Post-magnetization is only available when ramping is the selected stop mode (see parameter 21.03 Stop mode).
� Post-magnetization with scalar control is not supported at the moment.
DC brake
1 = Enable DC brake.
Reserved
0000b...0011b DC hold speed
0.00...1000.00 rpm DC current reference
0.0...100.0% Post magnetization time
0...3000 s Pre-heating input source
Off On DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5
DC magnetization selection.
Defines the DC hold speed in speed control mode. See parameter 21.08 DC current control, and section DC hold (page 147).
DC hold speed.
Defines the DC hold current in percent of the motor nominal current. See parameter 21.08 DC current control, and section DC magnetization (page 146). After 100 seconds post-magnetization time, the maximum magnetization current is limited to the magnetization current corresponding to the actual flux reference.
DC hold current.
Defines the length of time for which post-magnetization is active after stopping the motor. The magnetization current is defined by parameter 21.10 DC current reference. See parameter 21.08 DC current control.
Post-magnetization time.
Selects the source for controlling pre-heating for the motor. The status of the pre-heating is shown as bit 2 of 06.21 Drive status word 3. Notes: � The heating function requires that STO is not triggered. � The heating function requires that the drive is not faulted.
0. Pre-heating is always deactivated.
1. Pre-heating is always activated when the drive is stopped.
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
1 = 1 5.00 rpm
See par. 46.01 30.0%
1 = 1% 0 s
1 = 1 s Off
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
244 Parameters
No.
21.15 21.16 21.18
21.19
Name/Value DI6 Supervision 1 Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 MCW user bit 0 MCW user bit 1 MCW user bit 2 MCW user bit 3 Other [bit] Pre-heating time delay 10...3000 s Pre-heating current 0.0...30.0% Auto restart time
0.0 s 0.1...10.0 s Scalar start mode
Normal
Description
Def/FbEq16
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
8
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
9
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
10
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
11
Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
12
Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
13
Bit 12 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 189).
16
Bit 13 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 189).
17
Bit 14 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 189).
18
Bit 15 of 06.01 Main control word (see page 189).
19
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Defines the time delay before pre-heating starts after the
60 s
drive is stopped.
Pre-heating time delay.
1 = 1 s
Defines the DC current used to heat the motor. The value is in 0.0% percent of the nominal motor current.
Pre-heating current.
1 = 1%
The motor can be automatically started after a short supply 10.0 s
power failure using the automatic restart function. See section
Automatic restart (page 156).
When this parameter is set to 0.0 seconds, automatic
restarting is disabled. Otherwise, the parameter defines the
maximum duration of the power failure after which restarting
is attempted. Note that this time also includes the DC precharging delay. See also parameter 21.34 Force auto restart.
This parameter has effect only if parameter 95.04 Control board supply is set to External 24V.
WARNING! Before you activate the function, make sure that no dangerous situations can occur. The function restarts the drive automatically and continues operation after a supply break.
Automatic restarting disabled.
0
Maximum power failure duration.
1=1s
Selects the motor start function for the scalar motor control mode, ie. when 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Scalar.
Notes:
� The start function for the vector motor control mode is selected by parameter 21.01 Start mode.
� With permanent magnet motors, Automatic start mode must be used.
� This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
See also section DC magnetization (page 146).
Normal
Immediate start from zero speed.
0
Parameters 245
No. Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Const time
The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. The pre-
1
magnetizing time is defined by parameter 21.02
Magnetization time. This mode should be selected if constant
pre-magnetizing time is required (e.g. if the motor start must
be synchronized with the release of a mechanical brake).
This setting also guarantees the highest possible break-away
torque when the pre-magnetizing time is set long enough.
Note: This mode cannot be used to start into a rotating motor.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set pre-
magnetizing time has passed even if motor
magnetization is not completed. In applications where
a full break-away torque is essential, ensure that the constant
magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full
magnetization and torque.
Automatic
The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency 2 to start a rotating motor. This is useful for flying starts: if the motor is already rotating, the drive will start smoothly at the current frequency.
Note: Cannot be used in multimotor systems.
Torque boost
The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before the start. The pre- 3 magnetizing time is defined by parameter 21.02 Magnetization time.
Torque boost is applied at start. Torque boost is stopped when output frequency exceeds 40% of nominal frequency or when it is equal to the reference value. See parameter 21.26 Torque boost current.
This mode should selected if a high break-away torque is required.
Note: This mode cannot be used to start into a rotating motor.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set premagnetizing time has passed even if motor magnetization is not completed. In applications where a full break-away torque is essential, ensure that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque.
Automatic+boost
Automatic start with torque boost.
4
Automatic start is performed first and the motor is
magnetized. If the speed is found to be zero, torque boost is
applied.
Flying start
The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency 5 to start a rotating motor. If the motor is already rotating, drive will start smoothly at the current frequency. � The mode will start the motor with vector control and switch to scalar control on the fly when the motor speed has been found.
Compared to the Automatic start mode, Flying start detects the motor speed faster. Flying start requires more accurate information about motor model. Therefore standstill ID run is done automatically when the drive is started for the first time after selecting Flying start. Motor plate values should be accurate. Wrong plate values may decrease the starting performance.
Flying start+boost
Flying start with torque boost.
6
Flying start is performed first and the motor is magnetized. If
the speed is found to be zero, torque boost is applied.
246 Parameters
No. 21.21 21.22 21.23
21.24 21.25 21.26
21.27
Name/Value DC hold frequency
0.00...1000.00 Hz Start delay
0.00...60.00 s Smooth start
Disabled Enabled always Start only Smooth start current
10.0...200.0% Smooth start speed
2.0...100.0% Torque boost current
15.0...300.0% Torque boost time
0.0...60.0 s
Description
Defines the DC hold frequency, which is used instead of parameter 21.09 DC hold speed when the motor is in scalar frequency mode. See parameter 21.08 DC current control, and section DC hold (page 147).
DC hold frequency.
Defines the start delay. After the conditions for start have been fulfilled, the drive waits until the delay has elapsed and then starts the motor. During the delay, warning AFE9 Start delay is shown. Start delay can be used with all start modes.
Start delay
Selects the forced current vector rotation mode at low speeds. When the smooth start mode is selected, the rate of acceleration is limited by the acceleration and deceleration ramp times. If the process driven by the permanent magnet synchronous motor has high inertia, slow ramp times are recommended. Can be used for permanent magnet synchronous motors only.
Disabled.
Enabled always.
Enabled when starting the motor.
Current used in the current vector rotation at low speeds. Increase the smooth start current if the application requires motor shaft swinging needs to be minimized. Can be used for permanent magnet synchronous motors only.
Value in percent of the nominal motor current.
Output frequency up to which the current vector rotation is used. See parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode. Can be used for permanent magnet synchronous motors only.
Value as a percentage of the nominal motor frequency.
Defines the maximum supplied current to motor when (21.19 Scalar start mode is set to Torque boost (see page 244). Parameter value is in percent of the motor nominal current. Nominal value of the parameter is 100.0%. Torque boost is only applied at start, ending when output frequency exceeds 40% of nominal frequency or when output frequency is equal to reference. Can be used in scalar motor control mode only.
Value in percent of the nominal motor current.
Defines the minimum and maximum torque boost time. If torque boost time is less than 40% of frequency acceleration time (see parameters 28.72 and 28.74), then torque boost time is set at 40% of frequency acceleration time.
Nominal motor time.
Def/FbEq16 5.00 Hz
1 = 1 Hz 0.00 s
1=1s Disabled
0 1 2 50.0%
1 = 1% 10.0%
1 = 1% 100.0%
1 = 1% 20.0 s
1 = 1%
Parameters 247
No. 21.30
21.31 21.32 21.34 21.35 21.36
Name/Value
Description
Speed
compensated stop mode
Selects the method used to stop the drive. See also section. Speed compensated stop (page 153). Speed compensated stop is active only if
� the operation mode is not torque, and � parameter 21.03 Stop mode is Ramp, or
� parameter 20.11 Run enable stop mode is Ramp (in case Run enable is missing).
Off
Stop according parameter 21.03 Stop mode, no speed
compensated stop.
Speed comp FWD
If the direction of rotation is forward, speed compensation is used for constant distance braking. Speed difference (between used speed and maximum speed) is compensated by running the drive with current speed before the motor is stopped along a ramp.
If the direction of rotation is reverse, the drive is stopped along a ramp.
Speed comp REV
If the direction of rotation is reverse, speed compensation is used for constant distance braking. Speed difference (between used speed and maximum speed) is compensated by running the drive with current speed before the motor is stopped along a ramp.
If the direction of rotation is forward, the drive is stopped along a ramp.
Speed comp bipolar Regardless of the direction of rotation, speed compensation is used for constant distance braking. Speed difference (between used speed and maximum speed) is compensated
by running the drive with current speed before the motor is stopped along a ramp.
Speed comp stop delay
This delay adds distance to the total distance traveled during a stop from maximum speed. It is used to adjust the distance
to match requirements so that the distance traveled is not solely determined by the deceleration rate.
0.00...1000.00 s Speed delay.
Speed comp stop threshold
This parameter sets a speed threshold below which the Speed compensated stop feature is disabled. In this speed
region, the speed compensated stop is not attempted and the drive stops as it would, using the ramp option.
0...100%
Speed threshold as a percent of the motor nominal speed.
Force auto restart Forces automatic restart. The parameter is applicable only if parameter 95.04 Control board supply is set to External 24V.
Disable
Force auto restart disabled. Parameter 21.18 Auto restart time is in effect if its value is more than 0.0 s.
Enable
Force auto restart enabled. Parameter 21.18 Auto restart time is ignored. The drive never trips on the undervoltage fault and the start signal is on forever. When he DC voltage is restored,
the normal operation continues.
Preheating power Defines the power used to heat the motor.
0.00...10.00 kW
Preheating power.
Preheating unit
Defines if preheating is specified as current or power.
Current
Power
Def/FbEq16 Off
0 1
2
3
0.00 s
1=1s 10%
1 = 1% Disable 0 1
0.00 100 = 1 kW Current 0 1
248 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
2222 Speed reference selection
22.01 Speed ref unlimited
22.11
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Ext1 speed ref1
Description
Speed reference selection; motor potentiometer settings. See the control chain diagrams on pages 526...530.
Displays the output of the speed reference selection block. See the control chain diagram on page 527. This parameter is read-only.
Value of the selected speed reference.
Selects EXT1 speed reference source 1. Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and 22.12 Ext1 speed ref2. A mathematical function (22.13 Ext1 speed function) applied to the two signals creates an EXT1 reference (A in the figure below). A digital source selected by 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection can be used to switch between EXT1 reference and the corresponding EXT2 reference defined by parameters 22.18 Ext2 speed ref1, 22.19 Ext2 speed ref2 and 22.20 Ext2 speed function (B in the figure below).
Def/FbEq16
-
See par. 46.01 AI1 scaled
0 AI FB ......
Other
22.11
0 AI FB ......
Other
22.12
0 AI FB ......
Other
22.18
0 AI FB ......
Other
22.19
22.13 Ref1
ADD SUB MUL MIN MAX
22.20 Ref1
ADD SUB MUL MIN MAX
A
EXT1
19.11 0
1
22.86
EXT2
B
Zero
None.
0
AI1 scaled
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 212).
1
AI2 scaled
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 214).
2
Reserved
3
Parameters 249
No.
22.12 22.13
Name/Value FB A ref1 FB A ref2 Reserved EFB ref1 EFB ref2 Reserved Motor potentiometer PID
Frequency input 1
Control panel (ref saved)
Description 03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 184). 03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 184).
03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 185). 03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 185).
22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor potentiometer).
40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID controller).
11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI5 is used as a frequency input).
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 184)
saved by the control system for the location where the control returns is used as the reference.
Reference
t EXT1 -> EXT2
EXT1 reference EXT2 reference
Active reference Inactive reference
Def/FbEq16 4 5 6...7 8 9 10...14 15
16
17
18
Control panel (ref copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 184) for 19 the previous control location is used as the reference when the control location changes if the references for the two
locations are of the same type (e.g. frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is used as the new reference.
Reference
t EXT1 -> EXT2
EXT1 reference EXT2 reference
Active reference Inactive reference
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Ext1 speed ref2
Selects EXT1 speed reference source 2.
For the selections, and a diagram of reference source selection, see parameter 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1.
Zero
Ext1 speed function Selects a mathematical function between the reference
Ref1
sources selected by parameters 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 and
22.12 Ext1 speed ref2. See diagram at 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1.
Ref1
Signal selected by 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 is used as speed 0 reference 1 as such (no function applied).
Add (ref1 + ref2)
The sum of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1 1.
Sub (ref1 - ref2)
The subtraction ([22.11 Ext1 speed ref1] - [22.12 Ext1 speed 2 ref2]) of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
Mul (ref1 � ref2)
The multiplication of the reference sources is used as speed 3 reference 1.
250 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Min (ref1, ref2)
Max (ref1, ref2)
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1
Zero AI1 scaled AI2 scaled Reserved FB A ref1 FB A ref2 Reserved EFB ref1 EFB ref2 Reserved Motor potentiometer PID
Frequency input
Control panel (ref saved)
Control panel (ref copied)
Other
Description
The smaller of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
The greater of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
Selects EXT2 speed reference source 1. Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and 22.19 Ext2 speed ref2. A mathematical function (22.20 Ext2 speed function) applied to the two signals creates an EXT2 reference. See diagram at 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1.
None.
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 212).
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 214).
03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 184). 03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 184).
03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 185). 03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 185).
22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor potentiometer).
40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID controller).
11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI5 is used as a frequency input).
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 184) saved by the control system for the location where the control returns is used as the reference.
Reference
t EXT1 -> EXT2
EXT1 reference EXT2 reference
Active reference Inactive reference
Def/FbEq16 4
5
Zero
0 1 2 3 4 5 6...7 8 9 10...14 15
16
17
18
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 184) for 19 the previous control location is used as the reference when the control location changes if the references for the two
locations are of the same type (e.g. frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is used as the new reference.
Reference
t EXT1 -> EXT2
EXT1 reference EXT2 reference
Active reference Inactive reference
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Parameters 251
No. 22.19 22.20
22.21
Name/Value Ext2 speed ref2
Ext2 speed function
Ref1 Add (ref1 + ref2) Sub (ref1 - ref2) Mul (ref1 � ref2) Min (ref1, ref2) Max (ref1, ref2) Constant speed function
Description
Selects EXT2 speed reference source 2. For the selections, and a diagram of reference source selection, see parameter 22.18 Ext2 speed ref1.
Selects a mathematical function between the reference sources selected by parameters 22.18 Ext2 speed ref1 and 22.19 Ext2 speed ref2. See diagram at 22.18 Ext2 speed ref1.
Signal selected by Ext2 speed ref1 is used as speed reference 1 as such (no function applied).
The sum of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
The subtraction ([22.11 Ext1 speed ref1] - [22.12 Ext1 speed ref2]) of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
The multiplication of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
The smaller of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
The greater of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
Determines how constant speeds are selected, and whether the rotation direction signal is considered or not when applying a constant speed.
Def/FbEq16 Zero
Ref1
0 1 2 3 4 5 0b0001
Bit 0 1
2...15
Name
Information
Constant speed 1 = Packed: 7 constant speeds are selectable using the three sources
mode
defined by parameters 22.22, 22.23 and 22.24.
0 = Separate: Constant speeds 1, 2 and 3 are separately activated by
the sources defined by parameters 22.22, 22.23 and 22.24 respectively. In case of conflict, the constant speed with the smaller number takes priority.
Direction enable
1 = Start dir: To determine running direction for a constant speed, the sign of the constant speed setting (parameters 22.26...22.32) is
multiplied by the direction signal (forward: +1, reverse: -1). This
effectively allows the drive to have 14 (7 forward, 7 reverse) constant speeds if all values in 22.26...22.32 are positive.
WARNING: If the direction signal is reverse and the active
constant speed is negative, the drive will run in the forward direction.
0 = Accord Par: The running direction for the constant speed is
determined by the sign of the constant speed setting (parameters
22.26...22.32).
Reserved
0b0000...0001b
Constant speed configuration word.
1 = 1
252 Parameters
No. 22.22
Name/Value
Constant speed sel1
Description
When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant speed 1. When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 22.23 Constant speed sel2 and 22.24 Constant speed sel3 select three sources whose states activate constant speeds as follows:
Def/FbEq16 DI3
Source defined Source defined Source defined by par. 22.22 by par. 22.23 by par. 22.24
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
Constant speed active
None Constant speed 1 Constant speed 2 Constant speed 3 Constant speed 4 Constant speed 5 Constant speed 6 Constant speed 7
22.23
Always off Always on DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Reserved Supervision 1 Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Other [bit] Constant speed sel2
Always off.
0
Always on.
1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
8...17
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
18
Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
19
Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
20
21...23
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
24
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
25
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
26
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is 0 DI4 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant speed 2.
When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 22.22 Constant speed sel1 and 22.24 Constant speed sel3 select three sources that are used to activate constant speeds. See table at parameter 22.22 Constant speed sel1.
For the selections, see parameter 22.22 Constant speed sel1.
Parameters 253
No. 22.24
Name/Value
Constant speed sel3
22.26 Constant speed 1
22.27 22.28 22.29 22.30 22.31 22.32 22.41
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 2
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 3
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 4
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 5
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 6
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Constant speed 7
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Speed ref safe
22.42
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Jogging 1 ref
22.43
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Jogging 2 ref
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Description
Def/FbEq16
When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is 0 Always off (Separate), selects a source that activates constant speed 3.
When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 22.22 Constant speed sel1 and 22.23 Constant speed sel2 select three sources that are used to activate constant speeds. See table at parameter 22.22 Constant speed sel1.
For the selections, see parameter 22.22 Constant speed sel1.
Defines constant speed 1 (the speed the motor will turn when 300.00 rpm constant speed 1 is selected).
Constant speed 1.
See par. 46.01
Defines constant speed 2.
600.00 rpm
Constant speed 2.
See par. 46.01
Defines constant speed 3.
900.00 rpm
Constant speed 3.
See par. 46.01
Defines constant speed 4.
1200.00 rpm
Constant speed 4.
See par. 46.01
Defines constant speed 5.
1500.00 rpm
Constant speed 5.
See par. 46.01
Defines constant speed 6.
2400.00 rpm
Constant speed 6.
See par. 46.01
Defines constant speed 7.
3000.00 rpm
Constant speed 7.
See par. 46.01
Defines a safe speed reference value that is used with supervision functions such as
� 12.03 AI supervision function � 49.05 Communication loss action
� 50.02 FBA A comm loss func.
0.00 rpm
Safe speed reference.
See par. 46.01
Defines the speed reference for jogging function 1. For more 0.00 rpm information on jogging, see page 150.
Speed reference for jogging function 1.
See par. 46.01
Defines the speed reference for jogging function 2. For more 0.00 rpm information on jogging, see page 150.
Speed reference for jogging function 2.
See par. 46.01
254 Parameters
No. 22.51
Name/Value
Critical speed function
Description
Enables/disables the critical speeds function. Also determines whether the specified ranges are effective in both rotating directions or not. See also section Critical speeds/frequencies (page 123).
Def/FbEq16 0000b
Bit
Name
0
Enable
1
Sign mode
2...15 Reserved
Information
1 = Enable: Critical speeds enabled.
0 = Disable: Critical speeds disabled.
1 = Signed: The signs of parameters 22.52...22.57 are taken into account.
0 = Absolute: Parameters 22.52...22.57 are handled as absolute values. Each range is effective in both directions of rotation.
22.52 22.53 22.54 22.55 22.56 22.57 22.71
0000b...0011b Critical speed 1 low
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm Critical speed 1 high
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm Critical speed 2 low
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm Critical speed 2 high
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm Critical speed 3 low
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm Critical speed 3 high
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm Motor potentiometer function Disabled
Critical speeds configuration word. Defines the low limit for critical speed range 1. Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of 22.53 Critical speed 1 high. Low limit for critical speed 1.
Defines the high limit for critical speed range 1. Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 22.52 Critical speed 1 low. High limit for critical speed 1.
Defines the low limit for critical speed range 2. Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of 22.55 Critical speed 2 high. Low limit for critical speed 2.
Defines the high limit for critical speed range 2. Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 22.54 Critical speed 2 low. High limit for critical speed 2.
Defines the low limit for critical speed range 3. Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of 22.57 Critical speed 3 high. Low limit for critical speed 3.
Defines the high limit for critical speed range 3. Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 22.56 Critical speed 3 low. High limit for critical speed 3.
Activates and selects the mode of the motor potentiometer. See section Speed compensated stop (page 153).
Motor potentiometer is disabled and its value set to 0.
1 = 1 0.00 rpm
See par. 46.01 0.00 rpm
See par. 46.01 0.00 rpm
See par. 46.01 0.00 rpm
See par. 46.01 0.00 rpm
See par. 46.01 0.00 rpm
See par. 46.01 Disabled
0
Parameters 255
No. Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Enabled (init at stop When enabled, the motor potentiometer first adopts the value 1
/power-up)
defined by parameter 22.72 Motor potentiometer initial value.
The value can then be adjusted from the up and down
sources defined by parameters 22.73 Motor potentiometer up
source and 22.74 Motor potentiometer down source.
A stop or a power cycle will reset the motor potentiometer to
the initial value (22.72).
Enabled (resume As Enabled (init at stop /power-up), but the motor
2
always)
potentiometer value is retained over a power cycle.
22.72 22.73
Enabled (init to actual)
Motor potentiometer initial value -32768.00... 32767.00 Motor potentiometer up source
Not used Not used DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Reserved Supervision 1 Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Other [bit]
Whenever another reference source is selected, the value of the motor potentiometer follows that reference. After the source of reference returns to the motor potentiometer, its value can again be changed by the up and down sources (defined by 22.73 and 22.74).
Defines an initial value (starting point) for the motor potentiometer. See the selections of parameter 22.71 Motor potentiometer function.
Initial value for motor potentiometer.
3
0.00 1 = 1
Selects the source of motor potentiometer up signal.
0 = No change 1 = Increase motor potentiometer value. (If both the up and down sources are on, the potentiometer value will not change.)
Note: Motor potentiometer function up/down source control speed or frequency from zero to maximum speed or frequency. The running direction can be changed with parameter 20.04 Ext1 in2 source. See the figure in section Motor potentiometer on page 135.
Not used
0.
0
1.
1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
8...17
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
18
Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
19
Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
20
21...23
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
24
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
25
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
26
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
256 Parameters
No. 22.74
22.75 22.76 22.77 22.80 22.86 22.87
Name/Value Motor potentiometer down source
Motor potentiometer ramp time
0.0...3600.0 s Motor potentiometer min value -32768.00... 32767.00 Motor potentiometer max value -32768.00... 32767.00 Motor potentiometer ref act -32768.00... 32767.00 Speed reference act 6
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm Speed reference act 7
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Description
Selects the source of motor potentiometer down signal. 0 = No change 1 = Decrease motor potentiometer value. (If both the up and down sources are on, the potentiometer value will not change.) Note: Motor potentiometer function up/down source control speed or frequency from zero to maximum speed or frequency. The running direction can be changed with parameter 20.04 Ext1 in2 source. See the figure in section Motor potentiometer on page 135. For the selections, see parameter 22.73 Motor potentiometer up source.
Defines the change rate of the motor potentiometer. This parameter specifies the time required for the motor potentiometer to change from minimum (22.76) to maximum (22.77). The same change rate applies in both directions.
Motor potentiometer change time.
Defines the minimum value of the motor potentiometer. Note: If vector control mode is used, value of this parameter must be changed.
Motor potentiometer minimum.
Defines the maximum value of the motor potentiometer. Note: If vector control mode is used, value of this parameter must be changed.
Motor potentiometer maximum.
The output of the motor potentiometer function. (The motor potentiometer is configured using parameters 22.71...22.74.) This parameter is read-only.
Value of motor potentiometer.
Displays the value of the speed reference (EXT1 or EXT2) that has been selected by 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection. See diagram at 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 or the control chain diagram on page 526. This parameter is read-only.
Speed reference after additive 2.
Displays the value of speed reference before application of critical speeds. See the control chain diagram on page 527. The value is received from 22.86 Speed reference act 6 unless overridden by � any constant speed � a jogging reference � network control reference � control panel reference � safe speed reference. This parameter is read-only.
Speed reference before application of critical speeds.
Def/FbEq16 Not used
40.0 s 10 = 1 s -50.00 1 = 1 50.00 1 = 1 1 = 1 -
See par. 46.01 -
See par. 46.01
Parameters 257
No. Name/Value 2233 Speed reference ramp
23.01 Speed ref ramp input
23.02
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Speed ref ramp output
23.11
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Ramp set selection
Acc/Dec time 1 Acc/Dec time 2 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved FBA A
23.12
Reserved
EFB DCU CW bit 10
Other [bit]
Acceleration time 1
0.000...1800.000 s
Description
Def/FbEq16
Speed reference ramp settings (programming of the acceleration and deceleration rates for the drive).
See the control chain diagram on page 528.
Displays the used speed reference (in rpm) before it enters the ramping and shaping functions. See the control chain diagram on page 528.
This parameter is read-only.
Speed reference before ramping and shaping.
See par. 46.01
Displays the ramped and shaped speed reference in rpm.
-
See the control chain diagram on page 528.
This parameter is read-only.
Speed reference after ramping and shaping.
See par. 46.01
Selects the source that switches between the two sets of
DI5
acceleration/deceleration ramp times defined by parameters
23.12...23.15.
0 = Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are active
1 = Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are active
0.
0
1.
1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
8...17
For Transparent16 and Transparent32 profiles only. DCU
18
control word bit 10 received through the fieldbus adapter A.
19
Only for the DCU profile. DCU control word bit 10 received 20 through the embedded fieldbus interface.
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Defines acceleration time 1 as the time required for the speed to change from zero to the speed defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling (not to parameter 30.12 Maximum speed).
If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the acceleration rate.
If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the reference.
If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive torque limits.
20.000 s
Acceleration time 1.
10 = 1 s
258 Parameters
No. 23.13
23.14 23.15 23.20 23.21 23.23
Name/Value Deceleration time 1
0.000...1800.000 s Acceleration time 2 0.000...1800.000 s Deceleration time 2 0.000...1800.000 s Acc time jogging 0.000...1800.000 s Dec time jogging 0.000...1800.000 s Emergency stop time
0.000...1800.000 s
Description
Defines deceleration time 1 as the time required for the speed to change from the speed defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling (not from parameter 30.12 Maximum speed) to zero. If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the reference. If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate. If the deceleration rate is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive torque limits (or not to exceed a safe DC link voltage). If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too short, ensure that DC overvoltage control is on (parameter 30.30 Overvoltage control). Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application, the drive should be equipped with braking equipment such as a brake chopper and brake resistor.
Deceleration time 1.
Defines acceleration time 2. See parameter 23.12 Acceleration time 1.
Acceleration time 2.
Defines deceleration time 2. See parameter 23.13 Deceleration time 1.
Deceleration time 2.
Defines the acceleration time for the jogging function ie. the time required for the speed to change from zero to the speed value defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling. See section Settings and diagnostics (page 150).
Acceleration time for jogging.
Defines the deceleration time for the jogging function ie. the time required for the speed to change from the speed value defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling to zero. See section Settings and diagnostics (page 150).
Deceleration time for jogging.
Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped if an emergency stop Off3 is activated (ie. the time required for the speed to change from the speed value defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling or 46.02 Frequency scaling to zero). Emergency stop mode and activation source are selected by parameters 21.04 Emergency stop mode and 21.05 Emergency stop source respectively. Emergency stop can also be activated through fieldbus. Note: � Emergency stop Off1 uses the standard deceleration ramp
as defined by parameters 23.11...23.15. � The same parameter value is also used in frequency
control mode (ramp parameters 28.71...28.75).
Emergency stop Off3 deceleration time.
Def/FbEq16 20.000 s
10 = 1 s 60.000 s 10 = 1 s 60.000 s 10 = 1 s 60.000 s 10 = 1 s 60.000 s 10 = 1 s 3.000 s
10 = 1 s
Parameters 259
No. 23.28
Name/Value
Variable slope enable
Description
Activates the variable slope function, which controls the slope of the speed ramp during a speed reference change. This allows for a constantly variable ramp rate to be generated, instead of just the standard two ramps normally available.
If the update interval of the signal from an external control system and the variable slope rate (23.29 Variable slope rate) are equal, speed reference (23.02 Speed ref ramp output) is a straight line.
Def/FbEq16 Off
Speed reference
Speed reference
t A
23.02 Speed ref ramp output
Time
t = update interval of signal from an external control system A = speed reference change during t
23.29
Off On Variable slope rate
2...30000 ms
This function is only active in remote control.
Variable slope disabled.
Variable slope enabled (not available in local control).
Defines the rate of the speed reference change when variable slope is enabled by parameter 23.28 Variable slope enable. For the best result, enter the reference update interval into this parameter.
Variable slope rate.
0 1 50 ms
1 = 1 ms
260 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
23.32 Shape time 1
Description
Def/FbEq16
Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps used with the set 1.
0.000 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for slow ramps.
0.001...1000.000 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for lifting applications. The S-curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between.
Acceleration:
0.000 s
Speed
Linear ramp: 23.32 = 0 s
Linear ramp: 23.32 = 0 s
S-curve ramp: 23.32 > 0 s
Deceleration: Speed
S-curve ramp: 23.32 > 0 s
Time
S-curve ramp: 23.32 > 0 s
Linear ramp: 23.32 = 0 s
Linear ramp: 23.32 = 0 s
S-curve ramp: 23.32 > 0 s
Time
23.33
0.000...1800.000 s Shape time 2 0.000...1800.000 s
Ramp shape at start and end of acceleration and deceleration.
Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps used with the set 2. See parameter 23.32 Shape time 1.
Ramp shape at start and end of acceleration and deceleration.
10 = 1 s 0.000 s 10 = 1 s
Parameters 261
No. Name/Value 2244 Speed reference conditioning
24.01 Used speed reference
24.02
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Used speed feedback
24.03
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Speed error filtered
24.04
-30000.0... 30000.0 rpm
Speed error inverted
24.11
-30000.0... 30000.0 rpm
Speed correction
24.12
-10000.00... 10000.00 rpm
Speed error filter time
0...10000 ms 2255 Speed control
25.01 Torque reference speed control
-1600.0...1600.0%
Description
Def/FbEq16
Speed error calculation; speed error window control configuration; speed error step. See the control chain diagram on page 529.
Displays the ramped and corrected speed reference (before speed error calculation). See the control chain diagram on page 529. This parameter is read-only.
Speed reference used for speed error calculation.
Displays the speed feedback used for speed error calculation. See the control chain diagram on page 529. This parameter is read-only.
Speed feedback used for speed error calculation.
Displays the filtered speed error. See the control chain diagram on page 529. This parameter is read-only.
Filtered speed error.
Displays the inverted (unfiltered) speed error. See the control chain diagram on page 529. This parameter is read-only.
Inverted speed error.
Defines a speed reference correction, ie. a value added to the existing reference between ramping and limitation. This is useful to trim the speed if necessary, for example to adjust draw between sections of a paper machine. See the control chain diagram on page 529.
Speed reference correction.
Defines the time constant of the speed error low-pass filter. If the used speed reference changes rapidly, the possible interferences in the speed measurement can be filtered with the speed error filter. Reducing the ripple with this filter may cause speed controller tuning problems. A long filter time constant and fast acceleration time contradict one another. A very long filter time results in unstable control.
Speed error filtering time constant. 0 = filtering disabled.
-
See par. 46.01 -
See par. 46.01 -
See par. 46.01 -
See par. 46.01 0.00 rpm
See par. 46.01 0 ms
1 = 1 ms
Speed controller settings. See the control chain diagram on page 529.
Displays the speed controller output that is transferred to the torque controller. See the control chain diagram on page 529.
This parameter is read-only.
Limited speed controller output torque.
See par. 46.03
262 Parameters
No. 25.02
Name/Value
Speed proportional gain
Description
Defines the proportional gain (Kp) of the speed controller. Too high a gain may cause speed oscillation. The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant.
Def/FbEq16 5.00
%
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time = 0
TD= Derivation time = 0
Controller output = Kp � e
Error value Controller output
e = Error value
0.00...250.00
Time
If gain is set to 1, a 10% change in error value (reference actual value) causes the speed controller output to change by 10%, ie. the output value is input � gain.
Proportional gain for speed controller.
100 = 1
Parameters 263
No. 25.03
Name/Value
Speed integration time
% Kp � e
Description
Defines the integration time of the speed controller. The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant and the proportional gain of the speed controller is 1. The shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error value is corrected. This time constant must be set to the same order of magnitude as the time constant (time to respond) of the actual mechanical system being controlled, otherwise instability will result.
Setting the integration time to zero disables the I-part of the controller. This is useful to do when tuning the proportional gain; adjust the proportional gain first, then return the integration time.
Anti-windup (the integrator just integrates up to 100%) stops the integrator if the controller output is limited.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant.
Def/FbEq16 2.50 s
Controller output
Gain = Kp = 1 TI = Integration time > 0 TD= Derivation time = 0
Kp � e
0.00...1000.00 s
TI Integration time for speed controller.
e = Error value Time 10 = 1 s
264 Parameters
No. 25.04
Name/Value
Speed derivation time
Description
Defines the derivation time of the speed controller. Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes. The longer the derivation time, the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change. If the derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise as a PID controller. The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances. For simple applications, derivative time is not normally required and should be left at zero.
The speed error derivative must be filtered with a low pass filter to eliminate disturbances.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant.
Def/FbEq16 0.000 s
% Controller output
Kp � TD �
e Ts
Kp � e
Error value
Kp � e
e = Error value
TI
Time
Gain = Kp = 1 TI = Integration time > 0 TD= Derivation time > 0 Ts= Sample time period = 250 �s e = Error value change between two samples
25.05
0.000...10.000 s Derivation time for speed controller.
Derivation filter time Defines the derivation filter time constant. See parameter 25.04 Speed derivation time.
0...10000 ms
Derivation filter time constant.
1000 = 1 s 8 ms
1 = 1 ms
Parameters 265
No. 25.06
Name/Value
Acc comp derivation time
Description
Defines the derivation time for acceleration(/deceleration) compensation. In order to compensate for a high inertia load during acceleration, a derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller. The principle of a derivative action is described under parameter 25.04 Speed derivation time.
Note: As a general rule, set this parameter to the value between 50 and 100% of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven machine.
The figure below shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp.
No acceleration compensation:
Def/FbEq16 0.00 s
Acceleration compensation:
Speed reference Actual speed
Time
Speed reference Actual speed
Time
25.07 25.15
0.00...1000.00 s Acc comp filter time
0.0...1000.0 ms Proportional gain em stop
1.00...250.00
Acceleration compensation derivation time.
Defines the acceleration (or deceleration) compensation filter time constant. See parameters 25.04 Speed derivation time and 25.06 Acc comp derivation time.
Acceleration/deceleration compensation filter time.
Defines the proportional gain for the speed controller when an emergency stop is active. See parameter 25.02 Speed proportional gain.
Proportional gain upon an emergency stop.
10 = 1 s 8.0 ms
1 = 1 ms 10.00
100 = 1
266 Parameters
No. 25.33
Name/Value
Speed controller autotune
25.34
Off
On
Speed controller autotune mode
Smooth Normal Tight
25.37 Mechanical time constant
25.38
0.00...1000.00 s
Autotune torque step
25.39
0.00...100.00%
Autotune speed step
Description
Activates (or selects a source that activates) the speed controller autotune function. See section Speed controller autotune (page 124).
The autotune will automatically set parameters 25.02 Speed proportional gain, 25.03 Speed integration time and 25.37 Mechanical time constant.
The prerequisites for performing the autotune routine are:
� the motor identification run (ID run) has been successfully completed
� the speed and torque limits (parameter group 30 Limits) have been set
� speed feedback filtering (parameter group 90 Feedback selection), speed error filtering (24 Speed reference conditioning) and zero speed (21 Start/stop mode) have been set, and
� the drive has been started and is running in speed control mode.
Def/FbEq16 Off
WARNING: The motor and machinery will run against the torque and speed limits during the autotune routine. MAKE SURE IT IS SAFE TO ACTIVATE THE AUTOTUNE FUNCTION!
The autotune routine can be aborted by stopping the drive.
0?1 = Activate speed controller autotune
Note: The value does not revert to 0 automatically
0
0
1
1
Defines a control preset for the speed controller autotune
Normal
function. The setting affects the way the torque reference will
respond to a speed reference step.
Slow but robust response.
0
Medium setting.
1
Fast response. May produce too high a gain value for some 2 applications.
Mechanical time constant of the drive and the machinery as 0.00
determined by the speed controller autotune function. The value can be adjusted manually.
Mechanical time constant.
100 = 1 s
Defines an added torque value used by the autotune function. 10.00
This value is scaled to motor nominal torque.
Note that the torque used by the autotune function can also be limited by the torque limits (in parameter group 30 Limits) and nominal motor torque.
Autotune torque step.
100 = 1%
Defines a speed value added to the initial speed for the autotune routine. The initial speed (speed used when autotune is activated) plus the value of this parameter is the calculated maximum speed used by the autotune routine. The maximum speed can also be limited by the speed limits (in
parameter group 30 Limits) and nominal motor speed.
The value is scaled to motor nominal speed.
Note: The motor will exceed the calculated maximum speed slightly at the end of each acceleration stage.
10.00
Parameters 267
No. 25.40
Name/Value
0.00...100.00%
Autotune repeat times
25.53
1...10
Torque prop reference
25.54
-30000.0... 30000.0%
Torque integral reference
25.55
-30000.0... 30000.0%
Torque deriv reference
25.56
-30000.0... 30000.0%
Torque acc compensation
-30000.0... 30000.0%
26 26 Torque reference chain
26.01 Torque reference to TC
-1600.0...1600.0%
26.02 Torque reference used
-1600.0...1600.0% 26.08 Minimum torque ref
-1000.0...0.0%
Description
Autotune speed step.
Determines how many acceleration/deceleration cycles are performed during the autotune routine. Increasing the value will improve the accuracy of the autotune function, and allow the use of smaller torque or speed step values.
Displays the output of the proportional (P) part of the speed controller. See the control chain diagram on page 529. This parameter is read-only.
P-part output of speed controller.
Displays the output of the integral (I) part of the speed controller. See the control chain diagram on page 529. This parameter is read-only.
I-part output of speed controller.
Displays the output of the derivative (D) part of the speed controller. See the control chain diagram on page 529. This parameter is read-only.
D-part output of speed controller.
Displays the output of the acceleration compensation function. See the control chain diagram on page 529. This parameter is read-only.
Output of acceleration compensation function.
Settings for the torque reference chain. See the control chain diagrams on pages 531 and 532.
Displays the final torque reference given to the torque controller in percent. This reference is then acted upon by various final limiters, like power, torque, load etc. See the control chain diagrams on pages 531 and 532. This parameter is read-only.
Torque reference for torque control in percent of motor nominal torque (99.12).
Displays the final torque reference (in percent of motor nominal torque) given to the torque controller, and comes after frequency, voltage and torque limitation. See the control chain diagram on page 533. This parameter is read-only.
Torque reference for torque control in percent of motor nominal torque (99.12).
Defines the minimum torque reference. Allows for local limiting of the torque reference before it is passed on to the torque ramp controller. For absolute torque limiting, refer to parameter 30.19 Minimum torque 1.
Minimum torque reference in percent of motor nominal torque (99.12).
Def/FbEq16 100 = 1% 10
1 = 1 -
See par. 46.03 -
See par. 46.03 -
See par. 46.03 -
See par. 46.03
-
See par. 46.03 -
See par. 46.03 -300.0%
See par. 46.03
268 Parameters
No. 26.09
26.11
Name/Value
Description
Maximum torque ref Defines the maximum torque reference. Allows for local
limiting of the torque reference before it is passed on to the torque ramp controller. For absolute torque limiting, refer to parameter 30.20 Maximum torque 1.
0.0...1000.0%
Maximum torque reference in percent of motor nominal torque (99.12).
Torque ref1 source
Selects torque reference source 1.
Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and 26.12 Torque ref2 source. A digital source selected by 26.14 Torque ref1/2 selection can be used to switch between the two sources, or a mathematical function (26.13 Torque ref1 function) applied to the two signals to create the reference.
Def/FbEq16 300.0%
See par. 46.03 Zero
0 AI FB ......
Other
26.11
26.70
0 AI FB ......
Other
26.12
26.71
26.13 Ref1
ADD SUB MUL MIN MAX
26.14 0
1
26.72
Zero AI1 scaled AI2 scaled Reserved FB A ref1 FB A ref2 Reserved EFB ref1 EFB ref2 Reserved Motor potentiometer PID
Frequency input
None. 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 212). 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 214).
03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 184). 03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 184).
03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 185). 03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 185).
22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor potentiometer). 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID controller). 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI5 is used as a frequency input).
0 1 2 3 4 5 6...7 8 9 10...14 15
16
17
Parameters 269
No.
26.12 26.13 26.14
Name/Value
Control panel (ref saved)
Description
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 184)
saved by the control system for the location where the control returns is used as the reference.
Reference
t EXT1 -> EXT2
EXT1 reference EXT2 reference
Active reference Inactive reference
Def/FbEq16 18
Control panel (ref copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 184) for 19 the previous control location is used as the reference when the control location changes if the references for the two
locations are of the same type (e.g. frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is used as the new reference.
Reference
t EXT1 -> EXT2
EXT1 reference EXT2 reference
Active reference Inactive reference
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Torque ref2 source
Selects torque reference source 2.
For the selections, and a diagram of reference source selection, see parameter 26.11 Torque ref1 source.
Zero
Torque ref1 function
Selects a mathematical function between the reference
sources selected by parameters 26.11 Torque ref1 source and 26.12 Torque ref2 source. See diagram at 26.11 Torque ref1 source.
Ref1
Ref1
Signal selected by 26.11 Torque ref1 source is used as torque 0 reference 1 as such (no function applied).
Add (ref1 + ref2)
The sum of the reference sources is used as torque reference 1 1.
Sub (ref1 - ref2)
The subtraction ([26.11 Torque ref1 source] - [26.12 Torque 2 ref2 source]) of the reference sources is used as torque
reference 1.
Mul (ref1 � ref2)
The multiplication of the reference sources is used as torque 3 reference 1.
Min (ref1, ref2)
The smaller of the reference sources is used as torque
4
reference 1.
Max (ref1, ref2)
The greater of the reference sources is used as torque
5
reference 1.
Torque ref1/2 selection
Configures the selection between torque references 1 and 2. See diagram at 26.11 Torque ref1 source.
0 = Torque reference 1 1 = Torque reference 2
Torque reference 1
Torque reference 1 0.
0
Torque reference 2 1.
1
270 Parameters
No.
26.17 26.18 26.19 26.20
26.21 26.22
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Follow Ext1/Ext2 Torque reference 1 is used when external control location
2
selection
EXT1 is active. Torque reference 2 is used when external
control location EXT2 is active.
See also parameter 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection.
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
3
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
4
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
5
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
6
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
7
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
8
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Torque ref filter time Defines a low-pass filter time constant for the torque reference.
0.000 s
0.000...30.000 s Filter time constant for torque reference.
1000 = 1 s
Torque ramp up time
Defines the torque reference ramp-up time, ie. the time for the 0.000 s reference to increase from zero to nominal motor torque.
0.000...60.000 s Torque reference ramp-up time.
100 = 1 s
Torque ramp down Defines the torque reference ramp-down time, ie. the time for 0.000 s
time
the reference to decrease from nominal motor torque to zero.
0.000...60.000 s Torque reference ramp-down time.
100 = 1 s
Torque reversal
Selects the source of torque reversal function.
Always off
Always off
Torque reversal function is disabled.
0
Always on
Torque reversal function is enabled.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
8
Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
9
Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
10
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
11
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
12
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
13
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Torque sel torque in Selects the source for 26.74 Torque ref ramp out.
Torque ref torq ctrl
Not selected
None.
0
Torque ref torq ctrl Torque reference from the torque chain.
1
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Torque sel speed in Selects the source for 25.01 Torque reference speed control. Torque ref speed ctrl
Not selected
None.
0
Parameters 271
No. 26.70 26.71 26.72
26.73 26.74 26.75 26.81 26.82
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Torque ref speed Torque reference from the speed chain.
1
ctrl
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Torque reference act 1
Displays the value of torque reference source 1 (selected by parameter 26.11 Torque ref1 source). See the control chain diagram on page 531. This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0...1600.0% Value of torque reference source 1.
See par. 46.03
Torque reference act 2
Displays the value of torque reference source 2 (selected by parameter 26.12 Torque ref2 source). See the control chain diagram on page 531.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0...1600.0% Value of torque reference source 2.
See par. 46.03
Torque reference Displays the torque reference after the function applied by -
act 3
parameter 26.13 Torque ref1 function (if any), and after
selection (26.14 Torque ref1/2 selection). See the control
chain diagram on page 531.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0...1600.0% Torque reference after selection.
See par. 46.03
Torque reference Displays the torque reference after application of reference -
act 4
additive 1. See the control chain diagram on page 531.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0...1600.0% Torque reference after application of reference additive 1.
See par. 46.03
Torque ref ramp out Displays the torque reference after limiting and ramping. See the control chain diagram on page 531.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0...1600.0% Torque reference after limiting and ramping.
See par. 46.03
Torque reference Displays the torque reference after control mode selection. -
act 5
See the control chain diagram on page 532.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0...1600.0% Torque reference after control mode selection.
See par. 46.03
Rush control gain Rush controller gain term. See section Rush control (page 5.0 150).
0.0...10000.0
Rush controller gain.
1 = 1
Rush control
Rush controller integration time term.
2.0
integration time
0.0...10.0
Rush controller integration time.
1 = 1 s
272 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
2288 Frequency reference Settings for the frequency reference chain.
chain
See the control chain diagrams on pages 524 and 525.
28.01
Frequency ref ramp Displays the used frequency reference before ramping. See
input
the control chain diagram on page 524.
This parameter is read-only.
-500.00...500.00 Hz
Frequency reference before ramping.
28.02
Frequency ref ramp output
Displays the final frequency reference (after selection, limitation and ramping). See the control chain diagram on page 524.
This parameter is read-only.
-500.00...500.00 Hz
Final frequency reference.
Def/FbEq16
-
See par. 46.02 -
See par. 46.02
Parameters 273
No. 28.11
Name/Value Ext1 frequency ref1
Description
Selects EXT1 frequency reference source 1.
Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and 28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2. A mathematical function (28.13 Ext1 frequency function) applied to the two signals creates an EXT1 reference (A in the figure below). A digital source selected by 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection can be used to switch between EXT1 reference and the corresponding EXT2 reference defined by parameters 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1, 28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2 and 28.17 Ext2 frequency function (B in the figure below).
Def/FbEq16 AI1 scaled
0 AI FB ......
Other
28.11
0 AI FB ......
Other
28.12
0 AI FB ......
Other
28.15
0 AI FB ......
Other
28.16
28.13 Ref1
ADD SUB MUL MIN MAX
28.17 Ref1
ADD SUB MUL MIN MAX
A
EXT1
19.11 0
1
28.92
EXT2
B
Zero AI1 scaled AI2 scaled Reserved FB A ref1 FB A ref2 Reserved EFB ref1 EFB ref2 Reserved
None. 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 212). 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 214).
03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 184). 03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 184).
03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 185). 03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 185).
0 1 2 3 4 5 6...7 8 9 10...14
274 Parameters
No.
28.12 28.13
Name/Value Motor potentiometer PID
Frequency input 1
Control panel (ref saved)
Description
22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor potentiometer).
40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID controller).
11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI5 is used as a frequency input).
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 184)
saved by the control system for the location where the control returns is used as the reference.
Reference
t EXT1 -> EXT2
EXT1 reference EXT2 reference
Active reference Inactive reference
Def/FbEq16 15 16 17 18
Control panel (ref copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 184) for 19 the previous control location is used as the reference when the control location changes if the references for the two
locations are of the same type (e.g. frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is used as the new reference.
Reference
t EXT1 -> EXT2
EXT1 reference EXT2 reference
Active reference Inactive reference
Other Ext1 frequency ref2
Ext1 frequency function
Ref1 Add (ref1 + ref2) Sub (ref1 - ref2)
Mul (ref1 � ref2) Min (ref1, ref2) Max (ref1, ref2)
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178).
Selects EXT1 frequency reference source 2. For the selections, and a diagram of reference source selection, see parameter 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1.
Selects a mathematical function between the reference sources selected by parameters 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1 and 28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2. See diagram at 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1.
Signal selected by 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1 is used as frequency reference 1 as such (no function applied).
The sum of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
The subtraction ([28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1] - [28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2]) of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
The multiplication of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
The smaller of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
The greater of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
Zero
Ref1
0 1 2
3 4 5
Parameters 275
No. 28.15
28.16
Name/Value Ext2 frequency ref1
Zero AI1 scaled AI2 scaled Reserved FB A ref1 FB A ref2 Reserved EFB ref1 EFB ref2 Reserved Motor potentiometer PID
Frequency input 1
Control panel (ref saved)
Description
Selects EXT2 frequency reference source 1. Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and 28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2. A mathematical function (28.17 Ext2 frequency function) applied to the two signals creates an EXT2 reference. See diagram at 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1.
None.
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 212).
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 214).
03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 184). 03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 184).
03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 185). 03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 185).
22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor potentiometer).
40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID controller).
11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI5 is used as a frequency input).
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 184) saved by the control system for the location where the control
returns is used as the reference.
Reference
t EXT1 -> EXT2
EXT1 reference EXT2 reference Active reference Inactive reference
Def/FbEq16 Zero
0 1 2 3 4 5 6...7 8 9 10...14 15
16
17
18
Control panel (ref copied)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 184) for 19 the previous control location is used as the reference when
the control location changes if the references for the two locations are of the same type (e.g. frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is
used as the new reference.
Reference
t EXT1 -> EXT2
EXT1 reference EXT2 reference
Active reference Inactive reference
Other Ext2 frequency ref2
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178).
Selects EXT2 frequency reference source 2. For the selections, and a diagram of reference source selection, see parameter 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1.
Zero
276 Parameters
No. 28.17
28.21
Name/Value Ext2 frequency function
Ref1 Add (ref1 + ref2) Sub (ref1 - ref2)
Mul (ref1 � ref2) Min (ref1, ref2) Max (ref1, ref2) Constant frequency function
Description
Selects a mathematical function between the reference sources selected by parameters 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1 and 28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2. See diagram at 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1.
Signal selected by 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1 is used as frequency reference 1 as such (no function applied).
The sum of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
The subtraction ([28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1] - [28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2]) of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
The multiplication of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
The smaller of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
The greater of the reference sources is used as frequency reference 1.
Determines how constant frequencies are selected, and whether the rotation direction signal is considered or not when applying a constant frequency.
Def/FbEq16 Ref1
0 1 2
3 4 5 0b0001
Bit
Name
0
Const freq
mode
1
Direction
enable
2...15 Reserved
Information
1 = Packed: 7 constant frequencies are selectable using the three sources defined by parameters 28.22, 28.23 and 28.24.
0 = Separate: Constant frequencies 1, 2 and 3 are separately activated by the sources defined by parameters 28.22, 28.23 and 28.24 respectively. In case of conflict, the constant frequency with the smaller number takes priority.
1 = Start dir: To determine running direction for a constant speed, the sign of the constant speed setting (parameters 22.26...22.32) is multiplied by the direction signal (forward: +1, reverse: -1). This effectively allows the drive to have 14 (7 forward, 7 reverse) constant speeds if all values in 22.26...22.32 are positive.
WARNING: If the direction signal is reverse and the active constant speed is negative, the drive will run in the forward direction.
0 = Accord Par: The running direction for the constant speed is determined by the sign of the constant speed setting (parameters 22.26...22.32).
0000b...0011b
Constant frequency configuration word.
1 = 1
Parameters 277
No. 28.22
Name/Value
Constant frequency sel1
Description
When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant frequency 1.
When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 28.23 Constant frequency sel2 and 28.24 Constant frequency sel3 select three sources whose states activate constant frequencies as follows:
Def/FbEq16 DI3
Source defined Source defined Source defined by par. 28.22 by par. 28.23 by par. 28.24
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
Constant frequency active None
Constant frequency 1 Constant frequency 2 Constant frequency 3 Constant frequency 4 Constant frequency 5 Constant frequency 6 Constant frequency 7
28.23
Always off Always on DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Reserved Supervision 1 Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Other [bit] Constant frequency sel2
Always off. Always on. Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307). Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307). Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299). Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299). Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299). Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant frequency 2. When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 28.22 Constant frequency sel1 and 28.24 Constant frequency sel3 select three sources that are used to activate constant frequencies. See table at parameter 28.22 Constant frequency sel1. For the selections, see parameter 28.22 Constant frequency sel1.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8...17 18 19 20 21...23 24 25 26 DI4
278 Parameters
No. 28.24
28.26 28.27 28.28 28.29 28.30 28.31 28.32 28.41
28.42 28.43
Name/Value Constant frequency sel3
Constant frequency 1 -500.00...500.00 Hz Constant frequency 2 -500.00...500.00 Hz Constant frequency 3 -500.00...500.00 Hz Constant frequency 4 -500.00...500.00 Hz Constant frequency 5 -500.00...500.00 Hz Constant frequency 6 -500.00...500.00 Hz Constant frequency 7 -500.00...500.00 Hz Frequency ref safe
-500.00...500.00 Hz Jogging 1 frequency ref -500.00...500.00 Hz Jogging 2 frequency ref
Description When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant frequency 3. When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 28.22 Constant frequency sel1 and 28.23 Constant frequency sel2 select three sources that are used to activate constant frequencies. See table at parameter 28.22 Constant frequency sel1. For the selections, see parameter 28.22 Constant frequency sel1. Defines constant frequency 1 (the frequency the motor will turn when constant frequency 1 is selected). Constant frequency 1.
Defines constant frequency 2.
Constant frequency 2.
Defines constant frequency 3.
Constant frequency 3.
Defines constant frequency 4.
Constant frequency 4.
Defines constant frequency 5.
Constant frequency 5.
Defines constant frequency 6.
Constant frequency 6.
Defines constant frequency 7.
Constant frequency 7.
Defines a safe frequency reference value that is used with supervision functions such as � 12.03 AI supervision function � 49.05 Communication loss action � 50.02 FBA A comm loss func. Safe frequency reference.
Defines the frequency reference for jogging function 1 in scalar control mode. Jogging 1 frequency reference.
Defines the frequency reference for jogging function 2 in scalar control mode.
Def/FbEq16 Always off
5.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 10.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 15.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 20.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 25.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 40.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 50.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 0.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 0.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 0.00 Hz
Parameters 279
No. 28.51
Name/Value
-500.00...500.00 Hz
Critical frequency function
Description Jogging 2 frequency reference.
Enables/disables the critical frequencies function. Also determines whether the specified ranges are effective in both rotating directions or not. See also section Critical speeds/frequencies (page 123).
Def/FbEq16
See par. 46.02
0000b
Bit
Name
Information
0
Crit freq
1 = Enable: Critical frequencies enabled.
0 = Disable: Critical frequencies disabled.
1
Sign mode
1 = According to par: The signs of parameters 28.52...28.57 are taken
into account.
0 = Absolute: Parameters 28.52...28.57 are handled as absolute values. Each range is effective in both directions of rotation.
28.52 28.53 28.54 28.55 28.56 28.57
0000b...0011b Critical frequency 1 low
-500.00...500.00 Hz Critical frequency 1 high
-500.00...500.00 Hz Critical frequency 2 low
-500.00...500.00 Hz Critical frequency 2 high
-500.00...500.00 Hz Critical frequency 3 low
-500.00...500.00 Hz Critical frequency 3 high
-500.00...500.00 Hz
Critical frequencies configuration word. Defines the low limit for critical frequency 1. Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of 28.53 Critical frequency 1 high. Low limit for critical frequency 1.
Defines the high limit for critical frequency 1. Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 28.52 Critical frequency 1 low. High limit for critical frequency 1.
Defines the low limit for critical frequency 2. Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of 28.55 Critical frequency 2 high. Low limit for critical frequency 2.
Defines the high limit for critical frequency 2. Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 28.54 Critical frequency 2 low. High limit for critical frequency 2.
Defines the low limit for critical frequency 3. Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of 28.57 Critical frequency 3 high. Low limit for critical frequency 3.
Defines the high limit for critical frequency 3. Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 28.56 Critical frequency 3 low. High limit for critical frequency 3.
1 = 1 0.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 0.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 0.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 0.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 0.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 0.00 Hz
See par. 46.02
280 Parameters
No. 28.71
28.72 28.73 28.74 28.75
Name/Value Freq ramp set selection
Acc/Dec time 1 Acc/Dec time 2 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved FBA A Reserved EFB DCU CW bit 10 Other [bit] Freq acceleration time 1
0.000...1800.000 s Freq deceleration time 1
0.000...1800.000 s Freq acceleration time 2 0.000...1800.000 s Freq deceleration time 2 0.000...1800.000 s
Description
Def/FbEq16
Selects a source that switches between the two sets of
DI5
acceleration/deceleration times defined by parameters
28.72...28.75.
0 = Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are in force
1 = Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are in force
0.
0
1.
1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
8...17
For Transparent16 and Transparent32 profiles only. DCU
18
control word bit 10 received through the fieldbus adapter.
19
Only for the DCU profile. DCU control word bit 10 received 20 through the embedded fieldbus interface.
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Defines acceleration time 1 as the time required for the frequency to change from zero to the frequency defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling. After this frequency has been reached, the acceleration continues with the same rate to the value defined by parameter 30.14 Maximum frequency.
If the reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate, the motor will follow the acceleration rate.
If the reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate, the motor frequency will follow the reference.
If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive torque limits.
20.000 s
Acceleration time 1.
10 = 1 s
Defines deceleration time 1 as the time required for the frequency to change from the frequency defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling (not from parameter 30.14 Maximum frequency) to zero.
If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too short, ensure that DC overvoltage control (30.30 Overvoltage control) is on.
Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application, the drive should be equipped with braking equipment such as a brake chopper and brake resistor.
20.000 s
Deceleration time 1.
10 = 1 s
Defines acceleration time 2. See parameter 28.72 Freq acceleration time 1.
60.000 s
Acceleration time 2.
10 = 1 s
Defines deceleration time 2. See parameter 28.73 Freq deceleration time 1.
60.000 s
Deceleration time 2.
10 = 1 s
Parameters 281
No. 28.76
Name/Value
Freq ramp in zero source
Active Inactive DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Other [bit]
Description
Def/FbEq16
Selects a source that forces the frequency reference to zero. Inactive
0 = Force frequency reference to zero 1 = Normal operation
0.
0
1.
1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
282 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
28.82 Shape time 1
Description
Def/FbEq16
Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps used with the set 1.
0.000 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for slow ramps.
0.001...1000.000 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for lifting applications. The S-curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between.
Acceleration:
0.000 s
Speed
Linear ramp: 28.82 = 0 s
Linear ramp: 28.82 = 0 s
S-curve ramp: 28.82 > 0 s
Deceleration: Speed
S-curve ramp: 28.82 > 0 s
Time
S-curve ramp: 28.82 > 0 s
Linear ramp: 28.82 = 0 s
Linear ramp: 28.82 = 0 s
S-curve ramp: 28.82 > 0 s
Time
28.83
0.000...1800.000 s Shape time 2 0.000...1800.000 s
Ramp shape at start and end of acceleration and deceleration.
Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps used with the set 2. See parameter 28.82 Shape time 1.
Ramp shape at start and end of acceleration and deceleration.
10 = 1 s 0.000 s 10 = 1 s
Parameters 283
No. Name/Value 28.92 Frequency ref act 3
28.96
-500.00...500.00 Hz
Frequency ref act 7
28.97
-500.00...500.00 Hz
Frequency ref unlimited
-500.00...500.00 Hz
30 30 Limits
30.01 Limit word 1
Description Displays the frequency reference after the function applied by parameter 28.13 Ext1 frequency function (if any), and after selection (19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection). See the control chain diagram on page 524. This parameter is read-only. Frequency reference after selection.
Displays the frequency reference after application of constant frequencies, control panel reference, etc. See the control chain diagram on page 524. This parameter is read-only. Frequency reference 7.
Displays the frequency reference after application of critical frequencies, but before ramping and limiting. See the control chain diagram on page 525. This parameter is read-only. Frequency reference before ramping and limiting.
Drive operation limits.
Displays limit word 1. This parameter is read-only.
Def/FbEq16 -
See par. 46.02 -
See par. 46.02 -
See par. 46.02
-
Bit 0
1...2 3
4
5
6
7 8 9 10 11...15
Name
Description
Torq lim
1 = Drive torque is being limited by the motor control (undervoltage control, current control, load angle control or pull-out control), or by the torque limits defined by parameters.
Reserved
Torq ref max
1 = Torque reference ramp input is being limited by 26.09 Maximum torque ref, 30.20 Maximum torque 1, 30.26 Power motoring limit or 30.27 Power generating limit. See the diagram on page 533.
Torq ref min
1 = Torque reference ramp input is being limited by 26.08 Minimum torque ref, 30.19 Minimum torque 1, 30.26 Power motoring limit or
30.27 Power generating limit. See the diagram on page 533.
Tlim max speed 1 = Torque reference is being limited by the rush control because of maximum speed limit (30.12 Maximum speed)
Tlim min speed 1 = Torque reference is being limited by the rush control because of minimum speed limit (30.11 Minimum speed)
Max speed ref lim 1 = Speed reference is being limited by 30.12 Maximum speed
Min speed ref lim 1 = Speed reference is being limited by 30.11 Minimum speed
Max freq ref lim 1 = Frequency reference is being limited by 30.14 Maximum frequency
Min freq ref lim 1 = Frequency reference is being limited by 30.13 Minimum frequency
Reserved
0000h...FFFFh
Limit word 1.
1 = 1
284 Parameters
No. 30.02
Name/Value Torque limit status
Description
Displays the torque controller limitation status word. This parameter is read-only.
Def/FbEq16 -
Bit
Name
Description
0
Undervoltage *1 = Intermediate DC circuit undervoltage
1
Overvoltage
*1 = Intermediate DC circuit overvoltage
2
Minimum torque *1 = Torque is being limited by 30.19 Minimum torque 1, 30.26 Power
motoring limit or 30.27 Power generating limit
3
Maximum torque *1 = Torque is being limited by 30.20 Maximum torque 1, 30.26 Power
motoring limit or 30.27 Power generating limit
4
Internal current 1 = An inverter current limit (identified by bits 8...11) is active
5
Load angle
(With permanent magnet motors and reluctance motors only)
1 = Load angle limit is active, ie. the motor cannot produce any more torque
6
Motor pullout (With asynchronous motors only)
Motor pull-out limit is active, ie. the motor cannot produce any more torque
7
Reserved
8
Thermal
1 = Input current is being limited by the main circuit thermal limit
9
Max current
*1 = Maximum output current (IMAX) is being limited
10
User current
*1 = Output current is being limited by 30.17 Maximum current
11
Thermal IGBT *1 = Output current is being limited by a calculated thermal current
value
12
IGBT
*1 = Output current is being limited because of estimated IGBT
overtemperature temperature
13
IGBT overload *1 = Output current is being limited because of IGBT junction to case
temperature
14...15 Reserved
*Only one out of bits 0...3, and one out of bits 9...11 can be on simultaneously. The bit typically indicates the limit that is exceeded first.
0000h...FFFFh
Torque limitation status word.
1 = 1
Parameters 285
No. 30.11
Name/Value Minimum speed
Description
Defines together with 30.12 Maximum speed the allowed speed range. See the figure below. A positive or zero minimum speed value defines two ranges, one positive and one negative. A negative minimum speed value defines one range.
WARNING! The absolute value of 30.11 Minimum speed must not be higher than the absolute value of 30.12 Maximum speed.
WARNING! In speed control mode only. In frequency control mode, use frequency limits (30.13 and 30.14).
Def/FbEq16 -1500.00 rpm
Speed 30.11 value < 0
30.12 Speed range allowed
0 Time
30.11
Speed
20.21 value = Request 30.11 value >= 0
30.12 Speed range allowed
30.11
0
-(30.11)
Time
Speed range allowed -(30.12)
Speed
20.21 value = Forward
30.11 value >= 0
30.12 Speed range allowed
30.11
0 -(30.11)
Time
-(30.12)
30.12
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Maximum speed
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Minimum allowed speed.
Defines together with 30.11 Minimum speed the allowed speed range. See parameter 30.11 Minimum speed. Note: This parameter does not affect the speed acceleration and deceleration ramp times. See parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
Maximum speed.
See par. 46.01 1500.00 rpm
See par. 46.01
286 Parameters
No. 30.13
Name/Value Minimum frequency
Description
Defines together with 30.14 Maximum frequency the allowed frequency range. See the figure. A positive or zero minimum frequency value defines two ranges, one positive and one negative. A negative minimum frequency value defines one range.
WARNING! The absolute value of 30.13 Minimum frequency must not be higher than the absolute value of 30.14 Maximum frequency. WARNING! in frequency control mode only.
Def/FbEq16 -50.00 Hz
Frequency
30.13 value < 0 30.14
Frequency range allowed 0
Time
30.13
Frequency
20.21 value = Request
30.13 value >= 0
30.14 Frequency range allowed
30.13
0
-(30.13)
Time
Frequency range allowed
-(30.14)
Frequency
20.21 value = Forward
30.13 value >= 0
30.14 30.13 Frequency range allowed
0 -(30.13)
Time
-(30.14)
30.14
-500.00...500.00 Hz
Maximum frequency
30.17
-500.00...500.00 Hz
Maximum current
0.00...3.24 A
Minimum frequency.
Defines together with 30.13 Minimum frequency the allowed frequency range. See parameter 30.13 Minimum frequency. Note: This parameter does not affect the frequency acceleration and deceleration ramp times. See parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
Maximum frequency.
Defines the maximum allowed motor current. This depends on the drive type; it is automatically determined on the basis of the rating. The system sets the default value to 90% of the rated current so you can increase the parameter value by 10% if needed.
Maximum motor current.
See par. 46.02 50.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 2.92 A
1 = 1 A
Parameters 287
No. Name/Value 30.18 Torq lim sel
Torque limit set 1 Torque limit set 2 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved EFB Other [bit]
Description
Selects a source that switches between two different predefined minimum torque limit sets.
0 = minimum torque limit defined by 30.19 and maximum torque limit defined by 30.20 are active 1 = minimum torque limit selected by 30.21 and maximum torque limit defined by 30.22 are active
The user can define two sets of torque limits, and switch between the sets using a binary source such as a digital input.
The first set of limits is defined by parameters 30.19 and 30.20. The second set has selector parameters for both the minimum (30.21) and maximum (30.22) limits that allows the use of a selectable analog source (such as an analog input).
Def/FbEq16
Torque limit set 1
0 AI1 AI2 PID 30.23 Other
30.19
30.21
30.18 1
0
User-defined minimum torque
limit
0 AI1 AI2 PID 30.24 Other
30.20
30.22
30.18 1
0
User-defined
maximum torque limit
Note: In addition to the user-defined limits, torque may be limited for other reasons (such as power limitation).
0 (minimum torque limit defined by 30.19 and maximum
0
torque limit defined by 30.20 are active).
1 (minimum torque limit selected by 30.21 and maximum
1
torque limit defined by 30.22 are active).
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
8...10
Only for the DCU profile. DCU control word bit 15 received 11 through the embedded fieldbus interface.
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
288 Parameters
No. 30.19 30.20 30.21
30.22
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Minimum torque 1
Defines a minimum torque limit for the drive (in percent of nominal motor torque). See diagram at parameter 30.18 Torq lim sel.
The limit is effective when
� the source selected by 30.18 Torq lim sel is 0, or
� 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 1.
-300.0%
-1600.0...0.0%
Minimum torque limit 1.
See par. 46.03
Maximum torque 1
Defines a maximum torque limit for the drive (in percent of nominal motor torque). See diagram at parameter 30.18 Torq lim sel.
The limit is effective when
� the source selected by 30.18 Torq lim sel is 0, or
� 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 1.
300.0%
0.0...1600.0%
Maximum torque 1.
See par. 46.03
Min torque 2 source Defines the source of the minimum torque limit for the drive (in percent of nominal motor torque) when
� the source selected by parameter 30.18 Torq lim sel is 1, or
� 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 2.
See diagram at 30.18 Torq lim sel.
Note: Any positive values received from the selected source are inverted.
Minimum torque 2
Zero
None.
0
AI1 scaled
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 212).
1
AI2 scaled
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 214).
2
Reserved
3...14
PID
40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID 15
controller).
Minimum torque 2 30.23 Minimum torque 2.
16
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Max torque 2 source
Defines the source of the maximum torque limit for the drive (in percent of nominal motor torque) when
� the source selected by parameter 30.18 Torq lim sel is 1, or
� 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 2.
See diagram at 30.18 Torq lim sel.
Note: Any negative values received from the selected source are inverted.
Maximum torque 2
Zero
None.
0
AI1 scaled
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 212).
1
AI2 scaled
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 214).
2
Reserved
3...14
PID
40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process PID 15
controller).
Maximum torque 2 30.24 Maximum torque 2.
16
Other
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Parameters 289
No. 30.23
30.24
30.26 30.27
30.30
30.31
Name/Value Minimum torque 2
-1600.0...0.0% Maximum torque 2
0.0...1600.0% Power motoring limit 0.00...600.00% Power generating limit
-600.00...0.00% Overvoltage control
Disable Enable Undervoltage control
Disable Enable
Description
Defines the minimum torque limit for the drive (in percent of nominal motor torque) when � the source selected by 30.18 Torq lim sel is 1, or � 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 2 and � 30.21 Min torque 2 source is set to Minimum torque 2. See diagram at 30.18 Torq lim sel.
Minimum torque limit 2.
Defines the maximum torque limit for the drive (in percent of nominal motor torque) when The limit is effective when � the source selected by 30.18 Torq lim sel is 1, or � 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 2 and � 30.22 Max torque 2 source is set to Maximum torque 2. See diagram at 30.18 Torq lim sel.
Maximum torque limit 2.
Defines the maximum allowed power fed by the inverter to the motor in percent of nominal motor power.
Maximum motoring power.
Defines the maximum allowed power fed by the motor to the inverter in percent of nominal motor power. Note: If your application, like a pump or a fan, requires that the motor must rotate in one direction only, use speed/ frequency limit (30.11 Minimum speed/30.13 Minimum frequency), or direction limit (20.21 Direction) to achieve this. Do not set parameter 30.19 Minimum torque 1 or 30.27 Power generating limit to 0%, as the drive is then not able to stop correctly.
Maximum generating power.
Enables the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link. Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit, the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque. Note: If the drive is equipped with a brake chopper and resistor, or a regenerative supply unit, the controller must be disabled.
Overvoltage control disabled.
Overvoltage control enabled.
Enables the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link. If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor torque in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit. By decreasing the motor torque, the inertia of the load will cause regeneration back to the drive, keeping the DC link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to a stop. This will act as a power-loss ride-through functionality in systems with high inertia, such as a centrifuge or a fan.
Undervoltage control disabled.
Undervoltage control enabled.
Def/FbEq16 -300.0%
See par. 46.03 300.0%
See par. 46.03 300.00% 1 = 1% -300.00%
1 = 1% Enable
0 1 Enable
0 1
290 Parameters
No. 30.35
Name/Value
Thermal current limitation
30.36
Disable
Enable
Speed limit selection
Not selected
Selected
Ext1 active Ext2 active Torque control DI1 DI2 DI3
Description
Def/FbEq16
Enables/disables temperature-based output current limitation. Enable
The limitation should only be disabled if required by the application.
Thermal current limitation disabled.
0
Thermal current limitation enabled.
1
Selects a source that switches between two different predefined adjustable speed limit sets.
0 = minimum speed limit defined by 30.11 and maximum speed limit defined by 30.12 are active 1 = minimum speed limit selected by 30.37 and maximum speed limit defined by 30.38 are active
The user can define two sets of speed limits, and switch between the sets using a binary source such as a digital input.
The first set of limits is defined by parameters 30.11 Minimum speed and 30.12 Maximum speed. The second set has selector parameters for both the minimum (30.37) and maximum (30.38) limits that allows the use of a selectable analog source (such as an analog input).
Not selected
0 AI1 AI2 Minimum speed Other
30.11
30.37
30.36 1
0
User-defined minimum speed
limit
0 AI1 AI2 Maximum speed Other
30.12
30.38
30.36 1
0
User-defined maximum speed
limit
Adjustable speed limits are disabled.
0
(Minimum speed limit defined by 30.11 Minimum speed and
maximum speed limit defined by 30.12 Maximum speed are
active).
Adjustable speed limits are enabled.
1
(Minimum speed limit defined by 30.37 Minimum speed
source and maximum speed limit defined by 30.38 Maximum
speed source are active).
Adjustable speed limits are enabled if EXT1 is active.
2
Adjustable speed limits are enabled if EXT2 is active.
3
Adjustable speed limits are enabled if Torque control mode 4 (vector motor control) is active.
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
5
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
6
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
7
Parameters 291
No. 30.37
Name/Value DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved Other [bit] Minimum speed source
30.38
Zero AI1 scaled AI2 scaled Reserved Minimum speed Other Maximum speed source
Zero AI1 scaled AI2 scaled Reserved Maximum speed Other 3311 Fault functions
31.01 External event 1 source
31.02
Active (false) Inactive (true) Reserved DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Other [bit] External event 1 type Fault
Description
Def/FbEq16
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
8
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
9
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
10
11
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Defines the source of a minimum speed limit for the drive when the source is selected by 30.36 Speed limit selection.
Note: In vector motor control mode only. In scalar motor control mode, use frequency limits 30.13 and 30.14.
Minimum speed
None.
0
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 212).
1
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 214).
2
3...10
30.11 Minimum speed.
11
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Defines the source of a maximum speed limit for the drive when the source is selected by 30.36 Speed limit selection.
Note: In vector motor control mode only. In scalar motor control mode, use frequency limits 30.13 and 30.14.
Maximum speed
None.
0
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 212).
1
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 214).
2
3...11
30.12 Maximum speed.
12
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Configuration of external events; selection of behavior of the drive upon fault situations.
Defines the source of external event 1.
See also parameter 31.02 External event 1 type.
0 = Trigger event 1 = Normal operation
Inactive (true)
0.
0
1.
1
2
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
3
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
4
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
5
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
6
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
7
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
8
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Selects the type of external event 1.
Fault
The external event generates a fault.
0
292 Parameters
No. 31.03
Name/Value
Warning
External event 2 source
31.04 31.05
External event 2 type
Fault
Warning
External event 3 source
31.06 31.07
External event 3 type
Fault
Warning
External event 4 source
31.08 31.09
External event 4 type
Fault
Warning
External event 5 source
31.10 31.11
External event 5 type
Fault
Warning
Fault reset selection
Not used Not used DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved
Description
The external event generates a warning.
Defines the source of external event 2. See also parameter 31.04 External event 2 type. For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1 source.
Selects the type of external event 2.
Def/FbEq16 1 Inactive (true)
Fault
The external event generates a fault.
The external event generates a warning.
Defines the source of external event 3. See also parameter 31.06 External event 3 type. For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1 source.
Selects the type of external event 3.
0 1 Inactive (true)
Fault
The external event generates a fault.
The external event generates a warning.
Defines the source of external event 4. See also parameter 31.08 External event 4 type. For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1 source.
Selects the type of external event 4.
0 1 Inactive (true)
Fault
The external event generates a fault.
The external event generates a warning.
Defines the source of external event 5. See also parameter 31.10 External event 5 type. For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1 source.
Selects the type of external event 5.
0 1 Inactive (true)
Fault
The external event generates a fault.
The external event generates a warning.
Selects the source of an external fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists. 0 -> 1 = Reset Note: A fault reset from the fieldbus interface is always observed regardless of this parameter.
0.
1.
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
0 1 Not used
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8...17
Parameters 293
No. 31.12
Name/Value Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Reserved Supervision 1 Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Other [bit] Autoreset selection
Description
Def/FbEq16
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
18
Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
19
Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
20
21...23
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
24
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
25
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
26
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Selects faults that are automatically reset. The parameter is a 16-bit word with each bit corresponding to a fault type. Whenever a bit is set to 1, the corresponding fault is automatically reset.
WARNING! Before you activate the function, make sure that no dangerous situations can occur. The function restarts the drive automatically and continues operation after a fault.
The bits of this binary number correspond to the following faults:
000h
Bit 0 1 2 3 4...9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fault Overcurrent Overvoltage Undervoltage AI supervision fault Reserved Selectable fault (see parameter 31.13 Selectable fault) External fault 1 (from source selected by parameter 31.01 External event 1 source) External fault 2 (from source selected by parameter 31.03 External event 2 source) External fault 3 (from source selected by parameter 31.05 External event 3 source) External fault 4 (from source selected by parameter 31.07 External event 4 source) External fault 5 (from source selected by parameter 31.09 External event 5 source)
0000h...FFFFh 31.13 Selectable fault
0000h...FFFFh 31.14 Number of trials
0...5
Automatic reset configuration word.
Defines the fault that can be automatically reset using parameter 31.12 Autoreset selection, bit 10. Faults are listed in chapter Fault tracing (page 464).
Fault code.
Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time defined by parameter 31.15 Total trials time.
Number of automatic resets.
1 = 1 0000h
10 = 1 0
10 = 1
294 Parameters
No. 31.15
31.16 31.19
31.21
Name/Value Total trials time
1.0...600.0 s Delay time 0.0...120.0 s Motor phase loss
No action Fault Supply phase loss No action Fault
Description
Defines a time window for automatic fault resets. The maximum number of attempts made during any period of this length is defined by 31.14 Number of trials. Note: If the fault condition remains and cannot be reset, each reset attempt will generate an event and start a new time window. In practice, if the specified number of resets (31.14) at specified intervals (31.16) take longer than the value of 31.15, the drive will continue to attempt resetting the fault until the cause is eventually removed.
Time for automatic resets.
Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an automatic reset. See parameter 31.12 Autoreset selection.
Autoreset delay.
Selects how the drive reacts when a motor phase loss is detected. In scalar motor control mode: � The supervision activates above 10% of the motor nominal
frequency. If any of the phase currents stays very small for a certain time limit, the output phase loss fault is given. � If the motor nominal current is below 1/6 of the drive nominal current or there is no motor connected, ABB recommends to disable the motor output phase loss function.
No action taken.
The drive trips on fault 3381 Output phase loss.
Selects how the drive reacts when a supply phase loss is detected.
No action taken.
The drive trips on fault 3130 Input phase loss.
Def/FbEq16 30.0 s
10 = 1 s 0.0 s 10 = 1 s Fault
0 1 Fault 0 1
Parameters 295
No. 31.22
Name/Value
STO indication run/stop
Fault/Fault Fault/Warning
Description
Selects which indications are given when one or both Safe torque off (STO) signals are switched off or lost. The indications also depend on whether the drive is running or stopped when this occurs.
The tables at each selection below show the indications generated with that particular setting.
When using Warning/Event/No indication and fieldbus control, check that the parameter 06.18 bit 7 STO = 0 before giving start command.
Notes:
� This parameter does not affect the operation of the STO function itself. The STO function will operate regardless of the setting of this parameter: a running drive will stop upon removal of one or both STO signals, and will not start until both STO signals are restored and all faults reset.
� The loss of only one STO signal always generates a fault as it is interpreted as a malfunction.
For more information on the STO, see chapter The Safe torque off function in the Hardware manual of the drive.
Inputs
IN1 IN2
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Indication (running or stopped)
Fault 5091 Safe torque off Faults 5091 Safe torque off and
FA81 Safe torque off 1 Faults 5091 Safe torque off and
FA82 Safe torque off 2 (Normal operation)
Def/FbEq16 Fault/Fault
0
1
Inputs
Indication
IN1 IN2
Running
Stopped
0
0
Fault 5091 Safe torque Warning A5A0 Safe
off
torque off
Faults 5091 Safe
Warning A5A0 Safe
0
1 torque off and FA81 torque off and fault
Safe torque off 1 FA81 Safe torque off 1
Faults 5091 Safe Warning A5A0 Safe
1
0 torque off and FA82 torque off and fault
Safe torque off 2 FA82 Safe torque off 2
1
1
(Normal operation)
296 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Fault/Event
Description
Inputs IN1 IN2
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Indication
Running
Stopped
Fault 5091 Safe torque Event B5A0 Safe
off
torque off
Faults 5091 Safe
Event B5A0 Safe
torque off and FA81 torque off and fault
Safe torque off 1 FA81 Safe torque off 1
Faults 5091 Safe
Event B5A0 Safe
torque off and FA82 torque off and fault
Safe torque off 2 FA82 Safe torque off 2
(Normal operation)
Def/FbEq16 2
Warning/Warning Event/Event
3
Inputs IN1 IN2
Indication (running or stopped)
0
0
Warning A5A0 Safe torque off
0
1
Warning A5A0 Safe torque off and fault FA81 Safe torque off 1
1
0
Warning A5A0 Safe torque off and fault FA82 Safe torque off 2
1
1
(Normal operation)
4
Inputs IN1 IN2
Indication (running or stopped)
0
0
Event B5A0 STO event
0
1
Event B5A0 STO event and fault FA81 Safe torque off 1
1
0
Event B5A0 STO event and fault FA82 Safe torque off 2
1
1
(Normal operation)
No indication/No
5
indication
Inputs IN1 IN2
Indication (running or stopped)
0
0
None
0
1
Fault FA81 Safe torque off 1
1
0
Fault FA82 Safe torque off 2
1
1
(Normal operation)
31.23
Wiring or earth fault
No action Fault
Selects how the drive reacts to incorrect input power and motor cable connection (ie. input power cable is connected to drive motor connection).
No action taken.
The drive trips on fault 3181 Wiring or earth fault.
Fault
0 1
Parameters 297
No. 31.24
31.25 31.26 31.27 31.28
Name/Value Stall function
No action Warning Fault Stall current limit 0.0...1600.0% Stall speed limit 0.00...10000.00 rpm Stall frequency limit 0.00...1000.00 Hz Stall time 0...3600 s
Description
Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition. A stall condition is defined as follows: � The drive exceeds the stall current limit (31.25 Stall current
limit), and � the output frequency is below the level set by parameter
31.27 Stall frequency limit or the motor speed is below the level set by parameter 31.26 Stall speed limit, and � the conditions above have been true longer than the time set by parameter 31.28 Stall time.
None (stall supervision disabled).
The drive generates an A780 Motor stall warning.
The drive trips on fault 7121 Motor stall.
Stall current limit in percent of the nominal current of the motor. See parameter 31.24 Stall function.
Stall current limit.
Stall speed limit in rpm. See parameter 31.24 Stall function.
Stall speed limit.
Stall frequency limit. See parameter 31.24 Stall function. Note: Setting the limit below 10 Hz is not recommended.
Stall frequency limit.
Stall time. See parameter 31.24 Stall function.
Stall time.
Def/FbEq16 No action
0 1 2 200.0% 150.00 rpm See par. 46.01 15.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 20 s -
298 Parameters
No. 31.30
Name/Value
Overspeed trip margin
Description
Defines, together with 30.11 Minimum speed and 30.12 Maximum speed, the maximum allowed speed of the motor (overspeed protection). If the speed (24.02 Used speed feedback) exceeds the speed limit defined by parameter 30.11 or 30.12 by more than the value of this parameter, the drive trips on the 7310 Overspeed fault.
WARNING! This function only supervises the speed in vector motor control mode. The function is not effective in scalar motor control mode.
Example: If the maximum speed is 1420 rpm and speed trip margin is 300 rpm, the drive trips at 1720 rpm.
Def/FbEq16 500.00 rpm
Speed (24.02)
Overspeed trip level
31.30
30.12
0.00...10000.00 rpm
0 Time
31.30
30.11
Overspeed trip level
Overspeed trip margin.
See par. 46.01
Parameters 299
No. 31.31
Name/Value
Frequency trip margin
Description
Defines, together with 30.13 Minimum frequency and 30.14 Maximum frequency, the maximum allowed frequency of the motor (overfrequency protection). The absolute value of this overfrequency trip level is calculated by adding the value of this parameter to the higher of the absolute values of 30.13 Minimum frequency and 30.14 Maximum frequency. If the output frequency (01.06 Output frequency) exceeds the overfrequency trip level (ie. the absolute value of the output frequency exceeds the absolute value of the overfrequency trip level), the drive trips on the 73F0 Overfrequency fault.
Frequency
Def/FbEq16 15.00 Hz
Overfrequency trip level
31.31 ABS(30.14) ABS(30.14)
30.14
Time 30.13
31.31
Overfrequency trip level
31.32
0.00...10000.00 Hz Emergency ramp supervision
0...300%
Overfrequency trip margin.
Parameters 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision and 31.33 Emergency ramp supervision delay, together with the derivative of 24.02 Used speed feedback, provide a supervision function for emergency stop modes Off1 and Off3. The supervision is based on either
� observing the time within which the motor stops, or � comparing the actual and expected deceleration rates.
If this parameter is set to 0%, the maximum stop time is directly set in parameter 31.33. Otherwise, 31.32 defines the maximum allowed deviation from the expected deceleration rate, which is calculated from parameters 23.11...23.15 (Off1) or 23.23 Emergency stop time (Off3). If the actual deceleration rate (24.02) deviates too much from the expected rate, the drive trips on 73B0 Emergency ramp failed, sets bit 8 of 06.17 Drive status word 2, and coasts to a stop. If 31.32 is set to 0% and 31.33 is set to 0 s, the emergency stop ramp supervision is disabled.
See also parameter 21.04 Emergency stop mode.
Maximum deviation from expected deceleration rate.
1 = 1 Hz 0%
1 = 1%
300 Parameters
No. 31.33
Name/Value
Emergency ramp supervision delay
31.35
0...100 s
Main fan fault function
Fault Warning No action 3322 Supervision
32.01 Supervision status
Description
If parameter 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision is set to 0%, this parameter defines the maximum time an emergency stop (mode Off1 or Off3) is allowed to take. If the motor has not stopped when the time elapses, the drive trips on 73B0 Emergency ramp failed, sets bit 8 of 06.17 Drive status word 2, and coasts to a stop. If 31.32 is set to a value other than 0%, this parameter defines a delay between the receipt of the emergency stop command and the activation of the supervision. ABB recommends to specify a short delay to allow the speed change rate to stabilize.
Maximum ramp-down time, or supervision activation delay.
Selects how the drive reacts when a main cooling fan fault is detected. Note: With an inverter unit consisting of one or more frame R8i inverter modules with speed-controlled fans, it may be possible to continue operation even if one main fan of a module stops. When fan failure is detected, the control program will automatically.
Triggers fault when the speed is below ID-run result or predetermined value.
Triggers warning when the speed is below ID-run result or predetermined value.
No action taken.
Def/FbEq16 0 s
1 = 1 s Warning
0 1 2
Configuration of signal supervision functions 1...6. Six values can be chosen to be monitored; a warning or fault is generated whenever predefined limits are exceeded. See also section Signal supervision (page 168).
Signal supervision status word. Indicates whether the values monitored by the signal supervision functions are within or outside their respective limits. Note: This word is independent of the drive actions defined by parameters 32.06, 32.16, 32.26, 32.36, 32.46 and 32.56.
0000b
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6...15
Name Supervision 1 active Supervision 2 active Supervision 3 active Supervision 4 active Supervision 5 active Supervision 6 active Reserved
Description 1 = Signal selected by 32.07 is outside its limits. 1 = Signal selected by 32.17 is outside its limits. 1 = Signal selected by 32.27 is outside its limits. 1 = Signal selected by 32.37 is outside its limits. 1 = Signal selected by 32.47 is outside its limits. 1 = Signal selected by 32.27 is outside its limits.
32.05
0000...0111b
Supervision 1 function
Disabled
Signal supervision status word.
Selects the mode of signal supervision function 1. Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.07) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.09 and 32.10 respectively). The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.06.
Signal supervision 1 not in use.
1 = 1 Disabled
0
Parameters 301
No.
32.06 32.07
Name/Value Low High
Abs low
Abs high
Both
Abs both
Hysteresis
Supervision 1 action
No action Warning Fault Fault if running Supervision 1 signal Zero Speed Reserved Frequency Current Reserved Torque DC voltage Output power AI1 AI2 Reserved Speed ref ramp in Speed ref ramp out Speed ref used Torque ref used Freq ref used
Description Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower limit. Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper limit. Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls below its (absolute) lower limit. Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal rises above its (absolute) upper limit. Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit or rises above its high limit. Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its (absolute) high limit. Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value defined by the upper limit + 0.5 � hysteresis range (32.11 Supervision 1 hysteresis). The action is deactivated when the signal falls below the value defined by the lower limit - 0.5 � hysteresis range. Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 1 exceeds its limits. Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by 32.01 Supervision status. No warning or fault generated. Warning A8B0 ABB Signal supervision 1 is generated. Drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision 1. If running, the drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision 1. Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision function 1. None. 01.01 Motor speed used (page 181).
01.06 Output frequency (page 181). 01.07 Motor current (page 181).
01.10 Motor torque (page 181). 01.11 DC voltage (page 181). 01.14 Output power (page 182). 12.11 AI1 actual value (page 212). 12.21 AI2 actual value (page 214).
23.01 Speed ref ramp input (page 256). 23.02 Speed ref ramp output (page 256). 24.01 Used speed reference (page 260). 26.02 Torque reference used (page 266). 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output (page 271).
Def/FbEq16 1 2
3
4
5
6
7
No action
0 1 2 3 Frequency
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11...17 18 19 20 21 22
302 Parameters
No.
32.08 32.09 32.10 32.11
32.15
Name/Value Inverter temperature Process PID output Process PID feedback Process PID setpoint Process PID deviation Other Supervision 1 filter time 0.000 ... 30.000 s Supervision 1 low -21474836.00... 21474836.00 Supervision 1 high -21474836.00... 21474836.00 Supervision 1 hysteresis
0.00...100000.00 Supervision 2 function
Disabled Low High
Abs low
Abs high
Both
Abs both
Description 05.11 Inverter temperature (page 187).
Def/FbEq16 23
40.01 Process PID output actual (page 332).
24
40.02 Process PID feedback actual (page 332).
25
40.03 Process PID setpoint actual (page 332).
26
40.04 Process PID deviation actual (page 333).
27
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by signal supervision 1.
0.000 s
Signal filter time.
1000 = 1 s
Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 1.
0.00
Low limit.
-
Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 1.
0.00
Upper limit.
-
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal supervision 1. This parameter applies to all selections for parameter 32.05 Supervision 1 function, not just Hysteresis (7). Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value defined by the upper limit + 0.5 � hysteresis. The action is deactivated when the signal falls below the value defined by the lower limit - 0.5 � hysteresis.
Hysteresis.
Selects the mode of signal supervision function 2. Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.17) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.19 and 32.20 respectively). The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.16.
Signal supervision 2 not in use.
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower limit.
Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper limit.
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls below its (absolute) lower limit.
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit or rises above its high limit.
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its (absolute) high limit.
0.00
Disabled
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Parameters 303
No. 32.16
32.17 32.18 32.19 32.20 32.21
32.25
Name/Value Hysteresis
Supervision 2 action
No action Warning Fault Fault if running Supervision 2 signal
Supervision 2 filter time 0.000 ... 30.000 s Supervision 2 low -21474836.00... 21474836.00 Supervision 2 high -21474836.00... 21474836.00 Supervision 2 hysteresis
0.00...100000.00 Supervision 3 function
Disabled Low High
Abs low
Abs high
Description
Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value defined by the upper limit + 0.5 � hysteresis range (32.21 Supervision 2 hysteresis). The action is deactivated when the signal falls below the value defined by the lower limit - 0.5 � hysteresis range.
Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 2 exceeds its limits. Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by 32.01 Supervision status.
No warning or fault generated.
Warning A8B1 ABB Signal supervision 2 is generated.
Drive trips on fault 80B1 Signal supervision 2.
If running, the drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision 1.
Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision function 2. For the available selections, see parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal.
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by signal supervision 2.
Signal filter time.
Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 2.
Low limit.
Def/FbEq16 7
No action
0 1 2 3 Current
0.000 s 1000 = 1 s 0.00 -
Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 2.
0.00
Upper limit.
-
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal supervision 2. This parameter applies to all selections for parameter 32.15 Supervision 2 function, not just Hysteresis (7). Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value defined by the upper limit + 0.5 � hysteresis. The action is deactivated when the signal falls below the value defined by the lower limit - 0.5 � hysteresis.
Hysteresis.
Selects the mode of signal supervision function 3. Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.27) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.29 and 32.30 respectively). The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.26.
Signal supervision 3 not in use.
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower limit.
Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper limit.
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls below its (absolute) lower limit.
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
0.00
Disabled
0 1 2 3 4
304 Parameters
No.
32.26
32.27 32.28 32.29 32.30 32.31
32.35
Name/Value Both
Abs both
Hysteresis
Supervision 3 action
No action Warning Fault Fault if running Supervision 3 signal
Supervision 3 filter time 0.000 ... 30.000 s Supervision 3 low -21474836.00... 21474836.00 Supervision 3 high -21474836.00... 21474836.00 Supervision 3 hysteresis
0.00...100000.00 Supervision 4 function
Disabled Low High
Description
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit or rises above its high limit.
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its (absolute) high limit.
Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value defined by the upper limit + 0.5 � hysteresis range (32.31 Supervision 3 hysteresis). The action is deactivated when the signal falls below the value defined by the lower limit - 0.5 � hysteresis range.
Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 3 exceeds its limits. Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by 32.01 Supervision status.
No warning or fault generated.
Warning A8B2 ABB Signal supervision 3 is generated.
Drive trips on fault 80B2 Signal supervision 3.
If running, the drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision 1.
Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision function 3. For the available selections, see parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal.
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by signal supervision 3.
Signal filter time.
Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 3.
Low limit.
Def/FbEq16 5 6
7
No action
0 1 2 3 Torque
0.000 s 1000 = 1 s 0.00 -
Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 3.
0.00
Upper limit.
-
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal supervision 3. This parameter applies to all selections for parameter 32.25 Supervision 3 function, not just Hysteresis (7). Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value defined by the upper limit + 0.5 � hysteresis. The action is deactivated when the signal falls below the value defined by the lower limit - 0.5 � hysteresis.
Hysteresis.
Selects the mode of signal supervision function 4. Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.37) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.39 and 32.30 respectively). The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.36.
Signal supervision 4 not in use.
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower limit.
Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper limit.
0.00
Disabled
0 1 2
Parameters 305
No.
32.36
32.37 32.38 32.39 32.40 32.41
Name/Value Abs low Abs high Both Abs both
Hysteresis
Supervision 4 action
No action Warning Fault Fault if running Supervision 4 signal
Supervision 4 filter time 0.000 ... 30.000 s Supervision 4 low -21474836.00... 21474836.00 Supervision 4 high -21474836.00... 21474836.00 Supervision 4 hysteresis
0.00...100000.00
Description
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls below its (absolute) lower limit.
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit or rises above its high limit.
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its (absolute) high limit.
Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value defined by the upper limit + 0.5 � hysteresis range (32.41 Supervision 4 hysteresis). The action is deactivated when the signal falls below the value defined by the lower limit - 0.5 � hysteresis range.
Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 4 exceeds its limits. Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by 32.01 Supervision status.
No warning or fault generated.
Warning A8B3 ABB Signal supervision 4 is generated.
Drive trips on fault 80B3 Signal supervision 4.
Drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision 1 if the motor is running.
Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision function 4. For the available selections, see parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal.
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by signal supervision 4.
Signal filter time.
Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 4.
Low limit.
Def/FbEq16 3 4 5 6
7
No action
0 1 2 3 Zero
0.000 s 1000 = 1 s 0.00 -
Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 4.
0.00
Upper limit.
-
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal
0.00
supervision 4.This parameter applies to all selections for
parameter 32.35 Supervision 4 function, not just Hysteresis
(7).
Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value
defined by the upper limit + 0.5 � hysteresis. The action is
deactivated when the signal falls below the value defined by
the lower limit - 0.5 � hysteresis.
Hysteresis.
-
306 Parameters
No. 32.45
32.46
32.47 32.48 32.49 32.50
Name/Value Supervision 5 function
Disabled Low High
Abs low
Abs high
Both
Abs both
Hysteresis
Supervision 5 action
No action Warning Fault Fault if running
Supervision 5 signal
Supervision 5 filter time 0.000 ... 30.000 s Supervision 5 low -21474836.00... 21474836.00 Supervision 5 high -21474836.00... 21474836.00
Description
Selects the mode of signal supervision function 5. Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.47) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.49 and 32.40 respectively). The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.46.
Signal supervision 5 not in use.
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower limit.
Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper limit.
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls below its (absolute) lower limit.
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit or rises above its high limit.
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its (absolute) high limit.
Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value defined by the upper limit + 0.5 � hysteresis range (32.51 Supervision 5 hysteresis). The action is deactivated when the signal falls below the value defined by the lower limit - 0.5 � hysteresis range.
Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 5 exceeds its limits. Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by 32.01 Supervision status.
No warning or fault generated.
Warning A8B4 ABB Signal supervision 5 is generated.
Drive trips on fault 80B4 Signal supervision 5.
Drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision 1 if the motor is running.
Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision function 5. For the available selections, see parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal.
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by signal supervision 5.
Signal filter time.
Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 5.
Low limit.
Def/FbEq16 Disabled
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7
No action
0 1 2 3 Zero
0.000 s 1000 = 1 s 0.00 -
Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 5.
0.00
Upper limit.
-
Parameters 307
No. 32.51 32.55
32.56 32.57 32.58
Name/Value Supervision 5 hysteresis
0.00...100000.00 Supervision 6 function
Disabled Low High Abs low Abs high Both Abs both
Hysteresis
Supervision 6 action
No action Warning Fault Fault if running Supervision 6 signal
Supervision 6 filter time 0.000 ... 30.000 s
Description
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal supervision 5. This parameter applies to all selections for parameter 32.45 Supervision 5 function, not just Hysteresis (7). Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value defined by the upper limit + 0.5 � hysteresis. The action is deactivated when the signal falls below the value defined by the lower limit - 0.5 � hysteresis.
Hysteresis.
Selects the mode of signal supervision function 6. Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter 32.57) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.59 and 32.50 respectively). The action to be taken when the condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.56.
Signal supervision 6 not in use.
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower limit.
Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper limit.
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls below its (absolute) lower limit.
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit or rises above its high limit.
Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal falls below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its (absolute) high limit.
Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value defined by the upper limit + 0.5 � hysteresis range (32.61 Supervision 6 hysteresis). The action is deactivated when the signal falls below the value defined by the lower limit - 0.5 � hysteresis range.
Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 6 exceeds its limits. Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated by 32.01 Supervision status.
No warning or fault generated.
Warning A8B5 ABB Signal supervision 6 is generated.
Drive trips on fault 80B5 Signal supervision 6.
Drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision 1 if the motor is running.
Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision function 6. For the available selections, see parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal.
Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by signal supervision 6.
Signal filter time.
Def/FbEq16 0.00
Disabled
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
No action
0 1 2 3 Zero
0.000 s 1000 = 1 s
308 Parameters
No. 32.59
32.60
32.61
Name/Value
Supervision 6 low
-21474836.00... 21474836.00
Supervision 6 high
-21474836.00... 21474836.00
Supervision 6 hysteresis
0.00...100000.00 3344 Timed functions
34.01 Timed functions status
Description Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 6. Low limit.
Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 6. Upper limit.
Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal supervision 6. This parameter applies to all selections for parameter 32.55 Supervision 6 function, not just Hysteresis (7). Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value defined by the upper limit + 0.5 � hysteresis. The action is deactivated when the signal falls below the value defined by the lower limit - 0.5 � hysteresis. Hysteresis.
Configuration of the timed functions. See also section Timed functions (page 134). Status of the combined timers. The status of a combined timer is the logical OR of all timers connected to it. This parameter is read-only.
Def/FbEq16 0.00 0.00 0.00
-
-
Bit 0 1 2 3...15
Name Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Reserved
Description 1 = Active. 1 = Active. 1 = Active.
0000h...0FFFFh 34.02 Timer status
Status of combined timers 1...3.
Status of timers 1...12. This parameter is read-only.
Bit
Name
0
Timer 1
1
Timer 2
2
Timer 3
3
Timer 4
4
Timer 5
5
Timer 6
6
Timer 7
7
Timer 8
8
Timer 9
9
Timer 10
10
Timer 11
11
Timer 12
12...15 Reserved
Description 1 = Active. 1 = Active. 1 = Active. 1 = Active. 1 = Active. 1 = Active. 1 = Active. 1 = Active. 1 = Active. 1 = Active. 1 = Active. 1 = Active.
1 = 1 -
0000h...FFFFh
Timer status.
1 = 1
Parameters 309
No. 34.04
Name/Value
Season/exception day status
Description
Status of seasons 1...3, exception weekday and exception holiday. Only one season can be active at a time. A day can be a workday and a holiday at the same time. This parameter is read-only.
Def/FbEq16 -
Bit 0 1 2 3 4...9 10 11 12...15
Name Season 1 Season 2 Season 3 Season 4 Reserved Exception workday Exception holiday Reserved
Description 1 = Active. 1 = Active. 1 = Active. 1 = Active.
1 = Active. 1 = Active.
34.10
0000h...FFFFh
Timed functions enable
Disabled Enabled DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Other [bit]
Status of the seasons and exception weekday and holiday. 1 = 1
Selects the source for the timed functions enable signal.
0 = Disabled. 1 = Enabled.
Disabled
0.
0
1.
1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
310 Parameters
No. 34.11
Name/Value
Timer 1 configuration
Description Defines when timer 1 is active.
Def/FbEq16
0111 1000 0000b
Parameters 311
No. Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Bit
Name
0
Monday
1
Tuesday
2
Wednesday
3
Thursday
4
Friday
5
Saturday
6
Sunday
7
Season 1
8
Season 2
9
Season 3
10
Season 4
11
Exceptions
12
Holidays
13
Workdays
14...15 Reserved
Description
1 = Monday is an active start day.
1 = Tuesday is an active start day.
1 = Wednesday is an active start day.
1 = Thursday is an active start day.
1 = Friday is an active start day.
1 = Saturday is an active start day.
1 = Sunday is an active start day.
1 = Timer is active in season 1.
1 = Timer is active in season 2.
1 = Timer is active in season 3.
1 = Timer is active in season 4.
0 = Exceptions days are disabled. The timer follows only weekday and season settings (bits 0...10 in the timer configuration) and the start time and duration of the timer (see 34.12 and 34.13).Exception day settings, parameters 34.70...34.90, do not have any effect on this timer.
1 = Exception days are enabled. The timer is active during the weekdays and seasons defined with bits 0...10 and the times defined by 34.12 and 34.13.In addition, the timer is active during the exception days defined with bit 12, bit 13 and parameters 34.70...34.90. If bit 12 and bit 13 are both zero, the timer is inactive during the exception days.
0 = Timer is inactive on exception days configured as "Holiday".
1 = Timer is active on exception days configured as "Holiday".
This bit has no effect unless bit 11 = 1 (Exceptions days are enabled).When bits 11 and 12 are both 1, the timer is active during the weekdays and seasons defined with bits 0...10 and times defined by parameters 34.12 and 34.13. In addition, the timer is active when the ongoing day is defined as Exception day Holiday by parameters 34.70...34.90 and the current time matches with the time range defined by 34.12 and 34.13. During Exception days, weekday and season bits are ignored.
0 = Timer is inactive on exception days configured as "Workday".
1 = Timer is active on exception days configured as "Workday".
This bit has no effect unless bit 11 = 1 (Exceptions enabled). When bits 11 and 13 are both 1, the Timer is active during the weekdays and seasons defined with bits 0...10 and the times defined by parameters 34.12 and 34.13.
312 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Examples of how the timer configuration defines when the Timer is active are shown below.
Bits of parameter 34.11 Timer 1 configuration
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Season1 Season2 Season3 Season4 Exceptions Holidays Workdays
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Example 1: Timer is active during the times of the day defined by other parameters every Weekday and every Season.
Exception day settings (34.70...34.90) do not have any effect on the Timer.
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Example 2: Timer is active during the times of the day defined by other parameters from Mon to Fri, every Season.
Exception day settings (34.70...34.90) do not have any effect on the Timer.
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Example 3: Timer is active during the times of the day defined by other parameters from Mon to Fri, only during Season 3 (can be configured as e.g. summer).
Exception day settings (34.70...34.90) do not have any effect on the Timer.
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 Example 4: Timer is active during the times of the day defined by other parameters from Mon to Fri, every Season.
In addition, the Timer is active every Exception day Holidays, regardless what is the day or season.
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 Example 5: Timer is active during the times of the day defined by other parameters on Mon, Wed, Fri and Sun, during Season1 and Season 2.
In addition, the Timer is active every Exception day Workdays, regardless what is the day or season.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 Example 6: Timer is active during the times of the day defined by other parameters every Weekday and every Season.
The Timer is inactive during all Exception days.
34.12 34.13
0000h...FFFFh Timer 1 start time
00:00:00...23:59:59 Timer 1 duration
00 00:00...07 00:00
Configuration of timer 1.
Defines the daily start time of timer 1. The time can be changed in second steps. The timer can be started at an other time than the start time. For example, if the timer's duration is more than one day and the active session starts during the time, the timer is started at 00:00 and stopped when there is no duration left.
Daily start time of the timer.
Defines the duration of timer 1. The duration can be changed in minute steps. The duration can extend over the change of the day but if an exception day becomes active, the period is interrupted at midnight. In the same way the period started on an exception day stays active only until the end of the day, even if the duration is longer. The timer will continue after a break if there is duration left.
Timer duration.
1 = 1 00:00:00
1 = 1 00 00:00
1 = 1
No. 34.14
34.15 34.16 34.17
34.18 34.19 34.20
34.21 34.22 34.23
34.24 34.25 34.26
34.27 34.28 34.29
34.30 34.31 34.32
34.33 34.34 34.35
34.36 34.37 34.38
34.39 34.40 34.41
34.42 34.43 34.44
34.45 34.46
Name/Value
Timer 2 configuration
Timer 2 start time
Timer 2 duration
Timer 3 configuration
Timer 3 start time
Timer 3 duration
Timer 4 configuration
Timer 4 start time
Timer 4 duration
Timer 5 configuration
Timer 5 start time
Timer 5 duration
Timer 6 configuration
Timer 6 start time
Timer 6 duration
Timer 7 configuration
Timer 7 start time
Timer 7 duration
Timer 8 configuration
Timer 8 start time
Timer 8 duration
Timer 9 configuration
Timer 9 start time
Timer 9 duration
Timer 10 configuration
Timer 10 start time
Timer 10 duration
Timer 11 configuration
Timer 11 start time
Timer 11 duration
Timer 12 configuration
Timer 12 start time
Timer 12 duration
Description See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. See 34.13 Timer 1 duration. See 34.11 Timer 1 configuration.
See 34.12 Timer 1 start time. See 34.13 Timer 1 duration.
Parameters 313
Def/FbEq16 0111 1000 0000b 00:00:00 00 00:00 0111 1000 0000b 00:00:00 00 00:00 0111 1000 0000b 00:00:00 00 00:00 0111 1000 0000b 00:00:00 00 00:00 0111 1000 0000b 00:00:00 00 00:00 0111 1000 0000b 00:00:00 00 00:00 0111 1000 0000b 00:00:00 00 00:00 0111 1000 0000b 00:00:00 00 00:00 0111 1000 0000b 00:00:00 00 00:00 0111 1000 0000b 00:00:00 00 00:00 0111 1000 0000b 00:00:00 00 00:00
314 Parameters
No. 34.60
34.61 34.62 34.63 34.70
34.71
Name/Value Season 1 start date
01.01...31.12 Season 2 start date Season 3 start date Season 4 start date Number of active exceptions
0...16 Exception types
Description
Defines the start date of season 1 in format dd.mm, where dd is the number of the day and mm is the number of the month. The season changes at midnight. One season can be active at a time. Timers are started on exception days even if they are not inside the active season. The season start dates (1...4) must be given in increasing order to use all seasons. The default value is interpreted that the season is not configured. If the season start dates are not in increasing order and the value is something else than the default value, a season configuration warning is given.
Season start date.
Defines the start date of season 2. See 34.60 Season 1 start date.
Defines the start date of season 3. See 34.60 Season 1 start date.
Defines the start date of season 4. See 34.60 Season 1 start date.
Defines how many of the exceptions are active by specifying the last active one. All preceding exceptions are active. Exceptions 1...3 are periods (duration can be defined) and exceptions 4...16 are days (duration is always 24 hours). Example: If the value is 4, exceptions 1...4 are active, and exceptions 5...16 are not active.
Number of active exception periods or days.
Defines the types of exceptions 1...16 as workday or holiday. Exceptions 1...3 are periods (duration can be defined) and exceptions 4...16 are days (duration is always 24 hours).
Def/FbEq16 01.01.
01.01. 01.01. 01.01. 3
0000b
Bit
Name
0
Exception 1
1
Exception 2
2
Exception 3
3
Exception 4
4
Exception 5
5
Exception 6
6
Exception 7
7
Exception 8
8
Exception 9
9
Exception 10
10
Exception 11
11
Exception 12
12
Exception 13
13
Exception 14
14
Exception 15
15
Exception 16
Description 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday 0 = Workday. 1 = Holiday
0000h...FFFFh
Types of exception period or days.
1 = 1
Parameters 315
No. 34.72
34.73
34.74 34.75 34.76 34.77 34.78
34.79 34.80 34.81 34.82 34.83 34.84 34.85 34.86 34.87 34.88 34.89 34.90
Name/Value Exception 1 start
01.01....31.12. Exception 1 length
0...60 d Exception 2 start Exception 2 length Exception 3 start Exception 3 length Exception day 4 01.01....31.12.
Exception day 5 Exception day 6 Exception day 7 Exception day 8 Exception day 9 Exception day 10 Exception day 11 Exception day 12 Exception day 13 Exception day 14 Exception day 15 Exception day 16
Description
Defines the start date of the exception period in format dd.mm, where dd is the number of the day and mm is the number of the month. The timer started on an exception day is always stopped at 23:59:59 even if it has duration left. The same date can be configured to be holiday and workday. The date is active if any of exception days are active.
Start date of exception period 1.
Defines the length of the exception period in days. Exception period is handled the same as a number of consecutive exception days.
Length of exception period 1.
See 34.72 Exception 1 start.
See 34.73 Exception 1 length.
See 34.72 Exception 1 start.
See 34.73 Exception 1 length.
Defines the date of exception day 4.
Start date of exception day 4. The timer started on an exception day is always stopped at 23:59:59 even if it has duration left.
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
See 34.79 Exception day 4
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
See 34.79 Exception day 4.
Def/FbEq16 01.01.
0d
1 = 1 01.01. 0d 01.01. 0d 01.01.
01.01 01.01 01.01 01.01 01.01 01.01 01.01 01.01 01.01 01.01 01.01 01.01
316 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
34.100 Timed function 1
Description
Defines which timers are connected to combined timer 1. 0 = Not connected. 1 = Connected. See 34.01 Timed functions status.
Bit
Name
0
Timer 1
1
Timer 2
2
Timer 3
3
Timer 4
4
Timer 5
5
Timer 6
6
Timer 7
7
Timer 8
8
Timer 9
9
Timer 10
10
Timer 11
11
Timer 12
12...15 Reserved
Description 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active.
34.101 34.102 34.110
0000h...FFFFh Timed function 2
Timed function 3
Boost time function
Timers connected to combined timer 1.
Defines which timers are connected to combined timer 2. See 34.01 Timed functions status.
Defines which timers are connected to combined timer 3. See 34.01 Timed functions status.
Defines which combined timers (that is, timers that are connected to the combined timers) are activated with the extra time function.
Bit 0 1 2 3...15
Name Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Reserved
Description 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active. 0 = Inactive. 1 = Active.
34.111
0000h...FFFFh
Boost time activation source
Off On DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6
Combined timers including the extra timer. Selects the source of extra time activation signal. 0 = Disabled. 1 = Enabled. 0. 1. Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
Def/FbEq16 0000b
1 = 1 0000b 0000b 0000b
1 = 1 Off 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Parameters 317
No. Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
34.112
Boost time duration
Defines the time inside which the extra time is deactivated after extra time activation signal is switched off.
Example: If parameter 34.111 Boost time activation source is set to DI1 and 34.112 Boost time duration is set to 00 01:30, the extra time is active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after digital input DI is deactivated.
00 00:00
00 00:00...07 00:00 Extra time duration.
1 = 1
35 35 Motor thermal protection
Motor thermal protection settings such as temperature measurement configuration, load curve definition and motor fan control configuration.
See also section Motor thermal protection (page 160).
35.01 Motor estimated temperature
Displays the motor temperature as estimated by the internal motor thermal protection model (see parameters 35.50...35.55). The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
This parameter is read-only.
-60...1000 �C or -76...1832 �F
Estimated motor temperature.
1 = 1�
35.02 Measured temperature 1
Displays the temperature received through the source
-
defined by parameter 35.11 Temperature 1 source. The unit is
selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
-60...5000 �C or -76...9032 �F, 0...5000 ohm or [35.12] ohm
35.03 Measured temperature 2
This parameter is read-only.
Measured temperature 1. Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is ohms. If the measured temperature source selection (35.11) is PTC analog I/O or PTC AI/DI Voltage divider tree, the motor thermal protection function converts the analog input signal (35.14) to PTC resistance value (ohms), and shows it in this parameter. This is the case even the parameter name and unit refer to motor temperature (�C or �F). You cannot change the unit to ohm by the time being (96.16).
Displays the temperature received through the source defined by parameter 35.21 Temperature 2 source. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
1 = 1 unit -
-60...5000 �C or -76...9032 �F, 0...5000 ohm or [35.22] ohm
35.05 Motor overload level
0.0...300.0%
This parameter is read-only.
Measured temperature 2. Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is ohms. If the measured temperature source selection (35.21) is PTC analog I/O or PTC AI/DI Voltage divider tree, the motor thermal protection function converts the analog input signal (35.24) to PTC resistance value (ohms), and shows it in this parameter. This is the case even the parameter name and unit refer to motor temperature (�C or �F). You cannot change the unit to ohm by the time being (96.16).
Shows the motor overload level as a percent of the motor overload fault limit. See section Motor overload protection (page 165).
Motor overload level. 0.0% No motor overloading 88.0% Motor overloaded to warning level 100.0% Motor overloaded to fault level
1 = 1 unit
0.0 10 = 1%
318 Parameters
No. 35.11
Name/Value Temperature 1 source
Disabled Estimated temperature
KTY84 analog I/O
Reserved 1 � Pt100 analog I/O
2 � Pt100 analog I/O 3 � Pt100 analog I/O Reserved Direct temperature
Description
Selects the source from which measured temperature 1 is read. Usually this source is from a sensor connected to the motor controlled by the drive, but it could be used to measure and monitor a temperature from other parts of the process as long as a suitable sensor is used as per the selection list. Note: Depending on this parameter selection the control program hides the non-relevant parameters in this group.
None. Temperature monitoring function 1 is disabled.
Estimated motor temperature (see parameter 35.01 Motor estimated temperature). The temperature is estimated from an internal drive calculation. It is important to set up the ambient temperature of the motor in 35.50 Motor ambient temperature.
KTY84 sensor connected to the analog input selected by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog output. The following settings are required: � Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt). � In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1 excitation. The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees.
Pt100 sensor connected to a standard analog input selected by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog output. The following settings are required: � Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt). � In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1 excitation. The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees.
As selection 1 � Pt100 analog I/O, but with two sensors connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves measurement accuracy significantly.
As selection 1 � Pt100 analog I/O, but with three sensors connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves measurement accuracy significantly.
The temperature is taken from the source selected by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source. The value of the source is assumed to be in the unit of temperature specified by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
Def/FbEq16 Estimated temperature
0 1 2
3...4 5
6 7 9...10 11
Parameters 319
No. Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
KTY83 analog I/O
KTY83 sensor connected to the analog input selected by
12
parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog
output.
The following settings are required:
� Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
� In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1
excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with
its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The
voltage is read by the analog input and converted into
degrees.
1 � Pt1000 analog I/O
Pt1000 sensor connected to a standard analog input selected 13 by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog output.
The following settings are required:
� Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
� In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1 excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees.
2 � Pt1000 analog As selection 1 � Pt1000 analog I/O, but with two sensors
14
I/O
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
3 � Pt1000 analog As selection 1 � Pt1000 analog I/O, but with three sensors 15
I/O
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
Ni1000
Ni1000 sensor connected to the analog input selected by
16
parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog
output.
The following settings are required:
� Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
� In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 1
excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with
its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The
voltage is read by the analog input and converted into
degrees.
Reserved
17...18
PTC analog I/O
PTC sensor connected to analog input selected by parameter 20 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog output.
The required settings are the same as with selection KTY84 analog I/O.
Note: With this selection, the control program converts the analog signal to PTC resistance value in ohms and shows it in parameter 35.02. The parameter name and unit still refer to temperature.
320 Parameters
No. 35.12
Name/Value PTC AI/DI Voltage Divider tree
Temperature 1 fault limit
Description
PTC sensor connected to the analog input selected by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source. A special voltage divider connection must be in use instead of the normal PTC connection. The voltage divider connection uses the terminals +10 V, digital input and analog input. See the drive hardware manual for the actual connection.
This selection makes it possible to connect the PTC when no analog output is available. The required settings are same as with selection KTY84 analog I/O. Note:
� Make sure that the digital input that you connect to this voltage divider circuit is not used for any other purpose in the control program.
� With this selection, the parameter 35.02 shows PTC resistance in ohms, not motor temperature even the parameter name and unit still refer to temperature.
Defines the fault limit for temperature supervision function 1. When measured temperature 1 exceeds the limit, the drive trips on fault 4981 External temperature 1.
The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
Def/FbEq16 23
130 �C or 266 �F or 4500 ohm
-60...5000 �C or -76...9032 �F or 0...5000 ohm
35.13 Temperature 1 warning limit
Fault limit for temperature monitoring function 1.
Note: If the measured temperature source selection (35.11) is PTC analog I/O or PTC AI/DI Voltage divider tree, the motor thermal protection function converts the analog input signal (35.14) to PTC resistance value (ohms). Also this limit is then a resistance value even the parameter name and unit refer to motor temperature (�C or �F). You cannot change the unit to ohm by the time being (96.16).
Defines the warning limit for temperature supervision function 1. When measured temperature 1 exceeds the limit, warning A491 External temperature 1 is generated.
The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
1=1�
110 �C or 230 �F or 4000 ohm
-60...5000 �C or -76...9032 �F or 0...5000 ohm
35.14 Temperature 1 AI source
Not selected AI1 actual value AI2 actual value Other
Warning limit for temperature monitoring function 1.
Note: If the measured temperature source selection (35.11) is PTC analog I/O or PTC AI/DI Voltage divider tree, the motor thermal protection function converts the analog input signal (35.14) to PTC resistance value (ohms). Also this limit is then a resistance value even the parameter name and unit refer to motor temperature (�C or �F). You cannot change the unit to ohm by the time being (96.16).
1=1�
Specifies the analog input when the setting of 35.11 Temperature 1 source requires measurement through an
analog input.
Not selected
None.
0
Analog input AI1 on the control unit.
1
Analog input AI2 on the control unit.
2
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Parameters 321
No. 35.21
Name/Value
Temperature 2 source
Description
Selects the source from which measured temperature 2 is read. See parameter 35.11.
Def/FbEq16
Estimated temperature
Disabled Estimated temperature KTY84 analog I/O
Reserved 1 � Pt100 analog I/O
2 � Pt100 analog I/O 3 � Pt100 analog I/O Reserved Direct temperature
None. Temperature monitoring function 2 is disabled.
Estimated motor temperature (see parameter 35.01 Motor estimated temperature). The temperature is estimated from an internal drive calculation. It is important to set up the ambient temperature of the motor in 35.50 Motor ambient temperature.
KTY84 sensor connected to the analog input selected by parameter 35.24 Temperature 2 AI source and an analog output. The following settings are required: � Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt). � In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 2 excitation. The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees.
Pt100 sensor connected to a standard analog input selected by parameter 35.24 Temperature 2 AI source and an analog output. The following settings are required: � Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt). � In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 2 excitation. The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees.
As selection 1 � Pt100 analog I/O, but with two sensors connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves measurement accuracy significantly.
As selection 1 � Pt100 analog I/O, but with three sensors connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves measurement accuracy significantly.
The temperature is taken from the source selected by parameter 35.24 Temperature 2 AI source. The value of the source is assumed to be in the unit of temperature specified by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
0 1 2
3...4 5
6 7 19...10 11
322 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
KTY83 analog I/O
KTY83 sensor connected to the analog input selected by
12
parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog
output.
The following settings are required:
� Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
� In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 2
excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with
its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The
voltage is read by the analog input and converted into
degrees.
1 � Pt1000 analog I/O
Pt1000 sensor connected to a standard analog input selected 13 by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog output.
The following settings are required:
� Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
� In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 2 excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and converted into degrees.
2 � Pt1000 analog As selection 1 � Pt1000 analog I/O, but with two sensors
14
I/O
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
3 � Pt1000 analog As selection 1 � Pt1000 analog I/O, but with three sensors 15
I/O
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
Ni1000
Ni1000 sensor connected to the analog input selected by
16
parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog
output.
The following settings are required:
� Set the appropriate analog input unit selection parameter
in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
� In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp sensor 2
excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along with
its temperature, the voltage over the sensor increases. The
voltage is read by the analog input and converted into
degrees.
Reserved
17...18
PTC analog I/O
PTC sensor connected to analog input selected by parameter 20 35.24 Temperature 2 AI source and an analog output.
The required settings are the same as with selection KTY84 analog I/O.
Note: With this selection, the control program converts the analog signal to PTC resistance value in ohms and shows it in parameter 35.03. The parameter name and unit still refer to temperature.
Parameters 323
No. 35.22
Name/Value PTC AI/DI Voltage Divider tree
Temperature 2 fault limit
Description
PTC sensor connected to the analog input selected by parameter 35.24 Temperature 2 AI source. A special voltage divider connection must be in use instead of the normal PTC connection. The voltage divider connection uses the terminals +10 V, digital input and analog input. See the drive hardware manual for the actual connection.
This selection makes it possible to connect the PTC when no analog output is available. The required settings are same as with selection KTY84 analog I/O. Note:
� Make sure that the digital input that you connect to this voltage divider circuit is not used for any other purpose in the control program.
� With this selection, the parameter 35.03 shows PTC resistance in ohms, not motor temperature even the parameter name and unit still refer to temperature.
Defines the fault limit for temperature supervision function 2. When measured temperature 1 exceeds the limit, the drive trips on fault 4982 External temperature 2.
The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
Def/FbEq16
130 �C or 266 �F or 4500 ohm
-60...5000 �C or -76...9032 �F or 0...5000 ohm
35.23 Temperature 2 warning limit
Fault limit for temperature monitoring function 2.
Note: If the measured temperature source selection (35.21) is PTC analog I/O or PTC AI/DI Voltage divider tree, the motor thermal protection function converts the analog input signal (35.24) to PTC resistance value (ohms). Also this limit is then a resistance value even the parameter name and unit refer to motor temperature (�C or �F). You cannot change the unit to ohm by the time being (96.16).
Defines the warning limit for temperature supervision function 2. When measured temperature 1 exceeds the limit, warning A492 External temperature 2 is generated.
The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
1=1�
110 �C or 230 �F or 4000 ohm
-60...5000 �C or -76...9032 �F or 0...5000 ohm
35.24 Temperature 2 AI source
Not selected AI1 actual value AI2 actual value Other
Warning limit for temperature monitoring function 2.
Note: If the measured temperature source selection (35.21) is PTC analog I/O or PTC AI/DI Voltage divider tree, the motor thermal protection function converts the analog input signal (35.24) to PTC resistance value (ohms). Also this limit is then a resistance value even the parameter name and unit refer to motor temperature (�C or �F). You cannot change the unit to ohm by the time being (96.16).
1=1�
Specifies the analog input when the setting of 35.11 Temperature 1 source requires measurement through an
analog input.
Not selected
None.
0
Analog input AI1 on the control unit.
1
Analog input AI2 on the control unit.
2
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
324 Parameters
No. 35.50
Name/Value
Motor ambient temperature
35.51
-60...100 �C or -76 ... 212 �F
Motor load curve
I/IN (%) 150
Description
Def/FbEq16
Defines the ambient temperature of the motor for the motor 20 �C or thermal protection model. The unit is selected by parameter 68 �F 96.16 Unit selection.
The motor thermal protection model estimates the motor temperature on the basis of parameters 35.50...35.55. The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the load curve, and decreases if it operates in the region below the load curve.
WARNING! The model cannot protect the motor if the motor does not cool properly because of dust, dirt, etc.
Ambient temperature.
1 = 1�
Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 35.52 Zero speed load and 35.53 Break point. The load curve is used by the motor thermal protection model to estimate the motor temperature.
When the parameter is set to 100%, the maximum load is taken as the value of parameter 99.06 Motor nominal current (higher loads heat up the motor). The load curve level should be adjusted if the ambient temperature differs from the nominal value set in 35.50 Motor ambient temperature.
110%
I = Motor current IN = Nominal motor current
35.51 100
50 35.52
50...150% 35.52 Zero speed load
25...150%
35.53
Drive output frequency
Maximum load for the motor load curve.
Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 35.51 Motor load curve and 35.53 Break point. Defines the maximum motor load at zero speed of the load curve. A higher value can be used if the motor has an external motor fan to boost the cooling. See the motor manufacturer's recommendations. See parameter 35.51 Motor load curve.
Zero speed load for the motor load curve.
1 = 1% 70%
1 = 1%
Parameters 325
No. Name/Value 35.53 Break point
1.00...500.00 Hz 35.54 Motor nominal
temperature rise
Description
Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 35.51 Motor load curve and 35.52 Zero speed load. Defines the break point frequency of the load curve ie. the point at which the motor load curve begins to decrease from the value of parameter 35.51 Motor load curve towards the value of parameter 35.52 Zero speed load. See parameter 35.51 Motor load curve.
Break point for the motor load curve.
Defines the temperature rise of the motor above ambient when the motor is loaded with nominal current. See the motor manufacturer's recommendations. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
Def/FbEq16 45.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 80 �C or 176 �F
Temperature
Motor nominal temperature rise
Ambient temperature
0...300 �C or 32...572 �F
Temperature rise.
Time 1 = 1�
326 Parameters
No. 35.55
Name/Value
Motor thermal time constant
Description
Def/FbEq16
Defines the thermal time constant for use with the motor thermal protection model, defined as the time to reach 63% of the nominal motor temperature. See the motor manufacturer's recommendations.
For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA class motors, use the rule of thumb: Motor thermal time equals 35 times t6, where t6 (in seconds) is specified by the motor manufacturer as the time that the motor can safely operate at six time its rated current.
The thermal time for Class 10 trip curve is 350 s, for Class 20 trip curve 700 s and for Class 30 trip curve 1050 s.
256 s
Motor current
100%
Temperature rise
100% 63%
Time
Motor thermal time
Time
35.56
100...10000 s
Motor overload action
No action
Warning only
Warning and fault
35.57 Motor overload class
Class 5 Class 10 Class 20
Motor thermal time constant.
Selects the action taken when motor overload is detected. See section Motor overload protection (page 165).
No action taken.
Drive generates warning A783 Motor overload when the motor is overloaded to the warning level, that is, parameter 35.05 Motor overload level reaches value 88.0%.
Drive generates warning A783 Motor overload when the motor is overloaded to the warning level, that is, parameter 35.05 Motor overload level reaches value 88.0%. Drive trips on fault 7122 Motor overload when the motor is overloaded to the fault level, that is, parameter 35.05 Motor overload level reaches value 100.0%.
Defines the motor overload class to be used. The class of protection is specified by the user as the time for tripping at 7.2 times (IEC 60947-4-1) or 6 times (NEMA ICS) the tripping level current. See section Motor overload protection (page 165).
Motor overload class 5.
Motor overload class 10.
Motor overload class 20.
1 = 1 s Warning and fault 0 1
2
Class 20
0 1 2
Parameters 327
No. Name/Value Class 30 Class 40
3366 Load analyzer
36.01 PVL signal source
36.02
Not selected Motor speed used Reserved Output frequency Motor current Reserved Motor torque DC voltage Output power Reserved Speed ref ramp in Speed ref ramp out Speed ref used Torque ref used Freq ref used Reserved Process PID out Other PVL filter time
0.00...120.00 s 36.06 AL2 signal source
Description Motor overload class 30. Motor overload class 40.
Def/FbEq16 3 4
Peak value and amplitude logger settings. See also section Load analyzer (page 169).
Selects the signal to be monitored by the peak value logger.
The signal is filtered using the filtering time specified by parameter 36.02 PVL filter time.
The peak value is stored, along with other pre-selected signals at the time, into parameters 36.10...36.15.
The peak value logger can be reset using parameter 36.09 Reset loggers. The logger is also reset whenever the signal source is changed. The date and time of the last reset are stored into parameters 36.16 and 36.17 respectively.
Output power
None (peak value logger disabled).
0
01.01 Motor speed used (page 181).
1
2
01.06 Output frequency (page 181).
3
01.07 Motor current (page 181).
4
5
01.10 Motor torque (page 181).
6
01.11 DC voltage (page 181).
7
01.14 Output power (page 182).
8
9
23.01 Speed ref ramp input (page 256).
10
23.02 Speed ref ramp output (page 256).
11
24.01 Used speed reference (page 260).
12
26.02 Torque reference used (page 266).
13
28.02 Frequency ref ramp output (page 271).
14
15
40.01 Process PID output actual (page 332).
16
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Peak value logger filtering time. See parameter 36.01 PVL signal source.
2.00 s
Peak value logger filtering time.
100 = 1 s
Selects the signal to be monitored by amplitude logger 2. The signal is sampled at 200 ms intervals.
The results are displayed by parameters 36.40...36.49. Each parameter represents an amplitude range, and shows what portion of the samples fall within that range.
The signal value corresponding to 100% is defined by parameter 36.07 AL2 signal scaling.
Amplitude logger 2 can be reset using parameter 36.09 Reset loggers. The logger is also reset whenever the signal source or scaling is changed. The date and time of the last reset are stored into parameters 36.50 and 36.51 respectively.
For the selections, see parameter 36.01 PVL signal source.
Motor torque
328 Parameters
No. 36.07 36.09
36.10 36.11 36.12 36.13 36.14 36.15 36.16 36.17 36.20
36.21 36.22 36.23 36.24
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
AL2 signal scaling Defines the signal value that corresponds to 100% amplitude. 100.00
0.00...32767.00
Signal value corresponding to 100%.
1 = 1
Reset loggers
Resets the peak value logger and/or amplitude logger 2. (Amplitude logger 1 cannot be reset.)
Done
Done
Reset completed or not requested (normal operation).
0
All
Reset both the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2.
1
PVL
Reset the peak value logger.
2
AL2
Reset amplitude logger 2.
3
PVL peak value
Peak value recorded by the peak value logger.
0.00
-32768.00... 32767.00
Peak value.
1 = 1
PVL peak date
The date on which the peak value was recorded.
01.01.1980
-
Peak occurrence date.
-
PVL peak time
The time at which the peak value was recorded.
00:00:00
-
Peak occurrence time.
-
PVL current at peak Motor current at the moment the peak value was recorded. 0.00 A
-32768.00... 32767.00 A
Motor current at peak.
1 = 1 A
PVL DC voltage at Voltage in the intermediate DC circuit of the drive at the
peak
moment the peak value was recorded.
0.00 V
0.00...2000.00 V DC voltage at peak.
10 = 1 V
PVL speed at peak Motor speed at the moment the peak value was recorded. 0.00 rpm
-30000.00... 30000.00 rpm
Motor speed at peak.
See par. 46.01
PVL reset date
The date on which the peak value logger was last reset.
01.01.1980
-
Last reset date of the peak value logger.
-
PVL reset time
The time at which the peak value logger was last reset.
00:00:00
-
Last reset time of the peak value logger.
-
AL1 0 to 10%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 0 and 10%. 100% corresponds to the Imax value given in the ratings table in chapter Technical data in the Hardware manual.
0.00%
0.00...100.00%
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 0 and 10%.
1 = 1%
AL1 10 to 20%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that 0.00% fall between 10 and 20%.
0.00...100.00%
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 10 and 20%.
1 = 1%
AL1 20 to 30%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that 0.00% fall between 20 and 30%.
0.00...100.00%
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 20 and 30%.
1 = 1%
AL1 30 to 40%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that 0.00% fall between 30 and 40%.
0.00...100.00%
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 30 and 40%.
1 = 1%
AL1 40 to 50%
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that 0.00% fall between 40 and 50%.
0.00...100.00%
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 40 and 50%.
1 = 1%
Parameters 329
No. Name/Value 36.25 AL1 50 to 60%
0.00...100.00% 36.26 AL1 60 to 70%
0.00...100.00% 36.27 AL1 70 to 80%
0.00...100.00% 36.28 AL1 80 to 90%
0.00...100.00% 36.29 AL1 over 90%
0.00...100.00% 36.40 AL2 0 to 10%
0.00...100.00% 36.41 AL2 10 to 20%
0.00...100.00% 36.42 AL2 20 to 30%
0.00...100.00% 36.43 AL2 30 to 40%
0.00...100.00% 36.44 AL2 40 to 50%
0.00...100.00% 36.45 AL2 50 to 60%
0.00...100.00% 36.46 AL2 60 to 70%
0.00...100.00% 36.47 AL2 70 to 80%
0.00...100.00% 36.48 AL2 80 to 90%
0.00...100.00% 36.49 AL2 over 90%
0.00...100.00%
Description
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 50 and 60%.
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 50 and 60%.
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 60 and 70%.
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 60 and 70%.
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 70 and 80%.
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 70 and 80%.
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 80 and 90%.
Amplitude logger 1 samples between 80 and 90%.
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that exceed 90%.
Amplitude logger 1 samples over 90%.
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 0 and 10%.
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 0 and 10%.
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 10 and 20%.
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 10 and 20%.
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 20 and 30%.
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 20 and 30%.
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 30 and 40%.
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 30 and 40%.
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 40 and 50%.
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 40 and 50%.
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 50 and 60%.
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 50 and 60%.
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 60 and 70%.
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 60 and 70%.
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 70 and 80%.
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 70 and 80%.
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 80 and 90%.
Amplitude logger 2 samples between 80 and 90%.
Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that exceed 90%.
Amplitude logger 2 samples over 90%.
Def/FbEq16 0.00%
1 = 1% 0.00%
1 = 1% 0.00%
1 = 1% 0.00%
1 = 1% 0.00%
1 = 1% 0.00%
1 = 1% 0.00%
1 = 1% 0.00%
1 = 1% 0.00%
1 = 1% 0.00%
1 = 1% 0.00%
1 = 1% 0.00%
1 = 1% 0.00%
1 = 1% 0.00%
1 = 1% 0.00%
1 = 1%
330 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
36.50 AL2 reset date
-
36.51 AL2 reset time
-
3377 User load curve
37.01 ULC output status word
Description
The date on which amplitude logger 2 was last reset.
Last reset date of amplitude logger 2.
The time at which amplitude logger 2 was last reset.
Last reset time of amplitude logger 2.
Settings for user load curve. See also section User load curve (page 127).
Displays the status of the monitored signal. The status is shown only while the drive is running. (The status word is independent of the actions and delays selected by parameters 37.03, 37.04, 37.41 and 37.42.) This parameter is read-only.
Def/FbEq16 01.01.1980 00:00:00 -
0000h
Bit
Name
0
Under load limit
1
Within load range
2
Overload limit
3
Outside load limit
4...15 Reserved
Description 1 = Signal lower than the underload curve. 1 = Signal between the underload and overload curve. 1 = Signal higher than the overload curve. 1 = Signal lower than the underload curve or higher than the overload curve.
37.02 37.03
0000h...FFFFh ULC supervision signal Not selected Motor speed % Motor current % Motor torque % Output power % of motor nominal Output power % of drive nominal Other ULC overload actions
Disabled Warning
Fault Warning/Fault
Status of the monitored signal. Selects the signal to be monitored. The function compares the absolute value of the signal against the load curve. No signal selected (monitoring disabled). 01.03 Motor speed % (page 181). 01.08 Motor current % of motor nom (page 181). 01.10 Motor torque (page 181). 01.15 Output power % of motor nom (page 182).
1 = 1 Motor torque % 0 1 2 3 4
01.16 Output power % of drive nom (page 182).
5
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Selects how the drive reacts if the absolute value of the
Disabled
monitored signal stays continuously above the overload curve
for longer than the value of 37.41 ULC overload timer.
No action taken.
0
The drive generates a warning (A8BE ULC overload
1
warning).
The drive trips on 8002 ULC overload fault.
2
The drive generates a warning (A8BE ULC overload warning) 3 if the signal stays continuously above the overload curve for half of the time defined by parameter 37.41 ULC overload timer.
The drive trips on 8002 ULC overload fault if the signal stays continuously above the overload curve for a time defined by parameter 37.41 ULC overload timer.
Parameters 331
No. 37.04
37.11
37.12 37.13 37.14 37.15 37.16
Name/Value ULC underload actions
Disabled Warning
Fault Warning/Fault
ULC speed table point 1
-30000.0...30000.0 rpm ULC speed table point 2 -30000.0...30000.0 rpm ULC speed table point 3 -30000.0...30000.0 rpm ULC speed table point 4 -30000.0...30000.0 rpm ULC speed table point 5 -30000.0...30000.0 rpm ULC frequency table point 1
-500.0...500.0 Hz
Description
Selects how the drive reacts if the absolute value of the monitored signal stays continuously above the overload curve for longer than the value of 37.42 ULC underload timer.
No action taken.
The drive generates a warning (A8BF ULC underload warning).
The drive trips on 8001 ULC underload fault.
The drive generates a warning (A8BF ULC underload warning) if the signal stays continuously below the underload curve for half of the time defined by parameter 37.41 ULC overload timer. The drive trips on 8001 ULC underload fault if the signal stays continuously above the underload curve for a time defined by parameter 37.42 ULC underload timer.
Defines the first of the five speed points on the X-axis of the user load curve. Speed points are used if parameter 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Vector or if 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Scalar and the reference unit is rpm. The five points must be in order from lowest to highest. The points are defined as positive values, but the range is symmetrically effective also in the negative direction. The monitoring is not active outside these two areas.
Speed.
Defines the second speed point. See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point 1.
Speed.
Defines the third speed point. See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point 1.
Speed.
Defines the fourth speed point. See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point 1.
Speed.
Defines the fifth speed point. See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point 1.
Speed.
Defines the first of the five frequency points on the X-axis of the user load curve. Frequency points are used if parameter 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Scalar and the reference unit is Hz. The five points must be in order from lowest to highest. The points are defined as positive values, but the range is symmetrically effective also in the negative direction. The monitoring is not active outside these two areas.
Frequency.
Def/FbEq16 Disabled 0 1 2 3
150.0 rpm
1 = 1 rpm 750.0 rpm 1 = 1 rpm 1290.0 rpm 1 = 1 rpm 1500.0 rpm 1 = 1 rpm 1800.0 rpm 1 = 1 rpm 5.0 Hz
1 = 1 Hz
332 Parameters
No. 37.17 37.18 37.19 37.20 37.21
37.22 37.23 37.24 37.25 37.31
37.32 37.33
Name/Value ULC frequency table point 2 -500.0...500.0 Hz ULC frequency table point 3 -500.0...500.0 Hz ULC frequency table point 4 -500.0...500.0 Hz ULC frequency table point 5 -500.0...500.0 Hz ULC underload point 1
-1600.0...1600.0% ULC underload point 2 -1600.0...1600.0% ULC underload point 3 -1600.0...1600.0% ULC underload point 4 -1600.0...1600.0% ULC underload point 5 -1600.0...1600.0% ULC overload point 1
-1600.0...1600.0% ULC overload point 2 -1600.0...1600.0% ULC overload point 3 -1600.0...1600.0%
Description
Defines the second frequency point. See parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1.
Frequency.
Defines the third frequency point. See parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1.
Frequency.
Defines the fourth frequency point. See parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1.
Frequency.
Defines the fifth frequency point. See parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1.
Frequency.
Defines the first of the five points on the Y-axis that together with the corresponding point on the X-axis (37.11 ULC speed table point 1...37.15 ULC speed table point 5 or 37.15 ULC speed table point 5...37.20 ULC frequency table point 5) define the underload (lower) curve. Each point of the underload curve must have a lower value than the corresponding overload point.
Underload point.
Defines the second underload point. See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1.
Underload point.
Defines the third underload point. See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1
Underload point.
Defines the fourth underload point. See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1
Underload point.
Defines the fifth underload point. See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1
Underload point.
Defines the first of the five points on the Y-axis that together with the corresponding point on the X-axis (37.11 ULC speed table point 1...37.15 ULC speed table point 5 or 37.15 ULC speed table point 5...37.20 ULC frequency table point 5) define the overload (higher) curve. Each point of the overload curve must have a higher value than the corresponding underload point.
Overload point.
Defines the second overload point. See parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1.
Overload point.
Defines the third overload point. See parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1.
Overload point.
Def/FbEq16 25.0 Hz 1 = 1 Hz 43.0 Hz 1 = 1 Hz 50.0 Hz 1 = 1 Hz 60.0 Hz 1 = 1 Hz 10.0%
1 = 1% 15.0% 1 = 1% 25.0% 1 = 1% 30.0% 1 = 1% 30.0% 1 = 1% 300.0%
1 = 1% 300.0% 1 = 1% 300.0% 1 = 1%
Parameters 333
No. 37.34
37.35
37.41
Name/Value
ULC overload point 4
-1600.0...1600.0%
ULC overload point 5
-1600.0...1600.0%
ULC overload timer
37.42
0.0...10000.0 s
ULC underload timer
0.0...10000.0 s 4400 Process PID set 1
40.01 Process PID output actual
40.02
-200000.00... 200000.00
Process PID feedback actual
40.03
-200000.00... 200000.00 PID customer units
Process PID setpoint actual
-200000.00... 200000.00 PID
customer units
Description
Defines the fourth overload point. See parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1.
Overload point.
Defines the fifth overload point. See parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1.
Overload point.
Defines the time for which the monitored signal must continuously stay above the overload curve before the drive takes the action selected by 37.03 ULC overload actions.
Overload timer.
Defines the time for which the monitored signal must continuously stay below the underload curve before the drive takes the action selected by 37.04 ULC underload actions.
Underload timer.
Parameter values for process PID control. The drive output can be controlled by the process PID. When the process PID control is enabled, the drive controls the process feedback to the reference value. Two different parameter sets can be defined for the process PID. One parameter set is in use at a time. The first set is made up of parameters 40.07...40.90 the second set is defined by the parameters in group 41 Process PID set 2. The binary source that defines which set is used is selected by parameter 40.57 PID set1/set2 selection. See also the control chain diagrams on pages 534 and 535. To set the PID customer unit, select Menu - Primary settings - PID - Unit on the panel.
Displays the output of the process PID controller. See the control chain diagram on page 535. This parameter is read-only.
Process PID controller output.
Displays the value of process feedback after source selection, mathematical function (parameter 40.10 Set 1 feedback function), and filtering. See the control chain diagram on page 534. This parameter is read-only.
Process feedback.
Displays the value of process PID setpoint after source selection, mathematical function (40.18 Set 1 setpoint function), limitation and ramping. See the control chain diagram on page 534. This parameter is read-only.
Setpoint for process PID controller.
Def/FbEq16 300.0% 1 = 1% 300.0% 1 = 1% 20.0 s 1=1s 20.0 s 1=1s
1 = 1 -
1 = 1 PID customer unit -
1 = 1 PID customer unit
334 Parameters
No. 40.04
40.05 40.06
Name/Value Process PID deviation actual
-200000.00... 200000.00 PID customer units Process PID trim output act -32768...32768 Process PID status word
Description Displays the process PID deviation. By default, this value equals setpoint - feedback, but deviation can be inverted by parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion. See the control chain diagram on page 535. This parameter is read-only. PID deviation.
Displays the process PID trimmed reference output. This parameter is read-only. Process PID trimmed reference. Displays status information on process PID control. This parameter is read-only.
Def/FbEq16 -
1 = 1 PID customer unit 1 = 1 -
Bit
Name
0
PID active
1
Setpoint frozen
2
Output frozen
3
PID sleep mode
4
Sleep boost
5
Trim mode
6
Tracking mode
7
Output limit high
8
Output limit low
9
Deadband active
10
PID set
11
Reserved
12
Internal setpoint
active
13...15 Reserved
Value 1 = Process PID control active. 1 = Process PID setpoint frozen. 1 = Process PID controller output frozen. 1 = Sleep mode active. 1 = Sleep boost active.
1 = Tracking function active. 1 = PID output is being limited by par. 40.37. 1 = PID output is being limited by par. 40.36. 1 = Deadband active (see par. 40.39) 0 = Parameter set 1 in use. 1 = Parameter set 2 in use.
1 = Internal setpoint active (see par. 40.16...40.23)
40.07
0000h...FFFFh
Process PID operation mode
40.08
Off On On when drive running Set 1 feedback 1 source Not selected AI1 scaled AI2 scaled Freq in scaled Reserved AI1 percent
Process PID control status word.
Activates/deactivates process PID control. Note: Process PID control is only available in external control; see section Local control vs. external control (page 105).
Process PID control inactive.
Process PID control active.
Process PID control is active when the drive is running.
1 = 1 Off
0 1 2
Selects the primary source of process feedback. See the control chain diagram on page 534. None. 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 212). 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 214). 11.39 Freq in 1 scaled value (see page 209).
12.101 AI1 percent value (see page 215).
AI2 percent
0 1 2 3 4...7 8
Parameters 335
No. 40.09 40.10
40.11 40.14
Name/Value AI2 percent Feedback data storage Other Set 1 feedback 2 source
Set 1 feedback function
In1 In1+In2 In1-In2 In1*In2 In1/In2 MIN(In1,In2) MAX(In1,In2) AVE(In1,In2) sqrt(In1) sqrt(In1-In2) sqrt(In1+In2) sqrt(In1)+sqrt(In2) Set 1 feedback filter time 0.000...30.000 s Set 1 setpoint scaling
-200000.00... 200000.00
Description 12.102 AI2 percent value (see page 215). 40.91 Feedback data storage (see page 347).
Def/FbEq16 9 10
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Selects the second source of process feedback. The second source is used only if the setpoint function requires two inputs.
For the selections, see parameter 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source.
Not selected
Defines how process feedback is calculated from the two
In1
feedback sources selected by parameters 40.08 Set 1
feedback 1 source and 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source.
The result of the function (for any selection) is multiplied by
parameter 40.90 Set 1 feedback multiplier.
Source 1.
0
Sum of sources 1 and 2.
1
Source 2 subtracted from source 1.
2
Source 1 multiplied by source 2.
3
Source 1 divided by source 2.
4
Smaller of the two sources.
5
Greater of the two sources.
6
Average of the two sources.
7
Square root of source 1.
8
Square root of (source 1 - source 2).
9
Square root of (source 1 + source 2).
10
Square root of source 1 + square root of source 2.
11
Defines the filter time constant for process feedback.
0.000 s
Feedback filter time.
Defines, together with parameter 40.15 Set 1 output scaling, a general scaling factor for the process PID control chain.
If the parameter is set to zero, automatic setpoint scaling is activated, where suitable setpoint scale is calculated according to selected setpoint source. Actual setpoint scale is shown in parameter 40.61 Setpoint scaling actual. The scaling can be utilized when, for example, the process setpoint is input in Hz, and the output of the PID controller is used as an rpm value in speed control. In this case, this parameter might be set to 50, and parameter 40.15 to the nominal motor speed at 50 Hz. In effect, the output of the PID controller = [40.15] when deviation (setpoint - feedback) = [40.14] and [40.32] = 1. Note: The scaling is based on the ratio between 40.14 and 40.15. For example, the values 50 and 1500 would produce the same scaling as 1 and 30.
Scaling.
1 = 1 s 0.00
1 = 1
336 Parameters
No. 40.15
Name/Value
Description
Set 1 output scaling See parameter 40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling. If the parameter is set to zero, scaling is automatic:
Operation mode (see par. 19.01) Speed control
Frequency control
Torque control
Scaling
46.01 Speed scaling 46.02 Frequency scaling
100%
Def/FbEq16 0.00
40.16
-200000.00... 200000.00
Set 1 setpoint 1 source
Not selected
Reserved
Internal setpoint
AI1 scaled AI2 scaled Reserved Motor potentiometer Reserved Freq in scaled AI1 percent AI2 percent
Control panel (ref saved)
Control panel (ref copied)
Process PID controller output base.
1 = 1
Selects the primary source of process PID setpoint. See the control chain diagram on page 534.
None.
Internal setpoint. See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 212).
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 214).
22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor potentiometer).
11.39 Freq in 1 scaled value (see page 209).
12.101 AI1 percent value (see page 215)
12.102 AI2 percent value (see page 215)
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 184) saved by the control system for the location where the control returns is used as the reference.
(Selection not available for parameter 71.16 Setpoint 1 source.)
Reference
t EXT1 -> EXT2
EXT1 reference EXT2 reference
Active reference Inactive reference
AI1 percent
0 1 2
3 4 5...7 8
9 10 11 12 13
Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 184) for 14 the previous control location is used as the reference when the control location changes if the references for the two
locations are of the same type (e.g. frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal is used as the new reference.
Reference
t EXT1 -> EXT2
EXT1 reference EXT2 reference
Active reference Inactive reference
Parameters 337
No. Name/Value FB A ref1 FB A ref2 Reserved EFB ref1 EFB ref2 Reserved Setpoint data storage
40.17
Other
Set 1 setpoint 2 source
40.18 Set 1 setpoint function
40.19
In1 In1+In2 In1-In2 In1*In2 In1/In2 MIN(In1,In2) MAX(In1,In2) AVE(In1,In2) sqrt(In1) sqrt(In1-In2) sqrt(In1+In2) sqrt(In1)+sqrt(In2) Set 1 internal setpoint sel1
Description
Def/FbEq16
03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 184).
15
03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 184).
16
17...18
03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 185).
19
03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 185).
20
21...23
40.92 Setpoint data storage (see page 347).
24
(Selection not available for parameter 71.16 Setpoint 1
source.)
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Selects the second source of process setpoint. The second source is used only if the setpoint function requires two inputs.
For the selections, see parameter 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source.
Not selected
Selects a function between the setpoint sources selected by In1 parameters 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source and 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source.
The result of the function (for any selection) is multiplied by parameter 40.89 Set 1 setpoint multiplier.
Source 1.
0
Sum of sources 1 and 2.
1
Source 2 subtracted from source 1.
2
Source 1 multiplied by source 2.
3
Source 1 divided by source 2.
4
Smaller of the two sources.
5
Greater of the two sources.
6
Average of the two sources.
7
Square root of source 1.
8
Square root of (source 1 - source 2).
9
Square root of (source 1 + source 2).
10
Square root of source 1 + square root of source 2.
11
Selects together with 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2 the internal setpoint out of the presets defined by parameters 40.21...40.24.
Note: Parameters 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source and 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source must be set to Internal setpoint.
Not selected
Source defined by par. 40.19
Source defined by par. 40.20
Setpoint preset active
0
0
0 (par. 40.24)
1
0
1 (par. 40.21)
0
1
2 (par. 40.22)
1
1
3 (par. 40.23)
Not selected
0.
0
Selected
1.
1
338 Parameters
No. 40.20
Name/Value DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Supervision 1 Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Other [bit] Set 1 internal setpoint sel2
40.21
Not selected Selected DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Supervision 1 Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Other [bit] Set 1 internal setpoint 1
-200000.00... 200000.00 PID
customer units
Description
Def/FbEq16
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
8...17
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
18
Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
19
Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
20
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
21
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
22
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
23
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Selects together with 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1 the
internal setpoint used out of the three internal setpoints defined by parameters 40.21...40.23. See table at 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
Not selected
0.
0
1.
1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
8...17
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
18
Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
19
Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
20
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
21
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
22
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
23
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Internal process setpoint 1. See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
0.00 PID
customer units
Internal process setpoint 1.
1 = 1 PID customer unit
Parameters 339
No. 40.22
40.23
40.24
40.26 40.27 40.28 40.29 40.30
Name/Value Set 1 internal setpoint 2
-200000.00... 200000.00PID customer units Set 1 internal setpoint 3
-200000.00... 200000.00 PID customer units Set 1 internal setpoint 0
-200000.00... 200000.00 PID customer units Set 1 setpoint min
-200000.00... 200000.00 PID customer units Set 1 setpoint max
-200000.00... 200000.00 PID customer units Set 1 setpoint increase time 0.0...1800.0 s Set 1 setpoint decrease time 0.0...1800.0 s Set 1 setpoint freeze enable
Not selected Selected DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved
Description Internal process setpoint 2. See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
Internal process setpoint 2.
Internal process setpoint 3. See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
Internal process setpoint 3.
Internal process setpoint 0. See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
Internal process setpoint 0.
Defines a minimum limit for the process PID controller setpoint. Minimum limit for process PID controller setpoint.
Defines a maximum limit for the process PID controller setpoint. Maximum limit for process PID controller setpoint.
Def/FbEq16 0.00 PID customer units 1 = 1 PID customer unit
0.00 PID customer units 1 = 1 PID customer unit
0.00 PID customer units 1 = 1 PID customer unit
0.00
1 = 1 PID customer unit
200000.00
1 = 1
Defines the minimum time it takes for the setpoint to increase from 0% to 100%.
Setpoint increase time.
Defines the minimum time it takes for the setpoint to decrease from 100% to 0%.
Setpoint decrease time.
Freezes, or defines a source that can be used to freeze, the setpoint of the process PID controller. This feature is useful when the reference is based on a process feedback connected to an analog input, and the sensor must be serviced without stopping the process. 1 = Process PID controller setpoint frozen See also parameter 40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable.
Process PID controller setpoint not frozen.
Process PID controller setpoint frozen.
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
0.0 s
1 = 1 0.0 s
1 = 1 Not selected
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8...17
340 Parameters
No.
40.31
40.32 40.33
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
18
Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
19
Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
20
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
21
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
22
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
23
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Set 1 deviation inversion
Inverts the input of the process PID controller.
0 = Deviation not inverted (Deviation = Setpoint - Feedback) 1 = Deviation inverted (Deviation = Feedback - Setpoint)
See also section Sleep and boost functions for process PID control (page 130).
Not inverted (Ref - Fbk)
Not inverted
0.
0
(Ref - Fbk)
Inverted (Fbk - Ref) 1.
1
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Set 1 gain
Defines the gain for the process PID controller. See
1.00
parameter 40.33 Set 1 integration time.
0.01...100.00
Gain for PID controller.
100 = 1
Set 1 integration time
Defines the integration time for the process PID controller. This time needs to be set to the same order of magnitude as the reaction time of the process being controlled, otherwise
instability will result.
60.0 s
Error/Controller output
O
I
G � I
40.34
0.0...9999.0 s
Set 1 derivation time
0.000...10.000 s
G � I
Ti
Time
I = controller input (error) O = controller output G = gain Ti = integration time
Note: Setting this value to 0 disables the "I" part, turning the PID controller into a PD controller.
Integration time.
Defines the derivation time of the process PID controller. The derivative component at the controller output is calculated on basis of two consecutive error values (EK-1 and EK) according to the following formula: PID DERIV TIME � (EK - EK-1)/TS, in which TS = 2 ms sample time E = Error = Process reference - process feedback.
Derivation time.
1 = 1 s 0.000 s
1000 = 1 s
Parameters 341
No. 40.35
Name/Value
Set 1 derivation filter time
Description
Defines the time constant of the 1-pole filter used to smooth the derivative component of the process PID controller.
%
Unfiltered signal
100
Def/FbEq16 0.0 s
63
Filtered signal
t T
O = I � (1 - e-t/T)
I = filter input (step) O = filter output t = time T = filter time constant
40.36 40.37 40.38
0.0...10.0 s Set 1 output min
-200000.00... 200000.00 Set 1 output max
-200000.00... 200000.00 Set 1 output freeze enable
Not selected Selected DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3
Filter time constant.
Defines the minimum limit for the process PID controller output. Using the minimum and maximum limits, it is possible to restrict the operation range.
Minimum limit for process PID controller output.
10 = 1 s 0.00
1 = 1
Defines the maximum limit for the process PID controller output. See parameter 40.36 Set 1 output min.
Maximum limit for process PID controller output.
100.00 1 = 1
Freezes (or defines a source that can be used to freeze) the output of the process PID controller, keeping the output at the value it was before freeze was enabled. This feature can be used when, for example, a sensor providing process feedback must to be serviced without stopping the process. 1 = Process PID controller output frozen See also parameter 40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze enable. Process PID controller output not frozen. Process PID controller output frozen. Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307). Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307). Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
Not selected
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8...17 18 19 20
342 Parameters
No. 40.39
Name/Value Supervision 1 Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Other [bit] Set 1 deadband range
Description
Def/FbEq16
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
21
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
22
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
23
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Defines a deadband around the setpoint. Whenever process 0.0
feedback enters the deadband, a delay timer starts. If the feedback remains within the deadband longer than the delay (40.40 Set 1 deadband delay), the PID controller output is
frozen. Normal operation resumes after the feedback value leaves the deadband.
40.39 Set 1 deadband range
Setpoint
Feedback
PID controller output
PID controller output frozen
40.40 40.43
0......200000.0
Set 1 deadband delay
0.0 ... 3600.0 s
Set 1 sleep level
0.0...200000.0 40.44 Set 1 sleep delay
40.45
0.0...3600.0 s
Set 1 sleep boost time
0.0...3600.0 s
40.40 Set 1 deadband delay
Time
Deadband range.
Delay for the deadband. See parameter 40.39 Set 1 deadband range.
Delay for deadband area.
Defines the start limit for the sleep function. If the value is 0.0, set 1 sleep mode is disabled. The sleep function compares PID output (parameter 40.01 Process PID output actual) to the value of this parameter. If PID output remains below this value longer than the sleep delay defined by 40.44 Set 1 sleep delay, the drive enters the sleep mode and stops the motor.
Sleep start level.
Defines a delay before the sleep function actually becomes enabled, to prevent nuisance sleeping. The delay timer starts when the sleep mode is enabled by parameter 40.43 Set 1 sleep level, and resets when the sleep mode is disabled.
Sleep start delay.
Defines a boost time for the sleep boost step. See parameter 40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step.
Sleep boost time.
1 = 1 0.0 s 1 = 1 s 0.0
1 = 1 60.0 s
1 = 1 s 0.0 s 1 = 1 s
Parameters 343
No. 40.46 40.47 40.48 40.49
40.50
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Set 1 sleep boost step
When the drive is entering sleep mode, the process setpoint is increased by this value for the time defined by parameter 40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time.
If active, sleep boost is aborted when the drive wakes up.
0.0 PID
customer units
0.0...200000.0 PID Sleep boost step. customer units
1 = 1 PID customer unit
Set 1 wake-up deviation
Defines the wake-up level as deviation between process setpoint and feedback.
When the deviation exceeds the value of this parameter, and remains there for the duration of the wake-up delay (40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay), the drive wakes up.
See also parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion.
0.00 PID customer
units
-200000.00... 200000.00 PID
customer units
Wake-up level (as deviation between process setpoint and feedback).
1 = 1 PID customer unit
Set 1 wake-up delay
Defines a wake-up delay for the sleep function to prevent nuisance wake-ups. See parameter 40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation.
The delay timer starts when the deviation exceeds the wakeup level (40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation), and resets if the deviation falls below the wake-up level.
0.50 s
0.00...60.00 s
Wake-up delay.
1 = 1 s
Set 1 tracking mode
Activates (or selects a source that activates) tracking mode. In tracking mode, the value selected by parameter 40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection is substituted for the PID controller output. See also section Tracking (page 132).
1 = Tracking mode enabled
Not selected
Not selected
0.
0
Selected
1.
1
DI1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
DI2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
DI3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
DI4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
DI5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
DI6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Reserved
8...17
Timed function 1 Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
18
Timed function 2 Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
19
Timed function 3 Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
20
Supervision 1
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
21
Supervision 2
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
22
Supervision 3
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
23
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Set 1 tracking ref selection
Selects the value source for tracking mode. See parameter 40.49 Set 1 tracking mode.
Not selected
Not selected
None.
0
AI1 scaled
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 212).
1
AI2 scaled
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 214).
2
344 Parameters
No. 40.51
40.52 40.53 40.54 40.55 40.56
Name/Value FB A ref1 FB A ref2 Other Set 1 trim mode
Off Direct
Proportional
Combined
Set 1 trim selection Torque Speed Frequency Set 1 trimmed ref pointer Not selected AI1 scaled AI2 scaled FB A ref1 FB A ref2 Other Set 1 trim mix
0.000 ... 1.000 Set 1 trim adjust
-100.000 ... 100.000 Set 1 trim source PID ref
Description
Def/FbEq16
03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 184).
3
03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 184).
4
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Activates the trim function and selects between direct and Off proportional trimming (or a combination of both). With trimming, it is possible to apply a corrective factor to the drive reference (setpoint). The output after trimming is available as parameter 40.05 Process PID trim output act.
See the control chain diagram on page 535.
The trim function is inactive.
0
The trim function is active. The trimming factor is relative to 1
the maximum speed, torque or frequency; the selection between these is made by parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim selection.
The trim function is active. The trimming factor is relative to 2
the reference selected by parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer.
The trim function is active. The trimming factor is a
3
combination of both Direct and Proportional modes; the
proportions of each are defined by parameter 40.54 Set 1 trim
mix.
Selects whether trimming is used for correcting the speed, torque or frequency reference.
Torque
Torque reference trimming.
1
Speed reference trimming.
2
Frequency reference trimming.
3
Selects the signal source for the trim reference.
Not selected
None.
0
12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 212).
1
12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 214).
2
03.05 FB A reference 1 (see page 184).
3
03.06 FB A reference 2 (see page 184).
4
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
When parameter 40.51 Set 1 trim mode is set to Combined, defines the effect of direct and proportional trim sources in the final trimming factor.
0.000 = 100% proportional 0.500 = 50% proportional, 50% direct 1.000 = 100% direct
0.000
Trim mix.
1 = 1
Defines a multiplier for the trimming factor. This value is
multiplied by the result of parameter 40.51 Set 1 trim mode. Consequently, the result of the multiplication is used to multiply the result of parameter 40.56 Set 1 trim source.
1.000
Multiplier for trimming factor.
1 = 1
Selects the reference to be trimmed. PID setpoint.
PID ref 1
Parameters 345
No. 40.57
Name/Value
PID output
PID set1/set2 selection
40.58
PID set 1 PID set 2 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Supervision 1 Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Other [bit] Set 1 increase prevention No Limiting
Ext PID min lim
Ext PID max lim
40.59
Other [bit]
Set 1 decrease prevention
No
Limiting
Ext PID min lim
Description
Def/FbEq16
PID controller output.
2
Selects the source that determines whether process PID
parameter set 1 (parameters 40.07...40.50) or set 2 (group 41 Process PID set 2) is used.
PID set 1
0. Process PID parameter set 1 in use.
0
1. Process PID parameter set 2 in use.
1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
8...17
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
18
Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
19
Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
20
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
21
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
22
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
23
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Activates and defines the type of the prevention of PID
No
integration term increase for PID set 1.
Increase prevention not in use.
0
The PID integration term is not increased if the maximum
1
value for the PID output is reached. This parameter is valid
for the PID set 1.
The process PID integration term is not increased when the 2 output of the external PID has reached its minimum limit. In
this setup, the external PID is used as a source for the process PID. This parameter is valid for the PID set 1.
The process PID integration term is not increased when the 3 output of the external PID has reached its maximum limit. In
this setup, the external PID is used as a source for the process PID. This parameter is valid for the PID set 1.
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Prevention of PID integration term decrease for PID set 1. No
Decrease prevention not in use.
0
The PID integration term is not decreased if the minimum
1
value for the PID output is reached. This parameter is valid
for the PID set 1.
The process PID integration term is not decreased when the 2 output of the external PID has reached its minimum limit. In
this setup, the external PID is used as a source for the process PID. This parameter is valid for the PID set 1.
346 Parameters
No. 40.60
40.61 40.62 40.79
Name/Value Ext PID max lim
Set 1 PID activation source
Off On Follow Ext1/Ext2 selection
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DIO1 DIO2 Other [bit] Setpoint scaling actual -200000.00... 200000.00 PID internal setpoint actual
-200000.00... 200000.00 PID customer units Set 1 units User text % bar kPa Pa psi CFM inH2O �C �F mbar m3/h
Description
Def/FbEq16
The process PID integration term is not decreased when the 3
output of the external PID has reached its maximum limit. In this setup, the external PID is used as a source for the process PID. This parameter is valid for the PID set 1.
Selects a source that enables/disables process PID control. On
See also parameter 40.07 Process PID operation mode. 0 = Process PID control disabled. 1 = Process PID control enabled.
0.
0
1.
1
Process PID control is disabled when external control location 2 EXT1 is active, and enabled when external control location EXT2 is active.
See also parameter 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection.
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
3
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
4
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
5
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
6
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
7
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
8
Digital input/output DIO1.
9
Digital input/output DIO2.
10
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Actual setpoint scaling. See parameter 40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling.
Scaling.
1 = 1
Displays the value of the internal setpoint. See the control chain diagram on page 534. This parameter is read-only.
Process PID internal setpoint.
-
1 = 1 PID customer unit
Unit used for PID set 1.
�C
User editable text. User text default is "PID unit 1".
0
No. Name/Value dm3/h l/s l/min l/h m3/s m3/min km3/h gal/s ft3/s ft3/min ft3/h ppm inHg kCFM inWC gpm gal/min in wg MPa ftWC % bar kPa Pa psi CFM inH2O �C �F mbar m3/h dm3/h l/s l/min l/h m3/s m3/min km3/h gal/s ft3/s ft3/min
Description
Parameters 347
Def/FbEq16
4 74 75 77 76 26 58 150 151 44 78 21 79 37 38 88 40 131 47 50 51
348 Parameters
No.
40.80 40.81 40.89 40.90 40.91 40.92 40.96
Name/Value ft3/h ppm inHg kCFM inWC gpm gal/min in wg MPa ftWC Set 1 PID output min source Not selected Set1 output min Set 1 PID output max source Not selected Set1 output max Set 1 setpoint multiplier
-200000.00... 200000.00 Set 1 feedback multiplier
-200000.00... 200000.00 Feedback data storage
-327.68...327.67 Setpoint data storage
-327.68...327.67 Process PID output % -100.00...100.00%
Description
Selects the source for set 1 PID output minimum.
None. 40.36 Set 1 output min. Selects the source for set 1 PID output minimum.
None. 40.37 Set 1 output max Defines the multiplier with which the result of the function specified by parameter 40.18 Set 1 setpoint function is multiplied. Multiplier.
Defines the multiplier with which the result of the function specified by parameter 40.10 Set 1 feedback function is multiplied. Multiplier.
Storage parameter for receiving a process feedback value e.g. through the embedded fieldbus interface. The value can be sent to the drive as Modbus I/O data. Set the target selection parameter of that particular data (58.101...58.114) to Feedback data storage. In 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source (or 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source), select Feedback data storage. Storage parameter for process feedback. Storage parameter for receiving a process setpoint value e.g. through the embedded fieldbus interface. The value can be sent to the drive as Modbus I/O data. Set the target selection parameter of that particular data (58.101...58.114)) to Setpoint data storage. In 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source (or 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source), select Setpoint data storage. Storage parameter for process setpoint. Percentage scaled signal of parameter 40.01 Process PID feedback actual. Percentage.
Def/FbEq16 52 34 29 126 65 80 48 59 94 125 Set1 output min 0 1 Set1 output max 0 1 1.00
1 = 1
1.00
1 = 1
-
100 = 1 -
100 = 1 0.00%
100 = 1%
Parameters 349
No. Name/Value
40.97 Process PID feedback %
-100.00...100.00%
40.98 Process PID setpoint %
-100.00...100.00%
40.99 Process PID deviation %
-100.00...100.00%
4411 Process PID set 2
41.08 41.09 41.10 41.11 41.14 41.15 41.16 41.17 41.18 41.19 41.20 41.21
Set 2 feedback 1 source
Set 2 feedback 2 source
Set 2 feedback function
Set 2 feedback filter time
Set 2 setpoint scaling
Set 2 output scaling
Set 2 setpoint 1 source
Set 2 setpoint 2 source
Set 2 setpoint function
Set 2 internal setpoint sel1
Set 2 internal setpoint sel2
Set 2 internal setpoint 1
41.22 Set 2 internal setpoint 2
41.23 Set 2 internal setpoint 3
41.24 Set 2 internal setpoint 0
41.26 Set 2 setpoint min
Description Percentage scaled signal of parameter 40.02 Process PID feedback actual. Percentage. Percentage scaled signal of parameter 40.03 Process PID setpoint actual. Percentage. Percentage scaled signal of parameter 40.04 Process PID deviation actual. .Percentage. A second set of parameter values for process PID control. The selection between this set and first set (parameter group 40 Process PID set 1) is made by parameter 40.57 PID set1/set2 selection. See also parameters 40.01...40.06, and the control chain diagrams on pages 534 and 535. See parameter 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source.
See parameter 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source.
See parameter 40.10 Set 1 feedback function.
See parameter 40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time.
See parameter 40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling.
See parameter 40.15 Set 1 output scaling. See parameter 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source.
See parameter 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source.
See parameter 40.18 Set 1 setpoint function.
See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
See parameter 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2.
See parameter 40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1.
See parameter 40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2.
See parameter 40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3.
40.24 Set 1 internal setpoint 0.
See parameter 40.26 Set 1 setpoint min.
Def/FbEq16 0.00%
100 = 1% 0.00%
100 = 1% 0.00%
100 = 1%
AI2 percent
Not selected
In1
0.000 s
0.00
0.00 AI1 percent
Not selected
In1
Not selected
Not selected
0.00 PID customer units 0.00 PID customer units 0.00 PID customer units 0.00 PID customer units 0.00
350 Parameters
No. 41.27 41.28
41.29
41.30
41.31
41.32 41.33
41.34
41.35
41.36 41.37 41.38
41.39
41.40
41.43 41.44 41.45
41.46
Name/Value
Set 2 setpoint max
Set 2 setpoint increase time
Set 2 setpoint decrease time
Set 2 setpoint freeze enable
Set 2 deviation inversion
Set 2 gain
Set 2 integration time
Set 2 derivation time
Set 2 derivation filter time
Set 2 output min
Set 2 output max
Set 2 output freeze enable
Set 2 deadband range
Set 2 deadband delay
Set 2 sleep level
Set 2 sleep delay
Set 2 sleep boost time
Set 2 sleep boost step
Description See parameter 40.27 Set 1 setpoint max. See parameter 40.28 Set 1 setpoint increase time.
See parameter 40.29 Set 1 setpoint decrease time.
See parameter 40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze enable.
See parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion.
See parameter 40.32 Set 1 gain. See parameter 40.33 Set 1 integration time.
See parameter 40.34 Set 1 derivation time.
See parameter 40.35 Set 1 derivation filter time.
See parameter 40.36 Set 1 output min. See parameter 40.37 Set 1 output max. See parameter 40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable.
See parameter 40.39 Set 1 deadband range.
See parameter 40.40 Set 1 deadband delay.
See parameter 40.43 Set 1 sleep level. See parameter 40.44 Set 1 sleep delay. See parameter 40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time.
See parameter 40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step.
41.47 Set 2 wake-up deviation
See parameter 40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation.
41.48
41.49 41.50
41.51 41.52 41.53
41.54 41.55 41.56
Set 2 wake-up delay
See parameter 40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay.
Set 2 tracking mode See parameter 40.49 Set 1 tracking mode.
Set 2 tracking ref selection
See parameter 40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection.
Set 2 trim mode
See parameter 40.51 Set 1 trim mode.
Set 2 trim selection See parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim selection.
Set 2 trimmed ref pointer
See parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer.
Set 2 trim mix
See parameter 40.54 Set 1 trim mix.
Set 2 trim adjust
See parameter 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust.
Set 2 trim source See parameter 40.56 Set 1 trim source.
Def/FbEq16 200000.00 0.0 s
0.0 s
Not selected
Not inverted (Ref - Fbk) 1.00 60.0 s
0.000 s
0.0 s
0.00 100.00 Not selected
0.0
0.0 s
0.0 60.0 s 0.0 s
0.0 PID customer units 0.00 PID customer units 0.50 s
Not selected Not selected
Off Torque Not selected
1.000 PID ref
Parameters 351
No. 41.58 41.59 41.60 41.79 41.80 41.81 41.89 41.90
Name/Value
Set 2 increase prevention
Set 2 decrease prevention
Set 2 PID activation source
Set 2 units
Set 2 PID output min source
Set 2 PID output max source
Set 2 setpoint multiplier
Set 2 feedback multiplier
4433 Brake chopper
43.01 Braking resistor temperature
43.06
0.0...120.0%
Brake chopper function
Disabled
Enabled with thermal model
Description See parameter 40.58 Set 1 increase prevention.
Def/FbEq16 No
See parameter 40.59 Set 1 decrease prevention.
No
See parameter 40.60 Set 1 PID activation source.
On
See parameter 40.79 Set 1 units. See parameter 40.80 Set 1 PID output min source.
See parameter 40.81 Set 1 PID output max source.
See parameter 40.89 Set 1 setpoint multiplier.
�C
Set1 output min
Set1 output max
1.00
Defines the multiplier k used in formulas of parameter 41.10 1.00
Set 2 feedback function. See parameter 40.90 Set 1 feedback multiplier.
Settings for the internal brake chopper. Note: These parameters apply to internal brake chopper only. When using external brake, you must disable brake chopper function by setting parameter 43.06 Brake chopper function to value Disabled.
Displays the estimated temperature of the brake resistor, or how close the brake resistor is to being too hot.
The value is given in percent where 100% is the eventual temperature the resistor would reach when loaded long enough with its rated maximum load capacity (43.09 Brake resistor Pmax cont).
The temperature calculation is based on the values of parameters 43.08, 43.09 and 43.10, and on the assumption that the resistor is installed as instructed by the manufacturer (ie it cools down as expected).
This parameter is read-only.
Estimated brake resistor temperature.
1 = 1%
Enables brake chopper control and selects the brake resistor overload protection method (calculation or measurement).
Note: Before enabling brake chopper control, ensure that
� a brake resistor is connected
� overvoltage control is switched off (parameter 30.30 Overvoltage control)
� the supply voltage range (parameter 95.01 Supply voltage) has been selected correctly.
Note: When using external brake chopper, set this parameter to value Disabled.
Disabled
Brake chopper control disabled.
0
Brake chopper control enabled with brake resistor protection 1
based on the thermal model. If you select this, you must also specify the values needed by the model, ie. parameters 43.08... 43.12. See the resistor data sheet.
352 Parameters
No.
43.07 43.08 43.09 43.10 43.11
Name/Value Enabled without thermal model
Overvoltage peak protection
Brake chopper run enable Off On Other [bit] Brake resistor thermal tc 0...10000 s Brake resistor Pmax cont
0.00... 10000.00 kW Brake resistance
0.0...1000.0 ohm Brake resistor fault limit
0...150%
Description
Def/FbEq16
Brake chopper control enabled without resistor overload
2
protection based on the thermal model. This setting can be
used, for example, if the resistor is equipped with a thermal
switch that is wired to open the main contactor of the drive if
the resistor overheats.
For more information, see chapter Resistor braking in the
Hardware manual.
Brake chopper control enabled in an overvoltage condition. 3
This setting is intended for situations where
� the braking chopper is not needed for runtime operation, ie. to dissipate the inertial energy of the motor,
� the motor is able to store a considerable amount magnetic energy in its windings, and
� the motor might, deliberately or inadvertently, be stopped by coasting.
In such a situation, the motor would potentially discharge enough magnetic energy towards the drive to cause damage. To protect the drive, the brake chopper can be used with a small resistor dimensioned merely to handle the magnetic energy (not the inertial energy) of the motor.
With this setting, the brake chopper is activated only whenever the DC voltage exceeds the overvoltage limit. During normal use, the brake chopper is not operating.
Selects the source for quick brake chopper on/off control.
On
0 = Brake chopper IGBT pulses are cut off
1 = Normal brake chopper IGBT modulation allowed.
0.
0
1.
1
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Defines the thermal time constant for the brake resistor
0 s
thermal model.
Brake resistor thermal time constant, ie the rated time to achieve 63% temperature.
1 = 1 s
Defines the maximum continuous load of the brake resistor that will eventually raise the resistor temperature to the
maximum allowed value (= continuous heat dissipation capacity of the resistor in kW) but not above it. The value is used in the resistor overload protection based on the thermal
model. See parameter 43.06 Brake chopper function and the data sheet of the brake resistor used.
0.00 kW
Maximum continuous load of the brake resistor.
1 = 1 kW
Defines the resistance value of the brake resistor. The value is used for the brake resistor protection based on the thermal model. See parameter 43.06 Brake chopper function.
Brake resistor resistance value.
Selects the fault limit for the brake resistor protection based on the thermal model. See parameter 43.06 Brake chopper function. When the limit is exceeded, the drive trips on fault 7183 BR excess temperature. The value is given in percent of the temperature the resistor reaches when loaded with the power defined by parameter 43.09 Brake resistor Pmax cont.
Brake resistor temperature fault limit.
0.0 ohm 1 = 1 ohm 105%
1 = 1%
Parameters 353
No. Name/Value
Description
43.12 Brake resistor warning limit
Selects the warning limit for the brake resistor protection based on the thermal model. See parameter 43.06 Brake chopper function. When the limit is exceeded, the drive generates a A793 BR excess temperature warning.
The value is given in percent of the temperature the resistor reaches when loaded with the power defined by parameter 43.09 Brake resistor Pmax cont.
0...150%
Brake resistor temperature warning limit.
4444 Mechanical brake control
Configuration of mechanical brake control. See also section Mechanical brake control (page 136).
44.01 Brake control status Displays the mechanical brake control status word. This parameter is read-only.
Def/FbEq16 95%
1 = 1% -
Bit 0
1
2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9...15
Name Open command
Opening torque request Hold stopped request Ramp to stopped Enabled Closed Opening Open Closing Reserved
Information Close/open command to brake actuator (0 = close, 1 = open). Connect this bit to desired output. 1 = Opening torque requested from drive logic.
1 = Hold requested from drive logic
1 = Ramping down to zero speed requested from drive logic 1 = Brake control is enabled 1 = Brake control logic in BRAKE CLOSED state 1 = Brake control logic in BRAKE OPENING state 1 = Brake control logic in BRAKE OPEN state 1 = Brake control logic in BRAKE CLOSING state
44.06
0000h...FFFFh
Brake control enable
Not selected Selected DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Reserved Supervision 1
Mechanical brake control status word. Activates/deactivates (or selects a source that activates/deactivates) the mechanical brake control logic. 0 = Brake control inactive 1 = Brake control active 0. 1. Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307). Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307). Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
1 = 1 Not selected
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8...17 18 19 20 21...23 24
354 Parameters
No. 44.08
Name/Value Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Other [bit] Brake open delay
0.00...5.00 s 44.13 Brake close delay
0.00...60.00 s 44.14 Brake close level
0.00...1000.00 rpm 4455 Energy efficiency 45.01 Saved GW hours
0...65535 GWh 45.02 Saved MW hours
0...999 MWh
Description
Def/FbEq16
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
25
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
26
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Defines the brake open delay, ie. the delay between the internal open brake command and the release of motor speed control. The delay timer starts when the drive has magnetized the motor. Simultaneously with the timer start, the brake control logic energizes the brake control output and the brake starts to open.
Set this parameter to the value of mechanical opening delay specified by the brake manufacturer.
0.00 s
Brake open delay.
100 = 1 s
Specifies a delay between a close command (that is, when the brake control output is de-energized) and when the drive stops modulating. This is to keep the motor live and under control until the brake actually closes.
Set this parameter equal to the value specified by the brake manufacturer as the mechanical wake-up time of the brake.
0.00 s
Brake close delay.
100 = 1 s
Defines the brake close speed as an absolute value.
After motor speed has decelerated to this level, a close command is given.
100.00 rpm
Brake close speed.
See par. 46.01
Settings for the energy saving calculators as well as peak and energy loggers. See also section Energy saving calculators (page 168).
Energy saved in GWh compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This parameter is incremented when 45.02 Saved MW hours rolls over. This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
Energy savings in GWh.
Energy saved in MWh compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This parameter is incremented when 45.03 Saved kW hours rolls over. When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.01 Saved GW hours is incremented. This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
Energy savings in MWh.
1 = 1 GWh -
1 = 1 MWh
Parameters 355
No. 45.03
45.04 45.05 45.06
45.07
Name/Value Saved kW hours
0.0...999.9 kWh Saved energy
0.0...214748368.0 kWh Saved money x1000
0...4294967295 thousands Saved money
0.00...999.99 units Saved amount
0.00... 21474830.08 units
Description
Energy saved in kWh compared to direct-on-line motor connection. If the internal brake chopper of the drive is enabled, all energy fed by the motor to the drive is assumed to be converted into heat, but the calculation still records savings made by controlling the speed. If the chopper is disabled, then regenerated energy from the motor is also recorded here. When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.02 Saved MW hours is incremented. This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
Energy savings in kWh.
Energy saved in kWh compared to direct-on-line motor connection. If the internal brake chopper of the drive is enabled, all energy fed by the motor to the drive is assumed to be converted into heat. This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
Energy savings in kWh.
Def/FbEq16 -
10 = 1 kWh -
1 = 1 kWh
Monetary savings in thousands compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This parameter is incremented when 45.06 Saved money rolls over. You can define the currency during the first start up or from primary settings (Main menu - Primary settings - Clock, region display - Units - Currency). This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
Monetary savings in thousands of units.
1 = 1 unit
Monetary savings compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This value is a calculated by multiplying the saved energy in kWh by the currently active energy tariff (45.14 Tariff selection). When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.05 Saved money x1000 is incremented. You can define the currency during the first start up or from primary settings (Main menu - Primary settings - Clock, region display - Units - Currency). This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
Monetary savings.
Monetary savings compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This value is a calculated by multiplying the saved energy in kWh by the currently active energy tariff (45.14 Tariff selection). You can define the currency during the first start up or from primary settings (Main menu - Primary settings - Clock, region display - Units - Currency). This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
Monetary savings.
-
1 = 1 unit -
1 = 1 unit
356 Parameters
No. 45.08 45.09
45.10 45.11
45.12
45.13
Name/Value CO2 reduction in kilotons
0...65535 metric kilotons CO2 reduction in tons
0.0...999.9 metric tons Total saved CO2
0.0...214748304.0 metric tons Energy optimizer
Disable Enable Energy tariff 1
0.000... 4294966.296 units Energy tariff 2 0.000... 4294966.296 units
Description
Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric kilotons compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This value is incremented when parameter 45.09 CO2 reduction in tons rolls over. This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric kilotons.
Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This value is calculated by multiplying the saved energy in MWh by the value of parameter 45.18 CO2 conversion factor (by default, 0.5 metric tons/MWh). When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.08 CO2 reduction in kilotons is incremented. This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons.
Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons compared to direct-on-line motor connection. This value is calculated by multiplying the saved energy in MWh by the value of parameter 45.18 CO2 conversion factor (by default, 0.5 metric tons/MWh). This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy calculations reset).
Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons.
Enables/disables the energy optimization function. The function optimizes the motor flux so that total energy consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and drive) can be improved by 1...20% depending on load torque and speed. Note: With a permanent magnet motor and a synchronous reluctance motor, energy optimization is always enabled regardless of this parameter. Note: Do no use energy optimizer in multimotor systems.
Energy optimization disabled.
Energy optimization enabled.
Defines energy tariff 1 (price of energy per kWh). Depending on the setting of parameter 45.14 Tariff selection, either this value or 45.13 Energy tariff 2 is used for reference when monetary savings are calculated. You can define the currency during the first start up or from primary settings (Main menu - Primary settings - Clock, region display - Units - Currency). Note: Tariffs are read only at the instant of selection, and are not applied retroactively.
Energy tariff 1.
Def/FbEq16 -
1 = 1 metric kiloton -
1 = 1 metric ton -
1 = 1 metric ton Disable
0 1 0.100 units
-
Defines energy tariff 2 (price of energy per kWh). See parameter 45.12 Energy tariff 1.
Energy tariff 2.
0.200 units -
Parameters 357
No. 45.14
45.18 45.19
45.21 45.24 45.25 45.26
Name/Value Tariff selection
Energy tariff 1 Energy tariff 2 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 CO2 conversion factor
0.000...65.535 tn/MWh Comparison power
0.00...10000000.00 kW Energy calculations reset Done Reset
Hourly peak power value
-3000.00 ... 3000.00 kW Hourly peak power time
Hourly total energy (resettable)
-3000.00 ... 3000.00 kWh
Description
Selects (or defines a source that selects) which pre-defined energy tariff is used. 0 = 45.12 Energy tariff 1 1 = 45.13 Energy tariff 2
0.
1.
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
Defines a factor for conversion of saved energy into CO2 emissions (kg/kWh or tn/MWh). Example: 45.10 Total saved CO2 = 45.02 Saved MW hours � 45.18 CO2 conversion factor (tn/MWh).
Factor for conversion of saved energy into CO2 emissions.
Actual power that the motor absorbs when connected directon-line and operating the application. The value is used for reference when energy savings are calculated. Note: The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is directly dependent on the accuracy of this value. If nothing is entered here, then the nominal motor power is used by the calculation, but that may inflate the energy savings reported as many motors do not absorb nameplate power.
Motor power.
Resets the savings counter parameters 45.01...45.10.
Reset not requested (normal operation), or reset complete.
Reset the savings counter parameters. The value reverts automatically to Done.
Value of the peak power during the last hour, that is, the most recent 60 minutes after the drive has been powered up. The parameter is updated once every 10 minutes unless the hourly peak is found in the most recent 10 minutes. In that case, the values is shown immediately.
Peak power value.
Time of the peak power value during the last hour.
Time.
Total energy consumption during the last hour, that is, the most recent 60 minutes. You can reset the value by setting it to zero.
Total energy.
Def/FbEq16 Energy tariff 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0.500 tn/MWh (metric ton)
1 = 1 tn/MWh 0.00 kW
1 = 1 kW Done 0 1 0.00 kW
10 = 1 kW 00:00:00 N/A 0.00 kWh
10 = 1 kWh
358 Parameters
No. 45.27 45.28 45.29 45.30
45.31
45.32 45.33 45.34
45.35
45.36 45.37 45.38
Name/Value Daily peak power value (resettable)
-3000.00 ... 3000.00 kW Daily peak power time
Daily total energy (resettable)
-30000.00 ... 30000.00 kWh Last day total energy
-30000.00 ... 30000.00 kWh Monthly peak power value (resettable)
-3000.00 ... 3000.00 kW Monthly peak power date
Monthly peak power time
Monthly total energy (resettable)
-1000000.00 ... 1000000.00 kWh Last month total energy
-1000000.00 ... 1000000.00 kWh Lifetime peak power value -3000.00 ... 3000.00 kW Lifetime peak power date
Lifetime peak power time
Description Value of the peak power since midnight of the present day. You can reset the value by setting it to zero. Peak power value.
Time of the peak power since midnight of the present day.
Time. Total energy consumption since midnight of the present day. You can reset the value by setting it to zero. Total energy.
Total energy consumption during the previous day, that is, between midnight of the previous day and midnight of the present day Total energy.
Value of the peak power during the present month, that is, since midnight of the first day of the present month. You can reset the value by setting it to zero. Peak power value.
Date of the peak power during the present month.
Date. Time of the peak power during the present month.
Time. Total energy consumption from the beginning of the present month. You can reset the value by setting it to zero. Total energy.
Total energy consumption during the previous month, that is, between midnight of the first day or the previous month and midnight of the first day of the present month.
Value of the peak power over the drive lifetime.
Peak power value.
Date of the peak power over the drive lifetime.
Date. Time of the peak power over the drive lifetime.
Time.
Def/FbEq16 0.00 kW 10 = 1 kW 00:00:00 N/A 0.00 kWh 1 = 1 kWh 0.00 kWh
1 = 1 kWh 0.00 kW
10 = 1 kW 1.1.1980 N/A 00:00:00 N/A 0.00 kWh
0.01 = 1 kWh 0.00 kWh
0.01 = 1 kWh 0.00 kW 10 = 1 kW 1.1.1980 N/A 00:00:00 N/A
Parameters 359
No. Name/Value
4466 Monitoring/scaling settings
46.01 Speed scaling
46.02
0.10...30000.00 rpm
Frequency scaling
0.10...1000.00 Hz 46.03 Torque scaling
0.1...1000.0% 46.04 Power scaling
46.05
0.10 ... 30000.00 kW or 0.10 ... 40214.48 hp
Current scaling
46.06
0...30000 A
Speed ref zero scaling
0.00 ... 30000.00 rpm
Description
Def/FbEq16
Speed supervision settings; actual signal filtering; general scaling settings.
Defines the maximum speed value used to define the acceleration ramp rate and the initial speed value used to define the deceleration ramp rate (see parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp). The speed acceleration and deceleration ramp times are therefore related to this value (not to parameter 30.12 Maximum speed). Also defines the 16-bit scaling of speed-related parameters. The value of this parameter corresponds to 20000 in e.g. fieldbus communication.
Acceleration/deceleration terminal/initial speed.
1500.00 rpm; 1800.00 rpm (95.20 b0)
1 = 1 rpm
Defines the maximum frequency value used to define the acceleration ramp rate and the initial frequency value used to define deceleration ramp rate (see parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain). The frequency acceleration and deceleration ramp times are therefore related to this value (not to parameter 30.14 Maximum frequency). Also defines the 16-bit scaling of frequency-related parameters. The value of this parameter corresponds to 20000 in e.g. fieldbus communication.
Acceleration/deceleration terminal/initial frequency.
Defines the 16-bit scaling of torque parameters. The value of this parameter (in percent of nominal motor torque) corresponds to 10000 in e.g. fieldbus communication.
Torque corresponding to 10000 on fieldbus.
Defines the 16-bit scaling of power parameters. The value of this parameter corresponds to 10000 in the fieldbus communication. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection. For 32-bit scaling see 46.43 Power decimals.
Power corresponding to 10000 on fieldbus.
50.00 Hz; 60.00 Hz (95.20 b0)
10 = 1 Hz 100.0% 10 = 1% 100.00
1 = 1 unit
Defines the 16-bit scaling of current parameters. The value of this parameter corresponds to 10000 in fieldbus communication.
For 32-bit scaling see 46.44 Current decimals.
10000 A
Defines a speed corresponding to a zero reference received from fieldbus (either the embedded fieldbus interface, or interface FBA A). For example, with a setting of 500, the fieldbus reference range of 0...20000 would correspond to a speed of 500...[46.01] rpm.
Note: This parameter is effective only with the ABB Drives communication profile.
Speed corresponding to minimum fieldbus reference.
0.00 rpm 1 = 1 rpm
360 Parameters
No. 46.07
46.11 46.12 46.13 46.14 46.21
Name/Value Frequency ref zero scaling
0.00 ... 1000.00 Hz Filter time motor speed 2...20000 ms Filter time output frequency 2...20000 ms Filter time motor torque 2...20000 ms Filter time power 2...20000 ms At speed hysteresis
Description
Defines a frequency corresponding to a zero reference received from fieldbus (either the embedded fieldbus interface, or interface FBA). For example, with a setting of 30, the fieldbus reference range of 0...20000 would correspond to a speed of 30...[46.02] Hz. Note: This parameter is effective only with the ABB Drives communication profile.
Frequency corresponding to minimum fieldbus reference.
Defines a filter time for signals 01.01 Motor speed used and 01.02 Motor speed estimated.
Motor speed signal filter time.
Defines a filter time for signal 01.06 Output frequency.
Output frequency signal filter time.
Defines a filter time for signal 01.10 Motor torque.
Motor torque signal filter time.
Defines a filter time for signal 01.14 Output power.
Output power signal filter time.
Defines the "at setpoint" limits for speed control of the drive. When the difference between reference (22.87 Speed reference act 7) and the speed (24.02 Used speed feedback) is smaller than 46.21 At speed hysteresis, the drive is considered to be "at setpoint". This is indicated by bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word.
Def/FbEq16 0.00 Hz
10 = 1 Hz 500 ms 1 = 1 ms 500 ms 1 = 1 ms 100 ms 1 = 1 ms 100 ms 1 = 1 ms 50.00 rpm
24.02 (rpm)
Drive at setpoint (06.11 bit 8 = 1)
22.87 + 46.21 (rpm) 22.87 (rpm) 22.87 - 46.21 (rpm)
0.00...30000.00 rpm
0 rpm Limit for "at setpoint" indication in speed control.
See par. 46.01
Parameters 361
No. 46.22
Name/Value
At frequency hysteresis
Description
Defines the "at setpoint" limits for frequency control of the drive. When the absolute difference between reference (28.96 Frequency ref ramp input) and actual frequency (01.06 Output frequency) is smaller than 46.22 At frequency hysteresis, the drive is considered to be "at setpoint". This is indicated by bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word.
Def/FbEq16 2.00 Hz
01.06 (Hz)
Drive at setpoint (06.11 bit 8 = 1)
28.96 + 46.22 (Hz) 28.96 (Hz) 28.96 - 46.22 (Hz)
0 Hz
46.23
0.00...1000.00 Hz At torque hysteresis
Limit for "at setpoint" indication in frequency control.
Defines the "at setpoint" limits for torque control of the drive. When the absolute difference between reference (26.73 Torque reference act 4) and actual torque (01.10 Motor torque) is smaller than 46.23 At torque hysteresis, the drive is considered to be "at setpoint". This is indicated by bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word.
See par. 46.02
5.0%
01.10 (%)
Drive at setpoint (06.11 bit 8 = 1)
26.73 + 46.23 (%) 26.73 (%) 26.73 - 46.23 (%)
0%
46.31 46.32 46.33
0.0...300.0% Above speed limit
0.00...30000.00 rpm Above frequency limit 0.00...1000.00 Hz Above torque limit
0.0...1600.0%
Limit for "at setpoint" indication in torque control.
Defines the trigger level for "above limit" indication in speed control. When actual speed exceeds the limit, bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 is set. "Above limit" indication trigger level for speed control.
Defines the trigger level for "above limit" indication in frequency control. When actual frequency exceeds the limit, bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 is set. "Above limit" indication trigger level for frequency control.
Defines the trigger level for "above limit" indication in torque control. When actual torque exceeds the limit, bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 is set. "Above limit" indication trigger level for torque control.
See par. 46.03 1500.00 rpm
See par. 46.01 50.00 Hz
See par. 46.02 300.0%
See par. 46.03
362 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
46.41 kWh pulse scaling
46.43
0.001... 1000.000 kWh
Power decimals
0...3 46.44 Current decimals
0...3 4477 Data storage
47.01 47.02 47.03 47.04 47.11 47.12 47.13
Data storage 1 real32
-2147483.000... 2147483.000
Data storage 2 real32
-2147483.000... 2147483.000
Data storage 3 real32
-2147483.000... 2147483.000
Data storage 4 real32
-2147483.000... 2147483.000
Data storage 1 int32
-2147483648... 2147483647
Data storage 2 int32
-2147483648... 2147483647
Data storage 3 int32
-2147483648... 2147483647
Description
Defines the trigger level for the "kWh pulse" on for 50 ms. The output of the pulse is bit 9 of 05.22 Diagnostic word 3.
"kWh pulse" on trigger level.
Def/FbEq16 1.000 kWh
1 = 1 kWh
Defines the number of display decimals places and 32-bit scaling of power-related parameters. The value of this parameter corresponds to the number of decimals assumed in the 32-bit integer fieldbus communication (for 16-bit scaling see 46.04 Power scaling).
Number of decimals.
Defines the number of display decimals places and 32-bit scaling of current-related parameters. The value of this parameter corresponds to the number of decimals assumed in the 32-bit integer fieldbus communication (for 16-bit scaling see 46.05 Current scaling).
Number of decimals.
2
1 = 1 2
1 = 1
Data storage parameters that can be written to and read from using other parameters' source and target settings. Note that there are different storage parameters for different data types. See also section Data storage parameters (page 174).
Data storage parameter 1.
0.000
32-bit data.
-
Data storage parameter 2.
0.000
32-bit data.
-
Data storage parameter 3.
0.000
32-bit data.
-
Data storage parameter 4.
0.000
32-bit data.
-
Data storage parameter 9.
0
32-bit data.
-
Data storage parameter 10.
0
32-bit data.
-
Data storage parameter 11.
0
32-bit data.
-
Parameters 363
No. Name/Value
47.14 Data storage 4 int32
-2147483648... 2147483647
47.21 Data storage 1 int16
-32768...32767
47.22 Data storage 2 int16
-32768...32767
47.23 Data storage 3 int16
-32768...32767
47.24 Data storage 4 int16
-32768...32767
49 49 Panel port communication
49.01 Node ID number
49.03 49.04
1...32 Baud rate 38.4 kbps 57.6 kbps 86.4 kbps 115.2 kbps 230.4 kbps Communication loss time
49.05
0.3...3000.0 s Communication loss action No action Fault Last speed
Description Data storage parameter 12.
Def/FbEq16 0
32-bit data.
-
Data storage parameter 17.
0
16-bit data. Data storage parameter 18.
1 = 1 0
16-bit data. Data storage parameter 19.
1 = 1 0
16-bit data. Data storage parameter 20.
1 = 1 0
16-bit data.
1 = 1
Communication settings for the control panel port on the drive.
Defines the node ID of the drive. All devices connected to the network must have a unique node ID. Note: For networked drives, it is advisable to reserve ID 1 for spare/replacement drives.
Node ID.
Defines the transfer rate of the link.
38.4 kbit/s.
57.6 kbit/s.
86.4 kbit/s.
115.2 kbit/s.
230.4 kbit/s.
Sets a timeout for control panel (or PC tool) communication. If a communication break lasts longer than the timeout, the action specified by parameter 49.05 Communication loss action is taken.
Panel/PC tool communication timeout.
Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel (or PC tool) communication break.
No action taken.
Drive trips on 7081 Control panel loss.
Drive generates an A7EE Panel loss warning and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined on the basis of actual speed using 850 ms lowpass filtering.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.
1
1 = 1 115.2 kbps 1 2 3 4 5 10.0 s
10 = 1 s Fault
0 1 2
364 Parameters
No. 49.06 49.19
Name/Value
Description
Speed ref safe
Drive generates an A7EE Panel loss warning and sets the speed to the speed defined by parameter 22.41 Speed ref safe (or 28.41 Frequency ref safe when frequency reference is being used).
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.
Refresh settings
Applies the settings of parameters 49.01...49.05.
Note: Refreshing may cause a communication break, so reconnecting the drive may be required.
Done
Refresh done or not requested.
Configure
Refresh parameters 49.01...49.05. The value reverts automatically to Done.
Basic panel home Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 1 of the
view 1
integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP-S).
Auto
Shows the factory default parameters.
Motor speed used 01.01 Motor speed used
Output frequency 01.06 Output frequency
Motor current
01.07 Motor current
Motor current % of 01.08 Motor current % of motor nom motor nominal
Motor torque
01.10 Motor torque
DC voltage
01.11 DC voltage
Output power
01.14 Output power
Speed ref ramp in 23.01 Speed ref ramp input
Speed ref ramp out 23.02 Speed ref ramp output
Speed ref used
24.01 Used speed reference
Freq ref used
28.02 Frequency ref ramp output
Process PID out
40.01 Process PID output actual
Temp sensor 1 excitation
The output is used to feed an excitation current to the
temperature sensor 1, see parameter 35.11 Temperature 1 source. See also section Motor thermal protection
(page 160).
Temp sensor 2 excitation
The output is used to feed an excitation current to the
temperature sensor 2, see parameter 35.21 Temperature 2 source. See also section Motor thermal protection
(page 160).
Abs motor speed used
01.61 Abs motor speed used
Abs motor speed % 01.62 Abs motor speed %
Abs output frequency
01.63 Abs output frequency
Abs motor torque 01.64 Abs motor torque
Abs output power 01.65 Abs output power
Abs motor shaft power
01.68 Abs motor shaft power
External PID1 out 71.01 External PID act value
AO1 data storage 13.91 AO1 data storage
Def/FbEq16 3
Done 0 1 Auto
Parameters 365
No. 49.20
Name/Value
AO2 data storage
Other [bit]
Basic panel home view 2
49.21 Basic panel home view 3
49.219 Basic panel home view 4
49.220 Basic panel home view 5
49.221 Basic panel home view 6
50 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA)
50.01 FBA A enable
Disable
Enable
50.02 FBA A comm loss func
No action Fault
Last speed
Description
Def/FbEq16
13.92 AO2 data storage
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 2 of the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP-S).
For the selections, see parameter 49.19 Basic panel home view 1.
Auto
Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 3 of the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP-S).
For the selections, see parameter 49.19 Basic panel home view 1.
Auto
Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 4 of the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP-S).
For the selections, see parameter 49.19 Basic panel home view 1.
Auto
Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 5 of the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP-S).
For the selections, see parameter 49.19 Basic panel home view 1.
Auto
Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 6 of the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP-S).
For the selections, see parameter 49.19 Basic panel home view 1.
Auto
Fieldbus communication configuration. See also chapter Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter (page 505).
Enables/disables communication between the drive and fieldbus adapter A, and specifies the slot the adapter is installed into.
Communication between drive and fieldbus adapter A disabled.
Communication between drive and fieldbus adapter A enabled. The adapter is in slot 1.
Selects how the drive reacts upon a fieldbus communication break. The time delay is defined by parameter 50.03 FBA A comm loss t out.
No action taken.
Drive trips on 7510 FBA A communication. This only occurs if control is expected from the fieldbus (FBA A selected as source of start/stop/reference in the currently active control location).
Drive generates a warning (A7C1 FBA A communication) and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at. This only occurs if control is expected from the fieldbus. The speed is determined on the basis of actual speed using 850 ms low-pass filtering.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.
Enable 0 1 No action
0 1
2
366 Parameters
No.
50.03 50.04
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Speed ref safe
Drive generates a warning (A7C1 FBA A communication) and 3 sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 22.41 Speed ref safe (in speed control) or 28.41 Frequency ref safe (in frequency control). This only occurs if control is expected from the fieldbus.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.
Fault always
Drive trips on 7510 FBA A communication. This occurs even 4 though no control is expected from the fieldbus.
Warning
Drive generates an A7C1 FBA A communication warning.
5
This only occurs if control is expected from the fieldbus.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
FBA A comm loss t out
Defines the time delay before the action defined by parameter 50.02 FBA A comm loss func is taken. Time count starts when the communication link fails to update the message.
Note: There is a 60-second boot-up delay immediately after
power-up. During the delay, the communication break
monitoring is disabled (but communication itself can be
active).
0.3 s
0.3...6553.5 s
Time delay.
1 = 1 s
FBA A ref1 type
Selects the type and scaling of reference 1 received from
fieldbus adapter A. The scaling of the reference is defined by parameters 46.01...46.04, depending on which reference type is selected by this parameter.
Speed or frequency
Speed or frequency Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the 0 currently active operation mode as follows:
Operation mode (see par. 19.01) Speed control
Torque control
Frequency control
Reference 1 type
Speed Speed Frequency
50.05
Transparent
No scaling is applied (the 16-bit scaling is 1 = 1 unit).
1
General
Generic reference with a 16-bit scaling of 100 = 1 (ie. integer 2 and two decimals).
Torque
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling. 3
Speed
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
4
Frequency
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling. 5
FBA A ref2 type
Selects the type and scaling of reference 2 received from
fieldbus adapter A. The scaling of the reference is defined by parameters 46.01...46.04, depending on which reference type is selected by this parameter.
Speed or frequency
Speed or frequency Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the 0 currently active operation mode as follows:
Operation mode (see par. 19.01) Speed control
Torque control
Frequency control
Reference 2 type
Torque Torque Torque
Parameters 367
No. 50.06 50.07
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Transparent
No scaling is applied(the 16-bit scaling is 1 = 1 unit).
1
General
Generic reference with a 16-bit scaling of 100 = 1 (ie. integer 2 and two decimals).
Torque
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling. 3
Speed
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
4
Frequency
The scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling. 5
FBA A SW sel
Selects the source of the Status word to be sent to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A.
Auto
Auto
Source of the Status word is chosen automatically.
0
Transparent mode The source selected by parameter 50.09 FBA A SW
1
transparent source is transmitted as the Status word to the
fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A.
FBA A actual 1 type
Selects the type and scaling of actual value 1 transmitted to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A. The scaling of the value is defined by parameters 46.01...46.04,
depending on which actual value type is selected by this parameter.
Speed or frequency
Speed or frequency Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the
0
currently active operation mode as follows:
Operation mode (see par. 19.01)
Speed control
Torque control Frequency control
Actual value 1 type
Speed Speed Frequency
50.08
Transparent
The value selected by parameter 50.10 FBA A act1
1
transparent source is sent as actual value 1. No scaling is
applied (the 16-bit scaling is 1 = 1 unit).
General
The value selected by parameter 50.10 FBA A act1
2
transparent source is sent as actual value 1 with a 16-bit
scaling of 100 = 1 unit (ie. integer and two decimals).
Torque
01.10 Motor torque is sent as actual value 1. The scaling is 3 defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
Speed
01.01 Motor speed used is sent as actual value 1. The scaling 4 is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
Frequency
01.06 Output frequency is sent as actual value 1. The scaling 5 is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
FBA A actual 2 type
Selects the type and scaling of actual value 2 transmitted to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A. The scaling of the value is defined by parameters 46.01...46.04,
depending on which actual value type is selected by this parameter.
Speed or frequency
Speed or frequency Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the
0
currently active operation mode as follows:
Operation mode (see par. 19.01)
Speed control Torque control
Frequency control
Actual value 2 type
Torque Torque Torque
368 Parameters
No.
50.09 50.10 50.11 50.12 50.13 50.14
Name/Value Transparent
General
Torque
Speed
Frequency
FBA A SW transparent source Not selected Other FBA A act1 transparent source
Not selected Other FBA A act2 transparent source
Not selected Other FBA A debug mode
Disable Fast
FBA A control word
00000000h... FFFFFFFFh FBA A reference 1
-2147483648... 2147483647
Description
Def/FbEq16
The value selected by parameter 50.11 FBA A act2
1
transparent source is sent as actual value 1. No scaling is
applied (the 16-bit scaling is 1 = 1 unit).
The value selected by parameter 50.11 FBA A act2
2
transparent source is sent as actual value 1 with a 16-bit
scaling of 100 = 1 unit (ie. integer and two decimals).
01.10 Motor torque is sent as actual value 1. The scaling is 3 defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
01.01 Motor speed used is sent as actual value 1. The scaling 4 is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
01.06 Output frequency is sent as actual value 1. The scaling 5 is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
Selects the source of the fieldbus status word when
Not selected
parameter 50.06 FBA A SW sel is set to Transparent mode.
No source selected.
-
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
When parameter 50.07 FBA A actual 1 type is set to Transparent, this parameter selects the source of actual value
1 transmitted to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A.
Not selected
No source selected.
-
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
When parameter 50.08 FBA A actual 2 type is set to Transparent, this parameter selects the source of actual value
2 transmitted to the fieldbus network through fieldbus adapter A.
Not selected
No source selected.
-
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
This parameter enables debug mode. Displays raw
Disable
(unmodified) data received from and sent to fieldbus adapter
A in parameters 50.13...50.18.
Debug mode disabled.
0
Debug mode enabled. Cyclical data update is as fast as
1
possible which increases CPU load on the drive.
Displays the raw (unmodified) control word sent by the
-
master (PLC) to fieldbus adapter A if debugging is enabled by
parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode.
This parameter is read-only.
Control word sent by master to fieldbus adapter A.
-
Displays raw (unmodified) reference REF1 sent by the master (PLC) to fieldbus adapter A if debugging is enabled by parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode.
This parameter is read-only.
Raw REF1 sent by master to fieldbus adapter A.
-
Parameters 369
No. Name/Value 50.15 FBA A reference 2
50.16
-2147483648... 2147483647
FBA A status word
50.17
00000000h... FFFFFFFFh
FBA A actual value 1
50.18
-2147483648... 2147483647
FBA A actual value 2
-2147483648... 2147483647
5511 FBA A settings
51.01 FBA A type
51.02 FBA A Par2
... 51.26
0...65535 ... FBA A Par26 0...65535
Description
Displays raw (unmodified) reference REF2 sent by the master (PLC) to fieldbus adapter A if debugging is enabled by parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode. This parameter is read-only.
Raw REF2 sent by master to fieldbus adapter A.
Def/FbEq16 -
-
Displays the raw (unmodified) status word sent by fieldbus adapter A to the master (PLC) if debugging is enabled by parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode.
This parameter is read-only.
Status word sent by fieldbus adapter A to master.
-
Displays raw (unmodified) actual value ACT1 sent by fieldbus adapter A to the master (PLC) if debugging is enabled by parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode.
This parameter is read-only.
Raw ACT1 sent by fieldbus adapter A to master.
-
Displays raw (unmodified) actual value ACT2 sent by fieldbus adapter A to the master (PLC) if debugging is enabled by parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode.
This parameter is read-only.
Raw ACT2 sent by fieldbus adapter A to master.
-
Fieldbus adapter A configuration.
Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module. If value is 0 = None, module is not found or is not properly connected, or is disabled by parameter 50.01 FBA A enable. 1 = PROFIBUS-DP 32 = CANopen 37 = DeviceNet 128 = Ethernet 132 = PROFInet IO 135 = EtherCAT 136 = ETH Pwrlink 485 = RS-485 comm 101 = ControlNet This parameter is read-only.
Parameters 51.02...51.26 are adapter module-specific. For more information, see the documentation of the fieldbus adapter module. Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily in use.
Fieldbus adapter configuration parameter.
...
See parameter 51.02 FBA A Par2.
Fieldbus adapter configuration parameter.
-
1 = 1 ... 1 = 1
370 Parameters
No. 51.27 51.28 51.29 51.30 51.31
51.32 51.33
Name/Value FBA A par refresh
Done Configure FBA A par table ver
FBA A drive type code 0...65535 FBA A mapping file ver 0...65535 D2FBA A comm status Not configured Initializing Time out Configuration error
Off-line On-line
Reset FBA A comm SW ver
FBA A appl SW ver
Description
Validates any changed fieldbus adapter module configuration settings. After refreshing, the value reverts automatically to Done. Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Refreshing done.
Refreshing.
Displays the parameter table revision of the fieldbus adapter module mapping file (stored in the memory of the drive). In format axyz, where ax = major table revision number; yz = minor table revision number. This parameter is read-only.
Parameter table revision of adapter module.
Displays the drive type code in the fieldbus adapter module mapping file (stored in the memory of the drive). This parameter is read-only.
Drive type code stored in the mapping file.
Displays the fieldbus adapter module mapping file revision stored in the memory of the drive in decimal format. This parameter is read-only.
Mapping file revision.
Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter module communication.
Adapter is not configured.
Adapter is initializing.
A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive.
Adapter configuration error: mapping file not found in the file system of the drive, or mapping file upload has failed more than three times.
Fieldbus communication is off-line.
Fieldbus communication is on-line, or fieldbus adapter has been configured not to detect a communication break. For more information, see the documentation of the fieldbus adapter.
Adapter is performing a hardware reset.
Displays the common program revision of the adapter module in format axyz, where a = major revision number, xy = minor revision number, z = correction number or letter. Example: 190A = revision 1.90A.
Common program revision of adapter module.
Displays the application program revision of the adapter module in format axyz, where a = major revision number, xy = minor revision number, z = correction number or letter. Example: 190A = revision 1.90A.
Application program version of adapter module.
Def/FbEq16 Done
0 1 -
-
1 = 1 -
1 = 1 Not configured 0 1 2 3
4 5
6
-
-
Parameters 371
No. Name/Value 5522 FBA A data in
52.01 FBA A data in1
None
CW 16bit
Ref1 16bit
Ref2 16bit
SW 16bit
Act1 16bit
Act2 16bit
Reserved
CW 32bit
Ref1 32bit
Ref2 32bit
SW 32bit
Act1 32bit
Act2 32bit
Reserved
SW2 16bit
Other
...
...
52.12 FBA A data in12
5533 FBA A data out
53.01 FBA A data out1
None CW 16bit Ref1 16bit Ref2 16bit Reserved CW 32bit Ref1 32bit Ref2 32bit Reserved CW2 16bit
Description
Def/FbEq16
Selection of data to be transferred from drive to fieldbus controller through fieldbus adapter A.
Note: 32-bit values require two consecutive parameters. Whenever a 32-bit value is selected in a data parameter, the next parameter is automatically reserved.
Parameters 52.01...52.12 select data to be transferred from None the drive to the fieldbus controller through fieldbus adapter A.
None.
0
Control Word (16 bits)
1
Reference REF1 (16 bits)
2
Reference REF2 (16 bits)
3
Status Word (16 bits)
4
Actual value ACT1 (16 bits)
5
Actual value ACT2 (16 bits)
6
7...10
Control Word (32 bits)
11
Reference REF1 (32 bits)
12
Reference REF2 (32 bits)
13
Status Word (32 bits)
14
Actual value ACT1 (32 bits)
15
Actual value ACT2 (32 bits)
16
17...23
Status Word 2 (16 bits)
24
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
...
...
See parameter 52.01 FBA A data in1.
None
Selection of data to be transferred from fieldbus controller to drive through fieldbus adapter A. Note: 32-bit values require two consecutive parameters. Whenever a 32-bit value is selected in a data parameter, the next parameter is automatically reserved. Parameters 53.01...53.12 select data to be transferred from the fieldbus controller to the drive through fieldbus adapter A. None. Control Word (16 bits) Reference REF1 (16 bits) Reference REF2 (16 bits)
Control Word (32 bits) Reference REF1 (32 bits) Reference REF2 (32 bits)
Control Word 2 (16 bits)
None
0 1 2 3 7...10 11 12 13 14...20 21
372 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Other
...
...
53.12 FBA A data out12
58 58 Embedded fieldbus
58.01 Protocol enable
None Modbus RTU
58.02 Protocol ID
58.03 Node address
0...255 58.04 Baud rate
58.05
Autodetect 4.8 kbps 9.6 kbps 19.2 kbps 38.4 kbps 57.6 kbps 76.8 kbps 115.2 kbps Parity
8 NONE 1 8 NONE 2 8 EVEN 1
Description
Def/FbEq16
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
...
...
See parameter 53.01 FBA A data out1.
None
Configuration of the embedded fieldbus (EFB) interface. See also chapter Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) (page 475).
Enables/disables the embedded fieldbus interface and selects the protocol to use.
None (communication disabled).
Embedded fieldbus interface is enabled and uses the Modbus RTU protocol.
Displays the protocol ID and revision. First 4 bits specify the protocol ID and last 12 bits specify the revision. This parameter is read-only.
Protocol ID and revision.
Defines the node address of the drive on the fieldbus link. Values 1...247 are allowable. Also called Station ID, MAC Address or Device Address. Two devices with the same address are not allowed on-line. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
Node address (values 1...247 are allowed).
Selects the transfer rate of the fieldbus link. When using selection Autodetect, the parity setting of the bus must be known and configured in parameter 58.05 Parity. When parameter 58.04 Baud rate is set to Autodetect, the EFB settings must be refreshed with parameter 58.06. The bus is monitored for a period of time and the detected baud rate is set as the value of this parameter. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
Baud rate detected automatically.
4.8 kbit/s.
9.6 kbit/s.
19.2 kbit/s.
38.4 kbit/s.
57.6 kbit/s.
76.8 kbit/s.
115.2 kbit/s.
Selects the type of parity bit and number of stop bits. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
Eight data bits, no parity bit, one stop bit.
Eight data bits, no parity bit, two stop bits.
Eight data bits, even parity bit, one stop bit.
None 0 1 -
1 = 1 0
1 = 1 Modbus: 19.2 kbps
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EVEN 1
0 1 2
Parameters 373
No. 58.06
Name/Value 8 ODD 1 Communication control Enabled Refresh settings
Silent mode
58.07 Communication diagnostics
Description Eight data bits, odd parity bit, one stop bit. Takes changed EFB settings in use, or activates silent mode.
Def/FbEq16 3 Enabled
Normal operation.
0
Refreshes settings (parameters 58.01...58.05, 58.14...58.17, 1 58.25, 58.28...58.34) and takes changed EFB configuration settings in use. Reverts automatically to Enabled.
Activates silent mode (no messages are transmitted).
2
Silent mode can be terminated by activating the Refresh
settings selection of this parameter.
Displays the status of the EFB communication.
-
This parameter is read-only.
Note that the name is only visible when the error is present
(bit value is 1).
Bit
Name
Description
0
Init failed
1 = EFB initialization failed
1
Addr config err
1 = Node address not allowed by protocol
2
Silent mode
1 = Drive not allowed to transmit
0 = Drive allowed to transmit
3
Autobauding
1 = Automatic detection of baud rate is in use (see parameter 58.04)
4
Wiring error
1 = Errors detected (A/B wires possibly swapped)
5
Parity error
1 = Error detected: check parameters 58.04 and 58.05
6
Baud rate error
1 = Error detected: check parameters 58.05 and 58.04
7
No bus activity
1 = 0 bytes received during last 5 seconds
8
No packets
1 = 0 packets (addressed to any device) detected during last 5 seconds
9
Noise or addressing 1 = Errors detected (interference, or another device with the
error
same address on line)
10
Comm loss
1 = 0 packets addressed to the drive received within timeout (58.16)
11
CW/Ref loss
1 = No control word or references received within timeout (58.16)
12
Inactive
13
Protocol 1
Reserved
14
Protocol 2
Reserved
15
Internal error
1 = Internal error occurred. Contact your local ABB representative.
0000h...FFFFh 58.08 Received packets
0...4294967295
EFB communication status.
Displays a count of valid packets addressed to the drive. During normal operation, this number increases constantly. Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down for over 3 seconds.
Number of received packets addressed to the drive.
1 = 1 -
1 = 1
374 Parameters
No. 58.09 58.10
58.11
58.12 58.14
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
Transmitted packets Displays a count of valid packets transmitted by the drive.
-
During normal operation, this number increases constantly.
Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down
for over 3 seconds.
0...4294967295
Number of transmitted packets.
1 = 1
All packets
Displays a count of valid packets addressed to any device on the bus. During normal operation, this number increases constantly.
Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down for over 3 seconds.
0...4294967295
Number of all received packets.
1 = 1
UART errors
Displays a count of character errors received by the drive. An increasing count indicates a configuration problem on the bus.
Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down for over 3 seconds.
0...4294967295
Number of UART errors.
1 = 1
CRC errors
Displays a count of packets with a CRC error received by the drive. An increasing count indicates interference on the bus.
Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset down for over 3 seconds.
0...4294967295
Number of CRC errors.
1 = 1
Communication loss action
Selects how the drive reacts to an EFB communication break. No action
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
See also parameters 58.15 Communication loss mode and 58.16 Communication loss time.
No action
No action taken (monitoring disabled).
0
Fault
The drive monitors communication loss when start/stop is
1
expected from the EFB on the currently active control
location.
The drive trips on 6681 EFB comm loss if control in the
currently active control location is expected from the EFB or
reference is coming from the EFB, and the communication is
lost.
Last speed
Drive generates an A7CE EFB comm loss warning and
2
freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at. The
speed is determined on the basis of actual speed using
850 ms low-pass filtering. This occurs if control or reference
is expected from the EFB.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
Speed ref safe
Drive generates an A7CE EFB comm loss warning and sets 3 the speed to the speed defined by parameter 22.41 Speed ref safe (or 28.41 Frequency ref safe when frequency reference is being used). This occurs if control or reference is expected from the EFB.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.
Parameters 375
No. Name/Value Fault always
Warning
58.15 Communication loss mode
58.16
Any message
Cw / Ref1 / Ref2
Communication loss time
0.0...6000.0 s 58.17 Transmit delay
0...65535 ms 58.18 EFB control word
58.19
0000h... FFFFh
EFB status word
58.25
0000h... FFFFh
Control profile
ABB Drives DCU Profile
Description
Drive continuously monitors for communication loss. Drive trips on 6681 EFB comm loss. This happens even though the drive is in a control location where the EFB start/stop or reference is not used.
Drive generates an A7CE EFB comm loss warning. This occurs even though no control is expected from the EFB.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.
Defines which message types reset the timeout counter for detecting an EFB communication loss. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). See also parameters 58.14 Communication loss action and 58.16 Communication loss time.
Any message addressed to the drive resets the timeout.
A write of the control word or a reference resets the timeout.
Sets a timeout for EFB communication. If a communication break lasts longer than the timeout, the action specified by parameter 58.14 Communication loss action is taken. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). See also parameter 58.15 Communication loss mode. Note: There is a 30-second boot-up delay immediately after power-up.
EFB communication timeout.
Defines a minimum response delay in addition to any fixed delay imposed by the protocol. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
Minimum response delay.
Displays the raw (unmodified) control word sent by the Modbus controller to the drive. For debugging purposes. This parameter is read-only.
Control word sent by Modbus controller to the drive.
Def/FbEq16 4 5 Any message
1 2 30.0 s
1 = 1 0 ms
1 = 1 1 = 1
Displays the raw (unmodified) status word for debugging purposes. This parameter is read-only.
Status word sent by the drive to the Modbus controller.
1 = 1
Defines the communication profile used by the Modbus protocol. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings). See section About the control profiles on page 484.
ABB Drives control profile (with a 16-bit control word)
DCU control profile (with a 16 or 32-bit control word)
ABB Drives
0 5
376 Parameters
No. 58.26
Name/Value EFB ref1 type
Speed or frequency
Description
Selects the type and scaling of reference 1 received through the embedded fieldbus interface. The scaled reference is displayed by 03.09 EFB reference 1.
Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the currently active operation mode as follows.
Def/FbEq16 Speed or frequency
0
Operation mode (see par. 19.01)
Speed control
Torque control Frequency control
Reference 1 type
Speed Speed Frequency
58.27 58.28
Transparent General Torque Speed Frequency EFB ref2 type
EFB act1 type Speed or frequency
No scaling is applied.
Generic reference without a specific unit. Scaling: 1 = 100.
Torque reference. The scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
Speed reference. The scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
Frequency reference. The scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
Selects the type and scaling of reference 2 received through the embedded fieldbus interface. The scaled reference is displayed by 03.10 EFB reference 2.
Selects the type of actual value 1.
Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the currently active operation mode as follows.
1 2 3
4
5
Torque
Speed or frequency 0
Operation mode (see par. 19.01) Speed control
Torque control
Frequency control
Actual 1 type
Speed Speed Frequency
58.29 58.31
58.32
Transparent General Torque Speed Frequency EFB act2 type
EFB act1 transparent source Not selected Other EFB act2 transparent source Not selected Other
No scaling is applied.
1
Generic reference without a specific unit. Scaling: 1 = 100. 2
Scaling is defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
3
Scaling is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
4
Scaling is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
5
Selects the type of actual value 2. For the selections, see parameter 58.28 EFB act1 type.
Transparent
Selects the source of actual value 1 when parameter 58.28 Not selected EFB act1 type is set to Transparent.
None.
0
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Selects the source of actual value 2 when parameter 58.29 Not selected EFB act2 type is set to Transparent.
None.
0
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Parameters 377
No. Name/Value 58.33 Addressing mode
Mode 0
Mode 1
Mode 2
58.34 Word order
HI-LO LO-HI 58.101 Data I/O 1
None CW 16bit Ref1 16bit Ref2 16bit SW 16bit Act1 16bit Act2 16bit Reserved CW 32bit Ref1 32bit
Description
Defines the mapping between parameters and holding registers in the 400101...465535 Modbus register range. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
16-bit values (groups 1...99, indexes 1...99): Register address = 400000 + 100 � parameter group + parameter index. For example, parameter 22.80 would be mapped to register 400000 + 2200 + 80 = 402280. 32-bit values (groups 1...99, indexes 1...99): Register address = 420000 + 200 � parameter group + 2 � parameter index. For example, parameter 22.80 would be mapped to register 420000 + 4400 + 160 = 424560.
16-bit values (groups 1...255, indexes 1...255): Register address = 400000 + 256 � parameter group + parameter index. For example, parameter 22.80 would be mapped to register 400000 + 5632 + 80 = 405712.
32-bit values (groups 1...127, indexes 1...255): Register address = 400000 + 512 � parameter group + 2 � parameter index. For example, parameter 22.80 would be mapped to register 400000 + 11264 + 160 = 411424.
Selects in which order 16-bit registers of 32-bit parameters are transferred. For each register, the first byte contains the high order byte and the second byte contains the low order byte. Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
The first register contains the high order word, the second contains the low order word.
The first register contains the low order word, the second contains the high order word.
Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master accesses when it reads from or writes to the register address corresponding to Modbus register 1 (400001). The master defines the type of the data (input or output). The value is transmitted in a Modbus frame consisting of two 16bit words. If the value is 16-bit, it is transmitted in the LSW (least significant word). If the value is 32-bit, the subsequent parameter is also reserved for it and must be set to None.
No mapping, register is always zero.
ABB Drives profile: 16-bit ABB drives control word; DCU Profile: lower 16 bits of the DCU control word
Reference REF1 (16 bits)
Reference REF2 (16 bits)
ABB Drives profile: 16-bit ABB drives status word; DCU Profile: lower 16 bits of the DCU status word
Actual value ACT1 (16 bits)
Actual value ACT2 (16 bits)
Control Word (32 bits)
Reference REF1 (32 bits)
Def/FbEq16 Mode 0
0
1
2
LO-HI
0 1 CW 16bit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7...10 11 12
378 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Ref2 32bit
SW 32bit
Act1 32bit
Act2 32bit
Reserved
CW2 16bit
SW2 16bit
58.102
Reserved
RO/DIO control word
AO1 data storage
AO2 data storage
Reserved
Feedback data storage
Setpoint data storage
Other
Data I/O 2
58.103 Data I/O 3
58.104 Data I/O 4
58.105 Data I/O 5
58.106 Data I/O 6
58.107 Data I/O 7
...
...
58.114 Data I/O 14
Description Reference REF2 (32 bits) Status Word (32 bits) Actual value ACT1 (32 bits) Actual value ACT2 (32 bits)
ABB Drives profile: not used; DCU Profile: upper 16 bits of the DCU control word ABB Drives profile: not used / always zero; DCU Profile: upper 16 bits of the DCU status word
Parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word.
Def/FbEq16 13 14 15 16 17...20 21
24
25...30 31
Parameter 13.91 AO1 data storage. Parameter 13.92 AO2 data storage.
Parameter 40.91 Feedback data storage.
32 33 34...39 40
Parameter 40.92 Setpoint data storage.
41
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master accesses when it reads from or writes to register address 400002.
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
Ref1 16bit
Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master accesses when it reads from or writes to register address 400003.
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
Ref2 16bit
Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master accesses when it reads from or writes to register address 400004.
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
SW 16bit
Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master accesses when it reads from or writes to register address 400005.
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
Act1 16bit
Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master accesses when it reads from or writes to register address 400006.
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
Act2 16bit
Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400007. For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
None
...
...
Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400014. For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
None
Parameters 379
No. Name/Value 7711 External PID1
71.01
71.02 71.03 71.04 71.06
External PID act value Feedback act value Setpoint act value Deviation act value PID status word
Description
Configuration of external PID. See the control chain diagrams on pages 536 and 537. See parameter 40.01 Process PID output actual.
See parameter 40.02 Process PID feedback actual. See parameter 40.03 Process PID setpoint actual. See parameter 40.04 Process PID deviation actual. Displays status information on process external PID control. This parameter is read-only.
Def/FbEq16
-
Bit
Name
0
PID active
1
Reserved
2
Output frozen
3...6 7 8 9 10...11 12
13...15
Reserved Output limit high Output limit low Deadband active Reserved Internal setpoint active Reserved
Value 1 = Process PID control active.
1 = Process PID controller output frozen. Bit is set if parameter 71.38 Output freeze enable is TRUE, or the deadband function is active (bit 9 is set).
1 = PID output is being limited by par. 71.37. 1 = PID output is being limited by par. 71.36. 1 = Deadband is active (see par. 71.39)
1 = Internal setpoint active (see par. 71.16...71.23)
71.07 71.08 71.11 71.14
71.15 71.16 71.19
0000h...FFFFh
Process PID control status word.
PID operation mode See parameter 40.07 Process PID operation mode.
Feedback 1 source See parameter 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source.
Feedback filter time See parameter 40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time.
Setpoint scaling
Defines, together with parameter 71.15 Output scaling, a general scaling factor for the external PID control chain. The scaling can be utilized when, for example, the process setpoint is input in Hz, and the output of the PID controller is used as an rpm value in speed control. In this case, this parameter might be set to 50, and parameter 71.15 to the nominal motor speed at 50 Hz.
In effect, the output of the PID controller [71.15] when deviation (setpoint - feedback) = [71.14] and [71.32] = 1.
Note: The scaling is based on the ratio between 71.14 and 71.15. For example, the values 50 and 1500 would produce the same scaling as 1 and 3.
-200000.00... 200000.00
Process setpoint base.
Output scaling
See parameter 71.14 Setpoint scaling.
-200000.00... 200000.00
Process PID controller output base.
Setpoint 1 source See parameter 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source.
Internal setpoint sel1
See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
1 = 1 Off AI2 percent 0.000 s 1500.00
1 = 1 1500.00 1 = 1 AI1 percent Not selected
380 Parameters
No. 71.20 71.21
71.22
71.23
71.26 71.27 71.31 71.32 71.33 71.34 71.35 71.36 71.37 71.38 71.39
71.40
71.58
Name/Value
Internal setpoint sel2
Internal setpoint 1
Description See parameter 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2.
See parameter 40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1.
Internal setpoint 2 See parameter 40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2.
Internal setpoint 3 See parameter 40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3.
Setpoint min Setpoint max Deviation inversion
See parameter 40.26 Set 1 setpoint min. See parameter 40.27 Set 1 setpoint max. See parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion.
Gain
See parameter 40.32 Set 1 gain.
Integration time
See parameter 40.33 Set 1 integration time.
Derivation time
See parameter 40.34 Set 1 derivation time.
Derivation filter time See parameter 40.35 Set 1 derivation filter time.
Output min
See parameter 40.36 Set 1 output min.
Output max
See parameter 40.37 Set 1 output max.
Output freeze enable
See parameter 40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable.
Deadband range
The control program compares the absolute value of parameter 71.04 Deviation act value to the deadband range defined by this parameter. If the absolute value is within the deadband range for the time period defined by parameter 71.40 Deadband delay, PID's deadband mode is activated and 71.06 PID status word bit 9 Deadband active is set. Then PID's output is frozen and 71.06 PID status word bit 2 Output frozen is set.
If the absolute value is equal or greater than the deadband range, PID's deadband mode is deactivated.
0.0...200000.0
Range
Deadband delay
Defines the deadband delay for the deadband function. See parameter 71.39 Deadband range.
0.0...3600.0 s
Delay
Increase prevention See parameter 40.58 Set 1 increase prevention.
No
Increase prevention not in use.
Limiting
The PID integration term is not increased if the maximum value for the PID output is reached. This parameter is valid
for the PID set 1.
Process PID min lim
The process PID integration term is not increased when the output of the external PID has reached its minimum limit. In this setup, the external PID is used as a source for the
process PID.
Process PID max lim
The process PID integration term is not increased when the output of the external PID has reached its maximum limit. In this setup, the external PID is used as a source for the
process PID.
Def/FbEq16 Not selected
0.00 PID customer units 0.00 PID customer units 0.00 PID customer units 0.00 200000.00 Not inverted (Ref - Fbk) 1.00 60.0 s 0.000 s 0.0 s -200000.00 200000.00 Not selected
0.0
1 = 1 0.0 s
1=1s No 0 1
2
3
Parameters 381
No. 71.59
Name/Value Other Decrease prevention No Limiting
Process PID min lim
Process PID max lim
71.62 71.79
Other
Internal setpoint actual
External PID units
7766 PFC configuration
76.01 PFC status
Description
Def/FbEq16
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
See parameter 40.59 Set 1 decrease prevention.
No
Decrease prevention not in use.
0
The PID integration term is not decreased if the maximum 1 value for the PID output is reached. This parameter is valid for the PID set 1.
The process PID integration term is not decreased when the 2
output of the external PID has reached its minimum limit. In this setup, the external PID is used as a source for the process PID.
The process PID integration term is not decreased when the 3
output of the external PID has reached its maximum limit. In this setup, the external PID is used as a source for the process PID.
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
See parameter 40.62 PID internal setpoint actual.
-
Unit used for external PID.
%
For selections, see parameter 40.79 Set 1 units.
PFC (Pump and fan control) and Autochange configuration
parameters. See also section Pump and fan control (PFC) on page 132.
Displays the running/stopped status of the PFC motors.
-
PFC1, PFC2, PFC3, PFC4, PFC5 and PFC6 always
correspond to the 1st...6th motor of the PFC system. If 76.74
Autochange auxiliary PFC auxiliary PFC is set to Aux motors
only, PFC1 represents the motor connected to the drive and
PFC2 the first auxiliary motor (the 2nd motor of the system). If
76.74 is set to All motors, PFC1 is the first motor, PFC2 the
2nd. The drive can be connected to any of these motors
depending on the Autochange functionality.
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6...15
Name PFC 1 running PFC 2 running PFC 3 running PFC 4 running PFC 5 running PFC 6 running Reserved
Value 0 = Stop, 1 = Start 0 = Stop, 1 = Start 0 = Stop, 1 = Start 0 = Stop, 1 = Start 0 = Stop, 1 = Start 0 = Stop, 1 = Start
76.02
0000h...FFFFh Multipump system status
PFC disabled PFC enabled (not started)
Status of the PFC relay outputs.
Displays the status of the PFC system in text form. Provides a quick PFC system overview, e.g. if the parameter is added to the Home view on the control panel.
PFC (Pump and fan control) is enabled.
PFC is enabled but not started.
1 = 1 PFC disabled
0 1
382 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
SPFC enabled (not SPFC (Soft pump and fan control) is enabled but not started. 2 started)
Running with VSD The drive is controlling one pump/fan motor, no auxiliary
100
motors are used.
Running with VSD One auxiliary motor has been taken in use.
101
+ 1 Aux
Running with VSD Two auxiliary motor have been taken in use.
102
+ 2 Aux
Running with VSD Three auxiliary motor have been taken in use.
103
+ 3 Aux
Running with VSD Four auxiliary motor have been taken in use.
104
+ 4 Aux
Running with VSD Five auxiliary motor have been taken in use.
105
+ 5 Aux
Starting Aux1
Auxiliary motor 1 is being started.
200
Starting Aux2
Auxiliary motor 2 is being started.
201
Starting Aux3
Auxiliary motor 3 is being started.
202
Starting Aux4
Auxiliary motor 4 is being started.
203
Starting Aux5
Auxiliary motor 5 is being started.
204
Stopping Aux1
Auxiliary motor 1 is being stopped.
300
Stopping Aux2
Auxiliary motor 2 is being stopped.
301
Stopping Aux3
Auxiliary motor 3 is being stopped.
302
Stopping Aux4
Auxiliary motor 4 is being stopped.
303
Stopping Aux5
Auxiliary motor 5 is being stopped.
304
Autochange active Autochange, that is, automatic rotation of the start order is 400 active.
No auxiliary motors No auxiliary motors are available to be started, eg, all are
500
available to be
already running, or a motor in not available due to
started
maintenance.
Regulator bypass active
Direct-on-line pumps are automatically started and stopped. 600
PID sleep
PID sleep is in use, and the pump can be stopped in during 800 low demand.
PID sleep boost
PID sleep with extended sleep time is in use, and the pump 801 can be stopped in during low demand.
Invalid configuration PFC configuration is invalid.
4
PFC inactive (local PFC is inactive because the drive is in local control.
5
control)
PFC inactive
PFC is inactive because of an invalid operation mode.
6
(invalid operation
mode)
Drive motor
The motor connected to the drive is interlocked (not
7
interlocked
available). Warning D503 VSD controlled PFC motor
interlocked (page 463) is generated.
All motors interlocked
All motors are interlocked (not available). Warning D502 All 8 motors interlocked (page 463) is generated.
PFC inactive (ext1 PFC is inactive because external control location EXT1 is in 9
active)
use. PFC is supported in EXT2 only.
Parameters 383
No. 76.11
Name/Value Pump status 1
Description Shows the status of pump 1.
Bit 0 1 2 3...4 5 6...10 11 12...15
Name Ready Reserved Running Reserved In PFC control Reserved Interlocked Reserved
Value 0 = False, 1 = True 0 = False, 1 = True 0 = False, 1 = True
0 = False, 1 = True
Def/FbEq16 -
76.12 76.13 76.14 76.15 76.16 76.21
0000h...FFFFh Pump status 2 Pump status 3 Pump status 4 Pump status 5 Pump status 6 Multipump configuration Off Reserved PFC
SPFC
76.25 Number of motors
76.26 76.27
1...6
Min number of motors allowed
0...6
Max number of motors allowed
1...6
Status of pump 1. See parameter 76.11 Pump status 1. See parameter 76.11 Pump status 1. See parameter 76.11 Pump status 1. See parameter 76.11 Pump status 1. See parameter 76.11 Pump status 1. Selects the multipump/fan control (PFC) mode.
1 = 1 Off
PFC disabled.
PFC enabled. One pump at a time is controlled by the drive. The remaining pumps are direct-on-line pumps that are started and stopped by the drive logic The frequency (group 28 Frequency reference chain) / speed (group 22 Speed reference selection) reference must be defined as PID for the PFC functionality to work properly.
SPFC enabled. See section Soft pump and fan control (SPFC) on page.133
Total number of motors used in the application, including the motor connected directly to the drive.
Number of motors.
Minimum number of motors running simultaneously.
0 1 2
3 1 1 = 1 1
Minimum number of motors. Maximum number of motors running simultaneously.
1 = 1 1
Maximum number of motors.
1 = 1
384 Parameters
No. 76.30
Name/Value Start point 1
Speed
Description
Defines the start point for the first auxiliary motor. As the motor speed or frequency (defined by the PID output value) exceeds the limit defined by this parameter, a new auxiliary motor is started.
To avoid nuisance starts of the second auxiliary motor, the speed of the variable speed motor should be higher than the start speed for the duration defined by parameter 76.55 Start delay. If the speed decreases below the start speed, the auxiliary motor is not started.
To maintain the process conditions during the start of the second auxiliary motor, a speed hold on time can be defined with parameter 76.57 PFC speed hold on. Certain pump types do not produce significant flow with low frequencies. The speed hold on time can be used to compensate the time needed to accelerate the second auxiliary motor to a speed where it produces flow. The start of the second auxiliary motor is not aborted if the speed of the first auxiliary motor decreases.
Def/FbEq16
Vector: 1300 rpm; Scalar 48 Hz; 58 Hz (95.20 b0)
76.55
76.57
Max. speed
76.30
76.41 Min. speed
76.56 76.58
Time
Aux. pump 1 Stop/Start
ON OFF
ON OFF 0...32767 rpm/Hz 76.31 Start point 2
76.32 Start point 3
76.33 Start point 4
Increasing
Start
flow
Decreasing
Stop
flow
Speed/frequency. Defines the start speed (Hz/rpm) for the second auxiliary motor. See parameter 76.31 Start point 1.
Defines the start speed (Hz/rpm) for the third auxiliary motor. See parameter 76.31 Start point 1.
Defines the start speed (Hz/rpm) for the fourth auxiliary motor. See parameter 76.31 Start point 1.
1 = 1 unit
Vector: 1300 rpm; Scalar 48 Hz; 58 Hz (95.20 b0)
Vector: 1300 rpm; Scalar 48 Hz; 58 Hz (95.20 b0)
Vector: 1300 rpm; Scalar 48 Hz; 58 Hz (95.20 b0)
Parameters 385
No. 76.34 76.41
76.42 76.43 76.44 76.45 76.55 76.56 76.57 76.58
Name/Value Start point 5
Stop point 1
0...32767 rpm/Hz Stop point 2
Stop point 3
Stop point 4
Stop point 5
Start delay 0.00...12600.00 s Stop delay 0.00...12600.00 s PFC speed hold on 0.00...1000.00 s PFC speed hold off 0.00...1000.00 s
Description Defines the start speed (Hz/rpm) for the fifth auxiliary motor. See parameter 76.31 Start point 1.
Defines the stop speed (Hz/rpm) for the first auxiliary motor. When the speed (defined by the PID output value) of the motor connected directly to the drive falls below this value and one auxiliary motor is running, the stop delay defined by parameter 76.56 Stop delay is started. If the speed is still at the same level or lower when the stop delay elapses, the first auxiliary motor stops. The running speed of the drive is increased by [Start point 1 Stop point 1] after the auxiliary motor stops. Speed/frequency Defines the stop speed (Hz/rpm) for the second auxiliary motor. See parameter 76.31 Stop point 1.
Defines the stop speed (Hz/rpm) for the third auxiliary motor. See parameter 76.31 Stop point 1.
Defines the stop speed (Hz/rpm) for the fourth auxiliary motor. See parameter 76.31 Stop point 1.
Defines the stop speed (Hz/rpm) for the fifth auxiliary motor. See parameter 76.31 Stop point 1.
Defines a start delay for auxiliary motors. See parameter 76.31 Start point 1. Time delay. Defines a stop delay for auxiliary motors. See parameter 76.31 Stop point 1. Time delay. Hold time for auxiliary motor switch-on. See parameter 76.31 Start point 1. Time. Hold time for auxiliary motor switch-off. See parameter 76.31 Stop point 1. Time.
Def/FbEq16 Vector: 1300 rpm; Scalar 48 Hz; 58 Hz (95.20 b0) Vector: 800 rpm; Scalar 25 Hz; 30 Hz (95.20 b0)
1 = 1 unit Vector: 800 rpm; Scalar 25 Hz; 30 Hz (95.20 b0) Vector: 800 rpm; Scalar 25 Hz; 30 Hz (95.20 b0) Vector: 800 rpm; Scalar 25 Hz; 30 Hz (95.20 b0) Vector: 800 rpm; Scalar 25 Hz; 30 Hz (95.20 b0) 10.00 s
1=1s 10.00 s
1=1s 0.00 s
1=1s 0.00 s
1=1s
386 Parameters
No. 76.59
Name/Value
PFC contactor delay
76.60
0.20...600.00 s
PFC ramp acceleration time
76.61
0.00...1800.00 s
PFC ramp deceleration time
0.00...1800.00 s 76.70 PFC autochange
Not selected Selected DI1 DI2 DI3
Description
Start delay for the motor that is directly controlled by the drive. This does not affect the starting of the auxiliary motors.
WARNING! There must always be a delay set if the motors are equipped with star-delta starters. The delay must be set longer than the time setting of the starter. After the motor is switched on by the relay output of the drive, there must be enough time for the star-delta starter to first switch to star and then back to delta before the motor is connected to the drive.
Time delay.
Defines the acceleration time for the drive motor speed compensation, when an auxiliary motor is stopped. This ramp time is also used for the drive motor to accelerate after an autochange has occurred. Defines the acceleration time if the latest reference received by the drive is higher than the previous reference. This parameter is used also to accelerate the pump when the auxiliary pump is started. The parameter sets the ramp-up time as seconds from zero to maximum frequency (not from the previous reference to the new reference).
Time.
Defines the deceleration time for the drive motor speed compensation, when an auxiliary motor is started. This ramp time is also used for the drive motor to decelerate after an autochange has occurred. Defines the deceleration time if the latest reference received by the drive is lower than the previous reference. This parameter is used also to decelerate the pump when the auxiliary pump is stopped. The parameter sets the ramp-down time as seconds from maximum to zero frequency (not from the previous reference to the new reference).
Time.
Defines the way the autochange is triggered. In all cases except Even wear, the start order is moved one step forward each time the autochange occurs. If the start order initially is 1-2-3-4, after the first autochange the order will be 2-3-4-1, etc. For Even wear, the start order will be determined so that the running times of all motors remain within the defined limit. Note: Autochange only occurs when the speed of the drive is below the speed defined by parameter 76.73 Autochange level. See also section Autochange on page 133.
Autochange disabled.
Rising edge starts the autochange if autochange conditions are met.
Autochange triggered by the rising edge of digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
Autochange triggered by the rising edge of digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
Autochange triggered by the rising edge of digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
Def/FbEq16 0.50 s
1=1s 1.00 s
1=1s 1.00 s
1=1s Not selected
0 1 2 3 4
Parameters 387
No.
76.71 76.72 76.73 76.74
Name/Value
Description
Def/FbEq16
DI4
Autochange triggered by the rising edge of digital input DI4 5
(10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
DI5
Autochange triggered by the rising edge of digital input DI5 6
(10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
DI6
Autochange triggered by the rising edge of digital input DI6 7
(10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
Timed function 1 Autochange triggered by timed function 1 (bit 0 of 34.01
8
Timed functions status (see page 307)).
Timed function 2 Autochange triggered by timed function 2 (bit 1 of 34.01
9
Timed functions status (see page 307)).
Timed function 3 Autochange triggered by timed function 3 (bit 2 of 34.01
10
Timed functions status (see page 307)).
Fixed interval
Autochange is done when the interval determined in the
11
parameter 76.71 PFC autochange interval has elapsed.
All stop
Autochange is done when all the motors are stopped.
12
The PID sleep feature (parameters 40.43 Set 1 sleep level ...
40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay) must be used for the drive to stop
when the process demand is low.
Even wear
The running time of the motors are balanced by the drive.
13
When the difference in running time between the motors with
the least and most running hours exceeds the time defined by
parameter 76.72 Maximum wear imbalance, the autochange
occurs.
The running hours of the motors can be found in group 77
PFC maintenance and monitoring.
Other [bit]
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
PFC autochange interval
Specifies the interval that is used in setting Fixed interval of 1.00 h parameter 76.70 PFC autochange.
0.00...42949672.95 Time. h
1=1h
Maximum wear imbalance
Specifies the maximum wear imbalance, or difference in running times between any motor, used by the Even wear setting of parameter 76.70 PFC autochange.
10.00 h
0.00...1000000.00 Time. h
1=1h
Autochange level
Upper speed limit for the Autochange to occur. The Autochange occurs when:
� the condition defined in 76.70 PFC autochange is fulfilled and,
� the speed of the drive motor 01.03 Motor speed % is below the speed limit defined in this parameter.
Note: When the value is selected as 0%, this speed limit check is disabled.
100.0%
0.0...300.0%
Speed/frequency in percentage of the nominal speed or frequency of the drive motor.
1 = 1%
Autochange auxiliary PFC
Selects whether only auxiliary motors or all motors are included in the Autochange function.
Aux motors only
388 Parameters
No.
76.81
76.82 76.83 76.84 76.85 76.86 76.95
Name/Value All motors
Aux motors only
PFC 1 interlock
Interlocked. PFC motor is not in use Available. PFC motor is available DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Other [bit] PFC 2 interlock
PFC 3 interlock
PFC 4 interlock
PFC 5 interlock
PFC 6 interlock
Regulator bypass control
Disable
Description
All motors, including the one connected to the drive participates in the autochange. The Autochange logic will connect the drive to each of the motors according to setting of parameter 76.70 PFC autochange. Note: The first motor (PFC1) also requires the appropriate hardware contactor connections and PFC1 must be defined in one of the relay output source parameters.
Only auxiliary (direct-on-line) motors are affected by the autochange function. Note: PFC1 refers to the motor that is fixed to the drive and must not be selected in any of the relay output source parameters. Only the starting order of the auxiliary motors will be rotated.
Defines if the PFC motor 1 can be started. An interlocked PFC motor cannot be started. 0 = Interlocked (not available), 1 = Available.
PFC motor is interlocked and not available.
Def/FbEq16 0
1
Available. PFC motor is available 0
PFC motor is available.
1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
8
Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
9
Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
10
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
See parameter 76.81 PFC 1 interlock.
Available. PFC motor is
available
See parameter 76.81 PFC 1 interlock.
Available. PFC motor is available
See parameter 76.81 PFC 1 interlock.
Available.
PFC motor is available
See parameter 76.81 PFC 1 interlock.
Available. PFC motor is
available
See parameter 76.81 PFC 1 interlock.
Available. PFC motor is available
Defines if direct-on-line pumps are automatically started and stopped.
This setting can be used in applications with a low number of sensors and low accuracy requirements.
Disable
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
0
Parameters 389
No. Name/Value
Enable
Other [bit]
7777 PFC maintenance and monitoring
77.10 PFC runtime change
Done
Set any PFC run time
Reset PFC1 run time
Reset PFC2 run time
Reset PFC3 run time
Reset PFC4 run time
Reset PFC5 run time
Reset PFC6 run time
77.11 Pump 1 running time
0.00... 42949672.95 h
77.12 Pump 2 running time
77.13 Pump 3 running time
77.14 Pump 4 running time
77.15 Pump 5 running time
77.16 Pump 6 running time
Description
Def/FbEq16
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
1
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
PFC (Pump and fan control) maintenance and monitoring parameters.
Enables the reset, or arbitrary setting, of 77.11 Pump 1 running time ... 77.14 Pump 4 running time.
The parameter automatically reverts back to this value.
Enables the setting of 77.11 Pump 1 running time ... 77.14 Pump 4 running time to an arbitrary value.
Resets parameter 77.11 Pump 1 running time.
Done
0 1
2
Resets parameter 77.12 Pump 2 running time.
3
Resets parameter 77.13 Pump 3 running time.
4
Resets parameter 77.14 Pump 4 running time.
5
Resets parameter 77.15 Pump 5 running time.
6
Resets parameter 77.16 Pump 6 running time.
7
Running time counter of pump/fan 1. Can be set or reset by parameter 77.10 Pump 1 running time.
Time
0.00 h 1=1h
See parameter 77.11 Pump 1 running time.
0.00 h
See parameter 77.11 Pump 1 running time.
0.00 h
See parameter 77.11 Pump 1 running time.
0.00 h
See parameter 77.11 Pump 1 running time.
0.00 h
See parameter 77.11 Pump 1 running time.
0.00 h
390 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
9955 HW configuration
95.01 Supply voltage
Automatic / not selected
95.02
380...415 V
Adaptive voltage limits
95.03
Disable
Enable
Estimated AC supply voltage
95.04
0...65535 V
Control board supply
Internal 24V
External 24V
Description
Def/FbEq16
Various hardware-related settings.
Selects the supply voltage range. This parameter is used by the drive to determine the nominal voltage of the supply network. The parameter also affects the current ratings and the DC voltage control functions (trip and brake chopper activation limits) of the drive.
WARNING! An incorrect setting may cause the motor to rush uncontrollably, or the brake chopper or resistor to overload.
Note: The selections shown depend on the hardware of the drive. If only one voltage range is valid for the drive in question, it is selected by default.
Automatic / not selected
No voltage range selected. The drive will not start modulating 0 before a range is selected, unless parameter 95.02 Adaptive voltage limits is set to Enable, in which case the drive
estimates the supply voltage itself.
380...415 V
2
Enables adaptive voltage limits.
Adaptive voltage limits can be used if, for example, an IGBT supply unit is used to raise the DC voltage level. If the communication between the inverter and IGBT supply unit is active, the voltage limits are related to the DC voltage reference from the IGBT supply unit. Otherwise the limits are calculated based on the measured DC voltage at the end of the pre-charging sequence.
This function is also useful if the AC supply voltage to the drive is high, as the warning levels are raised accordingly.
Enable
Adaptive voltage limits disabled.
0
Adaptive voltage limits enabled.
1
AC supply voltage estimated by calculation. Estimation is
-
done every time the drive is powered up and is based on the
rise speed of voltage level of the DC bus while the drive
charges the DC bus.
Voltage.
10 = 1 V
Specifies how the control unit of the drive is powered.
Internal 24V
The drive control unit is powered from the drive power unit it 0 is connected to.
The drive control unit is powered from an external power
1
supply.
Parameters 391
No. 95.15
Name/Value
Special HW settings
Description
Contains hardware-related settings that can be enabled and disabled by toggling the specific bits. Note: � The installation of the hardware specified by this
parameter may require derating of drive output, or impose other limitations. Refer to the hardware manual of the drive.
Def/FbEq16 0b0000
Bit 0 1 2...15
Name Reserved ABB Sine filter Reserved
Information 1 = An ABB sine filter is connected to the output of the drive.
95.20
0000b...0111b HW options word 1
Hardware options configuration word.
Specifies hardware-related options that require differentiated parameter defaults. This parameter is not affected by a parameter restore.
1 = 1 0b0000
Bit
Name
0
Supply frequency
60 Hz
1...12 13
Reserved
du/dt filter activation
14...15 Reserved
Value See section Differences in the default values between 50 Hz and 60 Hz supply frequency settings on page 412. 0 = 50 Hz. 1 = 60 Hz.
When active, an external du/dt filter is connected to the drive/inverter output. The setting will limit the output switching frequency, and force the fan of the drive/inverter module to full speed. 0 = du/dt filter inactive. 1 = du/dt filter active.
0000h...FFFFh
Hardware options configuration word.
1 = 1
392 Parameters
No. 95.21
Name/Value HW options word 2
Description
Specifies more hardware-related options that require differentiated parameter defaults. See parameter 95.20 HW options word 1.
WARNING! After switching any bits in this word, recheck the values of the affected parameters.
Def/FbEq16 0b0000
Bit 0...4 5 6 7 8
9...15
Name Reserved Bypass present Cabinet drive Cabinet fan type Legacy bypass present Reserved
Information
1 = Bypass is used. 0 = Inactive, 1 = Active. Only for drive frames R6 or larger. 0 = Inactive, 1 = Active. Only for drive frames R6 or larger. 0 = Inactive, 1 = Active
95.200
0000b...0101b Cooling fan mode Auto
Always on 9966 System
96.01 Language
Not selected English Deutsch Italiano Espa�ol Portugues Nederlands Fran�ais Dansk Suomi Svenska Russki Polski Cesk� Magyar
Hardware options configuration word 2.
Cooling fan operation mode.
Fan runs normally: Fan on/off, fan speed reference can autochange according to the drive state.
Fan always runs at 100% speed reference.
1 = 1 Auto 0
1
Language selection; access levels; macro selection; parameter save and restore; control unit reboot; user parameter sets; unit selection.
Selects the language of the parameter interface and other displayed information when viewed on the control panel. Notes: � Not all languages listed below are necessarily supported. � This parameter does not affect the languages visible in the
Drive composer PC tool. (Those are specified under View Settings - Drive default language.)
None.
English.
German.
Italian.
Spanish.
Portuguese.
Dutch.
French.
Danish.
Finnish.
Swedish.
Russian.
Polish.
Czech.
Hungarian.
Not selected
0 1033 1031 1040 3082 2070 1043 1036 1030 1035 1053 1049 1045 1029 1038
Parameters 393
No. 96.02
96.03
Name/Value Chinese (Simplified, PRC) Greek Japanese Korean Thai T�rk�e Pass code
0...99999999 Access level status
Description
Simplified Chinese.
Greek
Japanese.
Korean
Turkish.
Pass codes can be entered into this parameter to activate further access levels (see parameter 96.03 Access level status) or to configure the user lock. Entering "358" toggles the parameter lock, which prevents the changing of all other parameters through the control panel or the Drive composer PC tool. Entering the user pass code (by default, "10000000") enables parameters 96.100...96.102, which can be used to define a new user pass code and to select the actions that are to be prevented. Entering an invalid pass code will close the user lock if open, ie. hide parameters 96.100...96.102. After entering the code, check that the parameters are in fact hidden. If they are not, enter another (random) pass code. Note: You must change the default user pass code to maintain a high level of cybersecurity. Store the code in a safe place � the protection cannot be disabled even by ABB if the code is lost. See also section User lock (page 175).
Pass code.
Shows which access levels have been activated by pass codes entered into parameter 96.02 Pass code.
Def/FbEq16 2052 1055
0001b
Bit 0 1 2 3...10 11 12 13 14 15
Name End user Service Advanced programmer Reserved OEM access level 1 OEM access level 2 OEM access level 3 Parameter lock Reserved
0000b...0111b 96.04 Macro select
Done ABB standard Hand/Auto Hand/PID
Active access levels.
Selects the control macro. See chapter Control macros (page 73) for more information. After a selection is made, the parameter reverts automatically to Done.
Macro selection complete; normal operation.
Factory macro (see page 75). For scalar motor control.
Hand/Auto macro (see page 88).
Hand/PID macro (see page 90).
Done
0 1 2 3
394 Parameters
No. 96.05 96.06
Name/Value ABB limited 2-wire 3-wire Alternate Motor potentiometer PID Panel PID PFC ABB standard (vector) Torque control Macro active
ABB standard Hand/Auto Hand/PID ABB limited 2-wire 3-wire Alternate Motor potentiometer PID Panel PID PFC ABB standard (vector) Torque control Parameter restore
Done Restore defaults
Description ABB limited 2-wire macro (see page 81). 3-wire macro see page 82). Alternate macro see page 84). Motor potentiometer macro (see page 86).
Def/FbEq16 4 11 12 13
PID macro (see page 92). Panel PID macro (see page 94). PFC macro (see page 96). ABB standard (vector) macro (see page 77). For vector motor control. Torque control macro Shows which control macro is currently selected. See chapter Control macros (page 73) for more information. To change the macro, use parameter 96.04 Macro select. Factory macro (see page 75). For scalar motor control. Hand/Auto macro (see page 88). Hand/PID macro (see page 90). ABB limited 2-wire macro (see page 81). 3-wire macro see page 82). Alternate macro see page 84). Motor potentiometer macro (see page 86).
14 15 16 17
ABB standard
1 2 3 4 11 12 13
PID macro (see page 92).
Panel PID macro (see page 94).
PFC macro (see page 96).
ABB standard (vector) macro (see page 77). For vector motor control.
Torque control macro
Restores the original settings of the control program, ie. parameter default values. Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Restoring is completed.
Restores all editable parameter values to default values, except � motor data and ID run results � I/O extension module settings � end user texts, such as customized warnings and faults,
and the drive name � control panel/PC communication settings � fieldbus adapter settings � control macro selection and the parameter defaults � parameter 95.01 Supply voltage � differentiated defaults implemented by parameters 95.20
HW options word 1 and 95.21 HW options word 2 � user lock configuration parameters 96.100...96.102.
14 15 16 17
Done
0 8
Parameters 395
No.
96.07 96.08 96.10
Name/Value Clear all
Reset all fieldbus settings Reset home view Reset end user texts
Reset motor data All to factory defaults Parameter save manually
Done Save Control board boot
No action Reboot User set status n/a Loading
Description
Restores all editable parameter values to default values, except � end user texts, such as customized warnings and faults,
and the drive name � control panel/PC communication settings � control macro selection and the parameter defaults � parameter 95.01 Supply voltage � differentiated defaults implemented by parameters 95.20
HW options word 1 and 95.21 HW options word 2 � user lock configuration parameters 96.100...96.102. � group 49 Panel port communication parameters.
Restores all fieldbus and communication related settings to default values. Note: Fieldbus, control panel and PC tool communication are interrupted during the restore.
Restores the Home view layout back to show the values of the default parameters defined by the control macro in use
Restores all end user texts to default values, including the drive name, contact info, customized fault and warning texts, PID unit and currency unit. Note: PID unit is reset only if it is user editable text, that is, parameter 40.79 Set 1 units is set to User text.
Restores all motor nominal values and motor ID run results to default values.
Restores all drive parameters and settings back to initial factory values, except � differentiated defaults implemented by parameters 95.20
HW options word 1 and 95.21 HW options word 2.
Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory on the drive control unit to ensure that operation can continue after cycling the power. Save the parameters with this parameter � to store values sent from the fieldbus � when using external +24 V DC power supply to the control
unit: to save parameter changes before you power down the control unit. The supply has a very short hold-up time when powered off. Note: A new parameter value is saved automatically when changed from the PC tool or control panel but not when altered through a fieldbus adapter connection.
Save completed.
Save in progress.
Changing the value of this parameter to 1 reboots the control unit (without requiring a power off/on cycle of the complete drive module). The value reverts to 0 automatically.
1 = No action.
1 = Reboot the control unit.
Shows the status of the user parameter sets. This parameter is read-only. See also section User parameter sets (page 173).
No user parameter sets have been saved.
A user set is being loaded.
Def/FbEq16 62
32 512 1024
2 34560 Done
0 1 No action 0 1 n/a 0 1
396 Parameters
No. 96.11
Name/Value Saving Faulted User1 IO active User2 IO active User3 IO active User4 IO active Reserved User1 backup User2 backu User3 backup User4 backup User set save/load
No action User set I/O mode Load set 1 Load set 2 Load set 3 Load set 4 Reserved Save to set 1 Save to set 2 Save to set 3 Save to set 4
Description
A user set is being saved.
Invalid or empty parameter set.
User set 1 has been selected by parameters 96.12 User set I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
User set 2 has been selected by parameters 96.12 User set I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
User set 3 has been selected by parameters 96.12 User set I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
User set 4 has been selected by parameters 96.12 User set I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
User set 1 has been saved or loaded.
User set 2 has been saved or loaded.
User set 3 has been saved or loaded.
User set 4 has been saved or loaded.
Enables the saving and restoring of up to four custom sets of parameter settings. The set that was in use before powering down the drive is in use after the next power-up. Notes: � Some hardware configuration settings, such as I/O
extension module and fieldbus configuration parameters (groups 14...16, 47, 50...58 and 92...93) are not included in user parameter sets. � Parameter changes made after loading a set are not automatically stored � they must be saved using this parameter. � This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running
Load or save operation complete; normal operation.
Load user parameter set using parameters 96.12 User set I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
Load user parameter set 1.
Load user parameter set 2.
Load user parameter set 3.
Load user parameter set 4.
Save user parameter set 1.
Save user parameter set 2.
Save user parameter set 3.
Save user parameter set 4.
Def/FbEq16 2 3 4 5 6 7 8...19 20 21 22 23 No action
0 1 2 3 4 5 6...17 18 19 20 21
Parameters 397
No. 96.12
Name/Value
User set I/O mode in1
Description
When parameter 96.11 User set save/load is set to User set I/O mode, selects the user parameter set together with parameter 96.13 User set I/O mode in2 as follows:
Status of source defined by par.
96.12
0
1
0
1
Status of source defined by par.
96.13
0
0
1
1
User parameter set selected
Set 1 Set 2 Set 3 Set 4
Def/FbEq16 Not selected
96.13
Not selected Selected DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Reserved Timed function 1 Timed function 2 Timed function 3 Reserved Supervision 1 Supervision 2 Supervision 3 Other [bit] User set I/O mode in2
0.
0
1.
1
Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0).
2
Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1).
3
Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2).
4
Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3).
5
Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4).
6
Digital input DI6 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5).
7
8...17
Bit 0 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
18
Bit 1 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
19
Bit 2 of 34.01 Timed functions status (see page 307).
20
21...23
Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
24
Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
25
Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 299).
26
Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page 178). -
See parameter 96.12 User set I/O mode in1.
Not selected
398 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
96.16 Unit selection
Description
Selects the unit of parameters indicating power, temperature and torque.
Def/FbEq16 0b0000
Bit
Name
0
Power unit
1
Reserved
2
Temperature
unit
3
Reserved
4
Torque unit
5...15 Reserved
Information 0 = kW 1 = hp
0 = �C 1 = �F
0 = Nm (N�m) 1 = lbft (lb�ft)
96.20
96.51 96.54
0000h...FFFFh Time sync primary source Internal Fieldbus A
Embedded FB
Panel link
Ethernet tool link
Clear fault and event logger Done Reset Checksum action
No action Pure event
Warning Warning and prevent start Fault
Unit selection word.
Defines the 1st priority external source for synchronization of the drive's time and date.
No external source selected.
FENA/FPNO can get the time from SNTP server and set it as time for the drive.
EFB BACnet MS/TP time-sync service can be used to set the time for the drive.
Control panel, or Drive composer PC tool connected to the control panel.
You can set the time manually by using DCP over Ethernet. The time can be set in the same way when you do it with USB and panel.
Clears all events from the drive's fault and event logs.
1 = 1 Panel link 0 3 6 8 9
Done
0 = No action.
1 = Resets (clears) the loggers.
Selects how the drive reacts. � when 96.55 Checksum control word, bit 8 = 1 (Approved
checksum A): if the parameter checksum 96.68 Actual checksumA does not match 96.71 Approved checksum A, and/or � when 96.55 Checksum control word, bit 9 = 1 (Approved checksum B): if the parameter checksum 96.69 Actual checksumB does not match 96.72 Approved checksum B.
No action taken. (The checksum feature is not in use.)
The drive generates an event log entry (B686 Checksum mismatch).
The drive generates a warning (A686 Checksum mismatch).
The drive generates a warning (A686 Checksum mismatch). Starting the drive is prevented.
The drive trips on 6200 Checksum mismatch.
0 1 No action
0 1 2 3 4
Parameters 399
No. 96.55
Name/Value
Checksum control word
Description
Bits 8...9 select which comparison(s) are made:
� Bit 8 = 1 (Approved checksum A): 96.68 Actual checksumA is compared to 96.71 Approved checksum A, and/or
� Bit 9 = 1 (Approved checksum A): if 96.69 Actual checksumB is compared to 96.72 Approved checksum B.
Bits 12...13 select approved (reference) checksum parameter(s) into which the actual checksum(s) from parameter(s) are copied:
� Bit 12 = 1 (Set approved checksum A): Value of 96.68 Actual checksum A is copied into 96.71 Approved checksum A, and/or
� Bit 13 = 1 (Set approved checksum B): Value of 96.69 Actual checksum B copied into 96.72 Approved checksum B.
Def/FbEq16 00000000h
Bit 0...7 8
9
10...11 12
13
Name Reserved
Approved checksum A
Approved checksum B
Reserved
Set approved checksum A
Set approved checksum B
14...15 Reserved
Information
1 = Enabled: Checksum A (96.71) is observed. 0 = Disabled. 1 = Enabled: Checksum B (96.72) is observed. 0 = Disabled.
1 = Set: Copy value of 96.68 into 96.71. 0 = Done (copy has been made). 1 = Set: Copy value of 96.69 into 96.72. 0 = Done (copy has been made). 1 = lbft (lb�ft)
96.68
00000000... FFFFFFFFh Actual checksumA
00000000... FFFFFFFFh
Checksum control word.
1 = 1
Displays the actual parameter configuration checksum A. The 0h checksum A is generated and updated whenever an action is selected in 96.54 Checksum action and 96.55 Checksum control word, bit 8 = 1 (Approved checksum A).
Checksum A calculation does not include
� fieldbus settings.
The parameters included in the calculation are user editable parameters in parameter groups 10, 11, 12, 13,15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 28, 30, 31, 32, 34, 35, 36, 37, 40, 41, 43, 45, 46, 71, 76, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99.
See also section Parameter checksum calculation (page 174).
Actual checksum.
-
400 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
96.69 Actual checksumB
00000000h... FFFFFFFFh
96.70 Disable adaptive program
No
Yes
96.71 Approved checksum A
00000000h... FFFFFFFFh
96.72 Approved checksum B
00000000h... FFFFFFFFh
96.78 550 compatibility mode
Disable
Enable
96.100 Change user pass code
96.101
10000000... 99999999
Confirm user pass code
10000000... 99999999
Description
Def/FbEq16
Displays the actual parameter configuration checksum B. The 0h checksum B is generated and updated whenever an action is selected in 96.54 Checksum action and 96.55 Checksum control word, bit 9 = 1 (Approved checksum B). Checksum B calculation does not include � fieldbus settings � motor data settings � energy data settings. The parameters included in the calculation are user editable parameters in parameter groups 10, 11, 12, 13,15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 28, 30, 31, 32, 34, 35, 36, 37, 40, 41, 43, 46, 71, 76, 95, 96, 97. See also section Parameter checksum calculation (page 174).
Actual checksum.
-
Enables/disables the adaptive program (if present).
Yes
See also section Adaptive programming (page 115).
Adaptive program enabled.
0
Adaptive program disabled.
1
Approved (reference) checksum A.
0h
Approved checksum A.
-
Approved (reference) checksum B.
0h
Approved checksum B.
-
Enables/disables a Modbus user to access a select set of parameters using 550 register numbering.
Using 550 compatibility mode is disabled.
Using 550 compatibility mode is enabled.
(Visible when user lock is open) To change the current user pass code, enter a new code into this parameter as well as 96.101 Confirm user pass code. A warning will be active until the new pass code is confirmed. To cancel changing the pass code, close the user lock without confirming. To close the lock, enter an invalid pass code in parameter 96.02 Pass code, activate parameter 96.08 Control board boot, or cycle the power. See also section User lock (page 175).
New user pass code.
Disable 0 1 10000000
-
(Visible when user lock is open)
Confirms the new user pass code entered in 96.100 Change user pass code.
Confirmation of new user pass code.
-
Parameters 401
No. Name/Value
96.102 User lock functionality
Description
(Visible when user lock is open) Selects the actions or functionalities to be prevented by the user lock. Note that the changes made take effect only when the user lock is closed. See parameter 96.02 Pass code. Note: ABB recommends you select all the actions and functionalities unless otherwise required by the application.
Def/FbEq16 0000h
Bit 0 1 2
3...10 11 12 13 14...15
Name
Information
Disable ABB access 1 = ABB access levels (service, advanced programmer, etc.; see
levels
96.03) disabled
Freeze parameter 1 = Changing the parameter lock state prevented, ie. pass code
lock state
358 has no effect
Disable file download
1 = Loading of files to drive prevented. This applies to � firmware upgrades
� parameter restore
� loading an adaptive program
� changing Home view of control panel
� editing drive texts
� editing the favorite parameters list on control panel
� configuration settings made through control panel such as time/date formats and enabling/disabling clock display.
Reserved
Disable OEM access 1 = OEM access level 1 disabled
level 1
Disable OEM access 1 = OEM access level 2 disabled
level 2
Disable OEM access 1 = OEM access level 3 disabled
level 3
Reserved
0000h...FFFFh
Selection of actions to be prevented by user lock.
9977 Motor control
Switching frequency; slip gain; voltage reserve; flux braking; anti-cogging (signal injection); IR compensation.
97.01
Switching frequency reference
Defines the switching frequency of the drive that is used as long as the drive stays below the thermal limit. See section Switching frequency on page 149.
Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic motor noise. Lower switching frequency generates less switching losses and reduce EMC emissions.
Note:
� If you have a multimotor system, contact your local ABB representative.
4 kHz
4 kHz.
8 kHz
8 kHz.
12 kHz
12 kHz.
4 kHz
4 8 12
402 Parameters
No. 97.02
97.03 97.04 97.05
Name/Value Minimum switching frequency
1.5 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 12 kHz Slip gain
0...200% Voltage reserve
-4...50% Flux braking
Disabled Moderate
Description
Lowest switching frequency value that is allowed. Depends on the frame size. When drive is reaching the thermal limit, it will automatically start to reduce the switching frequency until the minimum allowed value is reached. Once the minimum has been reached, the drive will automatically start limiting the output current to keep the temperature below the thermal limit. Inverter temperature is shown by parameter 05.11 Inverter temperature. � �
1.5 kHz. Not for all frame sizes.
2 kHz.
4 kHz.
8 kHz.
12 kHz.
Defines the slip gain which is used to improve the estimated motor slip. 100% means full slip gain; 0% means no slip gain. The default value is 100%. Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite having the setting at full slip gain. Example (with nominal load and nominal slip of 40 rpm): A 1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive. Despite having full slip gain (= 100%), a manual tachometer measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 998 rpm. The static speed error is 1000 rpm - 998 rpm = 2 rpm. To compensate the error, the slip gain should be increased to 105% (2 rpm / 40 rpm = 5%).
Slip gain.
Defines the minimum allowed voltage reserve. When the voltage reserve has decreased to the set value, the drive enters the field weakening area. Note: This is an expert level parameter and should not be adjusted without appropriate skill. If the intermediate circuit DC voltage Udc = 550 V and the voltage reserve is 5%, the RMS value of the maximum output voltage in steady-state operation is 0.95 � 550 V / sqrt(2) = 369 V The dynamic performance of the motor control in the field weakening area can be improved by increasing the voltage reserve value, but the drive enters the field weakening area earlier.
Voltage reserve.
Defines the level of flux braking power. (Other stopping and braking modes can be configured in parameter group 21 Start/stop mode). Note: This is an expert level parameter and should not be adjusted without appropriate skill.
Flux braking is disabled.
Flux level is limited during the braking. Deceleration time is longer compared to full braking.
Def/FbEq16 1.5 kHz
1 2 4 8 12 100%
1 = 1% -2%
1 = 1% Disabled
0 1
Parameters 403
No. 97.08 97.11
Name/Value Full
Optimizer minimum torque
0.0 ... 1600.0% TR tuning
25...400%
Description
Maximum braking power. Almost all available current is used to convert the mechanical braking energy to thermal energy in the motor.
WARNING! Using full flux braking heats up the motor especially in cyclic operation. Make sure that the motor can withstand this if you have a cyclic application.
This parameter can be used to improve the control dynamics of a synchronous reluctance motor or a salient permanent magnet synchronous motor. As a rule of thumb, define a level to which the output torque must rise with minimum delay. This will increase the motor current and improve the torque response at low speeds.
Optimizer torque limit.
Rotor time constant tuning. This parameter can be used to improve torque accuracy in closed-loop control of an induction motor. Normally, the motor identification run provides sufficient torque accuracy, but manual fine-tuning can be applied in exceptionally demanding applications to achieve optimal performance. Note: This is an expert level parameter and should not be adjusted without appropriate skill.
Rotor time constant tuning.
Def/FbEq16 2
0.0%
10 = 1% 100%
1 = 1%
404 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
97.13 IR compensation
Description
Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed (IR compensation). The function is useful in applications with a high break-away torque where vector control cannot be applied.
U / UN (%)
Relative output voltage. IR compensation set to 15%.
100%
Def/FbEq16 3.50%
0.00...50.00%
97.15
Motor model temperature adaptation
Disabled
Estimated temperature
15%
Relative output voltage. No IR compensation.
Field weakening point
f (Hz)
50% of nominal frequency
See also section IR compensation for scalar motor control on page 142.
Typical IR compensation values are shown below.
3-phase 380...480V drives
PN (kW)
0.37 0.75 1.1 2.2 4 7.5 15 22
IR
3.5 3.5 3.2 2.5 2 1.5 1.25 1.2
compensation
(%)
3-phase 200...240V drives
PN (kW)
0.37 0.75 1.1 2.2 3 7.5 11
IR
3.5 3.5 2.6 2.4 2.2 1.7 1.5
compensation
(%)
1-phase 200...240V drives
PN (kW)
0.37 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2
IR
3.0 2.3 2.0 1.7 1.5
compensation
(%)
WARNING! Set IR compensation value as low as possible. Large IR compensation value can lead to overheating of the motor and damage to the drive, if
operated for longer periods at low speed.
Voltage boost at zero speed in percent of nominal motor voltage.
1 = 1%
Enables the motor model temperature adaptation. Estimated Disabled motor temperature can be used to adapt temperature
dependent parameters (e.g. resistances) of motor model.
Temperature adaptation disabled.
0
Temperature adaptation with motor temperature estimate
1
(parameter 35.01 Motor estimated temperature).
Parameters 405
No. 97.16
97.17
97.20
Name/Value
Stator temperature factor
0...200%
Rotor temperature factor
0...200%
U/F ratio
Linear Squared
97.49 Slip gain for scalar
0...200 %
97.94 IR comp max frequency 1.0...200.0 %
9988 User motor parameters
98.01 User motor model mode
Not selected Motor parameters
Description
Tunes the motor temperature dependence of stator parameters (stator resistance).
Tuning factor.
Tunes the motor temperature dependence of rotor parameters (e.g. rotor resistance).
Tuning factor.
Selects the form for the U/f (voltage to frequency) ratio below field weakening point. For scalar control only. Note: The U/f function cannot be used with energy optimization; if 45.11 Energy optimizer is set to Enable, parameter 97.20 U/F ratio is ignored.
Linear ratio for constant torque applications.
Squared ratio for centrifugal pump and fan applications. With squared U/f ratio the noise level is lower for most operating frequencies. Not recommended for permanent magnet motors.
Sets gain for slip compensation in percent when the drive is operating in scalar control mode. A squirrel-cage motor slips under load. Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for the slip. Note: This parameter is only effective in scalar motor control mode (parameter 99.04 Motor control mode is set to Scalar).
0% = No slip compensation. 0...200% = Increasing slip compensation. 100% means full slip compensation according to parameter 99.08 Motor nominal frequency and 99.09 Motor nominal speed.
Sets the frequency at which IR compensation set by parameter 97.13 IR compensation reaches 0 V. Unit is percent of the motor nominal frequency.
Frequency.
Def/FbEq16 50% 1 = 1% 100% 1 = 1% Squared
0 1
0%
1 = 1%
50.0% 1 = 1%
Motor values supplied by the user that are used in the motor model.
These parameters are useful for non-standard motors, or to just get more accurate motor control of the motor on site. A better motor model always improves the shaft performance.
Activates the motor model parameters 98.02...98.12 and 98.14. Notes:
� Parameter value is automatically set to zero when ID run is selected by parameter 99.13 ID run requested. The values of parameters 98.02...98.12 are then updated according to the motor characteristics identified during the ID run.
� Measurements made directly from the motor terminals during the ID run are likely to produce slightly different values than those on a data sheet from a motor manufacturer.
� This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Parameters 98.02...98.12 inactive.
The values of parameters 98.02... 98.12 are used as the motor model.
Not selected
0 1
406 Parameters
No. 98.02
98.03 98.04 98.05 98.06 98.07 98.08 98.09 98.10 98.11
Name/Value
Description
Rs user
Defines the stator resistance RS of the motor model. With a star-connected motor, RS is the resistance of one winding. With a delta-connected motor, RS is one-third of the resistance of one winding. Resistance value is given at 20 �C (68 �F).
0.00000...0.50000 Stator resistance in per unit. p.u.
Rr user
Defines the rotor resistance RR of the motor model. Resistance value is given at 20 �C (68 �F). Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00000...0.50000 Rotor resistance in per unit. p.u.
Lm user
Defines the main inductance LM of the motor model. Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00000...10.00000 p.u.
SigmaL user
Main inductance in per unit.
Defines the leakage inductance LS.
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00000...1.00000 Leakage inductance in per unit. p.u.
Ld user
Defines the direct axis (synchronous) inductance.
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors.
0.00000...10.00000 Direct axis inductance in per unit. p.u
Lq user
Defines the quadrature axis (synchronous) inductance.
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors.
0.00000...10.00000 Quadrature axis inductance in per unit. p.u
PM flux user
Defines the permanent magnet flux.
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors.
0.00000... 2.00000 Permanent magnet flux in per unit. p.u
Rs user SI
Defines the stator resistance RS of the motor model. Resistance value is given at 20 �C (68 �F).
0.00000... 100.00000 ohm
Stator resistance.
Rr user SI
Defines the rotor resistance RR of the motor model. Resistance value is given at 20 �C (68 �F). Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00000... 100.00000 ohm
Rotor resistance.
Lm user SI
Defines the main inductance LM of the motor model. Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00...100000.01 mH
Main inductance.
Def/FbEq16 0.00000 p.u.
0.00000 p.u.
0.00000 p.u. 0.00000 p.u. 0.00000 p.u.
0.00000 p.u.
0.00000 p.u.
0.00000 ohm 0.00000 ohm
0.00 mH 1 = 10000 mH
Parameters 407
No. Name/Value 98.12 SigmaL user SI
98.13
0.00...100000.01 mH
Ld user SI
98.14
0.00...100000.01 mH
Lq user SI
0.00...100000.01 mH
9999 Motor data
99.03 Motor type
Asynchronous motor
Permanent magnet motor
SynRM
99.04 Motor control mode Vector
Description
Defines the leakage inductance LS.
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
Leakage inductance.
Defines the direct axis (synchronous) inductance. Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors.
Direct axis inductance.
Defines the quadrature axis (synchronous) inductance. Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors.
Quadrature axis inductance.
Motor configuration settings.
Selects the motor type. Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Standard squirrel cage AC induction motor (asynchronous induction motor).
Permanent magnet motor. Three-phase AC synchronous motor with permanent magnet rotor and sinusoidal BackEMF voltage. Note: With permanent magnet motors special attention must be paid on setting the motor nominal values correctly in parameter group 99 Motor data. You must use vector control. If the nominal BackEMF voltage of the motor is not available, a full ID run should be performed for improving performance.
Synchronous reluctance motor. Three-phase AC synchronous motor with salient pole rotor without permanent magnets. You must use vector control for this selection.
Selects the motor control mode.
Vector control. Vector control has better accuracy than scalar control but cannot be used in all situations (see selection Scalar below). Requires motor identification run (ID run). See parameter 99.13 ID run requested. Notes: � In vector control the drive performs a standstill ID run at
the first start if ID run has not been previously performed. A new start command is required after standstill ID run. � To achieve a better motor control performance, you can perform a normal ID run without load. See also section Operating modes of the drive (page 110).
Def/FbEq16 0.00 mH 1 = 10000 mH 0.00 mH
1 = 10000 mH 0.00 mH
1 = 10000 mH
Asynchronous motor 0 1
2
Scalar 0
408 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
Scalar
99.06 Motor nominal current
0.00...5.20 A 99.07 Motor nominal
voltage
99.08
69.2...830.0V
Motor nominal frequency
99.09
0.00...500.00 Hz
Motor nominal speed
0...30000 rpm
Description
Scalar control. Suitable for most applications, if top performance is not required. Motor identification run is not required. Note: Scalar control must be used in the following situations: � with multimotor systems 1) if the load is not equally shared
between the motors, 2) if the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after the motor identification (ID run) � if the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of the drive � if the drive is used with no motor connected (for example, for test purposes). Note: Correct motor operation requires that the magnetizing current of the motor does not exceed 90% of the nominal current of the inverter. See also section Speed compensated stop (page 153), and section Operating modes of the drive (page 110).
Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate. If multiple motors are connected to the drive, enter the total current of the motors. Notes: � Correct motor operation requires that the magnetizing
current of the motor does not exceed 90% of the nominal current of the drive.
� This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Nominal current of the motor. The allowable range is 1/6...2 � IN of the drive (0...2 � IN with scalar control mode).
Defines the nominal motor voltage supplied to the motor. This setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor. Notes: � With permanent magnet motors, the nominal voltage is the
BackEMF voltage at nominal speed of the motor. If the voltage is given as voltage per rpm, e.g. 60 V per 1000 rpm, the voltage for a nominal speed of 3000 rpm is 3 � 60 V = 180 V.
� The stress on the motor insulation is always dependent on the drive supply voltage. This also applies to the case where the motor voltage rating is lower than that of the drive and the supply.
� This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Nominal voltage of the motor.
Defines the nominal motor frequency. This setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor. Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Nominal frequency of the motor.
Defines the nominal motor speed. The setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor. Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Nominal speed of the motor.
Def/FbEq16 1
1.80 A
1 = 1 A; See 46.05 400.0 V
10 = 1 V 50.00 Hz 10 = 1 Hz 1430 rpm 1 = 1 rpm
Parameters 409
No. 99.10
99.11
99.12
Name/Value
Description
Motor nominal power
Defines the nominal motor power. The setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor. If multiple motors are connected to the drive, enter the total power of the motors. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
0.00... 10000.00 Nominal power of the motor.
kW or 0.00... 13404.83 hp
Motor nominal cos
Defines the cosphi of the motor for a more accurate motor model. The value is not obligatory, but is useful with an asynchronous motor, especially when performing a standstill identification run. With a permanent magnet or synchronous reluctance motor, this value is not needed.
Notes:
� Do not enter an estimated value. If you do not know the exact value, leave the parameter at zero.
� This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
0.00...1.00
Cosphi of the motor.
Motor nominal torque
Defines the nominal motor shaft torque for a more accurate motor model. Not obligatory. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
0.000...4000000.000 N�m or
0.000...2950248.597 lb�ft
Nominal motor torque.
Def/FbEq16 0.75 kW or hp; See 46.05
1 = 1 unit 0.00
100 = 1 0.000 N�m or lb�ft
1 = 100 unit
410 Parameters
No.
Name/Value
99.13 ID run requested
None Normal
Description
Selects the type of the motor identification routine (ID run) performed at the next start of the drive. During the ID run, the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control.
If no ID run has been performed yet (or if default parameter values have been restored using parameter 96.06 Parameter restore), this parameter is automatically set to Standstill, signifying that an ID run must be performed. After the ID run, the drive stops and this parameter is automatically set to None. Notes:
� To ensure that the ID run can work properly, the drive limits in group 30 (maximum speed and minimum speed, and maximum torque and minimum torque) must to be large enough (the range specified by the limits must be wide enough. If e.g. speed limits are less than the motor nominal speed, the ID run cannot be completed.
� Make sure the motor is stopped before starting the ID run.
� For the Advanced ID run, the machinery must always be de-coupled from the motor.
� With a permanent magnet or synchronous reluctance motor, a Normal, Reduced or Standstill ID run requires that the motor shaft is NOT locked and the load torque is less than 10%.
� With scalar control mode (99.04 Motor control mode = Scalar), the ID run is not requested automatically. However, an ID run can be performed for more accurate torque estimation.
� Once the ID run is activated, it can be canceled by stopping the drive.
� The ID run must be performed every time any of the motor parameters (99.04, 99.06...99.12) have been changed.
� Ensure that the Safe Torque Off and emergency stop circuits (if any) are closed during the ID run.
� Mechanical brake (if present) is not opened by the logic for the ID run.
� This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
No motor ID run is requested. This mode can be selected only if the ID run (Normal/Reduced/Standstill/Advanced) has already been performed once.
Normal ID run. Guarantees good control accuracy for all cases. The ID run takes about 90 seconds. This mode should be selected whenever it is possible. Notes:
� If the load torque will be higher than 20% of motor nominal torque, or if the machinery is not able to withstand the nominal torque transient during the ID run, then the driven machinery must be de-coupled from the motor during a Normal ID run.
� Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID run. During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50...100% of the nominal speed during the ID run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
Def/FbEq16 None
0 1
No. Name/Value Reduced
Standstill Reserved Advanced
Adaptive
Parameters 411
Description
Reduced ID run. This mode should be selected instead of the Normal or Advanced ID Run if � mechanical losses are higher than 20% (ie. the motor
cannot be de-coupled from the driven equipment), or if � flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running (ie.
in case of a motor with an integrated brake supplied from the motor terminals). With this ID run mode, the resultant motor control in the field weakening area or at high torques is not necessarily as accurate as motor control following a Normal ID run. Reduced ID run is completed faster than the Normal ID Run (< 90 seconds). Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID run. During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50...100% of the nominal speed during the ID run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
Standstill ID run. The motor is injected with DC current. With an AC induction (asynchronous) motor, the motor shaft is not rotated. With a permanent magnet motor, the shaft can rotate up to half a revolution.
Note: This mode should be selected only if the Normal, Reduced or Advanced ID run is not possible due to the restrictions caused by the connected mechanics (eg. with lift or crane applications).
Advanced ID run. Only for frames R6...R11. Guarantees the best possible control accuracy. The ID run takes a very long time to complete. This mode should be selected when top performance is needed across the whole operating area.
Note: The driven machinery must be de-coupled from the motor because of high torque and speed transients that are applied.
WARNING! The motor may run at up to the maximum (positive) and minimum (negative) allowed speed during the ID run. Several accelerations and decelerations are done. The maximum torque, current and speed allowed by the limit parameters may be utilized. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
Adaptive ID run. Improves the motor model accuracy during normal operation of the drive.
The drive performs a Standstill ID run first. Motor parameters are then updated with better accuracy during an adaptation sequence when following user's driving profile. When the adaptation is complete, parameters 99.14 Last ID run performed changes from Standstill to Adaptive. Motor parameters are updated automatically and the user is not required to update any other parameter. Notes:
� For vector control only. � For frame sizes R1...R4 only.
Def/FbEq16 2
3 4 6
8
412 Parameters
No. 99.14
99.15 99.16
Name/Value Last ID run performed
None Normal Reduced Standstill Reserved Advanced Adaptive Motor polepairs calculated 0...1000 Motor phase order
U V W U W V
Description Shows the type of ID run that was performed last. For more information about the different modes, see the selections of parameter 99.13 ID run requested. No ID run has been performed. Normal ID run. Reduced ID run. Standstill ID run.
Advanced ID run. Adaptive ID run. Calculated number of pole pairs in the motor.
Def/FbEq16 None
0 1 2 3 4 6 8 0
Number of pole pairs.
Switches the rotation direction of motor. This parameter can be used if the motor turns in the wrong direction (for example, because of the wrong phase order in the motor cable), and correcting the cabling is considered impractical. Note: � Changing this parameter does not affect speed reference
polarities, so positive speed reference will rotate the motor forward. The phase order selection just ensures that "forward" is in fact the correct direction.
Normal.
Reversed rotation direction.
1 = 1 U V W
0 1
Parameters 413
Differences in the default values between 50 Hz and 60 Hz supply frequency settings
Parameter 95.20 HW options word 1 bit 0 Supply frequency 60 Hz changes the drive parameter default values according to the supply frequency, 50 Hz or 60 Hz. The bit is set according to the market before the drive is delivered.
If you need to change from 50 Hz to 60 Hz, or vice versa, change the value of the bit and then do a complete reset to the drive. After that you have to reselect the macro to be used.
The table below shows the parameters whose default values depend on the supply frequency setting. The supply frequency setting, with the type designation of the drive, also affects Group 99 Motor data parameter values though these parameters are not listed in the table.
No
Name
11.45 12.20 13.18 22.26 22.27 22.28 22.29 22.30 22.30 22.31 28.26 28.27 28.28 28.29 28.30 28.31 28.32
Freq in 1 at scaled max AI1 scaled at AI1 max AO1 source max Constant speed 1 Constant speed 2 Constant speed 3 Constant speed 4 Constant speed 5 Constant speed 6 Constant speed 7 Constant frequency 1 Constant frequency 2 Constant frequency 3 Constant frequency 4 Constant frequency 5 Constant frequency 6 Constant frequency 7
95.20 HW options word 1 bit Supply frequency 60 Hz = 50 Hz
1500.000 50.000 50.0
300.00 rpm 600.00 rpm 900 .00 rpm 1200.00 rpm 1500.00 rpm 2400.00 rpm 3000.00 rpm
5.00 Hz 10.00 Hz 15.00 Hz 20.00 Hz 25.00 Hz 40.00 Hz 50.00 Hz
95.20 HW options word 1 bit Supply frequency 60 Hz = 60 Hz
1800.000 60.000 60.0
360.00 rpm 720.00 rpm 1080.00 rpm 1440.00 rpm 1800.00 rpm 2880.00 rpm 3600.00 rpm
6.00 Hz 12.00 Hz 18.00 Hz 24.00 Hz 30.00 Hz 48.00 Hz 60.00 Hz
414 Parameters
No
Name
30.11 30.12 30.13 30.14 31.26 31.27 31.30 46.01 46.02 46.31 46.32
Minimum speed Maximum speed Minimum frequency Maximum frequency Stall speed limit Stall frequency limit Overspeed trip margin Speed scaling Frequency scaling Above speed limit Above frequency limit
95.20 HW options word 1 bit Supply frequency 60 Hz = 50 Hz
-1500.00 rpm 1500.00 rpm
-50.00 Hz 50.00 Hz 150.00 rpm 15.00 Hz 500.00 rpm 1500.00 rpm 50.00 Hz 1500.00 rpm 50.00 Hz
95.20 HW options word 1 bit Supply frequency 60 Hz = 60 Hz
-1800.00 rpm 1800.00 rpm
-60.00 Hz 60.00 Hz 180.00 rpm 18.00 Hz 500.00 rpm 1800.00 rpm 60.00 Hz 1800.00 rpm 60.00 Hz
Additional parameter data 415
8
Additional parameter data
What this chapter contains
This chapter lists the parameters with some additional data such as their ranges and 32-bit fieldbus scaling. For parameter descriptions, see chapter Parameters (page 177).
Terms and abbreviations
Term Actual signal Analog src
Binary src
Data FbEq32
List
Definition
Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Usually can only be monitored but not adjusted; some counter-type signals can however be reset.
Analog source: the parameter can be set to the value of another parameter by choosing "Other", and selecting the source parameter from a list. In addition to the "Other" selection, the parameter may offer other preselected settings.
Binary source: the value of the parameter can be taken from a specific bit in another parameter value ("Other"). Sometimes the value can be fixed to 0 (false) or 1 (true). In addition, the parameter may offer other pre-selected settings.
Data parameter
32-bit fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in communication when a 32-bit value is selected for transmission to an external system. The corresponding 16-bit scalings are listed in chapter Parameters (page 177).
Selection list.
416 Additional parameter data
Term No. PB Real Type
Definition Parameter number. Packed Boolean (bit list). Real number. Parameter type. See Analog src, Binary src, List, PB, Real.
Fieldbus addresses
Refer to the User's manual of the fieldbus adapter.
Additional parameter data 417
Parameter groups 1...9
No.
Name
01 Actual values
01.01 Motor speed used
01.02 Motor speed estimated
01.03 Motor speed %
01.06 Output frequency
01.07 Motor current
01.08 Motor current % of motor nom
01.09 Motor current % of drive nom
01.10 Motor torque
01.11 DC voltage
01.13 Output voltage
01.14 Output power
01.15 Output power % of motor nom
01.16 Output power % of drive nom
01.17 Motor shaft power
01.18 Inverter GWh counter
01.19 Inverter MWh counter
01.20 Inverter kWh counter
01.24 Flux actual %
01.30 Nominal torque scale
Type
Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real
01.50 01.51 01.52 01.53 01.54
Current hour kWh Previous hour kWh Current day kWh Previous day kWh Cumulative inverter energy
Real Real Real Real Real
01.55
01.56
01.57
01.58
01.61 01.62 01.63 01.64 01.65 01.66 01.67
Inverter GWh counter (resettable)
Inverter MWh counter (resettable)
Inverter kWh counter (resettable)
Cumulative inverter energy (resettable)
Abs motor speed used
Abs motor speed %
Abs output frequency
Abs motor torque
Abs output power
Abs output power % motor nom
Abs output power % drive nom
Real Real Real Real
Range
Unit
FbEq32
-30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00
-1000.00...1000.00 -500.00...500.00 0.00...30000.00 0.0...1000.0 0.0...1000.0 -1600.0...1600.0 0.00...2000.00 0...2000
-32768.00...32767.00 -300.00...300.00 -300.00...300.00
-32768.00...32767.00 0...65535 0...1000 0...1000 0...200
0.000...4000000.000
0.00...1000000.00 0.00...1000000.00 0.00...1000000.00 0.00...1000000.00
-200000000.0... 200000000.0 0...65535
rpm rpm % Hz
A % % % V V kW % % kW or hp GWh MWh kWh % N�m or lb�ft kWh kWh kWh kWh kWh
100 = 1 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
100 = 1% 100 = 1 Hz 100 = 1 A
10 = 1% 10 = 1% 10 = 1% 100 = 1 V 1 = 1 V 100 = 1 unit 100 = 1% 100 = 1% 100 = 1 unit 1 = 1 GWh 1 = 1 MWh 1 = 1 kWh 1 = 1% 1000 = 1 unit
100 = 1 kWh 100 = 1 kWh 100 = 1 kWh 100 = 1 kWh
1 = 1 kWh
GWh
1 = 1 GWh
0...1000
MWh
1 = 1 MWh
0...1000
kWh
1 = 1 kWh
-200000000.0... 200000000.0
0.00...30000.00 0.00...1000.00% 0.00...500.00 Hz
0.0...1600.0 0.00...32767.00
0.00...300.00 0.00...300.00
kWh
rpm % Hz % kW % %
1 = 1 kWh
100 = 1 rpm 100 = 1% 100 = 1 Hz 10 = 1% 100 = 1 kW 100 = 1% 100 = 1%
418 Additional parameter data
No.
Name
01.68 Abs motor shaft power
03 Input references
03.01 Panel reference
03.02 Panel reference remote
03.05 FB A reference 1
03.06 FB A reference 2
03.09 EFB reference 1
03.10 EFB reference 2
04 Warnings and faults
04.01 Tripping fault
04.02 Active fault 2
04.03 Active fault 3
04.06 Active warning 1
04.07 Active warning 2
04.08 Active warning 3
04.11 Latest fault
04.12 2nd latest fault
04.13 3rd latest fault
04.16 Latest warning
04.17 2nd latest warning
04.18 3rd latest warning
04.40 Event word 1
04.41 Event word 1 bit 0 code
04.43 Event word 1 bit 1 code
04.45, ... 04,47, 04,49,
...
04.71 Event word 1 bit 15 code
05 Diagnostics
05.01 On-time counter
05.02 Run-time counter
05.03 Hours run
05.04 Fan on-time counter
05.10 Control board temperature
05.11 Inverter temperature
05.20 Diagnostic word 1
05.21 Diagnostic word 2
05.22 Diagnostic word 3
05.80 Motor speed at fault
05.81 Output frequency at fault
05.82 DC voltage at fault
Type
Range 0.00...32767.00
Unit
FbEq32
kW
100 = 1 kW
Real
-100000.00...100000.00
-
Real
-100000.00...100000.00
-
Real
-100000.00...100000.00
-
Real
-100000.00...100000.00
-
Real
-30000.00...30000.00
-
Real
-30000.00...30000.00
-
100 = 1 100 = 1 100 = 1 100 = 1 100 = 1 100 = 1
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data PB Data Data
...
0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0x2310...FFFFh 0x3210...FFFFh
...
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
...
Data
Real Real Real Real Real Real PB PB PB Real Real Real
0x2330...FFFFh
-
1 = 1
0...65535 0...65535 0.0...429496729.5 0...65535 -100...300 -40.0...160.0 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh -30000.00...30000.00 -500.00...500.00 0.00...2000.00
d d h d �C or �F % rpm Hz V
1=1d 1=1d 10 = 1 h 1=1d 10 = 1 � 10 = 1%
100 = 1 rpm 100 = 1 Hz 100 = 1 V
Additional parameter data 419
No.
Name
05.83 Motor current at fault
05.84 Motor torque at fault
05.85 Main status word at fault
05.86 DI delayed status at fault
05.87 Inverter temperature at fault
05.88 Reference used at fault
06 Control and status words
06.01 Main control word
06.11 Main status word
06.16 Drive status word 1
06.17 Drive status word 2
06.18 Start inhibit status word
06.19 Speed control status word
06.20 Constant speed status word
06.21 Drive status word 3
06.29 MSW bit 10 selection
06.30 MSW bit 11 selection
06.31 MSW bit 12 selection
06.32 MSW bit 13 selection
06.33 MSW bit 14 selection
07 System info 07.03 Drive rating id 07.04 Firmware name 07.05 Firmware version 07.06 Loading package name 07.07 Loading package version 07.11 Cpu usage 07.25 Customization package name 07.26 Customization package
version 07.30 Adaptive program status 07.31 AP sequence state 07.35 Drive configuration 07.36 Drive configuration 2
Type Real Real PB PB Real Real
PB PB PB PB PB PB PB PB Binary src Binary src Binary src Binary src Binary src
List List Data List Data Real Data Data
PB Data PB PB
Range 0.00...30000.00 -1600.0...1600.0 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh
-40...160 -30000.00...30000.00
0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh
-
-
-
-
-
0...100 -
0000h...FFFFh 0...20
0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh
Unit
FbEq32
A
100 = 1 A
%
10 = 1 %
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
�C
10 = 1 %
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
%
1 = 1%
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
420 Additional parameter data
Parameter groups 10...99
No.
Name
10 Standard DI, RO
10.01 DI status
10.02 DI delayed status
10.03 DI force selection
10.04 DI forced data
10.05 DI1 ON delay
10.06 DI1 OFF delay
10.07 DI2 ON delay
10.08 DI2 OFF delay
10.09 DI3 ON delay
10.10 DI3 OFF delay
10.11 DI4 ON delay
10.12 DI4 OFF delay
10.13 DI5 ON delay
10.14 DI5 OFF delay
10.15 DI6 ON delay
10.16 DI6 OFF delay
10.21 RO status
10.22 RO force selection
10.23 RO forced data
10.24 RO1 source
10.25 10.26 10.27
RO1 ON delay RO1 OFF delay RO2 source
10.28 10.29 10.30
RO2 ON delay RO2 OFF delay RO3 source
10.31 RO3 ON delay 10.32 RO3 OFF delay 10.99 RO/DIO control word 10.101 RO1 toggle counter 10.102 RO2 toggle counter 10.103 RO3 toggle counter 11 Standard DIO, FI, FO 11.02 DIO delayed status 11.03 DIO force selection 11.04 DIO force data
Type
PB PB PB PB Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real PB PB PB Binary src Real Real Binary src Real Real Binary src Real Real PB Real Real Real
PB PB PB
Range
0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0.00...3000.00 0.00...3000.00 0.00...3000.00 0.00...3000.00 0.00...3000.00 0.00...3000.00 0.00...3000.00 0.00...3000.00 0.00...3000.00 0.00...3000.00 0.00...3000.00 0.00...3000.00 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh
-
0.0...3000.0 0.0...3000.0
-
0.0...3000.0 0.0...3000.0
-
0.0...3000.0 0.0...3000.0 0000h...FFFFh 0...4294967000 0...4294967000 0...4294967000
0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh
Unit
FbEq32
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
100 = 1
s
100 = 1
s
100 = 1
s
100 = 1
s
100 = 1
s
100 = 1
s
100 = 1
s
100 = 1
s
100 = 1
s
100 = 1
s
100 = 1
s
100 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
10 = 1 s
s
10 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
s
10 = 1 s
s
10 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
s
10 = 1 s
s
10 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
No.
Name
11.05 DIO1 configuration
11.06 DIO1 output source
11.07 DIO1 ON delay
11.08 DIO1 OFF delay
11.17 DI4 configuration
11.21 DI5 configuration
11.38 Freq in 1 actual value
11.39 Freq in 1 scaled value
11.42 Freq in 1 min
11.43 Freq in 1 max
11.44 Freq in 1 at scaled min
11.45 Freq in 1 at scaled max
12 Standard AI
12.02 AI force selection
12.03 AI supervision function
12.04 AI supervision selection
12.11 AI1 actual value
12.12 AI1 scaled value 12.13 AI1 forced value
12.15 12.16 12.17
AI1 unit selection AI1 filter time AI1 min
12.18 AI1 max
12.19 12.20 12.21
AI1 scaled at AI1 min AI1 scaled at AI1 max AI2 actual value
12.22 AI2 scaled value 12.23 AI2 forced value
12.25 12.26 12.27
AI2 unit selection AI2 filter time AI2 min
12.28 AI2 max
12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min 12.30 AI2 scaled at AI2 max 12.101 AI1 percent value 12.102 AI2 percent value
Additional parameter data 421
Type
Range
Unit
List
0, 2
-
PB
0000h...FFFFh
-
Real
0.0...3000.0
s
Real
0.0...3000.0
s
List
0...1
-
List
-
-
Real
0...16000
Hz
Real
-32768.000...32767.000
-
Real
0...16000
Hz
Real
0...16000
Hz
Real
-32768.000...32767.000
-
Real
-32768.000...32767.000
-
FbEq32 1 = 1 1 = 1
10 = 1 s 10 = 1 s
1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 Hz 1000 = 1 1 = 1 Hz 1 = 1vHz 1000 = 1 1000 = 1
PB List PB Real
Real Real
List Real Real
Real
Real Real Real
Real Real
List Real Real
Real
Real Real Real Real
0000h...FFFFh
-
0000h...FFFFh
0.000...22.000 mA or 0.000...11.000 V
-32768.000...32767.000
0.000...22.000 mA or 0.000...11.000 V
-
0.000...30.000
0.000...22.000 mA or 0.000...11.000 V
0.000...22.000 mA or 0.000...11.000 V
-32768.000...32767.000
-32768.000...32767.000
0.000...20.000 mA or 0.000...10.000 V
-32768.000...32767.000
0.000...20.000 mA or 0.000...10.000 V
-
0.000...30.000
0.000...22.000 mA or 0.000...11.000 V
0.000...22.000 mA or 0.000...11.000 V
-32768.000...32767.000
-32768.000...32767.000
0.00...100.00
0.00...100.00
mA or V
1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1000 = 1 unit
-
1000 = 1
mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
s mA or V
1 = 1 1000 = 1 s 1000 = 1 unit
mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
mA or V
1000 = 1 1000 = 1 1000 = 1 unit
-
1000 = 1
mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
s mA or V
1 = 1 1000 = 1 s 1000 = 1 unit
mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
-
1000 = 1
-
1000 = 1
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
422 Additional parameter data
No.
Name
13 Standard AO 13.02 AO force selection 13.11 AO1 actual value
13.12 AO1 source
13.13 AO1 forced value
13.15 13.16 13.17 13.18 13.19
AO1 unit selection AO1 filter time AO1 source min AO1 source max AO1 out at AO1 src min
13.20 AO1 out at AO1 src max
13.21 AO2 actual value 13.22 AO2 source
13.23 AO2 forced value 13.26 AO2 filter time 13.27 AO2 source min 13.28 AO2 source max 13.29 AO2 out at AO2 src min 13.30 AO2 out at AO2 src max 13.91 AO1 data storage 13.92 AO2 data storage 15 I/O extension module 15.01 Extension module type 15.02 Detected extension module 15.04 RO status 15.05 RO force selection 15.06 RO forced data 15.07 RO4 source
15.08 15.09 15.10
RO4 ON delay RO4 OFF delay RO5 source
15.11 15.12 15.13
RO5 ON delay RO5 OFF delay RO6 source
15.14 RO6 ON delay
Type
PB Real
Analog src Real
List Real Real Real Real
Real
Real Analog
src Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real
List List PB PB PB Binary src Real Real Binary src Real Real Binary src Real
Range
0000h...FFFFh 0.000...22.000 or 0.000...11000 V
-
0.000...22.000 or 0.000...11000 V
2, 10 0.000...30.000 -32768.0...32767.0 -32768.0...32767.0 0.000...22.000 or 0.000...11000 V 0.000...22.000 or 0.000...11000 V 0.000...22.000
-
0.000...22.000 0.000...30.000 -32768.0...32767.0 -32768.0...32767.0 0.000...22.000 0.000...22.000 -327.68...327.67 -327.68...327.67
0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh -
0.0...3000.0 0.0...3000.0
-
0.0...3000.0 0.0...3000.0
-
0.0...3000.0
Unit
FbEq32
-
1 = 1
mA
1000 = 1 mA
-
1 = 1
mA
1000 = 1 mA
-
1 = 1
s
1000 = 1 s
-
10 = 1
-
10 = 1
mA
1000 = 1 mA
mA
1000 = 1 mA
mA
1000 = 1 mA
-
1 = 1
mA
1000 = 1 mA
s
1000 = 1 s
-
10 = 1
-
10 = 1
mA
1000 = 1 mA
mA
1000 = 1 mA
-
100 = 1
-
100 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
10 = 1 s
s
10 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
s
10 = 1 s
s
10 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
s
10 = 1 s
No. 15.15 15.16
Name RO6 OFF delay RO7 source
15.17 RO7 ON delay 15.18 RO7 OFF delay 19 Operation mode 19.01 Actual operation mode 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection
19.12 Ext1 control mode 19.14 Ext2 control mode 19.16 Local control mode 19.17 Local control disable 20 Start/stop/direction 20.01 Ext1 commands 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type 20.03 Ext1 in1 source
20.04 Ext1 in2 source
20.05 Ext1 in3 source
20.06 20.07 20.08
Ext2 commands Ext2 start trigger type Ext2 in1 source
20.09 Ext2 in2 source
20.10 Ext2 in3 source
20.11 Run enable stop mode 20.12 Run enable 1 source
20.19 Enable start command
20.21 Direction 20.22 Enable to rotate
20.25 Jogging enable
20.26 Jogging 1 start source
20.27 Jogging 2 start source
Type Real Binary src Real Real
List Binary
src List List List List
List List Binary src Binary src Binary src List List Binary src Binary src Binary src List Binary src Binary src List Binary src Binary src Binary src Binary src
Additional parameter data 423
Range 0.0...3000.0
0.0...3000.0 0.0...3000.0
-
-
-
Unit
FbEq32
s
10 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
s
10 = 1 s
s
10 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
424 Additional parameter data
No.
Name
21 Start/stop mode
21.01 Start mode
21.02 Magnetization time
21.03 Stop mode
21.04 Emergency stop mode
21.05 Emergency stop source
21.06 21.07 21.08 21.09 21.10 21.11 21.14
Zero speed limit Zero speed delay DC current control DC hold speed DC current reference Post magnetization time Pre-heating input source
21.15 Pre-heating time delay 21.16 Pre-heating current 21.18 Auto restart time 21.19 Scalar start mode 21.21 DC hold frequency 21.22 Start delay 21.23 Smooth start 21.24 Smooth start current 21.25 Smooth start speed 21.26 Torque boost current 21.27 Torque boost time 21.30 Speed compensated stop
mode 21.31 Speed comp stop delay 21.32 Speed comp stop threshold 21.34 Force auto restart 21.35 Preheating power 21.36 Preheating unit
22 Speed reference selection 22.01 Speed ref unlimited 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1
22.12 Ext1 speed ref2
22.13 Ext1 speed function 22.18 Ext2 speed ref1
Type
List Real List List Binary src Real Real PB Real Real Real Binary src Real Real Real List Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real
Real Real List Real List
Real Analog
src Analog
src List Analog src
Range
0...10000
-
0.00...30000.00 0...30000
0000b...0011b 0.00...1000.00
0.0...100.0 0...3000 -
10...3000 0.0...30.0 0.0, 0.1...10.0
0.00...1000.00
0.00...60.00 -
10.0...200.0 2.0...100.0 15.0...300.0 0.0...60.0
-
0.00...1000.00 0...100 -
0.00...10.00 -
-30000.00...30000.00 -
-
-
Unit
FbEq32
-
1 = 1
ms
1 = 1 ms
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
ms
1 = 1 ms
-
1 = 1
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
%
10 = 1%
s
1=1s
-
1 = 1
s
1 = 1 s
%
10 = 1%
s
10 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
s
100 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
s
10 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
s
100 = 1 s
%
1 = 1%
-
1 = 1
kW
100 = 1 kW
-
1 = 1
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
Additional parameter data 425
No.
Name
22.19 Ext2 speed ref2
22.20 22.21 22.22
Ext2 speed function Constant speed function Constant speed sel1
22.23 Constant speed sel2
22.24 Constant speed sel3
22.26 22.27 22.28 22.29 22.30 22.31 22.32 22.41 22.42 22.43 22.51 22.52 22.53 22.54 22.55 22.56 22.57 22.71 22.72
22.73
Constant speed 1 Constant speed 2 Constant speed 3 Constant speed 4 Constant speed 5 Constant speed 6 Constant speed 7 Speed ref safe Jogging 1 ref Jogging 2 ref Critical speed function Critical speed 1 low Critical speed 1 high Critical speed 2 low Critical speed 2 high Critical speed 3 low Critical speed 3 high Motor potentiometer function Motor potentiometer initial value Motor potentiometer up source
22.74 Motor potentiometer down source
22.75 Motor potentiometer ramp time 22.76 Motor potentiometer min value 22.77 Motor potentiometer max
value 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act 22.86 Speed reference act 6 22.87 Speed reference act 7
23 Speed reference ramp 23.01 Speed ref ramp input 23.02 Speed ref ramp output
Type Analog
src List PB Binary src Binary src Binary src Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real PB Real Real Real Real Real Real List Real
Binary src
Binary src Real Real Real
Real Real Real
Real Real
Range -
00b...11b
-
-
-
-30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00
00b...11b -30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00
-32768.00...32767.00
-
-
0.0...3600.0 -32768.00...32767.00 -32768.00...32767.00
-32768.00...32767.00 -30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00
-30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00
Unit
FbEq32
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
-
1 = 1
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
-
1 = 1
-
100 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
10 = 1 s
-
100 = 1
-
100 = 1
-
100 = 1
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
426 Additional parameter data
No.
Name
23.11 Ramp set selection
23.12 Acceleration time 1 23.13 Deceleration time 1 23.14 Acceleration time 2 23.15 Deceleration time 2 23.20 Acc time jogging 23.21 Dec time jogging 23.23 Emergency stop time 23.28 Variable slope enable 23.29 Variable slope rate 23.32 Shape time 1 23.33 Shape time 2
24 Speed reference conditioning 24.01 Used speed reference 24.02 Used speed feedback 24.03 Speed error filtered 24.04 Speed error inverted 24.11 Speed correction 24.12 Speed error filter time
25 Speed control 25.01 Torque reference speed control 25.02 Speed proportional gain 25.03 Speed integration time 25.04 Speed derivation time 25.05 Derivation filter time 25.06 Acc comp derivation time 25.07 Acc comp filter time 25.15 Proportional gain em stop 25.33 Speed controller autotune 25.34 Speed controller autotune mode 25.37 Mechanical time constant 25.38 Autotune torque step 25.39 Autotune speed step 25.40 Autotune repeat times 25.53 Torque prop reference 25.54 Torque integral reference 25.55 Torque deriv reference 25.56 Torque acc compensation
Type Binary
src Real Real Real Real Real Real Real List Real Real Real
Range -
0.000...1800.000 0.000...1800.000 0.000...1800.000 0.000...1800.000 0.000...1800.000 0.000...1800.000 0.000...1800.000
2...30000 0.000...1800.000 0.000...1800.000
Real Real Real Real Real Real
-30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00 -10000.00...10000.00
0...10000
Real
Real Real Real Real Real Real Real List List
Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real
-1600.0...1600.0
0.00...250.00 0.00...1000.00 0.000...10.000
0...10000 0.00...1000.00
0.0...1000.0 1.00...250.00
-
0.00...1000.00 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00
1...10 -30000.0...30000.0 -30000.0...30000.0 -30000.0...30000.0 -30000.0...30000.0
Unit
FbEq32
-
1 = 1
s
1000 = 1 s
s
1000 = 1 s
s
1000 = 1 s
s
1000 = 1 s
s
1000 = 1 s
s
1000 = 1 s
s
1000 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
ms
1 = 1 ms
s
1000 = 1 s
s
1000 = 1 s
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
ms
1 = 1 ms
%
10 = 1%
-
100 = 1
s
1000 = 1 s
s
1000 = 1 s
ms
1 = 1 ms
s
100 = 1 s
ms
10 = 1 ms
-
100 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
100 = 1 s
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
-
1 = 1
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
Additional parameter data 427
No.
Name
26 Torque reference chain
26.01 Torque reference to TC
26.02 Torque reference used
26.08 Minimum torque ref
26.09 Maximum torque ref
26.11 Torque ref1 source
26.12 Torque ref2 source
26.13 Torque ref1 function 26.14 Torque ref1/2 selection
26.17 26.18 26.19 26.20 26.21
Torque ref filter time Torque ramp up time Torque ramp down time Torque reversal Torque sel torque in
26.22 Torque sel speed in
26.70 Torque reference act 1 26.71 Torque reference act 2 26.72 Torque reference act 3 26.73 Torque reference act 4 26.74 Torque ref ramp out 26.75 Torque reference act 5 26.81 Rush control gain 26.82 Rush control integration time 28 Frequency reference chain 28.01 Frequency ref ramp input 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1
28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2
28.13 Ext1 frequency function 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1
28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2
28.17 28.21 28.22
Ext2 frequency function Constant frequency function Constant frequency sel1
Type
Real Real Real Real Analog src Analog src List Binary src Real Real Real List Binary src Binary src Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real
Real Real Analog src Analog src List Analog src Analog src List PB Binary src
Range
-1600.0...1600.0 -1600.0...1600.0
-1000.0...0.0 0.0...1000.0
-
-
0...5 -
0.000...30.000 0.000...60.000 0.000...60.000
-
-
-1600.0...1600.0 -1600.0...1600.0 -1600.0...1600.0 -1600.0...1600.0 -1600.0...1600.0 -1600.0...1600.0
0.0...10000.0 0.0...10.0
-500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00
-
-
-
-
00b...11b
-
Unit
FbEq32
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
1000 = 1 s
s
1000 = 1 s
s
1000 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
-
10 = 1
s
10 = 1
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
428 Additional parameter data
No.
Name
28.23 Constant frequency sel2
28.24 Constant frequency sel3
28.26 28.27 28.28 28.29 28.30 28.31 28.32 28.41 28.42 28.43 28.51 28.52 28.53 28.54 28.55 28.56 28.57 28.71
Constant frequency 1 Constant frequency 2 Constant frequency 3 Constant frequency 4 Constant frequency 5 Constant frequency 6 Constant frequency 7 Frequency ref safe Jogging 1 frequency ref Jogging 2 frequency ref Critical frequency function Critical frequency 1 low Critical frequency 1 high Critical frequency 2 low Critical frequency 2 high Critical frequency 3 low Critical frequency 3 high Freq ramp set selection
28.72 28.73 28.74 28.75 28.76
Freq acceleration time 1 Freq deceleration time 1 Freq acceleration time 2 Freq deceleration time 2 Freq ramp in zero source
28.82 Shape time 1 28.83 Shape time 2 28.92 Frequency ref act 3 28.96 Frequency ref act 7 28.97 Frequency ref unlimited 30 Limits 30.01 Limit word 1 30.02 Torque limit status 30.11 Minimum speed 30.12 Maximum speed 30.13 Minimum frequency 30.14 Maximum frequency 30.17 Maximum current
Type Binary
src Binary
src Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real PB Real Real Real Real Real Real Binary src Real Real Real Real Binary src Real Real Real Real Real
Range -
-
-500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00
00b...11b -500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00
-
0.000...1800.000 0.000...1800.000 0.000...1800.000 0.000...1800.000
-
0.000...1800.000 0.000...1800.000 -500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00
PB PB Real Real Real Real Real
0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh -30000.00...30000.00 -30000.00...30000.00 -500.00...500.00 -500.00...500.00
0.00...2.16
Unit
FbEq32
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
-
1 = 1
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
-
1 = 1
s
1000 = 1 s
s
1000 = 1 s
s
1000 = 1 s
s
1000 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
s
1000 = 1 s
s
1000 = 1 s
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
A
100 = 1 A
Additional parameter data 429
No.
Name
30.18 Torq lim sel
30.19 30.20 30.21
Minimum torque 1 Maximum torque 1 Min torque 2 source
30.22 Max torque 2 source
30.23 30.24 30.26 30.27 30.30 30.31 30.35 30.36
Minimum torque 2 Maximum torque 2 Power motoring limit Power generating limit Overvoltage control Undervoltage control Thermal current limitation Speed limit selection
30.37 Minimum speed source
30.38 Maximum speed source
31 Fault functions 31.01 External event 1 source
31.02 External event 1 type 31.03 External event 2 source
31.04 External event 2 type 31.05 External event 3 source
31.06 External event 3 type 31.07 External event 4 source
31.08 External event 4 type 31.09 External event 5 source
31.10 External event 5 type 31.11 Fault reset selection
31.12 31.13 31.14 31.15 31.16 31.19
Autoreset selection Selectable fault Number of trials Total trials time Delay time Motor phase loss
Type Binary
src Real Real Analog src Analog src Real Real Real Real List List List Binary src Analog src Analog src
Binary src List
Binary src List
Binary src List
Binary src List
Binary src List
Binary src PB Real Real Real Real List
Range -
-1600.0...0.0 0.0...1600.0
-
-
-1600.0...0.0 0.0...1600.0 0.00...600.00 -600.00...0.00
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh
0...5 1.0...600.0 0.0...120.0
-
Unit
FbEq32
-
1 = 1
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
10 = 1 s
s
10 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
430 Additional parameter data
No.
Name
31.21 Supply phase loss
31.22 STO indication run/stop
31.23 Wiring or earth fault
31.24 Stall function
31.25 Stall current limit
31.26 Stall speed limit
31.27 Stall frequency limit
31.28 Stall time
31.30 Overspeed trip margin
31.31 Frequency trip margin
31.32 Emergency ramp supervision
31.33 Emergency ramp supervision delay
31.35 Main fan fault function
32 Supervision
32.01 Supervision status
32.05 Supervision 1 function
32.06 Supervision 1 action
32.07 Supervision 1 signal
32.08 Supervision 1 filter time 32.09 Supervision 1 low
Type List List List List Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real
List
PB List List Analog src Real Real
32.10 Supervision 1 high
Real
32.11 32.15 32.16 32.17
Supervision 1 hysteresis Supervision 2 function Supervision 2 action Supervision 2 signal
32.18 Supervision 2 filter time 32.19 Supervision 2 low
Real List List Analog src Real Real
32.20 Supervision 2 high
Real
32.21 32.25 32.26 32.27
Supervision 2 hysteresis Supervision 3 function Supervision 3 action Supervision 3 signal
32.28 Supervision 3 filter time 32.29 Supervision 3 low
Real List List Analog src Real Real
Range -
0.0...1600.0 0.00...10000.00 0.00...1000.00
0...3600 0.00...10000.00 0.00...10000.0
0...300 0...100
-
0000...0111b -
0.000...30.000 -21474836.00...
21474836.00 -21474836.00...
21474836.00 0.00...100000.00
-
0.000...30.000 -21474836.00...
21474836.00 -21474836.00...
21474836.00 0.00...100000.00
-
0.000...30.000 -21474836.00...
21474836.00
Unit
FbEq32
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
%
10 = 1%
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
s
1=1s
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
Hz
100 = 1 Hz
%
1 = 1%
s
1=1s
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
1000 = 1 s
-
100 = 1
-
100 = 1
-
100 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
1000 = 1 s
-
100 = 1
-
100 = 1
-
100 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
1000 = 1 s
-
100 = 1
Additional parameter data 431
No.
Name
32.30 Supervision 3 high
Type Real
32.31 32.35 32.36 32.37
Supervision 3 hysteresis Supervision 4 function Supervision 4 action Supervision 4 signal
32.38 Supervision 4 filter time 32.39 Supervision 4 low
Real List List Analog src Real Real
32.40 Supervision 4 high
Real
32.41 32.45 32.46 32.47
Supervision 4 hysteresis Supervision 5 function Supervision 5 action Supervision 5 signal
32.48 Supervision 5 filter time 32.49 Supervision 5 low
Real List List Analog src Real Real
32.50 Supervision 5 high
Real
32.51 32.55 32.56 32.57
Supervision 5 hysteresis Supervision 6 function Supervision 6 action Supervision 6 signal
32.58 Supervision 6 filter time 32.59 Supervision 6 low
Real List List Analog src Real Real
32.60 Supervision 6 high
Real
32.61 Supervision 6 hysteresis 34 Timed functions 34.01 Timed functions status 34.02 Timer status 34.04 Season/exception day status 34.10 Timed functions enable
34.11 34.12 34.13 34.14 34.15 34.16
Timer 1 configuration Timer 1 start time Timer 1 duration Timer 2 configuration Timer 2 start time Timer 2 duration
Real
PB PB PB Binary src PB Time Duration PB Time Duration
Range -21474836.00...
21474836.00 0.00...100000.00
-
0.000...30.000 -21474836.00...
21474836.00 -21474836.00...
21474836.00 0.00...100000.00
-
0.000...30.000 -21474836.00...
21474836.00 -21474836.00...
21474836.00 0.00...100000.00
-
0.000...30.000 -21474836.00...
21474836.00 -21474836.00...
21474836.00 0.00...100000.00
0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh
-
0000h...FFFFh 00:00:00...23:59:59 00 00:00...07 00:00
0000h...FFFFh 00:00:00...23:59:59 00 00:00...07 00:00
Unit
FbEq32
-
100 = 1
-
100 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
1000 = 1 s
-
100 = 1
-
100 = 1
-
100 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
1000 = 1 s
-
100 = 1
-
100 = 1
-
100 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
1000 = 1 s
-
100 = 1
-
100 = 1
-
100 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
1=1s
min
1 = 1 min
-
1 = 1
s
1=1s
min
1 = 1 min
432 Additional parameter data
No. 34.17 34.18 34.19 34.20 34.21 34.22 34.23 34.24 34.25 34.26 34.27 34.28 34.29 34.30 34.31 34.32 34.33 34.34 34.35 34.36 34.37 34.38 34.39 34.40 34.41 34.42 34.43 34.44 34.45 34.46 34.60 34.61 34.62 34.63 34.70 34.71 34.72 34.73 34.74 34.75 34.76
Name Timer 3 configuration Timer 3 start time Timer 3 duration Timer 4 configuration Timer 4 start time Timer 4 duration Timer 5 configuration Timer 5 start time Timer 5 duration Timer 6 configuration Timer 6 start time Timer 6 duration Timer 7 configuration Timer 7 start time Timer 7 duration Timer 8 configuration Timer 8 start time Timer 8 duration Timer 9 configuration Timer 9 start time Timer 9 duration Timer 10 configuration Timer 10 start time Timer 10 duration Timer 11 configuration Timer 11 start time Timer 11 duration Timer 12 configuration Timer 12 start time Timer 12 duration Season 1 start date Season 2 start date Season 3 start date Season 4 start date Number of active exceptions Exception types Exception 1 start Exception 1 length Exception 2 start Exception 2 length Exception 3 start
Type PB Time Duration PB Time Duration PB Time Duration PB Time Duration PB Time Duration PB Time Duration PB Time Duration PB Time Duration PB Time Duration PB Time Duration Date Date Date Date Real PB Date Real Date Real Date
Range 0000h...FFFFh 00:00:00...23:59:59 00 00:00...07 00:00 0000h...FFFFh 00:00:00...23:59:59 00 00:00...07 00:00 0000h...FFFFh 00:00:00...23:59:59 00 00:00...07 00:00 0000h...FFFFh 00:00:00...23:59:59 00 00:00...07 00:00 0000h...FFFFh 00:00:00...23:59:59 00 00:00...07 00:00 0000h...FFFFh 00:00:00...23:59:59 00 00:00...07 00:00 0000h...FFFFh 00:00:00...23:59:59 00 00:00...07 00:00 0000h...FFFFh 00:00:00...23:59:59 00 00:00...07 00:00 0000h...FFFFh 00:00:00...23:59:59 00 00:00...07 00:00 0000h...FFFFh 00:00:00...23:59:59 00 00:00...07 00:00
0...16 0000h...FFFFh 0...60 0...60 -
Unit
FbEq32
-
1 = 1
s
1=1s
min
1 = 1 min
-
1 = 1
s
1=1s
min
1 = 1 min
-
1 = 1
s
1=1s
min
1 = 1 min
-
1 = 1
s
1=1s
min
1 = 1 min
-
1 = 1
s
1=1s
min
1 = 1 min
-
1 = 1
s
1=1s
min
1 = 1 min
-
1 = 1
s
1=1s
min
1 = 1 min
-
1 = 1
s
1=1s
min
1 = 1 min
-
1 = 1
s
1=1s
min
1 = 1 min
-
1 = 1
s
1=1s
min
1 = 1 min
-
1=1d
-
1=1d
-
1=1d
-
1=1d
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1=1d
d
1=1d
-
1=1d
d
1=1d
-
1=1d
Additional parameter data 433
No.
Name
34.77 Exception 3 length
34.78 Exception day 4
34.79 Exception day 5
34.80 Exception day 6
34.81 Exception day 7
34.82 Exception day 8
34.83 Exception day 9
34.84 Exception day 10
34.85 Exception day 11
34.86 Exception day 12
34.87 Exception day 13
34.88 Exception day 14
34.89 Exception day 15
34.90 Exception day 16
34.100 Timed function 1
34.101 Timed function 2
34.102 Timed function 3
34.110 Boost time function
34.111 Boost time activation source
34.112 Boost time duration 35 Motor thermal protection 35.01 Motor estimated temperature
Type Real Date Date Date Date Date Date Date Date Date Date Date Date Date PB PB PB PB Binary src Duration
Real
35.02 Measured temperature 1
Real
35.03 Measured temperature 2
Real
35.05 35.11 35.12
Motor overload level Temperature 1 source Temperature 1 fault limit
35.13 Temperature 1 warning limit
35.14 Temperature 1 AI source
35.21 Temperature 2 source 35.22 Temperature 2 fault limit
35.23 Temperature 2 warning limit
Real List Real
Real
Analog src List Real
Real
Range 0...60
0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh -
00 00:00...07 00:00
-60...1000 �C or -76...1832 �F
-60...5000 �C or -76...9032 �F, 0 ohm or [35.12] ohm
-60...5000 �C or -76...9032 �F, 0 ohm or [35.22] ohm 0.0...300.0 -
-60...5000 �C or -76...9032 �F
-60...5000 �C or -76...9032 �F -
-60...5000 �C or
-76...9032 �F -60...5000 �C or
-76...9032 �F
Unit
FbEq32
d
1=1d
-
1=1d
-
1=1d
-
1=1d
-
1=1d
-
1=1d
-
1=1d
-
1=1d
-
1=1d
-
1=1d
-
1=1d
-
1=1d
-
1=1d
-
1=1d
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1 min
�C or �F
1=1�
�C, �F or ohm
1 = 1 unit
�C, �F or ohm
1 = 1 unit
%
-
�C, �F or ohm
�C, �F or ohm
-
10 = 1% 1 = 1
1 = 1 unit
1 = 1 unit
1 = 1
-
�C, �F or ohm
�C, �F or ohm
1 = 1 1 = 1 unit
1 = 1 unit
434 Additional parameter data
No.
Name
35.24 Temperature 2 AI source
35.50 Motor ambient temperature
35.51 Motor load curve 35.52 Zero speed load 35.53 Break point 35.54 Motor nominal temperature
rise 35.55 Motor thermal time constant 35.56 Motor overload action 35.57 Motor overload class
36 Load analyzer 36.01 PVL signal source
36.02 PVL filter time 36.06 AL2 signal source
36.07 36.09 36.10 36.11 36.12 36.13 36.14 36.15 36.16 36.17 36.20 36.21 36.22 36.23 36.24 36.25 36.26 36.27 36.28 36.29 36.40 36.41 36.42 36.43 36.44
AL2 signal scaling Reset loggers PVL peak value PVL peak date PVL peak time PVL current at peak PVL DC voltage at peak PVL speed at peak PVL reset date PVL reset time AL1 0 to 10% AL1 10 to 20% AL1 20 to 30% AL1 30 to 40% AL1 40 to 50% AL1 50 to 60% AL1 60 to 70% AL1 70 to 80% AL1 80 to 90% AL1 over 90% AL2 0 to 10% AL2 10 to 20% AL2 20 to 30% AL2 30 to 40% AL2 40 to 50%
Type Analog
src Real
Real Real Real Real
Range
Unit
-
-
-60...100 �C or -76 ... 212 �F
50...150 25...150 1.00 ... 500.00 0...300 �C or 32...572 �F
�C
% % Hz �C or �F
FbEq32 1 = 1
1 = 1 �
1 = 1% 1 = 1% 100 = 1 Hz 1 = 1�
Real List List
100...10000 -
s
1=1s
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
Analog src Real
Analog src Real List Real Data Data Real Real Real Data Data Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real
-
0.00...120.00 -
0.00...32767.00 -
-32768.00...32767.00 1/1/1980...6/5/2159 -
-32768.00...32767.00 0.00...2000.00
-30000.00... 30000.00 1/1/1980...6/5/2159 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00
-
1 = 1
s
100 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
-
100 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
100 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
A
100 = 1 A
V
100 = 1 V
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
Additional parameter data 435
No.
Name
36.45 AL2 50 to 60%
36.46 AL2 60 to 70%
36.47 AL2 70 to 80%
36.48 AL2 80 to 90%
36.49 AL2 over 90%
36.50 AL2 reset date
36.51 AL2 reset time
37 User load curve
37.01 ULC output status word
37.02 ULC supervision signal
37.03 ULC overload actions 37.04 ULC underload actions 37.11 ULC speed table point 1 37.12 ULC speed table point 2 37.13 ULC speed table point 3 37.14 ULC speed table point 4 37.15 ULC speed table point 5 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1 37.17 ULC frequency table point 2 37.18 ULC frequency table point 3 37.19 ULC frequency table point 4 37.20 ULC frequency table point 5 37.21 ULC underload point 1 37.22 ULC underload point 2 37.23 ULC underload point 3 37.24 ULC underload point 4 37.25 ULC underload point 5 37.31 ULC overload point 1 37.32 ULC overload point 2 37.33 ULC overload point 3 37.34 ULC overload point 4 37.35 ULC overload point 5 37.41 ULC overload timer 37.42 ULC underload timer 40 Process PID set 1 40.01 Process PID output actual
40.02 Process PID feedback actual
Type Real Real Real Real Real Data Data
PB Analog
src List List Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real
Real
Real
Range 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 0.00...100.00 1/1/1980...6/5/2159
-
Unit
FbEq32
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
%
100 = 1%
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
0000h...FFFFh -
-30000.0...30000.0 -30000.0...30000.0 -30000.0...30000.0 -30000.0...30000.0 -30000.0...30000.0 -500.0...500.0 -500.0...500.0 -500.0...500.0 -500.0...500.0 -500.0...500.0 -1600.0...1600.0 -1600.0...1600.0 -1600.0...1600.0 -1600.0...1600.0 -1600.0...1600.0 -1600.0...1600.0 -1600.0...1600.0 -1600.0...1600.0 -1600.0...1600.0 -1600.0...1600.0 0.0...10000.0 0.0...10000.0
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
rpm
10 = 1 rpm
rpm
10 = 1 rpm
rpm
10 = 1 rpm
rpm
10 = 1 rpm
rpm
10 = 1 rpm
Hz
10 = 1 Hz
Hz
10 = 1 Hz
Hz
10 = 1 Hz
Hz
10 = 1 Hz
Hz
10 = 1 Hz
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
%
10 = 1%
s
10 = 1 s
s
10 = 1 s
-200000.00...200000.00 -200000.00...200000.00
% 100 = 1 PID customer unit
PID
100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
436 Additional parameter data
No.
Name
40.03 Process PID setpoint actual
40.04 Process PID deviation actual
40.05 40.06 40.07 40.08
Process PID trim output act Process PID status word Process PID operation mode Set 1 feedback 1 source
40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source
40.10 40.11 40.14 40.15 40.16
Set 1 feedback function Set 1 feedback filter time Set 1 setpoint scaling Set 1 output scaling Set 1 setpoint 1 source
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source
40.18 Set 1 setpoint function 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1
40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2
40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1
40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2
40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3
40.24 Set 1 internal setpoint 0
40.26 Set 1 setpoint min
40.27 Set 1 setpoint max
40.28 40.29 40.30
Set 1 setpoint increase time Set 1 setpoint decrease time Set 1 setpoint freeze enable
Type Real
Real
Real PB List Analog src Analog src List Real Real Real Analog src Analog src List Binary src Binary src Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real Real Binary src
Range -200000.00...200000.00
-200000.00...200000.00
-32768...32768 0000h...FFFFh
-
Unit
PID customer
units
PID customer
units
-
-
-
-
FbEq32 100 = 1 PID customer unit
100 = 1 PID customer unit
1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-
-
0.000...30.000
s
-200000.00...200000.00
-
-200000.00...200000.00
-
-
-
1 = 1 1000 = 1 s
100 = 1 100 = 1
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-200000.00...200000.00 -200000.00...200000.00
-200000.00...200000.00
-200000.00...200000.00 -200000.00...200000.00
-200000.00...200000.00
0.0...1800.0 0.0...1800.0
-
PID customer
units
PID customer
units
PID customer
units
PID customer
units
PID customer
units
PID customer
units
s
s
-
100 = 1 PID customer unit
100 = 1 PID customer unit
100 = 1 PID customer unit
100 = 1 PID customer unit
100 = 1
100 = 1
10 = 1 s 10 = 1 s
1 = 1
Additional parameter data 437
No.
Name
40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion
40.32 40.33 40.34 40.35 40.36 40.37 40.38
Set 1 gain Set 1 integration time Set 1 derivation time Set 1 derivation filter time Set 1 output min Set 1 output max Set 1 output freeze enable
40.39 40.40 40.43 40.44 40.45 40.46
Set 1 deadband range Set 1 deadband delay Set 1 sleep level Set 1 sleep delay Set 1 sleep boost time Set 1 sleep boost step
40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation
40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay 40.49 Set 1 tracking mode
40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection
40.51 40.52 40.53 40.54 40.55 40.56 40.57
Set 1 trim mode Set 1 trim selection Set 1 trimmed ref pointer Set 1 trim mix Set 1 trim adjust Set 1 trim source PID set1/set2 selection
40.58 Set 1 increase prevention
40.59 Set 1 decrease prevention
40.60 Set 1 PID activation source
40.61 Setpoint scaling actual 40.62 PID internal setpoint actual
40.79 Set 1 units 40.80 Set 1 PID output min source
Type Binary
src Real Real Real Real Real Real Binary src Real Real Real Real Real Real
Real
Real Binary
src Analog
src List List List Real Real List Binary src Binary src Binary src Binary src Real Real
List List
Range -
Unit
FbEq32
-
1 = 1
0.10...100.00
-
100 = 1
0.0...9999.0
s
10 = 1 s
0.000...10.000
s
1000 = 1 s
0.0...10.0
s
10 = 1 s
-200000.00...200000.00
-
10 = 1
-200000.00...200000.00
-
10 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
0......200000.0 0.0 ... 3600.0 0.0...200000.0 0.0...3600.0 0.0...3600.0 0.0...200000.0
-200000.00...200000.00
0.00...60.00 -
-
10 = 1
s
10 = 1 s
-
10 = 1
s
10 = 1 s
s
10 = 1 s
PID
10 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
PID
100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
s
100 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
0.000 ... 1.000 -100.000 ... 100.000 -
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1000 = 1
-
1000 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-200000.00...200000.00 -200000.00...200000.00
-
-
100 = 1
PID
100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
-
1 = 1
-
1=1
438 Additional parameter data
No.
Name
40.81 Set 1 PID output max source
40.89 Set 1 setpoint multiplier
40.90 Set 1 feedback multiplier
40.91 Feedback data storage
40.92 Setpoint data storage
40.96 Process PID output %
40.97 Process PID feedback %
40.98 Process PID setpoint %
40.99 Process PID deviation %
41 Process PID set 2
41.08 Set 2 feedback 1 source
41.09 Set 2 feedback 2 source
41.10 41.11 41.14 41.15 41.16
Set 2 feedback function Set 2 feedback filter time Set 2 setpoint scaling Set 2 output scaling Set 2 setpoint 1 source
41.17 Set 2 setpoint 2 source
41.18 Set 2 setpoint function 41.19 Set 2 internal setpoint sel1
41.20 Set 2 internal setpoint sel2
41.21 Set 2 internal setpoint 1
41.22 Set 2 internal setpoint 2
41.23 Set 2 internal setpoint 3
41.24 Set 2 internal setpoint 0
41.26 Set 2 setpoint min
41.27 Set 2 setpoint max
41.28 Set 2 setpoint increase time 41.29 Set 2 setpoint decrease time
Type List Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real
Analog src
Analog src List Real Real Real
Analog src
Analog src List
Binary src
Binary src Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real Real
Range
Unit
-
-
-200000.00...200000.00
-
-200000.00...200000.00
-
-327.68...327.67
-
-327.68...327.67
-
-100.00...100.00
%
-100.00...100.00
%
-100.00...100.00
%
-100.00...100.00
%
FbEq32 1=1
100 = 1 100 = 1 100 = 1 100 = 1 100 = 1 100 = 1 100 = 1 100 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-
-
0.000...30.000
s
-200000.00...200000.00
-
-200000.00...200000.00
-
-
-
1 = 1 1000 = 1 s
100 = 1 100 = 1
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-200000.00...200000.00 -200000.00...200000.00 -200000.00...200000.00 -200000.00...200000.00 -200000.00...200000.00 -200000.00...200000.00
0.0...1800.0 0.0...1800.0
PID customer
unit
PID customer
units
PID customer
units
PID customer
units
PID customer
units
PID customer
units
s
s
100 = 1 PID customer unit
100 = 1 PID customer unit
100 = 1 PID customer unit
100 = 1 PID customer unit
100 = 1
100 = 1
10 = 1 s 10 = 1 s
Additional parameter data 439
No.
Name
41.30 Set 2 setpoint freeze enable
41.31 Set 2 deviation inversion
41.32 41.33 41.34 41.35 41.36 41.37 41.38
Set 2 gain Set 2 integration time Set 2 derivation time Set 2 derivation filter time Set 2 output min Set 2 output max Set 2 output freeze enable
41.39 41.40 41.43 41.44 41.45 41.46
Set 2 deadband range Set 2 deadband delay Set 2 sleep level Set 2 sleep delay Set 2 sleep boost time Set 2 sleep boost step
41.47 Set 2 wake-up deviation
41.48 Set 2 wake-up delay 41.49 Set 2 tracking mode
41.50 Set 2 tracking ref selection
41.51 41.52 41.53
Set 2 trim mode Set 2 trim selection Set 2 trimmed ref pointer
41.54 41.55 41.56 41.58
Set 2 trim mix Set 2 trim adjust Set 2 trim source Set 2 increase prevention
41.59 Set 2 decrease prevention
41.60 Set 2 PID activation source
41.79 41.80 41.81 41.89
Set 2 units Set 2 PID output min source Set 2 PID output max source Set 2 setpoint multiplier
Type Binary
src Binary
src Real Real Real Real Real Real Binary src Real Real Real Real Real Real
Real
Real Binary
src Analog
src List List Analog src Real Real List Binary src Binary src Binary src List List List Real
Range -
Unit
FbEq32
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
0.01...100.00
-
100 = 1
0.0...9999.0
s
10 = 1 s
0.000...10.000
s
1000 = 1 s
0.0...10.0
s
10 = 1 s
-200000.00...200000.00
-
10 = 1
-200000.00...200000.00
-
10 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
0......200000.0 0.0 ... 3600.0 0.0...200000.0 0.0...3600.0 0.0...3600.0 0.0...200000.0
-200000.00...200000.00
0.00...60.00 -
-
10 = 1
s
10 = 1 s
-
10 = 1
s
10 = 1 s
s
10 = 1 s
PID
10 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
PID
100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
s
100 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
0.000 ... 1.000 -100.000 ... 100.000
-
-
1000 = 1
-
1000 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-200000.00...200000.00
-
1 = 1 1=1 1=1 100 = 1
440 Additional parameter data
No.
Name
41.90 Set 2 feedback multiplier
43 Brake chopper
43.01 Braking resistor temperature
43.06 Brake chopper function
43.07 Brake chopper run enable
43.08 Brake resistor thermal tc 43.09 Brake resistor Pmax cont 43.10 Brake resistance 43.11 Brake resistor fault limit 43.12 Brake resistor warning limit 44 Mechanical brake control 44.01 Brake control status 44.06 Brake control enable
44.08 Brake open delay 44.13 Brake close delay 44.14 Brake close level 45 Energy efficiency 45.01 Saved GW hours 45.02 Saved MW hours 45.03 Saved kW hours 45.04 Saved energy 45.05 Saved money x1000
45.06 Saved money
45.07 Saved amount
45.08 CO2 reduction in kilotons
45.09 CO2 reduction in tons
45.10 Total saved CO2
45.11 Energy optimizer 45.12 Energy tariff 1
45.13 Energy tariff 2
45.14 Tariff selection
45.18 CO2 conversion factor
45.19 Comparison power
Type
Range
Unit
Real
-200000.00...200000.00
-
FbEq32 100 = 1
Real List Binary src Real Real Real Real Real
0.0...120.0 -
0...10000 0.00...10000.00
0.0...1000.0 0...150 0...150
% -
s kW Ohm % %
10 = 1% 1 = 1 1 = 1
1=1s 100 = 1 kW 10 = 1 ohm
1 = 1% 1 = 1%
PB Binary
src Real Real Real
0000h...FFFFh -
0.00...5.00 0.00...60.00 0.00...1000.00
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
100 = 1 s
s
100 = 1 s
rpm
100 = 1 rpm
Real Real Real Real Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
List Real
Real
Binary src Real
Real
0...65535 0...999
0.0...999.9 0.0...214748368.0 0...4294967295 thousands
0.00...999.99
0.00...21474830.08
0...65535
0.0...999.9
0.0...214748304.0
0.000...4294966.296
0.000...4294966.296
-
GWh
MWh
kWh
kWh
(definable)
(definable)
(definable)
metric kiloton
metric ton
metric ton
-
(definable)
(definable)
-
1 = 1 GWh
1 = 1 MWh
10 = 1 kWh
10 = 1 kWh
1 = 1 currency unit
100 = 1 currency unit
100 = 1 currency unit
1 = 1 metric kiloton
10 = 1 metric ton
10 = 1 metric ton
1 = 1
1000 = 1 currency unit
1000 = 1 currency unit
1 = 1
0.000...65.535 0.00...10000000.00
tn/ MWh kW
1000 = 1 tn/MWh
10 = 1 kW
Additional parameter data 441
No.
Name
45.21 Energy calculations reset
45.24 Hourly peak power value
45.25 Hourly peak power time
45.26 Hourly total energy (resettable)
45.27 Daily peak power value (resettable)
45.28 Daily peak power time
45.29 Daily total energy (resettable)
45.30 Last day total energy
45.31 Monthly peak power value (resettable)
45.32 Monthly peak power date
45.33 Monthly peak power time
45.34 Monthly total energy (resettable)
45.35 Last month total energy
45.36 Lifetime peak power value
45.37 Lifetime peak power date
45.38 Lifetime peak power time
46 Monitoring/scaling settings
46.01 Speed scaling
46.02 Frequency scaling
46.03 Torque scaling
46.04 Power scaling
46.05 Current scaling
46.06 Speed ref zero scaling
46.07 Frequency ref zero scaling
46.11 Filter time motor speed
46.12 Filter time output frequency
46.13 Filter time motor torque
46.14 Filter time power
46.21 At speed hysteresis
46.22 At frequency hysteresis
46.23 At torque hysteresis
46.31 Above speed limit
46.32 Above frequency limit
46.33 Above torque limit
46.41 kWh pulse scaling
46.43 Power decimals
46.44 Current decimals
Type List Real Real Real Real
Real Real Real Real
Real Real Real
Real Real Real Real
Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real
Range -
-3000.00 ... 3000.00
-3000.00 ... 3000.00 -3000.00 ... 3000.00
-30000.00 ... 30000.00 -30000.00 ... 30000.00
-3000.00 ... 3000.00
1/1/1980...6/5/2159 -
-1000000.00 ... 1000000.00
-1000000.00 ... 1000000.00 -3000.00 ... 3000.00 1/1/1980...6/5/2159 -
0.10...30000.00 0.10...1000.00
0.1...1000.0 0.10...30000.00
0...30000 0.00 ... 30000.00
0.00...1000.00 2...20000 2...20000 2...20000 2...20000
0.00...30000.00 0.00...1000.00
0.0...300.0 0.00...30000.00 0.00...1000.00
0.0...1600.0 0.001...1000.000
0...3 0...3
Unit -
kW
kWh kW
kWh kWh kW
kWh
kWh kW
rpm Hz % A rpm Hz ms ms ms ms rpm Hz % rpm Hz % kWh -
FbEq32 1 = 1
1 = 1 kW N/A
1 = 1 kWh 1 = 1 kW
N/A 1 = 1 kWh 1 = 1 kWh 1 = 1 kW
N/A N/A 1 = 1 kWh
1 = 1 kWh 1 = 1 kW
N/A N/A
100 = 1 rpm 100 = 1 Hz
10 = 1% 10 = 1 1=1A 100 = 1 rpm 100 = 1 Hz 1 = 1 ms 1 = 1 ms 1 = 1 ms 1 = 1 ms 100 = 1 rpm 100 = 1 Hz 1 = 1% 100 = 1 rpm 100 = 1 Hz 10 = 1% 1000 = 1 kWh 1 = 1 1 = 1
442 Additional parameter data
No.
Name
47 Data storage 47.01 Data storage 1 real32
Type Real
47.02 Data storage 2 real32
Real
47.03 Data storage 3 real32
Real
47.04 Data storage 4 real32
Real
47.11 Data storage 1 int32
Real
47.12 Data storage 2 int32
Real
47.13 Data storage 3 int32
Real
47.14 Data storage 4 int32
Real
47.21 Data storage 1 int16 47.22 Data storage 2 int16 47.23 Data storage 3 int16 47.24 Data storage 4 int16 49 Panel port communication 49.01 Node ID number 49.03 Baud rate 49.04 Communication loss time 49.05 Communication loss action 49.06 Refresh settings 49.19 Basic panel home view 1 49.20 Basic panel home view 2 49.21 Basic panel home view 3 49.219 Basic panel home view 4 49.220 Basic panel home view 5 49.221 Basic panel home view 6
50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) 50.01 FBA A enable 50.02 FBA A comm loss func 50.03 FBA A comm loss t out 50.04 FBA A ref1 type 50.05 FBA A ref2 type 50.06 FBA A SW sel 50.07 FBA A actual 1 type 50.08 FBA A actual 2 type 50.09 FBA A SW transparent source
Real Real Real Real
Real List Real List List List List List List List List
List List Real List List List List List Analog src
Range
-2147483.000... 2147483.000
-2147483.000... 2147483.000
-2147483.000... 2147483.000
-2147483.000... 2147483.000
-2147483648... 2147483647
-2147483648... 2147483647
-2147483648... 2147483647
-2147483648... 2147483647
-32768...32767 -32768...32767 -32768...32767 -32768...32767
1...32 -
0.3...3000.0 -
0.3...6553.5 -
Unit
FbEq32
-
1000 = 1
-
1000 = 1
-
1000 = 1
-
1000 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
10 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
10 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
Additional parameter data 443
No.
Name
Type
Range
Unit
50.10 FBA A act1 transparent source Analog
-
-
src
50.11 FBA A act2 transparent source Analog
-
-
src
50.12 FBA A debug mode
List
-
-
50.13 FBA A control word
Data 00000000h...FFFFFFFFh
-
50.14 FBA A reference 1
Real
-2147483648...
-
2147483647
50.15 FBA A reference 2
Real
-2147483648...
-
2147483647
50.16 FBA A status word
Data 00000000h...FFFFFFFFh
-
50.17 FBA A actual value 1
Real
-2147483648...
-
2147483647
50.18 FBA A actual value 2
Real
-2147483648...
-
2147483647
51 FBA A settings
51.01 FBA A type
List
-
-
51.02 FBA A Par2
Real
0...65535
-
...
...
...
...
...
51.26 FBA A Par26
Real
0...65535
-
51.27 FBA A par refresh
List
-
-
51.28 FBA A par table ver
Data
-
-
51.29 FBA A drive type code
Real
0...65535
-
51.30 FBA A mapping file ver
Real
0...65535
-
51.31 D2FBA A comm status
List
-
-
51.32 FBA A comm SW ver
Data
-
-
51.33 FBA A appl SW ver
Data
-
-
52 FBA A data in
52.01 FBA A data in1
List
-
-
...
...
...
...
...
52.12 FBA A data in12
List
-
-
53 FBA A data out
53.01 FBA A data out1
List
-
-
...
...
...
...
...
53.12 FBA A data out12
List
-
-
58 Embedded fieldbus
58.01 Protocol enable
List
-
-
58.02 Protocol ID
Real
0000h...FFFFh
-
58.03 Node address
Real
0...255
-
58.04 Baud rate
List
-
-
58.05 Parity
List
-
-
58.06 Communication control
List
-
-
58.07 Communication diagnostics
PB
0000h...FFFFh
-
FbEq32 1 = 1
1 = 1
1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1
1 = 1
1 = 1 1 = 1
1 = 1
1 = 1 1 = 1
1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1
1 = 1
1 = 1
1 = 1
1 = 1
1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1
444 Additional parameter data
No. 58.08 58.09 58.10 58.11 58.12 58.14 58.15 58.16 58.17 58.18 58.19 58.25 58.26 58.27 58.28 58.29 58.31
Name Received packets Transmitted packets All packets UART errors CRC errors Communication loss action Communication loss mode Communication loss time Transmit delay EFB control word EFB status word Control profile EFB ref1 type EFB ref2 type EFB act1 type EFB act2 type EFB act1 transparent source
58.32 EFB act2 transparent source
58.33 Addressing mode 58.34 Word order 58.101 Data I/O 1
58.102 Data I/O 2
58.103 Data I/O 3
58.104 Data I/O 4
58.105 Data I/O 5
58.106 Data I/O 6
58.107 Data I/O 7
...
...
58.114 Data I/O 14
71 External PID1 71.01 External PID act value
71.02 Feedback act value
Type Real Real Real Real Real List List Real Real PB PB List List List List List Analog src Analog src List List Analog src Analog src Analog src Analog src Analog src Analog src Analog src
... Analog
src
Real
Real
Range 0...4294967295 0...4294967295 0...4294967295 0...4294967295 0...4294967295
0.0...6000.0 0...65535 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
... -
Unit
FbEq32
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
s
10 = 1 s
ms
1 = 1 ms
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
...
-
1 = 1
-200000.00...200000.00 -200000.00...200000.00
% 100 = 1 PID customer unit
PID
100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
No.
Name
71.03 Setpoint act value
71.04 Deviation act value
71.06 71.07 71.08
PID status word PID operation mode Feedback 1 source
71.11 71.14 71.15 71.16
Feedback filter time Setpoint scaling Output scaling Setpoint 1 source
71.19 Internal setpoint sel1
71.20 Internal setpoint sel2
71.21 Internal setpoint 1
71.22 Internal setpoint 2
71.23 Internal setpoint 3
71.26 71.27 71.31
Setpoint min Setpoint max Deviation inversion
71.32 71.33 71.34 71.35 71.36 71.37 71.38
Gain Integration time Derivation time Derivation filter time Output min Output max Output freeze enable
71.39 71.40 71.58
Deadband range Deadband delay Increase prevention
71.59 Decrease prevention
Additional parameter data 445
Type Real
Real
PB List Analog src Real Real Real Analog src Binary src Binary src Real
Real
Real
Real Real Binary src Real Real Real Real Real Real Binary src Real Real Binary src Binary src
Range -200000.00...200000.00
-200000.00...200000.00
0000h...FFFFh -
Unit
FbEq32
PID
100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
PID
100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
0.000...30.000
s
-200000.00...200000.00
-
-200000.00...200000.00
-
-
-
1000 = 1 s 100 = 1 100 = 1 1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
-200000.00...200000.00
-200000.00...200000.00
-200000.00...200000.00
-200000.00...200000.00 -200000.00...200000.00
-
PID
100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
PID
100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
PID
100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
-
100 = 1
-
100 = 1
-
1 = 1
0.01...100.00
-
100 = 1
0.0...9999.0
s
10 = 1 s
0.000...10.000
s
1000 = 1 s
0.0...10.0
s
1000 = 1 s
-200000.00...200000.00
-
10 = 1
-200000.00...200000.00
-
10 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
0.0...200000.0 0.0...3600.0 -
-
10 = 1
s
1000 = 1 s
-
1 = 1
-
-
1 = 1
446 Additional parameter data
No.
Name
71.62 Internal setpoint actual
71.79 External PID units 76 PFC configuration
76.01 PFC status 76.02 Multipump system status
76.11 76.12 76.13 76.14 76.15 76.16 76.21 76.25 76.26 76.27 76.30 76.31 76.32 76.33 76.34 76.41 76.42 76.43 76.44 76.45 76.55 76.56 76.57 76.58 76.59 76.60 76.61 76.70
Pump status 1 Pump status 2 Pump status 3 Pump status 4 Pump status 5 Pump status 6 Multipump configuration Number of motors Min number of motors allowed Max number of motors allowed Start point 1 Start point 2 Start point 3 Start point 4 Start point 5 Stop point 1 Stop point 2 Stop point 3 Stop point 4 Stop point 5 Start delay Stop delay PFC speed hold on PFC speed hold off PFC contactor delay PFC ramp acceleration time PFC ramp deceleration time PFC autochange
76.71 76.72 76.73 76.74
PFC autochange interval Maximum wear imbalance Autochange level Autochange auxiliary PFC
Type Real
List
PB List
PB PB PB PB PB PB List Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Real Binary src Real Real Real List
Range -200000.00...200000.00
-
Unit
PID customer
units
-
FbEq32 100 = 1 PID customer unit
1 = 1
0000h...FFFFh 0...2, 100...103, 200...202, 300...302, 400, 500, 600,
800...801, 4...9 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh
1...6 0...6 1...6 0...32767 0...32767 0...32767 0...32767 0...32767 0...32767 0...32767 0...32767 0...32767 0...32767 0.00...12600.00 0.00...12600.00 0.00...1000.00 0.00...1000.00 0.20...600.00 0.00...1800.00 0.00...1800.00
-
-
rpm/Hz rpm/Hz rpm/Hz rpm/Hz rpm/Hz rpm/Hz rpm/Hz rpm/Hz rpm/Hz rpm/Hz s s s s s s s -
0.00...42949672.95
h
0.00...1000000.00
h
0.0...300.0
%
-
-
1 = 1 1 = 1
1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 unit 1 = 1 unit 1 = 1 unit 1 = 1 unit 1 = 1 unit 1 = 1 unit 1 = 1 unit 1 = 1 unit 1 = 1 unit 1 = 1 unit 100 = 1 s 100 = 1 s 100 = 1 s 100 = 1 s 100 = 1 s 100 = 1 s 100 = 1 s 1 = 1
100 = 1 h 100 = 1 h 10 = 1%
1 = 1
Additional parameter data 447
No.
Name
76.81 PFC 1 interlock
76.82 PFC 2 interlock
76.83 PFC 3 interlock
76.84 PFC 4 interlock
76.85 PFC 5 interlock
76.86 PFC 6 interlock
76.95 Regulator bypass control
77 PFC maintenance and monitoring 77.10 PFC runtime change 77.11 Pump 1 running time 77.12 Pump 2 running time 77.13 Pump 3 running time 77.14 Pump 4 running time 77.15 Pump 5 running time 77.16 Pump 6 running time 95 HW configuration 95.01 Supply voltage 95.02 Adaptive voltage limits 95.03 Estimated AC supply voltage 95.04 Control board supply 95.15 Special HW settings 95.20 HW options word 1 95.21 HW options word 2 95.200 Cooling fan mode 96 System 96.01 Language 96.02 Pass code 96.03 Access level status 96.04 Macro select 96.05 Macro active 96.06 Parameter restore 96.07 Parameter save manually 96.08 Control board boot 96.10 User set status 96.11 User set save/load
Type Binary
src Binary
src Binary
src Binary
src Binary
src Binary
src Binary
src
List Real Real Real Real Real Real
List List Real List PB PB PB List
List Data PB List List List List List List List
Range -
-
-
-
-
-
-
0.00...42949672.95 0.00...42949672.95 0.00...42949672.95 0.00...42949672.95 0.00...42949672.95 0.00...42949672.95
0...65535 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh 0000h...FFFFh -
000b...111b -
Unit
FbEq32
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
h
100 = 1 h
h
100 = 1 h
h
100 = 1 h
h
100 = 1 h
h
100 = 1 h
h
100 = 1 h
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
V
1=1V
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
-
1 = 1
448 Additional parameter data
No.
Name
96.12 User set I/O mode in1
96.13 User set I/O mode in2
96.16 96.20 96.51 96.54
Unit selection Time sync primary source Clear fault and event logger Checksum action
96.55 Checksum control word
96.68 Actual checksumA
96.69 Actual checksumB
96.70 Disable adaptive program 96.71 Approved checksum A
96.72 Approved checksum B
96.78 550 compatibility mode 96.100 Change user pass code 96.101 Confirm user pass code 96.102 User lock functionality
97 Motor control 97.01 Switching frequency reference 97.02 Minimum switching frequency 97.03 Slip gain 97.04 Voltage reserve 97.05 Flux braking 97.08 Optimizer minimum torque 97.11 TR tuning 97.13 IR compensation 97.15 Motor model temperature adaptation 97.16 Stator temperature factor 97.17 Rotor temperature factor 97.20 U/F ratio 97.49 Slip gain for scalar 97.94 IR comp max frequency
98 User motor parameters 98.01 User motor model mode 98.02 Rs user
Type Binary
src Binary
src PB List Real Binary src Binary src Binary src Binary src List Binary src Binary src List Data Data PB
List List Real Real List Real Real Real List
Real Real List Real Real
List Real
Range -
-
000h...FFFFh -
0...1 -
-
-
-
0...1 -
-
10000000...99999999 10000000...99999999
0000h...FFFFh
0...200 -4...50 0.0 ... 1600.0 25...400 0.00...50.00
0...200 0...200
0...200 1.0...200.0
0.0000...0.50000
Unit -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
% % % % % -
% % % %
p.u.
FbEq32 -
-
1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1
1 = 1
1 = 1
1 = 1 1 = 1
1 = 1
1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1
1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1% 1 = 1% 1 = 1 10 = 1% 1 = 1% 100 = 1% 1 = 1
1 = 1% 1 = 1% 1 = 1 1 = 1% 10 = 1%
1 = 1 100000 =
1 p.u.
Additional parameter data 449
No. 98.03 Rr user
Name
98.04 Lm user
98.05 SigmaL user
98.06 Ld user
98.07 Lq user
98.08 PM flux user
98.09 Rs user SI
98.10 Rr user SI
98.11 Lm user SI 98.12 SigmaL user SI 98.13 Ld user SI 98.14 Lq user SI 99 Motor data 99.03 Motor type 99.04 Motor control mode 99.06 Motor nominal current 99.07 Motor nominal voltage 99.08 Motor nominal frequency 99.09 Motor nominal speed 99.10 Motor nominal power
99.11 Motor nominal cos 99.12 Motor nominal torque
99.13 99.14 99.15 99.16
ID run requested Last ID run performed Motor polepairs calculated Motor phase order
Type Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real
Real Real Real Real
Range 0.0000...0.50000
0.00000...10.00000
0.00000...1.00000
0.00000...10.00000
0.00000...10.00000
0.00000...2.00000
0.00000...100.00000
0.00000...100.00000
0.00...100000.01 0.00...100000.01 0.00...100000.01 0.00...100000.01
Unit
FbEq32
p.u.
100000 =
1 p.u.
p.u.
100000 =
1 p.u.
p.u.
100000 =
1 p.u.
p.u.
100000 =
1 p.u.
p.u.
100000 =
1 p.u.
p.u.
100000 =
1 p.u.
ohm
100000 =
1 p.u.
ohm
100000 =
1 p.u.
mH
100 = 1 mH
mH
100 = 1 mH
mH
100 = 1 mH
mH
100 = 1 mH
List List Real Real Real Real Real
Real Real
List List Real List
-
-
-
-
0.00...5.20
A
69.2...830.0
V
0.0 ... 500.0
Hz
0 ... 30000
rpm
0.00...10000.00 kW or kW or hp 0.00 ... 13404.83 hp
0.00 ... 1.00
-
0.000...4000000.000 N�m or N�m or
0.000...2950248.597 lb�ft
lb�ft
-
-
-
-
0...1000
-
-
-
1 = 1 1 = 1 10 = 1 A 10 = 1 V 10 = 1 Hz 1 = 1 rpm 100 = 1 unit
100 = 1 1000 = 1 unit
1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1 1 = 1
450 Additional parameter data
Fault tracing 451
9
Fault tracing
What this chapter contains
The chapter lists the warning and fault messages including possible causes and corrective actions. The causes of most warnings and faults can be identified and corrected using the information in this chapter. If not, contact an ABB service representative. If you have a possibility to use the Drive composer PC tool, send the Support package created by the Drive composer to the ABB service representative. Warnings and faults are listed below in separate tables. Each table is sorted by warning/fault code.
Safety
WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to service the drive. Read the instructions in chapter Safety instructions at the beginning of the Hardware manual of the drive before working on the drive.
Indications
Warnings and faults
Warnings and faults indicate an abnormal drive status. The codes and names of active warnings and faults are displayed on the control panel of the drive as well as in the Drive composer PC tool. Only the codes of warnings and faults are available over fieldbus. Warnings do not need to be reset; they stop showing when the cause of the warning ceases. Warnings do not trip the drive and it will continue to operate the motor.
452 Fault tracing
Faults latch inside the drive and cause the drive to trip, and the motor stops. After the cause of a fault has been removed, the fault can be reset from a selectable source (Menu - Primary settings - Advanced functions - Reset faults manually (Reset faults manually from:) on the panel; or parameter 31.11 Fault reset selection) such as the control panel, Drive composer PC tool, the digital inputs of the drive, or fieldbus. Reseting the fault creates an event 64FF Fault reset. After the reset, the drive can be restarted.
Note that some faults require a reboot of the control unit either by switching the power off and on, or using parameter 96.08 Control board boot � this is mentioned in the fault listing wherever appropriate.
Pure events
In addition to warnings and faults, there are pure events that are only recorded in the event log of the drive. The codes of these events are included in the Warning messages table on page (454).
Editable messages
For external events, the action (fault or warning), name and the message text can be edited. To specify external events, select Menu - Primary settings - Advanced functions - External events.
Contact information can also be included and the text edited. To specify contact information, select Menu - Primary settings - Clock, region, display - Contact info view.
Warning/fault history
Event log
All indications are stored in the event log with a time stamp and other information. The event log stores information on � the last 8 fault recordings, that is, faults that tripped the drive or fault resets � the last 10 warnings or pure events that occurred.
See section Viewing warning/fault information on page 453.
Auxiliary codes
Some events generate an auxiliary code that often helps in pinpointing the problem. On the control panel, the auxiliary code is stored as part of the details of the event; in the Drive composer PC tool, the auxiliary code is shown in the event listing.
Fault tracing 453
Viewing warning/fault information
The drive is able to store a list of the active faults actually causing the drive to trip at the present time. The drive also stores a list of faults and warnings that have previously occurred.
For each stored fault, the panel shows the fault code, time and values of nine parameters (actual signals and status words) stored at the time of the fault. The values for the latest fault are in parameters 05.80...05.88.
For active faults and warnings, see � Menu - Diagnostics - Active faults � Menu - Diagnostics - Active warnings � Options - Active faults � Options - Active warnings � parameters in group 04 Warnings and faults (page 185).
For previously occurred faults and warnings, see � Menu - Diagnostics - Fault & event log � parameters in group 04 Warnings and faults (page 185).
The event log can also be accessed (and reset) using the Drive composer PC tool. See Drive composer PC tool user's manual (3AUA0000094606 [English]).
QR code generation for mobile service application
A QR code (or a series of QR codes) can be generated by the drive for display on the control panel. The QR code contains drive identification data, information on the latest events, and values of status and counter parameters. The code can be read with a mobile device containing the ABB service application, which then sends the data to ABB for analysis. For more information on the application, contact your local ABB service representative.
To generate the QR code, select Menu - System info - QR code.
Note: If a control panel which does not support QR code generation (version older than v.6.4x) is used, the QR code menu entry will disappear totally and will not be available any longer either with control panels supporting the QR code generation.
454 Fault tracing
Warning messages
Note: The list also contains events that only appear in the Event log.
Code (hex)
64FF
Warning / Aux. code Fault reset
A2A1 Current calibration
A2B1 Overcurrent
A2B3 Earth leakage
Cause
What to do
A fault has been reset from the panel, Drive composer PC tool, fieldbus or I/O. Current offset and gain measurement calibration will occur at next start. Output current has exceeded internal fault limit. In addition to an actual overcurrent situation, this warning may also be caused by an earth fault or supply phase loss.
Drive has detected load unbalance typically due to earth fault in motor or motor cable.
Event. Informative only.
Informative warning. (See parameter 99.13 ID run requested.)
Check motor load. Check acceleration times in parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp (speed control), 28 Frequency reference chain (frequency control). Also check parameters 46.01 Speed scaling, 46.02 Frequency scaling and 46.03 Torque scaling. Check motor and motor cable (including phasing and delta/star connection). Check for an earth fault in motor or motor cables by measuring the insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. See chapter Electrical installation, section Checking the insulation of the assembly in the Hardware manual of the drive. Check there are no contactors opening and closing in motor cable. Check that the start-up data in parameter group 99 Motor data corresponds to the motor rating plate. Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable.
Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check for an earth fault in motor or motor cables by measuring the insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. See chapter Electrical installation, section Checking the insulation of the assembly in the Hardware manual of the drive. If an earth fault is found, fix or change the motor cable and/or motor. If no earth fault can be detected, contact your local ABB representative.
Fault tracing 455
Code (hex) A2B4
A2BA A3A1 A3A2 A3AA A490 A491
A492
A4A0
Warning / Aux. code Cause
Short circuit
Short-circuit in motor cable(s) or motor.
IGBT overload
Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature. This warning protects the IGBT(s)
and can be activated by a short circuit in the motor cable.
DC link overvoltage
DC link undervoltage
DC not charged
Incorrect temperature sensor setup External temperature 1 (Editable message text)
Intermediate circuit DC voltage too high (when the drive is stopped).
Intermediate circuit DC voltage too low (when the drive is stopped).
The voltage of the intermediate DC circuit has not yet risen to operating level.
Temperature cannot be supervised due to incorrect adapter setup.
Measured temperature 1 has exceeded warning limit.
External temperature 2
(Editable message text)
Measured temperature 2 has exceeded warning limit.
Control board temperature
Control unit temperature is too high.
(none) Temperature above warning limit
1 Thermistor broken
What to do
Check motor and motor cable for cabling errors. Check motor and motor cable (including phasing and delta/star connection). Check for an earth fault in motor or motor cables by measuring the insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. See chapter Electrical installation, section Checking the insulation of the assembly in the Hardware manual of the drive. Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable.
Check motor cable. Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against drive power.
Check the supply voltage setting (parameter 95.01 Supply voltage). Note that the wrong setting of the parameter may cause the motor to rush uncontrollably, or may overload the brake chopper or resistor. Check the supply voltage. If the problem persists, contact your local ABB representative.
Check the settings of temperature source parameters 35.11 and 35.21.
Check the value of parameter 35.02 Measured temperature 1. Check the cooling of the motor (or other equipment whose temperature is being measured). Check the value of 35.13 Temperature 1 warning limit.
Check the value of parameter 35.03 Measured temperature 2. Check the cooling of the motor (or other equipment whose temperature is being measured). Check the value of 35.23 Temperature 2 warning limit.
Check the auxiliary code. See actions for each code below.
Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Contact an ABB service representative for control unit replacement.
456 Fault tracing
Code (hex) A4A1 A4A9
A4B0
A4B1 A4F6 A5A0
A5EA A5EB A5ED A5EE A5EF
Warning / Aux. code IGBT overtemperature
Cooling
Excess temperature
Excess temperature difference IGBT temperature
Safe torque off Programmable warning: 31.22 STO indication run/stop
Measurement circuit temperature PU board powerfail Measurement circuit ADC Measurement circuit DFF PU state feedback
Cause Estimated drive IGBT temperature is excessive.
Drive module temperature is excessive.
Power unit module temperature is excessive.
High temperature difference between the IGBTs of different phases. Drive IGBT temperature is excessive.
Safe torque off function is active, ie safety circuit signal(s) connected to connector STO is lost.
Problem with internal temperature measurement of the drive. Power unit power supply failure. Measurement circuit fault. Measurement circuit fault. State feedback from output phases does not match control signals.
What to do
Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against drive power.
Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds 40 �C/104 �F or if it exceeds 50 �C /122 �F, ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive. For all P55 frames, check the derating temperatures. See chapter Technical data, section Derating in the Hardware manual of the drive. Check drive module cooling air flow and fan operation. Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of drive module for dust pick-up. Clean whenever necessary.
Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against drive power. (1: U-phase, 2: V-phase, 3: W-phase, 4: INT board, 6: Air inlet (sensor connected to INT board X10), 7: PCB compartment fan or power supply board, FA: Ambient temperature).
Check the motor cabling. Check cooling of drive module(s).
Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against drive power.
Check safety circuit connections. For more information, chapter The Safe torque off function in the Hardware manual of the drive and description of parameter 31.22 STO indication run/stop (page 295). Check the value of parameter 95.04 Control board supply.
Contact your local ABB representative.
Contact your local ABB representative.
Contact your local ABB representative.
Contact your local ABB representative.
Contact your local ABB representative.
Fault tracing 457
Code (hex) A5F0 A682
A6A4
A6A5 A6A6 A6A7
A6B0
Warning / Aux. code Cause
Charging feedback
Flash erase speed exceeded
Charging feedback signal missing.
The flash memory (in the memory unit) has been erased too frequently, compromising the lifetime of the memory.
Motor nominal value
The motor parameters are set incorrectly.
The drive is not dimensioned correctly.
0001 Slip frequency is too small.
0002 Synchronous and nominal speeds differ too much.
0003 Nominal speed is higher than
synchronous speed with 1 pole pair.
0004 Nominal current is outside limits
0005 Nominal voltage is outside limits.
0006 Nominal power is higher than apparent power.
0007 Nominal power not consistent with nominal speed and
torque.
No motor data
Parameters in group 99 have not been set.
Voltage category unselected
System time not set
The voltage category has not been defined.
System time is not set. Timed functions cannot be used and fault log dates are not correct.
User lock is open
The user lock is open, ie. user lock configuration parameters
96.100...96.102 are visible.
What to do
Check the feedback signal coming from the charging system. Avoid forcing unnecessary parameter saves by parameter 96.07 or cyclic parameter writes (such as user logger triggering through parameters). Check the auxiliary code (format XYYY YZZZ). "X" specifies the source of warning (1: generic flash erase supervision). "ZZZ" specifies the flash subsector number that generated the warning. Check the auxiliary code. See actions for each code below.
Check the settings of the motor configuration parameters in groups 98 and 99. Check that the drive is sized correctly for the motor.
Check that all the required parameters in group 99 have been set. Note: It is normal for this warning to appear during the start-up and continue until the motor data is entered. Set voltage category in parameter 95.01 Supply voltage. Set the system time manually or connect the panel to the drive to synchronize the clock. If basic panel is used, synchronize the clock through the EFB or a fieldbus module. Set parameter 34.10 Timed functions enable to Disabled to disable the timed functions if they are not used. Close the user lock by entering an invalid pass code in parameter 96.02 Pass code. See section User lock (page 175).
458 Fault tracing
Code (hex) A6B1 A6D1 A6E5
A6E6
A780 A783 A792 A793
Warning / Aux. code Cause
User pass code not confirmed
A new user pass code has been entered in parameter 96.100 but not confirmed in
96.101.
FBA A parameter conflict
AI parametrization
The drive does not have a functionality requested by a PLC, or requested functionality has not been activated.
The current/voltage hardware setting of an analog input does not correspond to parameter settings.
ULC configuration
User load curve configuration error.
0000 Speed points inconsistent.
0001 Frequency points inconsistent.
0002 Underload point above overload point.
0003 Overload point below underload point.
Motor stall
Programmable warning: 31.24 Stall function
Motor is operating in stall
region because of e.g. excessive load or insufficient motor power.
Motor overload
Motor current is too high.
Brake resistor wiring
BR excess temperature
Brake resistor short circuit or brake chopper control fault. For drive frames R6 or larger.
Brake resistor temperature has exceeded warning limit defined by parameter 43.12 Brake resistor warning limit.
What to do
Confirm the new pass code by entering the same code in 96.101. To cancel, close the user lock without confirming the new code. See section User lock (page 175).
Check PLC programming. Check settings of parameter groups 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA).
Check the event log for an auxiliary code. The code identifies the analog input whose settings are in conflict. Adjust either the hardware setting (on the drive control unit) or parameter 12.15/12.25. Note: Control unit reboot (either by cycling the power or through parameter 96.08 Control board boot) is required to validate any changes in the hardware settings.
Check the auxiliary code (format XXXX ZZZZ). "ZZZZ" indicates the problem (see actions for each code below).
Check that each speed point (parameters 37.11...37.15) has a higher value than the previous point.
Check that each frequency point (37.20...37.16) has a higher value than the previous point.
Check that each overload point (37.31...37.35) has a higher value than the corresponding underload point (37.21...37.25).
Check motor load and drive ratings. Check fault function parameters.
Check for overloaded motor. Adjust the parameters used for the motor overload function (35.51...35.53) and 35.55...35.56.
Check brake chopper and brake resistor connection. Ensure brake resistor is not damaged.
Stop drive. Let resistor cool down. Check resistor overload protection function settings (parameter group 43 Brake chopper). Check warning limit setting, parameter 43.12 Brake resistor warning limit. Check that the resistor has been dimensioned correctly. Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits.
Fault tracing 459
Code (hex) A794
A79C
A7A2 A7AB A7C1
A7CE
Warning / Aux. code Cause
BR data
Brake resistor data has not been given.
0000 0001 Resistance value too low.
0000 0002 Thermal time constant not given.
0000 0003 Maximum continuous power not given.
BC IGBT excess temperature
Brake chopper IGBT
temperature has exceeded internal warning limit.
Mechanical brake opening failed
Status of mechanical brake acknowledgement is not as expected during brake open.
Extension I/O configuration failure
FBA A communication Programmable warning: 50.02 FBA A comm loss func
I/O module is not connected to the device or parameterization conflict with connected I/O module.
Cyclical communication between drive and fieldbus adapter module A or between PLC and fieldbus adapter module A is lost.
EFB comm loss
Programmable warning: 58.14 Communication loss action
Communication break in
embedded fieldbus (EFB) communication.
What to do
One or more of the resistor data settings (parameters 43.08...43.10) is incorrect. The parameter is specified by the auxiliary code.
Check value of 43.10.
Check value of 43.08.
Check value of 43.09.
Let chopper cool down. Check for excessive ambient temperature. Check for cooling fan failure. Check for obstructions in the air flow. Check the dimensioning and cooling of the cabinet. Check resistor overload protection function settings (parameters 43.06...43.10). Check minimum allowed resistor value for the chopper being used. Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits. Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive.
Check mechanical brake connection. Check mechanical brake settings in parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control. Check that acknowledgement signal matches the actual status of brake.
Check that the I/O module is connected to the device. Check that no parameters are connected to non-existing I/O parameters.
Check status of fieldbus communication. See user documentation of fieldbus interface. Check settings of parameter groups 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA), 51 FBA A settings, 52 FBA A data in and 53 FBA A data out. Check cable connections. Check if communication master is able to communicate.
Check the status of the fieldbus master (online/offline/error etc.). Check cable connections to the EIA-485/X5 terminals 29, 30 and 31 on the control unit.
460 Fault tracing
Code (hex) A7EE A88F A8A0 A8A1
A8A2
A8B0 A8B1 A8B2
Warning / Aux. code Cause
Panel loss
Programmable warning: 49.05 Communication loss action
Control panel or PC tool selected as active control location for drive has ceased
communicating.
Cooling fan
Maintenance timer limit exceeded.
AI supervision
Programmable warning: 12.03 AI supervision function
An analog signal is outside the limits specified for the analog
input.
RO life warning
0001
The relay has changed states more than the recommended number of times.
Relay output 1
0002 Relay output 2
0003 Relay output 3
RO toggle warning
The relay output is changing
states faster than recommended, e.g. if a fast changing frequency signal is
connected to it. The relay lifetime will be exceeded shortly.
0001 Relay output 1
0002 Relay output 2
0003 Relay output 3
ABB Signal supervision 1
(Editable message text) Programmable warning: 32.06 Supervision 1 action
Warning generated by the signal supervision function 1.
ABB Signal supervision 2
(Editable message text) Programmable warning: 32.16 Supervision 2 action
Warning generated by the signal supervision function 2.
ABB Signal supervision 3
(Editable message text) Programmable warning: 32.26 Supervision 3 action
Warning generated by the signal supervision function 3.
What to do
Check PC tool or control panel connection. Check control panel connector. Check mounting platform if being used. Disconnect and reconnect the control panel. Consider changing the cooling fan. Parameter 05.04 Fan on-time counter shows the running time of the cooling fan. Check signal level at the analog input. Check the wiring connected to the input. Check the minimum and maximum limits of the input in parameter group 12 Standard AI. Change the control unit or stop using the relay output.
Change the control unit or stop using relay output 1. Change the control unit or stop using relay output 2. Change the control unit or stop using relay output 3. Replace the signal connected to the relay output source with a less frequently changing signal.
Select a different signal with parameter 10.24 RO1 source. Select a different signal with parameter 10.27 RO2 source. Select a different signal with parameter 10.30 RO3 source. Check the source of the warning (parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal).
Check the source of the warning (parameter 32.17 Supervision 2 signal).
Check the source of the warning (parameter 32.27 Supervision 3 signal).
Fault tracing 461
Code (hex) A8B3 A8B4 A8B5 A8BE
A8BF
A981
A982
A983
A984
Warning / Aux. code Cause
ABB Signal supervision 4
(Editable message text) Programmable warning: 32.36 Supervision 4 action
Warning generated by the signal supervision function 4.
ABB Signal supervision 5
(Editable message text) Programmable warning: 32.46 Supervision 5 action
Warning generated by the signal supervision function 5.
ABB Signal supervision 6
(Editable message text) Programmable warning: 32.56 Supervision 6 action
Warning generated by the signal supervision function 6.
ULC overload warning
Programmable fault: 37.03 ULC overload actions
Selected signal has exceeded the user overload curve.
ULC underload warning
Programmable fault: 37.04 ULC underload actions
Selected signal has fallen below the user underload curve.
External warning 1
(Editable message text) Programmable warning: 31.01 External event 1 source 31.02 External event 1 type
External warning 2
(Editable message text) Programmable warning: 31.03 External event 2 source 31.04 External event 2 type
External warning 3
(Editable message text) Programmable warning: 31.05 External event 3 source 31.06 External event 3 type
External warning 4
(Editable message text) Programmable warning: 31.07 External event 4 source 31.08 External event 4 type
Fault in external device 1. Fault in external device 2. Fault in external device 3. Fault in external device 4.
What to do
Check the source of the warning (parameter 32.37 Supervision 4 signal).
Check the source of the warning (parameter 32.47 Supervision 5 signal).
Check the source of the warning (parameter 32.57 Supervision 6 signal).
Check for any operating conditions increasing the monitored signal (for example, the loading of the motor if the torque or current is being monitored). Check the definition of the load curve (parameter group 37 User load curve). Check for any operating conditions decreasing the monitored signal (for example, loss of load if the torque or current is being monitored). Check the definition of the load curve (parameter group 37 User load curve). Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.01 External event 1 source.
Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.03 External event 2 source.
Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.05 External event 3 source.
Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.07 External event 4 source.
462 Fault tracing
Code (hex)
Warning / Aux. code
Cause
What to do
A985
External warning 5
(Editable message text) Programmable warning: 31.09 External event 5 source 31.10 External event 5 type
Fault in external device 5.
Check the external device.
Check setting of parameter 31.09 External event 5 source.
AF88 Season configuration warning
You have configured a season which starts before the
previous season.
Configure the seasons with increasing start dates, see parameters 34.60
Season 1 start date...34.63 Season 4 start date.
AF90 Speed controller autotuning
The speed controller autotune Check the auxiliary code (format XXXX
routine did not complete
YYYY). "YYYY" indicates the problem
successfully.
(see actions for each code below).
0000 The drive was stopped before Repeat autotune until successful. the autotune routine finished.
0001 The drive was started but was not ready to follow the
autotune command.
Make sure the prerequisites of the autotune run are fulfilled. See section
Before activating the autotune routine (page 125).
0002
Required torque reference could not be reached before
the drive reached maximum speed.
Decrease torque step (parameter 25.38) or increase speed step (25.39).
0003 Motor could not accelerate/decelerate to
maximum/minimum speed.
Increase torque step (parameter 25.38) or decrease speed step (25.39).
0005 Motor could not decelerate with full autotune torque.
Decrease torque step (parameter 25.38) or speed step (25.39).
AFAA Autoreset
A fault is about to be autoreset. Informative warning. See the settings in parameter group 31 Fault functions.
AFE1 AFE2
Emergency stop (off2)
Emergency stop (off1 or off3)
Drive has received an emergency stop (mode selection off2) command.
Drive has received an emergency stop (mode selection off1 or off3) command.
Check that it is safe to continue operation. Then return emergency stop push button to normal position. Restart drive.
If the emergency stop was unintentional, check the source selected by parameter 21.05 Emergency stop source.
AFE9 Start delay
The start delay is active and the drive will start the motor
after a predefined delay.
Informative warning. See parameter 21.22 Start delay.
AFEB Run enable missing
No run enable signal is received.
Check setting of parameter 20.12 Run enable 1 source. Switch signal on (e.g. in the fieldbus Control Word) or check
wiring of selected source.
AFED Enable to rotate
Signal to rotate has not been received within a fixed time delay of 120 s.
Switch enable to rotate signal on (e.g. in digital inputs).
Check the setting of (and source selected by) parameter 20.22 Enable to rotate.
AFF6 Identification run
Motor ID run will occur at next Informative warning. start.
Fault tracing 463
Code (hex)
AFF8
Warning / Aux. code Motor heating active
B5A0
STO event
Programmable event: 31.22 STO indication run/stop
D501 No more available PFC motors
D502 All motors interlocked D503 VSD controlled PFC
motor interlocked
Cause
What to do
Pre-heating is being performed Informative warning.
Motor pre-heating is active. Current specified by parameter 21.16 Preheating current is being passed through the motor.
Safe torque off function is
active, ie. safety circuit signal(s) connected to connector STO is lost.
Informative warning.
Check safety circuit connections. For more information, see chapter The Safe torque off function in the Hardware manual of the drive and description of parameter 31.22 STO indication run/stop (page 295).
No more PFC motors can be
started because they can be interlocked or in the Hand mode.
Check that there are no interlocked PFC motors, see parameters: 76.81...76.84.
If all motors are in use, the PFC system is not adequately dimensioned to handle the demand.
All the motors in the PFC system are interlocked.
Check that there are no interlocked PFC motors, see parameters 76.81...76.84.
The motor connected to the
drive is interlocked (unavailable).
Motor connected to the drive is interlocked and thus cannot be started.
Remove the corresponding interlock to start the drive controlled PFC motor. See parameters 76.81...76.84.
464 Fault tracing
Fault messages
Code (hex)
1080
Fault / Aux. code
Backup/Restore timeout
1081 Rating ID fault
2310 Overcurrent
2340 Short circuit
2381 IGBT overload
3130 Input phase loss Programmable fault
Cause
What to do
Panel or PC tool has failed to communicate with the drive when backup was being made or restored. Drive software has not been able to read the rating ID of the drive.
Output current has exceeded internal fault limit. In addition to an actual overcurrent situation, this fault may also be caused by an earth fault or supply phase loss.
Short-circuit in motor cable(s) or motor
Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature. This fault protects the IGBT(s) and can be activated by a short circuit in the motor cable. Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating due to missing input power line phase or blown fuse.
Request backup or restore again.
Reset the fault to make the drive try to reread the rating ID. If the fault reappears, cycle the power to the drive. You may have to be repeat this. If the fault persists, contact your local ABB representative.
Check motor load. Check acceleration times in parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp (speed control) or 28 Frequency reference chain (frequency control). Also check parameters 46.01 Speed scaling, 46.02 Frequency scaling and 46.03 Torque scaling. Check motor and motor cable (including phasing and delta/star connection). Check there are no contactors opening and closing in motor cable. Check that the start-up data in parameter group 99 corresponds to the motor rating plate. Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Check for an earth fault in motor or motor cables by measuring the insulation resistances of motor and motor cable. See chapter Electrical installation, section Checking the insulation of the assembly in the Hardware manual of the drive.
Check motor and motor cable for cabling errors. Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable. Cycle the power to the drive.
Check motor cable. Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against drive power.
Check input power line fuses. Check for loose power cable connections. Check for input power supply imbalance.
Fault tracing 465
Code (hex) 3181 3210
3220 3381 4110 4210 4290
42F1 4310
Fault / Aux. code Wiring or earth fault Programmable fault: 31.23 Wiring or earth fault DC link overvoltage
DC link undervoltage
Output phase loss Programmable fault: 31.19 Motor phase loss Control board temperature IGBT overtemperature Cooling
IGBT temperature Excess temperature
Cause Incorrect input power and motor cable connection (ie. input power cable is connected to drive motor connection). Excessive intermediate circuit DC voltage.
Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient because of a missing supply phase, blown fuse or fault in the rectifier bridge. Motor circuit fault due to missing motor connection (all three phases are not connected). Control unit temperature is too high. Estimated drive IGBT temperature is excessive.
Drive module temperature is excessive.
Drive IGBT temperature is excessive.
Power unit module temperature is excessive.
What to do
Check input power connections.
Check that overvoltage control is on (parameter 30.30 Overvoltage control). Check that the supply voltage matches the nominal input voltage of the drive. Check the supply line for static or transient overvoltage. Check brake chopper and resistor (if present). Check deceleration time. Use coast-to-stop function (if applicable). Retrofit drive with brake chopper and brake resistor. Check that the brake resistor is dimensioned properly and the resistance is between acceptable range for the drive.
Check supply cabling, fuses and switchgear.
Connect motor cable.
Check proper cooling of the drive. Check the auxiliary cooling fan.
Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against drive power.
Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds 40 �C/104 �F or if it exceeds 50 �C /122 �F, ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive. For all P55 frames, check the derating temperatures. See chapter Technical data, section Derating in the Hardware manual of the drive. Check drive module cooling air flow and fan operation. Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of drive module for dust pick-up. Clean whenever necessary.
Check ambient conditions. Check air flow and fan operation. Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up. Check motor power against drive power.
See A4B0 Excess temperature (page 456).
466 Fault tracing
Code (hex) 4380 4981
4982
5090 5091
5092 5093
5094 5089
5098 50A0 5682 5691 5692 5693
Fault / Aux. code Excess temperature difference External temperature 1 (Editable message text)
External temperature 2 (Editable message text)
STO hardware failure Safe torque off Programmable fault: 31.22 STO indication run/stop
PU logic error Rating ID mismatch
Measurement circuit temperature SMT circuit malfunction
I/O communication loss Fan Power unit lost
Measurement circuit ADC PU board powerfail Measurement circuit DFF
Cause
High temperature difference between the IGBTs of different phases. Measured temperature 1 has exceeded fault limit.
Measured temperature 2 has exceeded fault limit.
STO hardware diagnostics has detected hardware failure. Safe torque off function is active, ie. safety circuit signal(s) connected to connector STO is broken during start or run.
Power unit memory has cleared. The hardware of the drive does not match the information stored in the memory. This may occur e.g. after a firmware update. Problem with internal temperature measurement of the drive. Safe motor temperature fault is generated and STO event/fault/warning is not generated. Note: If only one STO channel is opened, fault 5090 STO hardware failure is generated. Communication failure to standard I/O. Cooling fan stuck or disconnected.
Connection between the drive control unit and the power unit is lost. Measurement circuit fault.
Power unit power supply failure. Measurement circuit fault.
What to do
Check the motor cabling. Check cooling of drive module(s).
Check the value of parameter 35.02 Measured temperature 1. Check the cooling of the motor (or other equipment whose temperature is being measured). Check the value of parameter 35.03 Measured temperature 2. Check the cooling of the motor (or other equipment whose temperature is being measured). Contact your local ABB representative for hardware replacement. Check safety circuit connections. For more information, see chapter The Safe torque off function in the Hardware manual of the drive and description of parameter 31.22 STO indication run/stop (page 295). Check the value of parameter 95.04 Control board supply. Contact your local ABB representative.
Cycle the power to the drive. You may have to be repeat this.
Contact your local ABB representative.
Check connection between the relay output of the module and the STO terminal.
Try resetting the fault or cycle the power to the drive. Check fan operation and connection. Replace fan if faulty. Check the connection between the control unit and the power unit.
Contact your local ABB representative.
Contact your local ABB representative.
Contact your local ABB representative.
Fault tracing 467
Code (hex) 5697 5698 6181
6306 6481
6487
64A1
64A4 64A6
Fault / Aux. code Charging feedback Unknown PU fault
FPGA version incompatible
Cause
Charging feedback signal missing.
The power unit logic has generated a fault which is not known by the software.
Firmware and FPGA versions are incompatible.
FBA A mapping file Task overload
Fieldbus adapter A mapping file read error.
Internal fault.
Stack overflow
Internal fault.
Internal file load
File read error.
Rating ID fault Adaptive program
Rating ID load error.
Error running the adaptive program.
000A Program corrupted or block non-existent
000C Required block input missing 000E Program corrupted or block
non-existent 0011 Program too large. 0012 Program is empty.
001C A non-existing parameter or block is used in the program.
001D Parameter type invalid for selected pin.
001E Output to parameter failed because the parameter was write-protected.
0023 Program file incompatible with 0024 current firmware version.
What to do
Check the feedback signal coming from the charging system
Check the logic and software compatibility.
Reboot the control unit (using parameter 96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling power. If the problem persists, contact your local ABB representative
Contact your local ABB representative.
Reboot the control unit (using parameter 96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling power. If the problem persists, contact your local ABB representative
Reboot the control unit (using parameter 96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling power. If the problem persists, contact your local ABB representative
Reboot the control unit (using parameter 96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling power. If the problem persists, contact your local ABB representative
Contact your local ABB representative.
Check the auxiliary code (format XXYY ZZZZ). "XX" specifies the number of the state (00=base program) and "YY" specifies the number of the function block (0000=generic error). "ZZZZ" indicates the problem.
Restore the template program or download the program to the drive.
Check the inputs of the block.
Restore the template program or download the program to the drive.
Remove blocks until the error stops.
Correct the program and download it to the drive.
Edit the program to correct the parameter reference, or to use an existing block.
Edit the program to correct the parameter reference.
Check the parameter reference in the program. Check for other sources affecting the target parameter.
Adapt the program to current block library and firmware version.
468 Fault tracing
Code (hex) 64B1 64B2
64B3 64E1 64B1
6581 6591
65A1 6681
6682 6683
Fault / Aux. code
Cause
What to do
Other �
Contact your local ABB representative, quoting the auxiliary code.
Internal SSW fault
Internal fault.
Reboot the control unit (using parameter 96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling
power. If the problem persists, contact your local ABB representative.
User set fault
Loading of user parameter set failed because
� requested set does not exist
� set is not compatible with control program
� drive was switched off during loading.
Ensure that a valid user parameter set exists. Reload if uncertain.
Macro parameterization error
Macro parameterization failed, eg. because parameter default value that cannot be changed
has been attempted to write.
Kernel overload
Operating system error.
Reboot the control unit (using parameter 96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling power. If the problem persists, contact
your local ABB representative.
Fault reset
A fault has been reset. The cause of the fault no longer exists and the fault reset has
been requested and completed.
Informative fault.
Parameter system
Parameter load or save failed. Try forcing a save using parameter 96.07 Parameter save manually. Retry.
Backup/Restore timeout
During backup creating or
restoring operation a panel or PC-tool has failed to communicate with the drive as
part this operation.
Check panel or PC-tool communication and if it is still in backup or restore state.
FBA A parameter conflict
The drive does not have a functionality requested by PLC, or requested functionality
has not been activated.
Check PLC programming.
Check settings of parameter groups 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) and 51 FBA A settings.
EFB comm loss
Programmable fault: 58.14 Communication loss action
Communication break in embedded fieldbus (EFB) communication.
Check the status of the fieldbus master (online/offline/error etc.).
Check cable connections to the EIA-485/X5 terminals 29, 30 and 31 on the control unit.
EFB config file
Embedded fieldbus (EFB)
configuration file could not be read.
Contact your local ABB representative.
EFB invalid parameterization
Embedded fieldbus (EFB) parameter settings
inconsistent or not compatible with selected protocol.
Check the settings in parameter group 58 Embedded fieldbus.
Fault tracing 469
Code (hex) 6684
6685 6686 6882 6885 7081
7085 7086
7121
7122
7183
Fault / Aux. code EFB load fault
EFB fault 2 EFB fault 3
Text 32-bit table overflow Text file overflow Control panel loss Programmable fault: 49.05 Communication loss action
Incompatible option module I/O module AI Overvoltage
Motor stall Programmable fault: 31.24 Stall function
Motor overload
BR excess temperature
Cause
Embedded fieldbus (EFB) protocol firmware could not be loaded. Version mismatch between EFB protocol firmware and drive firmware. Fault reserved for the EFB protocol application. Fault reserved for the EFB protocol application. Internal fault.
Internal fault.
Control panel or PC tool selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating.
Fieldbus option module not supported. Overvoltage detected in AI. AI is changed to voltage mode. AI will return automatically back to mA mode when the AI signal level is in accepted limits. Motor is operating in stall region because of e.g. excessive load or insufficient motor power. Motor current is too high.
Brake resistor temperature has exceeded fault limit defined by parameter 43.11 Brake resistor fault limit.
What to do
Contact your local ABB representative.
Check the documentation of the protocol.
Check the documentation of the protocol.
Reset the fault. Contact your local ABB representative if the fault persists. Reset the fault. Contact your local ABB representative if the fault persists. Check PC tool or control panel connection. Check control panel connector. Disconnect and reconnect the control panel. Replace the module with a supported type. Check AI signal levels.
Check motor load and drive ratings. Check fault function parameters.
Check for overloaded motor. Adjust the parameters used for the motor overload function (35.51...35.53) and 35.55...35.56. Stop drive. Let resistor cool down. Check resistor overload protection function settings (parameter group 43 Brake chopper). Check fault limit setting, parameter 43.11 Brake resistor fault limit. Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits.
470 Fault tracing
Code (hex) 7192
7310 73B0 73F0
7510
8001 8002
Fault / Aux. code
BC IGBT excess temperature
Cause
Brake chopper IGBT temperature has exceeded internal fault limit.
Overspeed
Emergency ramp failed
Motor is turning faster than highest allowed speed due to incorrectly set minimum/maximum speed, insufficient braking torque or changes in load when using torque reference.
Emergency stop did not finish within expected time.
Overfrequency
Maximum allowed output frequency exceeded.
0xFA
Motor is turning faster than the
highest allowed frequency due to incorrectly set minimum/maximum frequency
or the motor rushes because of too high supply voltage or incorrect supply voltage
selection in parameter 95.01 Supply voltage.
Other -
FBA A communication
Programmable fault: 50.02 FBA A comm loss func
Cyclical communication
between drive and fieldbus adapter module A or between PLC and fieldbus adapter
module A is lost.
ULC underload fault ULC overload fault
User load curve: Signal has been too long under the underload curve.
User load curve: Signal has been too long over the overload curve.
What to do
Let chopper cool down. Check for excessive ambient temperature. Check for cooling fan failure. Check for obstructions in the air flow. Check resistor overload protection function settings (parameter group 43 Brake chopper). Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits. Check that drive supply AC voltage is not excessive.
Check minimum/maximum speed settings, parameters 30.11 Minimum speed and 30.12 Maximum speed. Check adequacy of motor braking torque. Check need for brake chopper and resistor(s).
Check the predefined ramp times (23.11...23.15 for mode Off1, 23.23 for mode Off3).
Check the auxiliary code.
Check minimum/maximum frequency settings, parameters 30.13 Minimum frequency and 30.14 Maximum frequency. Check used supply voltage and voltage selection parameter 95.01 Supply voltage.
Contact your local ABB representative, quoting the auxiliary code.
Check status of fieldbus communication. See user documentation of fieldbus interface. Check settings of parameter groups 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA), 51 FBA A settings, 52 FBA A data in and 53 FBA A data out. Check cable connections. Check if communication master is able to communicate.
See parameter 37.04 ULC underload actions.
See parameter 37.03 ULC overload actions.
Fault tracing 471
Code (hex) 80A0
80B0 80B1 80B2 80B3 80B4 80B5 9081
9082
9083
Fault / Aux. code
AI supervision Programmable fault: 12.03 AI supervision function
Cause
An analog signal is outside the limits specified for the analog input.
0001 AI1LessMIN
0002 AI1GreaterMAX
0003 AI2LessMIN.
0004 AI2GreaterMAX
Signal supervision 1
(Editable message text) Programmable fault: 32.06 Supervision 1 action
Fault generated by the signal supervision function 1.
Signal supervision 2
(Editable message text) Programmable fault: 32.16 Supervision 2 action
Fault generated by the signal supervision function 2.
Signal supervision 3
(Editable message text) Programmable fault: 32.26 Supervision 3 action
Fault generated by the signal supervision function 3.
Signal supervision 4
(Editable message text) Programmable fault: 32.36 Supervision 4 action
Fault generated by the signal supervision function 4.
Signal supervision 5
(Editable message text) Programmable fault: 32.46 Supervision 5 action
Fault generated by the signal supervision function 5.
Signal supervision 6
(Editable message text) Programmable fault: 32.56 Supervision 6 action
Fault generated by the signal supervision function 6.
External fault 1
(Editable message text) Programmable fault: 31.01 External event 1 source 31.02 External event 1 type
Fault in external device 1.
External fault 2
(Editable message text) Programmable fault: 31.03 External event 2 source 31.04 External event 2 type
Fault in external device 2.
External fault 3
(Editable message text) Programmable fault: 31.05 External event 3 source 31.06 External event 3 type
Fault in external device 3.
What to do Check signal level at the analog input. Check the auxiliary code. Check the wiring connected to the input. Check the minimum and maximum limits of the input in parameter group 12 Standard AI.
Check the source of the fault (parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal).
Check the source of the fault (parameter 32.17 Supervision 2 signal).
Check the source of the fault (parameter 32.27 Supervision 3 signal).
Check the source of the fault (parameter 32.37 Supervision 4 signal).
Check the source of the fault (parameter 32.47 Supervision 5 signal).
Check the source of the fault (parameter 32.57 Supervision 6 signal).
Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.01 External event 1 source.
Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.03 External event 2 source.
Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.05 External event 3 source.
472 Fault tracing
Code (hex) 9084
9085
FA81 FA82
FF61
Fault / Aux. code
Cause
External fault 4
(Editable message text) Programmable fault: 31.07 External event 4 source 31.08 External event 4 type
Fault in external device 4.
External fault 5
(Editable message text) Programmable fault: 31.09 External event 5 source 31.10 External event 5 type
Fault in external device 5.
Safe torque off 1
Safe torque off function is active, ie. STO circuit 1 is broken.
Safe torque off 2
Safe torque off function is
active, ie. STO circuit 2 is broken.
ID run
Motor ID run was not completed successfully.
0001 Maximum current limit too low.
0002 Maximum speed limit or calculated field weakening point too low.
0003 Maximum torque limit too low.
What to do
Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.07 External event 4 source.
Check the external device. Check setting of parameter 31.09 External event 5 source.
Check safety circuit connections. For more information, see chapter The Safe torque off function in the Hardware manual of the drive and description of parameter 31.22 STO indication run/stop (page 295). Check the value of parameter 95.04 Control board supply.
Check the nominal motor values in parameter group 99 Motor data. Check that no external control system is connected to the drive. Cycle the power to the drive (and its control unit, if powered separately). Check that no operation limits prevent the completion of the ID run. Restore parameters to default settings and try again. Check that the motor shaft is not locked. Check the auxiliary code. The second number of the code indicates the problem (see actions for each code below).
Check settings of parameters 99.06 Motor nominal current and 30.17 Maximum current. Make sure that 30.17 > 99.06. Check that the drive is dimensioned correctly according to the motor.
Check settings of parameters � 30.11 Minimum speed � 30.12 Maximum speed � 99.07 Motor nominal voltage � 99.08 Motor nominal frequency � 99.09 Motor nominal speed. Make sure that � 30.12 > (0.55 � 99.09) >
(0.50 � synchronous speed) � 30.11 < 0, and � supply voltage > (0.66 � 99.07).
Check settings of parameter 99.12 Motor nominal torque, and the torque limits in group 30 Limits. Make sure that the maximum torque limit in force is greater than 100%.
Fault tracing 473
Code (hex)
FF63 FF81 FF8E
Fault / Aux. code
Cause
0004 Current measurement calibration did not finish within reasonable time
0005...0008 Internal error.
0009 (Asynchronous motors only) Acceleration did not finish within reasonable time.
000A (Asynchronous motors only) Deceleration did not finish within reasonable time.
000B (Asynchronous motors only) Speed dropped to zero during ID run.
000C (Permanent magnet motors only) First acceleration did not finish within reasonable time.
000D (Permanent magnet motors only) Second acceleration did not finish within reasonable time.
000E...0010 Internal error.
0011 (Synchronous reluctance motors only) Pulse test error.
0012 Motor too large for advanced standstill ID run.
0013 (Asynchronous motors only) Motor data error.
STO diagnostics failure. FB A force trip
EFB force trip
SW internal malfunction.
A fault trip command has been received through fieldbus adapter A. A fault trip command has been received through the embedded fieldbus interface.
What to do Contact your local ABB representative.
Contact your local ABB representative. Contact your local ABB representative.
Contact your local ABB representative.
Contact your local ABB representative.
Contact your local ABB representative.
Contact your local ABB representative.
Contact your local ABB representative. Contact your local ABB representative.
Check that the motor and drive sizes are compatible. Contact your local ABB representative. Check that the motor nominal value settings in the drive are the same as in the motor nameplate. Contact your local ABB representative. Reboot the control unit (using parameter 96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling power. Check the fault information provided by the PLC.
Check the fault information provided by the PLC.
474 Fault tracing
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 475
10
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
What this chapter contains
The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network (fieldbus) using the embedded fieldbus interface.
System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system through a communication link using either a fieldbus adapter or the embedded fieldbus interface. The embedded fieldbus interface supports the Modbus RTU protocol. The drive control program can handle 10 Modbus registers in a 10-millisecond time level. For example, if the drive receives a request to read 20 registers, it will start its response within 22 ms of receiving the request � 20 ms for processing the request and 2 ms overhead for handling the bus. The actual response time depends on other factors as well, such as the baud rate (a parameter setting in the drive). The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface, or the control can be distributed between the embedded fieldbus interface and other available sources, for example, digital and analog inputs.
476 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Connecting EIA-485 Modbus RTU terminal to the drive
Connect the fieldbus to the EIA-485 Modbus RTU terminal on the RIIO-01 module which is attached on the control unit of the drive. The connection diagram is shown below.
Data flow Control Word (CW)
References
Status Word (SW) Actual values
Parameter R/W requests/responses
Fieldbus controller Termination ON1) Fieldbus
Process I/O (cyclic)
Service messages (acyclic)
B+ ADGND B+ ADGND B+ ADGND
ON
ON
ON
ON
1 1
Termination OFF
Drive
1
1
Termination OFF
...
Drive
1) The device at both ends on the fieldbus must have termination set to ON.
ON ON
1 1
Termination ON Drive
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 477
Connecting the drive to the fieldbus
Connect terminal block on the control unit of the drive to the fieldbus. The connection diagram is shown below. Use preferably three conductors and a shield for the connection.
Drive control unit
1) ON
TERM
SCR shield (Screen)
B + Positive A - Negative DGND
Shield 2) 1) If the device is at the end of the fieldbus, set switch
termination to ON. 2) Tie shield conductors together at the drive � Do
NOT terminate at SCR. 3) Terminate shield ONLY at the "Ground" terminal in
the automation controller. 4) Terminate DGND conductor at the "Signal ground
reference" terminal in the automation controller.
Ground 3) Reference 4)
GR -+
RS485 controller
478 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Setting up the embedded fieldbus interface
Set the drive up for the embedded fieldbus communication with the parameters shown in the table below. The Setting for fieldbus control column gives either the value to use or the default value. The Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter.
Parameter
Setting for fieldbus control
Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION 58.01 Protocol enable Modbus RTU
Initializes embedded fieldbus communication.
EMBEDDED MODBUS CONFIGURATION
58.03 Node address 1 (default)
Node address. There must be no two nodes with the same node address online.
58.04 Baud rate
19.2 kbps (default) Defines the communication speed of the link. Use the same setting as in the master station.
58.05 Parity
8 EVEN 1 (default) Selects the parity and stop bit setting. Use the same setting as in the master station.
58.14 Communication Fault (default) loss action
Defines the action taken when a communication loss is detected.
58.15 Communication Cw / Ref1 / Ref2
loss mode
(default)
Enables/disables communication loss monitoring and defines the means for
resetting the counter of the communication loss delay.
58.16 Communication 3.0 s (default) loss time
Defines the timeout limit for the communication monitoring.
58.17 Transmit delay 0 ms (default)
Defines a response delay for the drive.
58.25 Control profile
ABB Drives (default)
Selects the control profile used by the drive.
See section Basics of the embedded fieldbus interface (page 481).
58.26 EFB ref1 type 58.27 EFB ref2 type
Speed or
frequency (default for 58.26),
Transparent, General,Torque
(default for 58.27), Speed, Frequency
Defines the types of fieldbus references 1 and
2. The scaling for each reference type is defined by parameters 46.01...46.03. With
the Speed or frequency setting, the type is selected automatically according to the
currently active drive control mode.
58.28 EFB act1 type 58.29 EFB act2 type
Speed or
frequency (default for 58.28),
Transparent (default for 58.29),
General, Speed, Frequency
Defines the types of actual values 1 and 2.
The scaling for each actual value type is defined by parameters 46.01...46.03. With
the Speed or frequency setting, the type is selected automatically according to the
currently active drive control mode.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 479
Parameter
58.31 58.32
58.33
EFB act1 transparent source
EFB act2 transparent source
Addressing mode
58.34 Word order
58.101 Data I/O 1
...
...
58.114 Data I/O 14
58.06 Communication control
Setting for fieldbus control
Other
Function/Information
Defines the source of actual values 1 and 2 when the 58.26 EFB ref1 type (58.27 EFB ref2 type) is set to Transparent.
Mode 0 (default)
Defines the mapping between parameters and holding registers in the 400001...465536
(100...65535) Modbus register range.
LO-HI (default)
Defines the order of the data words in the Modbus message frame.
For example, the default settings
(I/Os 1...6 contain the control word,
the status word, two references and
two actual values)
Defines the address of the drive parameter which the Modbus master accesses when it
reads from or writes to the register address corresponding to Modbus In/Out parameters.
Select the parameters that you want to read or write through the Modbus I/O words.
RO/DIO control word, AO1 data
storage, AO2 data storage, Feedback
data storage, Setpoint data
storage
These settings write the incoming data into storage parameters 10.99 RO/DIO control
word, 13.91 AO1 data storage, 13.92 AO2 data storage, 40.91 Feedback data storage or
40.92 Setpoint data storage.
Refresh settings
Validates the settings of the configuration parameters.
The new settings will take effect when the drive is powered up the next time, or when they are validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
Setting the drive control parameters
After the embedded fieldbus interface has been set up, check and adjust the drive control parameters listed in the table below. The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value or values to use when the embedded fieldbus signal is the desired source or destination for that particular drive control signal. The Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter.
Parameter
Setting for fieldbus control
Function/Information
CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION
20.01 Ext1 commands
Embedded fieldbus
Selects fieldbus as the source for the start and stop commands when EXT1 is selected
as the active control location.
480 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Parameter
Setting for fieldbus control
Function/Information
20.06 Ext2 commands
Embedded fieldbus
Selects fieldbus as the source for the start
and stop commands when EXT2 is selected as the active control location.
SPEED REFERENCE SELECTION 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 EFB ref1
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1 EFB ref1
Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as speed reference 1.
Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as speed reference 2.
TORQUE REFERENCE SELECTION
26.11 Torque ref1 source
EFB ref1
26.12 Torque ref2 source
EFB ref1
Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as torque reference 1.
Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as torque reference 2.
FREQUENCY REFERENCE SELECTION 28.11 Ext1 frequency EFB ref1 ref1
28.15 Ext2 frequency EFB ref1 ref1
Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as frequency reference 1.
Selects a reference received through the embedded fieldbus interface as frequency reference 2.
OTHER SELECTIONS
EFB references can be selected as the source at virtually any signal selector parameter by selecting Other, then either 03.09 EFB reference 1 or 03.10 EFB reference 2.
SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS
96.07 Parameter save Save (reverts to
manually
Done)
Saves parameter value changes (including
those made through fieldbus control) to permanent memory.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 481
Basics of the embedded fieldbus interface
The cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16-bit data words or 32-bit data words.
The diagram below illustrates the operation of the embedded fieldbus interface. The signals transferred in the cyclic communication are explained further below the diagram.
Fieldbus network Cyclic communication
EFB profile
1)
EXT1/2 Start commands
CW REF1 REF2
SW ACT1 ACT2
SEL
2)
0 1
2
3
58.25
SEL
2)
0 1
2
3
58.25
I/O 1 I/O 2 I/O 3 ... I/O 69
Data I/O selection
EFB CW 03.09 EFB reference
1 03.10 EFB reference
2 EFB SW Actual 1 Actual 2
Par. 01.01...255.255
58....101 58.114
20.01 20.06 Reference selection
Groups 22/26/28/40 etc.
Reference selection
Groups 22/26/28/40 etc.
Acyclic communication
Parameter table
1. See also other parameters which can be controlled through fieldbus.
2. Data conversion if parameter 58.25 Control profile is set to ABB Drives. See section About the control profiles (page 484).
482 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Control word and Status word
The Control Word (CW) is a 16-bit or 32-bit packed boolean word. It is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. The CW is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. With drive parameters, the user selects the EFB CW as the source of drive control commands (such as start/stop, emergency stop, selection between external control locations 1/2, or fault reset). The drive switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the CW.
The fieldbus CW is either written to the drive as it is or the data is converted. See section About the control profiles (page 484).
The fieldbus Status Word (SW) is a 16-bit or 32-bit packed boolean word. It contains status information from the drive to the fieldbus controller. The drive SW is either written to the fieldbus SW as it is or the data is converted. See section About the control profiles (page 484).
References
EFB references 1 and 2 are 16-bit or 32-bit signed integers. The contents of each reference word can be used as the source of virtually any signal, such as the speed, frequency, torque or process reference. In embedded fieldbus communication, references 1 and 2 are displayed by 03.09 EFB reference 1 and 03.10 EFB reference 2 respectively. Whether the references are scaled or not depends on the settings of 58.26 EFB ref1 type and 58.27 EFB ref2 type. See section About the control profiles (page 484).
Actual values
Fieldbus actual signals (ACT1 and ACT2) are 16-bit or 32-bit signed integers. They convey selected drive parameter values from the drive to the master. Whether the actual values are scaled or not depends on the settings of 58.28 EFB act1 type and 58.29 EFB act2 type. See section About the control profiles (page 484).
Data input/outputs
Data input/outputs are 16-bit or 32-bit words containing selected drive parameter values. Parameters 58.101 Data I/O 1 ... 58.114 Data I/O 14 define the addresses from which the master either reads data (input) or to which it writes data (output).
Register addressing
The address field of Modbus requests for accessing holding registers is 16 bits. This allows the Modbus protocol to support addressing of 65536 holding registers.
Historically, Modbus master devices used 5-digit decimal addresses from 40001 to 49999 to represent holding register addresses. The 5-digit decimal addressing limited to 9999 the number of holding registers that could be addressed.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 483
Modern Modbus master devices typically provide a means to access the full range of 65536 Modbus holding registers. One of these methods is to use 6-digit decimal addresses from 400001 to 465536. This manual uses 6-digit decimal addressing to represent Modbus holding register addresses.
Modbus master devices that are limited to the 5-digit decimal addressing may still access registers 400001 to 409999 by using 5-digit decimal addresses 40001 to 49999. Registers 410000-465536 are inaccessible to these masters.
See parameter 58.33 Addressing mode.
Note: Register addresses of 32-bit parameters cannot be accessed by using 5-digit register numbers.
484 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
About the control profiles
A control profile defines the rules for data transfer between the drive and the fieldbus master, for example: � if packed boolean words are converted and how � if signal values are scaled and how � how drive register addresses are mapped for the fieldbus master.
You can configure the drive to receive and send messages according to one of the two profiles: � ABB Drives � DCU Profile.
For the ABB Drives profile, the embedded fieldbus interface of the drive converts the fieldbus data to and from the native data used in the drive. The DCU Profile involves no data conversion or scaling. The figure below illustrates the effect of the profile selection.
Fieldbus
Data conversion &
scaling
58.26...58.29
Profile selection
SEL
0 5 58.25
Control profile selection with parameter 58.25 Control profile is:
� (0) ABB Drives � (5) DCU Profile.
Drive
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 485
Control Word
Control Word for the ABB Drives profile
The table below shows the contents of the fieldbus Control Word for the ABB Drives control profile. The embedded fieldbus interface converts this word to the form in which it is used in the drive. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profile on page 492.
Bit Name 0 OFF1_
CONTROL
1 OFF2_ CONTROL
2 OFF3_ CONTROL
3 INHIBIT_ OPERATION
4 RAMP_OUT_ ZERO
5 RAMP_HOLD
6 RAMP_IN_ ZERO
Value 1 0
1 0
1 0
1
0 1 0 1 0 1
0
STATE/Description
Proceed to READY TO OPERATE.
Stop along currently active deceleration ramp. Proceed to OFF1 ACTIVE; proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.
Continue operation (OFF2 inactive).
Emergency OFF, coast to stop. Proceed to OFF2 ACTIVE, proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
Continue operation (OFF3 inactive).
Emergency stop, stop within time defined by drive parameter. Proceed to OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED. Warning: Ensure that the motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode.
Proceed to OPERATION ENABLED. Note: Run enable signal must be active; see the drive documentation. If the drive is set to receive the Run enable signal from the fieldbus, this bit activates the signal. See also parameter 06.18 Start inhibit status word (page 193).
Inhibit operation. Proceed to OPERATION INHIBITED.
Normal operation. Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: OUTPUT ENABLED.
Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero. Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).
ramp function. Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR ENABLED.
Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
Normal operation. Proceed to OPERATING. Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.
486 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Bit Name
7
RESET
8
JOGGING_1
9
JOGGING_2
10 REMOTE_ CMD
11 EXT_CTRL_ LOC
12 USER_0 13 USER_1 14 USER_2 15 USER_3
Value 0=>1
0 1
0 1
0 1 0
1
0
STATE/Description
Fault reset if an active fault exists. Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED. Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
Continue normal operation.
Request running at Jogging 1 speed. Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
Continue normal operation.
Request running at Jogging 2 speed. Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
Continue normal operation.
Fieldbus control d.
Control Word <> 0 or Reference <> 0: Retain last Control Word and Reference. Control Word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus control d. Reference and deceleration/acceleration ramp are locked.
Select External Control Location EXT2. Effective if the control location is parameterized to be selected from the fieldbus.
Select External Control Location EXT1. Effective if the control location is parameterized to be selected from the fieldbus.
Writable control bits that can be combined with drive logic for application-specific functionality.
Control Word for the DCU Profile
The embedded fieldbus interface writes the fieldbus Control Word as is to the drive Control Word bits 0 to 15. Bits 16 to 32 of the drive Control Word are not in use.
Bit Name
0
STOP
1
START
Value 1
0 1 0
State/Description Stop according to the Stop Mode parameter or the stop mode request bits (bits 7...9). (no op) Start the drive. (no op)
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 487
Bit Name
Value State/Description
2 REVERSE
1
Reverse direction of motor rotation.
0
Direction of motor rotation depends on the sign of
reference:
Positive reference: Forward
Negative reference: Reverse.
3 Reserved
4 RESET
0=>1 Fault reset if an active fault exists.
0
(no op)
5 EXT2
1
Select External control location EXT2. Effective if the
control location is parameterized to be selected from the
fieldbus.
0
Select External control location EXT1. Effective if the
control location is parameterized to be selected from the
fieldbus.
6 RUN_DISABLE 1
Run disable. If the drive is set to receive the run enable signal from the fieldbus, this bit deactivates the signal.
0
Run enable. If the drive is set to receive the run enable
signal from the fieldbus, this bit activates the signal.
7 STOPMODE_RA 1
MP
0
Normal ramp stop mode
(no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 7...9 are all 0.
8 STOPMODE_EM 1
ERGENCY_RAM P
0
Emergency ramp stop mode. (no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 7...9 are all 0.
9 STOPMODE_CO 1
AST
0
Coast stop mode. (no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 7...9 are all 0.
10 RAMP_PAIR _2 1
Select ramp set 2 (Acceleration time 2 / Deceleration time 2) when parameter 23.11 Ramp set selection is set to EFB DCU CW bit 10.
0
Select ramp set 1 (Acceleration time 1 / Deceleration time
1) when parameter 23.11 Ramp set selection is set to
EFB DCU CW bit 10.
11 RAMP_OUT_ZER 1 O
Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero. Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).
0
Normal operation.
12 RAMP_HOLD
1
Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
0
Normal operation.
13 RAMP_IN_ZERO 1
Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.
0
Normal operation.
14 REQ_LOCAL_LO 1 CK
Drive does not switch to local control mode (see parameter 19.17 Local control disable).
0
Drive can switch between local and remote control
modes.
488 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Bit Name 15 TORQ_LIM_PAIR
_2
16 FB_LOCAL_CTL
17 FB_LOCAL_REF
18 Reserved for RUN_DISABLE_1
19 Reserved 20 Reserved 21 Reserved 22 USER_0 23 USER_1 24 USER_2 25 USER_3 26... Reserved 31
Value 1
0
1 0 1 0
State/Description Select torque limit set 2 (Minimum torque 2 / Maximum torque 2) when parameter 30.18 Torq lim sel is set to EFB. Select torque limit set 1 (Minimum torque 1 / Maximum torque 1) when parameter 30.18 Torq lim sel is set to EFB. Local mode for control from the fieldbus is requested. Steal control from the active source. (no op) Local mode for reference from the fieldbus is requested. Steal reference from the active source. (no op) Not yet implemented.
Writable control bits that can be combined with drive logic for application-specific functionality.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 489
Status Word
Status Word for the ABB Drives profile
The table below shows the fieldbus Status Word for the ABB Drives control profile. The embedded fieldbus interface converts the drive Status Word into this form for the fieldbus. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profile on page 492.
Bit
Name
Value STATE/Description
0
RDY_ON
1
READY TO SWITCH ON.
0
NOT READY TO SWITCH ON.
1
RDY_RUN
1
READY TO OPERATE.
0
OFF1 ACTIVE.
2
RDY_REF
1
OPERATION ENABLED.
0
OPERATION INHIBITED.
See also parameter 06.18 Start inhibit status word (page 193).
3
TRIPPED
1
FAULT.
0
No fault.
4
OFF_2_STATUS 1
OFF2 inactive.
0
OFF2 ACTIVE.
5
OFF_3_STATUS 1
OFF3 inactive.
0
OFF3 ACTIVE.
6
SWC_ON_
1
INHIB
0
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED. �
7
ALARM
1
Warning/Alarm.
0
No warning/alarm.
8
AT_
1
SETPOINT
OPERATING. Actual value equals Reference (is within
tolerance limits, e.g. in speed control, speed error is 10% max. of nominal motor speed).
0
Actual value differs from Reference (is outside
tolerance limits).
9
REMOTE
1
Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2).
0
Drive control location: LOCAL.
10
ABOVE_
LIMIT
1
Actual frequency or speed equals or exceeds
supervision limit (set by drive parameter). Valid in both
directions of rotation.
0
Actual frequency or speed within supervision limit.
11
USER_0
12
USER_1
Status bits that can be combined with drive logic for application-specific functionality.
13
USER_2
14
USER_3
490 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Bit
Name
15
Reserved
Value STATE/Description
Status Word for the DCU Profile
The embedded fieldbus interface writes the drive Status Word bits 0 to 15 to the fieldbus Status Word as is. Bits 16 to 32 of the drive Status Word are not in use.
Bit
Name
Value State/Description
0
READY
1
Drive is ready to receive the start command.
0
Drive is not ready.
1
ENABLED
1
External run enable signal is active.
0
External run enable signal is not active.
2
STARTED
1
Drive has received start command.
0
Drive has not received start command.
3
RUNNING
1
Drive is modulating.
0
Drive is not modulating.
4
ZERO_SPEED 1
Drive is at zero speed.
0
Drive is not at zero speed.
5
ACCELERATING 1
Drive speed is increasing.
0
Drive speed is not increasing.
6
DECELERATING 1
Drive speed is decreasing.
0
Drive speed is not decreasing.
7
AT_SETPOINT 1
Drive is at setpoint.
0
Drive is not at setpoint.
8
LIMIT
1
Drive operation is limited.
0
Drive operation is not limited.
9
SUPERVISION 1
Actual value (speed, frequency or torque) is above a limit. Limit is set with parameters 46.31...46.33.
0
Actual value (speed, frequency or torque) is within
limits.
10
REVERSE_REF 1
Drive reference is in the reverse direction.
0
Drive reference is in the forward direction
11
REVERSE_ACT 1
Drive is running in the reverse direction
0
Drive is running in the forward direction
12
PANEL_LOCAL 1
Panel/keypad (or PC tool) is in local control mode.
0
Panel/keypad (or PC tool) is not in local control mode.
13
FIELDBUS_LOC 1
AL
0
Fieldbus is in local control mode. Fieldbus is not in local control mode.
14
EXT2_ACT
1
External control location EXT2 is active.
0
External control location EXT1 is active.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 491
Bit
Name
15
FAULT
16
ALARM
17
Reserved
18
DIRLOCK
19
LOCALLOCK
20
Reserved
21
Reserved
22
USER_0
23
USER_1
24
USER_2
25
USER_3
26
REQ_CTL
27
REQ_REF
28... 31
Reserved
Value 1 0 1 0
State/Description Drive is faulted. Drive is not faulted. Warning/Alarm is active. No warning/alarm.
1
Direction lock is ON. (Direction change is locked out.)
0
Direction lock is OFF.
1
Local mode lock is ON. (Local mode is locked out.)
0
Local mode lock is OFF.
Status bits that can be combined with drive logic for application-specific functionality.
1
Control has been granted to this channel.
0
Control has not been granted to this channel.
1
Reference has been granted to this channel.
0
Reference has not been granted to this channel.
492 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
State transition diagrams
State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profile
The diagram below shows the state transitions in the drive when the drive is using the ABB Drives profile and the drive is configured to follow the commands of the control word from the embedded fieldbus interface. The upper case texts refer to the states which are used in the tables representing the fieldbus Control and Status words. See sections Control Word for the ABB Drives profile on page 485 and Status Word for the ABB Drives profile on page 489.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 493
MAINS OFF Power ON
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED
(SW Bit6=1)
(CW Bit0=0)
ABB Drives profile
ABCD
NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
(SW Bit0=0)
(CW Bit3=0)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)
OPERATION INHIBITED
(SW Bit2=0)
operation inhibited
READY TO SWITCH ON
(SW Bit0=1)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)
CW = Control Word SW = Status Word
n = Speed I = Input Current RFG = Ramp Function
Generator f = Frequency
from any state
Fault
from any state
READY TO OPERATE
(SW Bit1=1)
FAULT
(SW Bit3=1)
OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)
OFF1 ACTIVE
(SW Bit1=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0 BCD
(CW Bit3=1 and
SW Bit12=1)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx 1111 and SW Bit12=1)
(CW Bit7=1)
from any state
from any state
Emergency Stop OFF3 (CW Bit2=0)
Emergency OFF OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
OFF3
OFF2
ACTIVE (SW Bit5=0) ACTIVE (SW Bit4=0)
(CW Bit4=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0
CD
A (CW Bit5=0)
OPERATION ENABLED
(SW Bit2=1)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111)
D
RFG: OUTPUT ENABLED
B
(CW Bit6=0)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111)
RFG: ACCELERATOR ENABLED
C (CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111)
OPERATION
(SW Bit8=1)
D
STATE condition rising edge of the bit
Start sequence: � 476h NOT READY TO SWITCH ON � If MSW bit 0 = 1 then
� 477h READY TO SWITCH ON (Stopped) � 47Fh OPERATION (Running)
494 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Stop sequence: � 477h = Stop according to 21.03 Stop mode � 47Eh = OFF1 ramp stop (Note: uninterruptable ramp stop) Fault reset: � Rising edge of MCW bit 7 Start after STO: � If 31.22 STO indication run/stop is not Fault/ Fault, check that 06.18 Start inhibit
status word, bit 7 STO = 0 before giving a start command.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 495
References
References for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile
The ABB Drives profile supports the use of two references, EFB reference 1 and EFB reference 2. The references are 16-bit words each containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer. A negative reference is formed by calculating the two's complement from the corresponding positive reference.
The references are scaled as defined by parameters 46.01...46.04; which scaling is in use depends on the setting of 58.26 EFB ref1 type and 58.27 EFB ref2 type (see page 376).
Fieldbus
Drive
20000 10000
46.01 (with speed reference) 46.02 (with frequency reference)
46.03 (with torque reference) 46.04 (with power reference)
0 -10000 -20000
0
-(46.03) (with torque reference) -(46.04) (with power reference)
-(46.01) (with speed reference) -(46.02) (with frequency reference)
The scaled references are shown by parameters 03.09 EFB reference 1 and 03.10 EFB reference 2.
496 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Actual values
Actual values for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile
The ABB Drives profile supports the use of two fieldbus actual values, ACT1 and ACT2. The actual values are 16-bit words each containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer. A negative value is formed by calculating the two's complement from the corresponding positive value.
The actual values are scaled as defined by parameters 46.01...46.04; which scaling is in use depends on the setting of parameters 58.28 EFB act1 type and 58.29 EFB act2 type (see page 376).
Fieldbus
Drive
20000 10000
0 -10000 -20000
46.01 (with speed reference) 46.02 (with frequency reference)
46.03 (with torque reference) 46.04 (with power reference)
0
-(46.03) (with torque reference) -(46.04) (with power reference)
-(46.01) (with speed reference) -(46.02) (with frequency reference)
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 497
Modbus holding register addresses
Modbus holding register addresses for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile
The table below shows the default Modbus holding register addresses for the drive data with the ABB Drives profile. This profile provides a converted 16-bit access to the drive data.
Note: Only the 16 least significant bits of the drive's 32-bit Control and Status Words can be accessed.
Note: Bits 16 through 32 of the DCU Control/Status word are not in use if 16-bit control/status word is used with the DCU Profile.
Register address 400001
400002 400003 400004
400005 400006 400007...400014 400015...400089 400090...400100 400101...465536
Register data (16-bit words)
Default: Control word (CW 16bit). See sections Control Word for the ABB Drives profile (page 485) and Control Word for the DCU Profile (page 486). The selection can be changed using parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
Default: Reference 1 (Ref1 16bit). The selection can be changed using parameter 58.102 Data I/O 2.
Default: Reference 2 (Ref2 16bit). The selection can be changed using parameter 58.102 Data I/O 2.
Default: Status Word (SW 16bit). See sections Status Word for the ABB Drives profile (page 489) and Status Word for the DCU Profile (page 490). The selection can be changed using parameter 58.102 Data I/O 2.
Default: Actual value 1 (Act1 16bit). The selection can be changed using parameter 58.105 Data I/O 5.
Actual value 2 (Act2 16bit). The selection can be changed using parameter 58.106 Data I/O 6.
Data in/out 7...14. Selected by parameters 58.107 Data I/O 7 ...58.114 Data I/O 14.
Unused
Error code access. See section Error code registers (holding registers 400090...400100) (page 504).
Parameter read/write. Parameters are mapped to register addresses according to parameter 58.33 Addressing mode.
498 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Modbus function codes
The table below shows the Modbus function codes supported by the embedded fieldbus interface.
Code 01h 02h 03h 05h 06h 08h
0Bh 0Fh 10h 16h 17h
Function name Read Coils Read Discrete Inputs Read Holding Registers Write Single Coil Write Single Register Diagnostics
Get Comm Event Counter Write Multiple Coils Write Multiple Registers Mask Write Register Read/Write Multiple Registers
Description
Reads the 0/1 status of coils (0X references).
Reads the 0/1 status of discrete inputs (1X references).
Reads the binary contents of holding registers (4X references).
Forces a single coil (0X reference) to 0 or 1.
Writes a single holding register (4X reference).
Provides a series of tests for checking the communication, or for checking various internal error conditions. Supported subcodes: � 00h Return Query Data: Echo/loopback test. � 01h Restart Comm Option: Restarts and initializes
the EFB, clears communications event counters. � 04h Force Listen Only Mode � 0Ah Clear Counters and Diagnostic Register � 0Bh Return Bus Message Count � 0Ch Return Bus Comm. Error Count � 0Dh Return Bus Exception Error Count � 0Eh Return Slave Message Count � 0Fh Return Slave No Response Count � 10h Return Slave NAK (negative acknowledge)
Count � 11h Return Slave Busy Count � 12h Return Bus Character Overrun Count � 14h Clear Overrun Counter and Flag
Returns a status word and an event count.
Forces a sequence of coils (0X references) to 0 or 1.
Writes the contents of a contiguous block of holding registers (4X references).
Modifies the contents of a 4X register using a combination of an AND mask, an OR mask, and the register's current contents.
Writes the contents of a contiguous block of 4X registers, then reads the contents of another group of registers (the same or different than those written) in a server device.
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 499
Code 2Bh / 0Eh
Function name
Encapsulated Interface Transport
Description
Supported subcodes:
� 0Eh Read Device Identification: Allows reading the identification and other information.
Supported ID codes (access type):
� 00h: Request to get the basic device identification (stream access)
� 04h: Request to get one specific identification object (individual access)
Supported Object IDs:
� 00h: Vendor Name ("ABB")
� 01h: Product Code (for example, "ASCDx") � 02h: Major Minor Revision (combination of contents
of parameters 07.05 Firmware version and 58.02 Protocol ID).
� 03h: Vendor URL ("www.abb.com")
� 04h: Product name: ("ACS480").
Exception codes
The table below shows the Modbus exception codes supported by the embedded fieldbus interface.
Code 01h 02h 03h
04h
Name ILLEGAL FUNCTION ILLEGAL ADDRESS ILLEGAL VALUE
DEVICE FAILURE
Description
The function code received in the query is not an allowable action for the server.
The data address received in the query is not an allowable address for the server.
The requested quantity of registers is larger than the device can handle. This error does not mean that a value written to the device is outside of the valid range.
An unrecoverable error occurred while the server was attempting to perform the requested action. See section Error code registers (holding registers 400090...400100) on page 504.
500 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Coils (0xxxx reference set)
Coils are 1-bit read/write values. Control Word bits are exposed with this data type. The table below summarizes the Modbus coils (0xxxx reference set). Note that the references are 1-based index which match the address transmitted on the wire.
Reference ABB Drives profile 000001 OFF1_CONTROL 000002 OFF2_CONTROL 000003 OFF3_CONTROL 000004 INHIBIT_OPERATION 000005 RAMP_OUT_ZERO 000006 RAMP_HOLD 000007 RAMP_IN_ZERO 000008 RESET 000009 JOGGING_1 000010 JOGGING_2 000011 REMOTE_CMD 000012 EXT_CTRL_LOC 000013 USER_0 000014 USER_1 000015 USER_2 000016 USER_3 000017 Reserved 000018 Reserved 000019 Reserved 000020 Reserved 000021 Reserved 000022 Reserved 000023 Reserved 000024 Reserved 000025 Reserved 000026 Reserved 000027 Reserved 000028 Reserved 000029 Reserved 000030 Reserved 000031 Reserved 000032 Reserved
DCU Profile STOP START Reserved Reserved RESET EXT2 RUN_DISABLE STOPMODE_RAMP STOPMODE_EMERGENCY_RAMP STOPMODE_COAST Reserved RAMP_OUT_ZERO RAMP_HOLD RAMP_IN_ZERO Reserved Reserved FB_LOCAL_CTL FB_LOCAL_REF Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved USER_0 USER_1 USER_2 USER_3 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 501
Reference ABB Drives profile
000033
Control for relay output RO1
(parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word, bit 0)
000034
Control for relay output RO2
(parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word, bit 1)
000035
Control for relay output RO3 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control
word, bit 2)
000036
Control for relay output RO4 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control
word, bit 3)
000037
Control for relay output RO5 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control
word, bit 4)
DCU Profile
Control for relay output RO1 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word, bit 0)
Control for relay output RO2 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word, bit 1)
Control for relay output RO3 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word, bit 2)
Control for relay output RO4 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word, bit 3)
Control for relay output RO5 (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word, bit 4)
502 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Discrete inputs (1xxxx reference set)
Discrete inputs are 1-bit read-only values. Status Word bits are exposed with this data type. The table below summarizes the Modbus discrete inputs (1xxxx reference set). Note that the references are 1-based index which match the address transmitted on the wire.
Reference ABB Drives profile 100001 RDY_ON 100002 RDY_RUN 100003 RDY_REF 100004 TRIPPED 100005 OFF_2_STATUS 100006 OFF_3_STATUS 100007 SWC_ON_INHIB 100008 ALARM 100009 AT_SETPOINT 100010 REMOTE 100011 ABOVE_LIMIT 100012 USER_0 100013 USER_1 100014 USER_2 100015 USER_3 100016 Reserved 100017 Reserved 100018 Reserved 100019 Reserved 100020 Reserved 100021 Reserved 100022 Reserved 100023 Reserved 100024 Reserved 100025 Reserved 100026 Reserved 100027 Reserved 100028 Reserved 100029 Reserved 100030 Reserved 100031 Reserved 100032 Reserved
DCU Profile READY D Reserved RUNNING ZERO_SPEED Reserved Reserved AT_SETPOINT LIMIT SUPERVISION Reserved Reserved PANEL_LOCAL FIELDBUS_LOCAL EXT2_ACT FAULT ALARM Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved USER_0 USER_1 USER_2 USER_3 REQ_CTL Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 503
Reference ABB Drives profile
100033
Delayed status of digital input
DI1 (parameter 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0)
100034
Delayed status of digital input
DI2 (parameter 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1)
100035
Delayed status of digital input DI3 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 2)
100036
Delayed status of digital input DI4 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 3)
100037
Delayed status of digital input DI5 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 4)
100038
Delayed status of digital input
DI6 (parameter 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5)
DCU Profile
Delayed status of digital input DI1 (parameter 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0)
Delayed status of digital input DI2 (parameter 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1)
Delayed status of digital input DI3 (parameter 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2)
Delayed status of digital input DI4 (parameter 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3)
Delayed status of digital input DI5 (parameter 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4)
Delayed status of digital input DI6 (parameter 10.02 DI delayed status, bit 5)
504 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)
Error code registers (holding registers 400090...400100)
These registers contain information about the last query. The error register is cleared when a query has finished successfully.
Reference Name 400090 Reset Error Registers
400091 400092
Error Function Code Error Code
400093 400094 400095
Failed Register
Last Register Written Successfully Last Register Read Successfully
Description
1 = Reset internal error registers (91...95). 0 = Do nothing.
Function code of the failed query.
Set when exception code 04h is generated (see table above). � 00h No error � 02h Low/High limit exceeded � 03h Faulty Index: Unavailable index of an array
parameter � 05h Incorrect Data Type: Value does not match the
data type of the parameter � 65h General Error: Undefined error when handling
query
The last register (discrete input, coil, input register or holding register) that failed to be read or written.
The last register (discrete input, coil, input register or holding register) that was written successfully.
The last register (discrete input, coil, input register or holding register) that was read successfully.
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 505
11
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
What this chapter contains
This chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network (fieldbus) through an optional fieldbus adapter module. The fieldbus control interface of the drive is described first, followed by a configuration example.
System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system through an optional fieldbus adapter ("fieldbus adapter A" = FBA A) mounted onto the control unit of the drive. The drive can be configured to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface, or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other available sources such as digital and analog inputs, depending on how control locations EXT1 and EXT2 are configured.
506 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Fieldbus adapters are available for various communication systems and protocols, for example � CANopen (FCAN-01 adapter) � ControlNet (FCNA-01 adapter) � DeviceNetTM (FDNA-01 adapter)
� Ethernet POWERLINK (FEPL-02 adapter)
� EtherCAT (FECA-01 adapter) � EtherNet/IPTM (FENA-21 adapter)
� Modbus/TCP (FMBT-21, FENA-21 adapter)
� PROFINET IO (FENA-21 adapter)
� PROFIBUS DP (FPBA-01 adapter)
Note: The text and examples in this chapter describe the configuration of one fieldbus adapter (FBA A) by parameters 50.01...50.18 and parameter groups 51 FBA A settings...53 FBA A data out.
Drive
Fieldbus controller
Other devices
Fieldbus
Type Fxxx fieldbus adapter installed onto drive control unit (slot 1)
Data Flow
Control word (CW) References
Status word (SW) Actual values
Parameter R/W requests/responses
Process I/O (cyclic)
Process I/O (cyclic) or Service messages (acyclic)
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 507
Basics of the fieldbus control interface
The cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16- or 32-bit input and output data words. The drive is able to support a maximum of 12 data words (16 bits) in each direction.
Data transmitted from the drive to the fieldbus controller is defined by parameters 52.01 FBA A data in1 ... 52.12 FBA A data in12. The data transmitted from the fieldbus controller to the drive is defined by parameters 53.01 FBA A data out1 ... 53.12 FBA A data out12.
Fieldbus network
Fieldbus adapter
DATA OUT 2)
4) 1 2 3 ... 12
Profile selection
3)
FBA Profile
4)
DATA OUT selection
FBA MAIN CW FBA REF1 FBA REF2
Par. 10.01...99.99
1) EXT1/2 Start func
20.01 20.06 Speed REF1 sel
Fieldbus-specific interface
DATA IN 2)
5) 1 2 3 ... 12
Profile selection
3)
Cyclic communication
Acyclic communication
See the manual of the fieldbus adapter module.
Group 53 5)
DATA IN selection
Group 52
FBA MAIN SW FBA ACT1 FBA ACT2
Par. 01.01...99.99
22.11 Speed REF2 sel
22.12 Parameter
table
1) See also other parameters which can be controlled from fieldbus. 2) The maximum number of data words used is protocol-dependent.
3) Profile/instance selection parameters. Fieldbus module specific parameters. For more information, see the User's manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module.
4) With DeviceNet, the control part is transmitted directly.
5) With DeviceNet, the actual value part is transmitted directly.
508 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Control word and Status word
The Control word is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. It is sent by the fieldbus master station to the drive through the adapter module. The drive switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions in the Control word, and returns status information to the master in the Status word.
For the ABB Drives communication profile, the contents of the Control word and the Status word are detailed on pages 511 and 513 respectively. The drive states are presented in the state diagram (page 514). For other fieldbus-specific communication profiles, see the manual of the fieldbus adapter.
The contents of the Control word and the Status word are detailed on pages 511 and 513 respectively. The drive states are presented in the state diagram (page 514).
Debugging the network words
If parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode is set to Fast, the Control word received from the fieldbus is shown by parameter 50.13 FBA A control word, and the Status word transmitted to the fieldbus network by 50.16 FBA A status word. This "raw" data is very useful to determine if the fieldbus master is transmitting the correct data before handing control to the fieldbus network.
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 509
References
References are 16-bit words containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer. A negative reference (indicating reversed direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the two's complement from the corresponding positive reference.
ABB drives can receive control information from multiple sources including analog and digital inputs, the drive control panel and a fieldbus adapter module. In order to have the drive controlled through the fieldbus, the module must be defined as the source for control information such as reference. This is done using the source selection parameters in groups 22 Speed reference selection, 26 Torque reference chain and 28 Frequency reference chain.
Debugging the network words
If parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode is set to Fast, the references received from the fieldbus are displayed by 50.14 FBA A reference 1 and 50.15 FBA A reference 2.
Scaling of references
Note: The scalings described below are for the ABB Drives communication profile. Fieldbus-specific communication profiles may use different scalings. For more information, see the manual of the fieldbus adapter.
The references are scaled as defined by parameters 46.01...46.04; which scaling is in use depends on the setting of 50.04 FBA A ref1 type and 50.05 FBA A ref2 type.
Fieldbus 20000
Drive
46.01 (with speed reference) 46.02 (with frequency reference)
10000
46.03 (with torque reference)
0
0
-10000 -20000
-(46.03) (with torque reference)
-(46.01) (with speed reference) -(46.02) (with frequency reference)
The scaled references are shown by parameters 03.05 FB A reference 1 and 03.06 FB A reference 2.
510 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Actual values
Actual values are 16-bit words containing information on the operation of the drive. The types of the monitored signals are selected by parameters 50.07 FBA A actual 1 type and 50.08 FBA A actual 2 type.
Debugging the network words
If parameter 50.12 FBA A debug mode is set to Fast, the actual values sent to the fieldbus are displayed by 50.17 FBA A actual value 1 and 50.18 FBA A actual value 2.
Scaling of actual values
Note: The scalings described below are for the ABB Drives communication profile. Fieldbus-specific communication profiles may use different scalings. For more information, see the manual of the fieldbus adapter.
The actual values are scaled as defined by parameters 46.01...46.04; which scaling is in use depends on the setting of parameters 50.07 FBA A actual 1 type and 50.08 FBA A actual 2 type.
Fieldbus 20000
Drive
46.01 (with speed reference) 46.02 (with frequency reference)
10000
46.03 (with torque reference)
0
0
-10000 -20000
-(46.03) (with torque reference)
-(46.01) (with speed reference) -(46.02) (with frequency reference)
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 511
Contents of the fieldbus Control word (ABB Drives profile)
The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the state diagram (page 514).
Bit
Name
Value STATE/Description
0
Off1 control
1
Proceed to READY TO OPERATE.
0
Stop along currently active deceleration ramp. Proceed to OFF1
ACTIVE; proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks
(OFF2, OFF3) are active.
1
Off2 control
1
Continue operation (OFF2 inactive).
0
Emergency OFF, coast to a stop.
Proceed to OFF2 ACTIVE, proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
2
Off3 control
1
Continue operation (OFF3 inactive).
0
Emergency stop, stop within time defined by drive parameter.
Proceed to OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
WARNING: Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode.
3
Run
1
Proceed to OPERATION ENABLED.
Note: Run enable signal must be active; see the drive documentation. If the drive is set to receive the Run enable signal from the fieldbus, this bit activates the signal.
0
Inhibit operation. Proceed to OPERATION INHIBITED.
See also parameter 06.18 Start inhibit status word (page 193).
4
Ramp out zero 1
Normal operation. Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
OUTPUT ENABLED.
0
Force Ramp function generator output to zero. The drive will
immediately decelerate to zero speed (observing the torque limits).
5
Ramp hold
1
ramp function.
Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR ENABLED.
0
Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
6
Ramp in zero
1
Normal operation. Proceed to OPERATING.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
0
Force Ramp function generator input to zero.
7
Reset
0=>1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source of the reset signal by drive parameters.
0
Continue normal operation.
8
Inching 1
1
Accelerate to inching (jogging) setpoint 1.
Notes:
� Bits 4...6 must be 0. � See also section Rush control (page 150).
0
Inching (jogging) 1 disabled.
9
Inching 2
1
Accelerate to inching (jogging) setpoint 2.
See notes at bit 8.
0
Inching (jogging) 2 disabled.
10
Remote cmd
1
Fieldbus control enabled.
0
Control word and reference not getting through to the drive, except
for bits 0...2.
11
Ext ctrl loc
1
Select External Control Location EXT2. Effective if control location is
parameterized to be selected from fieldbus.
0
Select External Control Location EXT1. Effective if control location is
parameterized to be selected from fieldbus.
512 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Bit
Name
12
User bit 0
13
User bit 1
14
User bit 2
15
User bit 3
Value STATE/Description
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 513
Contents of the fieldbus Status word (ABB Drives profile)
The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the state diagram (page 514).
Bit
Name
Value STATE/Description
0
Ready to switch 1
READY TO SWITCH ON.
ON
0
NOT READY TO SWITCH ON.
1
Ready run
1
READY TO OPERATE.
0
OFF1 ACTIVE.
2
Ready ref
1
OPERATION ENABLED.
0
OPERATION INHIBITED.
See also parameter 06.18 Start inhibit status word (page 193).
3
Tripped
1
FAULT.
0
No fault.
4
Off 2 inactive
1
OFF2 inactive.
0
OFF2 ACTIVE.
5
Off 3 inactive
1
OFF3 inactive.
0
OFF3 ACTIVE.
6
Switch-on inhibited 1
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
0
�
7
Warning
1
Warning active.
0
No warning active.
8
At setpoint
1
OPERATING. Actual value equals reference = is within tolerance
limits (see parameter 46.21).
0
Actual value differs from reference = is outside tolerance limits.
9
Remote
1
Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2).
0
Drive control location: LOCAL.
10
Above limit
-
See bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2.
11
User bit 0
-
See parameter 06.30 MSW bit 11 selection.
12
User bit 1
-
See parameter 06.31 MSW bit 12 selection.
13
User bit 2
-
See parameter 06.32 MSW bit 13 selection.
14
User bit 3
-
See parameter 06.33 MSW bit 14 selection.
15
Reserved
514 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
The state diagram (ABB Drives profile)
MAINS OFF Power ON
A BCD
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED SW b6=1
CW b0=0
NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
SW b0=0
from any state Fault
FAULT SW b3=1 CW b7=1
CW b3=0
OPERATION INHIBITED SW b2=0
operation inhibited
from any state
CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x110
READY TO SWITCH ON SW b0=1
from any state
CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x111
Emergency stop OFF2 (CW b1=0)
READY TO OPERATE
SW b1=1
OFF2 ACTIVE SW b4=0
OFF1 (CW b0=0)
OFF1 ACTIVE
SW b1=0
CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx 1111 from any state
n(f) = 0 / I = 0
Emergency stop OFF3 (CW b2=0)
BC D CW b4=0
OFF3 ACTIVE SW b5=0
CD A
CW b5=0
OPERATION ENABLED SW b2=1
CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111
n(f) = 0 / I = 0 STATE
D B
CW b6=0
RFG: OUTPUT ENABLED
CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111
CW SW bx n I RFG f
= Control word = Status word = bit x = Speed = Input Current = Ramp Function
Generator = Frequency
RFG: ACCELERATOR ENABLED
C CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111
OPERATION SW b8=1 D
condition
rising edge of bit
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 515
Setting up the drive for fieldbus control
1. Install the fieldbus adapter module mechanically and electrically according to the instructions given in the User's manual of the module.
2. Power up the drive.
3. Select the macro ABB limited 2-wire from the primary settings or with parameter 96.04 Macro select. This removes the I/O settings that are as default with I/O module.
4. Enable the communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module with parameter 50.01 FBA A enable.
5. With 50.02 FBA A comm loss func, select how the drive should react to a fieldbus communication break. Note: This function monitors both the communication between the fieldbus master and the adapter module and the communication between the adapter module and the drive.
6. With 50.03 FBA A comm loss t out, define the time between communication break detection and the selected action.
7. Select application-specific values for the rest of the parameters in group 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA), starting from 50.04. Examples of appropriate values are shown in the tables below.
8. Set the fieldbus adapter module configuration parameters in group 51 FBA A settings. As a minimum, set the required node address and the communication profile.
9. Define the process data transferred to and from the drive in parameter groups 52 FBA A data in and 53 FBA A data out. Note: Depending on the communication protocol and profile being used, the Control word and Status word may already be configured to be sent/received by the communication system.
10. Save the valid parameter values to permanent memory by setting parameter 96.07 Parameter save manually to Save.
11. Validate the settings made in parameter groups 51, 52 and 53 by setting parameter 51.27 FBA A par refresh to Configure.
12. Configure control locations EXT1 and EXT2 to allow control and reference signals to come from the fieldbus. Examples of appropriate values are shown in the tables below.
516 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Parameter setting example: FPBA (PROFIBUS DP) with ABB Drives profile
This example shows how to configure a basic speed control application that uses the ABB Drives communication profile with PPO Type 2. The start/stop commands and reference are according to the ABB Drives profile, speed control mode.
The reference values sent over the fieldbus have to be scaled within the drive so they have the desired effect. The reference value �16384 (4000h) corresponds to the range of speed set in parameter 46.01 Speed scaling (both forward and reverse directions). For example, if 46.01 is set to 480 rpm, then 4000h sent over fieldbus will request 480 rpm.
Direction Out In
PZD1 Control word Status word
PZD2 Speed reference Speed actual value
PZD3 PZD4 Acc time 1 Motor current
PZD5 PZD6 Dec time 1 DC voltage
The table below gives the recommended drive parameter settings.
Drive parameter 50.01 FBA A enable 50.04 FBA A ref1 type 50.07 FBA A actual 1 type
Setting for ACX580 drives 1 = [slot number]
4 = Speed
0 = Speed or frequency
Description
s communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module. Selects the fieldbus A reference 1 type and scaling. Selects the actual value type and scaling according to the currently active Ref1 mode defined in parameter 50.04.
51.01 FBA A type 51.02 Node address 51.03 Baud rate 51.04 MSG type 51.05 Profile 51.07 RPBA mode
1 = FPBA1) 32) 120001) 1 = PPO21) 1 = ABB Drives 0 = Disabled
Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter module.
Defines the PROFIBUS node address of the fieldbus adapter module.
Displays the current baud rate on the PROFIBUS network in kbit/s.
Displays the telegram type selected by the PLC configuration tool.
Selects the Control word according to the ABB Drives profile (speed control mode).
Disables the RPBA emulation mode.
52.01 FBA data in1 52.02 FBA data in2 52.03 FBA data in3 52.05 FBA data in5 53.01 FBA data out1 53.02 FBA data out2
4 = SW 16bit1)
5 = Act1 16bit 01.072) 01.112) 1 = CW 16bit1)
2 = Ref1 16bit
Status word Actual value 1 Motor current DC voltage Control word Reference 1 (speed)
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 517
Drive parameter
53.03 FBA data out3 53.05 FBA data out5
Setting for ACX580 drives 23.122) 23.132)
Description
Acceleration time 1 Deceleration time 1
51.27 FBA A par refresh 1 = Configure
Validates the configuration parameter settings.
19.12 Ext1 control mode 2 = Speed
20.01 Ext1 commands
12 = Fieldbus A
20.02 Ext1 start trigger type 1 = Level
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1
4 = FB A ref1
1) Read-only or automatically detected/set 2) Example
Selects speed control as the control mode 1 for external control location EXT1.
Selects fieldbus adapter A as the source of the start and stop commands for external control location EXT1.
Selects a level-triggered start signal for external control location EXT1.
Selects fieldbus A reference 1 as the source for speed reference 1.
Start sequence: � 476h NOT READY TO SWITCH ON � If MSW bit 0 = 1 then
� 477h READY TO SWITCH ON (Stopped) � 47Fh OPERATION (Running)
Stop sequence: � 477h = Stop according to 21.03 Stop mode � 47Eh = OFF1 ramp stop (Note: uninterruptable ramp stop)
Fault reset: � Rising edge of MCW bit 7
Start after STO:
If 31.22 STO indication run/stop is not Fault/ Fault, check that 06.18 Start inhibit status word, bit 7 STO = 0 before giving a start command.
518 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Automatic drive configuration for fieldbus control
The parameters set on module detection are shown in the table below. See also parameters 07.35 Drive configuration and 07.36 Drive configuration 2.
Option BIO-01
10.24 RO1 source -
10.27 RO2 source -
10.30 RO3 source -
20.01 Ext1 commands 2 (In1 Start,
In2 Dir)
20.03 Ext1 in1 source
2 (DI1)
20.04 Ext1 in2 source
3 (DI2)
RIIO-01
-
-
-
2 (In1 Start, 2 (DI1)
3 (DI2)
In2 Dir)
FENA-21
-
-
-
-
-
-
FECA-01
-
-
-
-
-
-
FPBA-01
-
-
-
-
-
-
FCAN-01
-
-
-
-
-
-
FSCA-01
-
-
-
-
-
-
FEIP-21
-
-
-
-
-
-
FMBT-21
-
-
-
-
-
-
FPNO-21
-
-
-
-
-
-
FEPL-02
-
-
-
-
-
-
FDNA-01
-
-
-
-
-
-
FCNA-01
-
-
-
-
-
-
Option
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1
BIO-01
RIIO-01
FENA-21 FECA-01 FPBA-01 FCAN-01 FSCA-01 FEIP-21 FMBT-21 FPNO-21 FEPL-02 FDNA-01 FCNA-01
1 (AI1 scaled)
1 (AI1 scaled)
-
22.22 Constant speed sel1
4 (DI3)
4 (DI3)
-
22.23 Constant speed sel2
5 (DI4)
5 (DI4)
-
Option BIO-01
23.11 Ramp set
selection 6 (DI5)
28.11 Ext1 frequency
ref1 1 (AI1 scaled)
28.22 Constant frequency
sel1 4 (DI3)
28.23 Constant frequency
sel2 5 (DI4)
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 519
Option
23.11 Ramp 28.11 Ext1
set
frequency
selection
ref1
RIIO-01
FENA-21 FECA-01 FPBA-01 FCAN-01 FSCA-01 FEIP-21 FMBT-21 FPNO-21 FEPL-02 FDNA-01 FCNA-01
6 (DI5)
-
1 (AI1 scaled)
-
28.22 Constant frequency
sel1 4 (DI3)
-
28.23 Constant frequency
sel2 5 (DI4)
-
Option
BIO-01 RIIO-01 FENA-21 FECA-01 FPBA-01 FCAN-01 FSCA-01 FEIP-21 FMBT-21 FPNO-21 FEPL-02 FDNA-01 FCNA-01
28.71 Freq ramp set selection
6 (DI5) 6 (DI5)
-
31.11 Fault reset
selection 0 0 -
Option
50.01 FBA A enable
50.02 FBA A comm loss
func
51.02 FBA A Par2
51.04 FBA A Par4
BIO-01
0
0
-
-
RIIO-01
0
0
-
-
FENA-21 1 (Enable)
0
11
0
FECA-01 1 (Enable)
0
0
-
FPBA-01 1 (Enable)
0
-
-
FCAN-01 1 (Enable)
0
-
-
FSCA-01 1 (Enable)
0
-
-
FEIP-21 1 (Enable)
0
100
0
520 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Option
50.01 FBA A enable
50.02 FBA A comm loss
func
51.02 FBA A Par2
51.04 FBA A Par4
FMBT-21 1 (Enable)
0
0
0
FPNO-21 1 (Enable)
0
11
0
FEPL-02 1 (Enable)
0
-
-
FDNA-01 1 (Enable)
0
-
-
FCNA-01 1 (Enable)
0
-
-
Option
51.05 FBA A 51.06 FBA A 51.07 FBA A 51.21 FBA A 51.23 FBA A 51.24 FBA A
Par5
Par6
Par7
Par21
Par23
Par24
BIO-01
-
-
-
-
-
-
RIIO-01
-
-
-
-
-
-
FENA-21
-
-
-
-
-
-
FECA-01
-
-
-
-
-
-
FPBA-01
1
-
-
-
-
-
FCAN-01
0
-
-
-
-
-
FSCA-01
-
10
1
-
-
-
FEIP-21
-
-
-
-
128
128
FMBT-21
-
-
-
1
-
-
FPNO-21
-
-
-
-
-
-
FEPL-02
-
-
-
-
-
-
FDNA-01
-
-
-
-
-
-
FCNA-01
-
-
-
-
-
-
Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter 521
Option
52.01 FBA data in1
BIO-01
-
RIIO-01
-
FENA-21
4
FECA-01
-
FPBA-01
4
FCAN-01
-
FSCA-01
-
FEIP-21
-
FMBT-21
-
FPNO-21
4
FEPL-02
-
FDNA-01
-
FCNA-01
-
52.02 BA data in2
5 5 -
5 -
53.01 FBA data out1
1 1 -
53.02 FBA data out2
2 2 -
-
-
-
-
1
2
-
-
-
-
-
-
58.01 Protocol enable
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
522 Fieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter
Control chain diagrams 523
12
Control chain diagrams
Contents of this chapter
The chapter presents the reference chains of the drive. The control chain diagrams can be used to trace how parameters interact and where parameters have an effect within the drive parameter system. For a more general diagram, see section Operating modes of the drive (page 110).
28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1
Selection
28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2
Selection
>
>
ADD SUB MUL MIN MAX
28.17 Ext2 frequency function Selection
28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1
Selection
28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2
Selection
>
>
ADD SUB MUL MIN MAX
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection Selection
28.21 Const frequency function Selection
28.22 Constant frequency sel1 Selection 28.23 Constant frequency sel2 Selection 28.24 Constant frequency sel3 Selection
>>>
>
CONSTANT FREQUENCY SELECTION
0
28.26 Constant frequency 1 28.27 Constant frequency 2 28.28 Constant frequency 3 28.29 Constant frequency 4 28.30 Constant frequency 5 28.31 Constant frequency 6 28.32 Constant frequency 7
Value Value Value Value Value Value Value
> >
Selection
>
28.13 Ext1 frequency function
28.92 Frequency ref act 3
Value
Direction Lock
28.96 Frequency ref act 7
Value
Constant frequency ref Constant frequency command
Fieldbus: ODVA CIPTM
Network reference 6.16 bit 9 Network control Value
03.01 Panel reference Value 06.16 bit 8 Local control Value
28.41 Frequency ref safe Value
49.05 Communication loss action = Speed ref safe Panel comm loss active
Panel as local control device
50.02 FBA A comm loss func = Speed ref safe Fieldbus comm loss active
Control from Fieldbus active
AND
OR Frequency reference safe command
AND
524 Control chain diagrams
Frequency reference selection
>
> >
28.76 Freq ramp in zero source Selection
Value
OR
6.1 bit 6 Ramp in zero Value
28.51 Critical frequency function 28.52 Critical frequency 1 low 28.53 Critical frequency 1 high 28.54 Critical frequency 2 low 28.55 Critical frequency 2 high 28.56 Critical frequency 3 low 28.57 Critical frequency 3 high
Selection Value Value Value Value Value Value
28.96 Frequency ref act 7
Value
CRITICAL FREQ
6.1 bit 5 Ramp hold Value
RAMP
28.97 Freq ref unlimited
Value
0
30.14 Maximum frequency
Value
28.01 Frequency ref ramp input
Value Value
30.13 Minimum frequency
28.72 Freq acceleration time 1 Value 28.74 Freq acceleration time 2 Value
28.73 Freq deceleration time 1 Value 28.75 Freq deceleration time 2 Value
28.82 Shape time 1
Value
28.83 Shape time 2
Value
0
28.71 Freq ramp set selection Selection
6.1 bit 4 Ramp out zero Value
28.02 Frequency ref ramp output
Value
Frequency reference modification
Control chain diagrams 525
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 22.12 Ext1 speed ref2
22.13 Ext1 speed function Selection
Selection Selection
>
>
ADD SUB MUL MIN MAX
22.20 Ext2 speed function Selection
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1
Selection
22.19 Ext2 speed ref2
Selection
>
>
ADD SUB MUL MIN MAX
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection Selection
>
> >
22.86 Speed reference act 6
Value
526 Control chain diagrams
Speed reference source selection I
22.86 Speed ref act 6
Value
22.21 Constant speed function Selection
22.22 Constant speed sel1 22.23 Constant speed sel2 22.24 Constant speed sel3
Selection Selection Selection
>>>
>
CONSTANT SPEED
SELECTION
0
22.26 Constant speed 1 22.27 Constant speed 2 22.28 Constant speed 3 22.29 Constant speed 4 22.30 Constant speed 5 22.31 Constant speed 6 22.32 Constant speed 7
Value Value Value Value Value Value Value
20.27 Jogging 2 start source 20.25 Jogging enable
Value Value
20.26 Jogging 1 start source
AND
Jogging 2
AND
Jogging 1
22.43 Jogging 2 ref
Value
Direction Lock
22.87 Speed reference act 7 Value
22.42 Jogging 1 ref
Value
Fieldbus: ODVA CIPTM
Network reference 6.16 bit 9 Network control
Value
3.01 Panel reference
Value
6.16 bit 8 Local control
Value
49.05 Communication loss action = Speed ref safe Panel comm loss active
Panel as local control device
50.02 FBA A comm loss func = Speed ref safe Fieldbus comm loss active
Control from Fieldbus active
AND AND
22.41 Speed ref safe
Value
Speed ref safe command
OR
22.51 Critical speed function Selection
22.52 Critical speed 1 low
Value
22.53 Critical speed 1 high
Value
22.54 Critical speed 2 low
Value
22.55 Critical speed 2 high 22.56 Critical speed 3 low
Value Value
22.57 Critical speed 3 high
Value
CRITICAL SPEEDS
22.01 Speed ref unlimited Value
Control chain diagrams 527
Speed reference source selection II
>
23.01 Speed ref ramp input
>>
30.36 Speed limit selection Selection
30.38 Max speed source Selection
MIN
30.12 Maximum speed Value
30.37 Min speed source Selection 30.11 Minimum speed Value
>
MAX
6.1 bit 6 Ramp in zero
Value
22.01 Speed ref unlimited
Value
0
Value
6.11 bit 5 Off 3 inactive
Value
23.23 Emergency stop time Value
23.11 Ramp set selection Selection
>
Value
23.12 Acceleration time 1 Value 23.14 Acceleration time 2 Value
23.13 Deceleration time 1 Value 23.15 Deceleration time 2 Value
23.32 Shape time 1 Value
23.33 Shape time 2 Value
0
23.20 Acc time jogging 23.21 Dec time jogging
Value Value
20.25 Jogging enable
20.26 Jogging 1 start source OR
20.27 Jogging 2 start source
AND
23.28 Variable slope enable Value 23.29 Variable slope rate Value 46.01 Speed scaling Value
6.1 bit 8 Inching 1 6.1 bit 9 Inching 2
Value Value
6.1 bit 4 Ramp out zero 6.1 bit 5 Ramp hold
6.1 bit 6 Ramp in zero
XOR
Value Value Value
AND
6.1 bit 9 Inching 2
Value
RAMP
RAMP
ACC TIME
DEC TIME
SHAPE TIME
22.42 Jogging 1 ref 22.43 Jogging 2 ref
Value Value
23.20 Acc time jogging 23.21 Dec time jogging
Value Value
SHAPE
6.11 bit 5 Off 3 inactive Value 0
ACC TIME DEC TIME
6.1 bit 4 Ramp out zero Value Stop command
AND
23.02 Speed ref ramp output
Value
528 Control chain diagrams
Speed reference ramping and shaping
23.02 Speed ref ramp output Value 24.11 Speed correction Value
25.06 Acc comp derivation time Value 25.07 Acc comp filter time Value
d dt
TAccCom Value
25.56 Torque acc compensation
+
24.01 Used speed reference Value
-1
x
Value
24.04 Speed error inverted
-
24.03 Speed error filtered
Value
24.02 Used speed feedback Value 24.12 Speed error filter time Value
Speed error calculation
Control chain diagrams 529
24.03 Speed error filtered Value
25.02 Speed proportional gain 25.03 Speed integration time 25.04 Speed derivation time 25.05 Derivation filter time 25.15 Proportional gain em stop
Value Value Value Value Value
30.18 Torq lim sel Value
30.20 Maximum torque Value 30.22 Max torque 2 source Selection
Speed regulator PID
Value Value Value Value
25.53 Torque prop reference
25.54 Torque integral reference 25.55 Torque deriv reference 25.56 Torque acc compensation
30.19 Minimum torque Value 30.21 Min torque 2 source Selection
30.18 Torq lim sel Value
530 Control chain diagrams
Speed controller
> >
25.01 Torque reference speed control
Value
26.14 Torq ref1/2 selection Selection 26.13 Torq ref1 function Value
Ref 1
26.11 Torq ref1 source
ADD
Selection
>
26.70 Torque Reference act 1
SUB
Value
26.12 Torq ref2 source
MUL
Selection
>
26.71 Torque Reference act 2
MIN
Value
MAX
>
26.09 Maximum torque ref Value
MIN
Internal torque lim max
26.72 Torque reference act 3
Value
6.16 bit 9 Network control
Value
26.73 Torque reference act 4
Value
26.18 Torq ramp up time
Value
Fieldbus: ODVA CIPTM
Network ref
03.01 Panel reference
Value
6.16 bit 8 Local control Value 26.08 Minimum torque ref Value
MAX
Internal torque lim min Value
26.17 Torque ref filter time Value
26.19 Torque ramp down time Value
26.74 Torque ref ramp out
Value
Control chain diagrams 531
Torque reference source selection and modification
532 Control chain diagrams
Reference selection for torque controller
19.12 Ext1 control mode
Selection
>
Value
19.14 Ext2 control mode
Selection
>
Value
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 sel Selection
>
Torque selector
26.22 Torque sel speed in 25.01 Torq reference speed control 0
Selection
Value
> >
26.21 Torque sel torque in
Selection
26.74 Torque ref ramp out
Value
ZERO SPEED TORQUE
MIN MAX ADD
26.01 Torque reference to TC
Speed limitation
Value
Value
26.75 Torque reference act 5
01.01 Motor speed used Value
Fieldbus: ODVA CIPTM
SPEED
6.16 bit 9 Network control Value 19.16 Local control mode Value
06.16 bit 8 Local control
Value
06.17 bit 6 Last speed active
SPEED Value
06.17 bit 5 Safe reference active
SPEED Value
SCALAR
99.04 Motor ctrl mode Value
SPEED
Safety function active
SPEED
Value
19.01 Actual operation mode
30.36 Speed limit selection Selection 30.38 Max speed source Selection 30.12 Maximum speed Value
30.37 Min speed source Selection 30.11 Minimum speed Value
>
>>
MIN MAX
6.01 bit 0 Off1 control Value 6.01 bit 2 Off3 control Value 21.05 Emergency stop source Value
AND OR
26.01 Torq reference to TC Value
DC voltage limiter
Power limiter
30.30 Overvoltagecontrol Value 30.31 Undervoltagecontrol Value
24.02 Used speed feedback Value
30.26Powermotoringlimit Value 30.27Powergeneratinglimit Value
Torque limiter
>
30.19 Minimum torque Value 30.21 Min torque 2 source Selection
30.18 Torq lim sel Value
30.20 Maximum torque Value 30.22 Max torque 2 source Selection
>
Load angle limitation
Motor pull-out limitation
30.02 Torque limit status
Current limiter
To TC
26.02 Torque reference used
Value
30.02 Torque limit status
30.17 Maximum current Value
Bit Name 0 = Undervoltage 1 = Overvoltage 2 = Minimum torque 3 = Maximum torque 4 = Internal current 5 = Load angle 6 = Motor pull-out 7 = Reserved 8 = Thermal 9 = Max current 10 = User current 11 = Thermal IGBT 12 = 13 = 14 = 15 =
Torque limitation
Control chain diagrams 533
534 Control chain diagrams
Process PID setpoint and feedback source selection
>
40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1 Selection 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2 Selection
40.24 Set 1 internal setpoint 0 40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1 40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2 40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3
Value Value Value Value
>
>
b0 BIN TO 0
b1 INT
SEL OUT
0
1
40.62 PID internal setpoint actual
2
Value
3
40.18 Set 1 setpoint function Value
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source
Selection
>
Value
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source
Selection
>
Value
Setpoint 1 ADD SUB MUL ADdIVd MIN MMAulX AVE
a a-b a+b a+ b
40.89 Set 1 setpoint multiplier
Value
Setpoint Scale
40.26 Set 1 setpoint min Value 40.28 Set 1 setpoint increase time Value 40.29 Set 1 setpoint decrease time Value
Value
40.27 Set 1 setpoint max
40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze enable
Selection
RAMP
40.03 Process PID setpoint actual
Value
+
40.06 Process PID status word: bit 4 PID sleep mode Value
Pulse
40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time Value
0
40.10 Set 1 feedback function Selection
>
40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step Value
40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source
Selection
>
Value
40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source
Selection
>
Value
Feedback 1 ADD SUB MUL ADdIVd MIN MMAulX AVE a a-b a+b a+ b
40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time Value 40.90 Set 1 feedback multiplier Value
Feedback Scale
Value
40.02 Process PID feedback actual
Note! Process PID parameter set 2 is also available. See parameter group 41.
Process PID controller
> >
> >
> >
TRIM FUNCTION
40.52 Set 1 trim selection Selection
30.20 Maximum torque 1 30.12 Maximum speed
30.14 Maximum frequency
Value Value Value
40.54 Set 1 trim mix
Value (range 0...1)
40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer Selection
>
>
40.55 Set 1 trim adjust Value 40.51 Set 1 trim mode Selection
x 1-
Off 0 Direct Proportional
Combined
40.56 Set 1 trim source Selection
+ x
40.03 Process PID setpoint actual Value
x
x 40.05 Process PID trim output act
Value
PROCESS PID FUNCTION
40.38 Output freeze Selection 40.40 Deadband delay Value
40.39 Deadband range Value
Compare
Delay
40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion
Selection
1 -1
Value
40.98 Process PID setpoint %
% scaling
>
40.81 Set 1 output max source
ABS
40.37 Set 1 output max Value
Selection
40.15 Set 1 output scaling Value
40.04 Process PID deviation actual Value
100%
40.99 Process PID Deviation %
Value
Process
PID
OR
status
40.06 Process PID status word
Value
40.49 Set 1 tracking mode Selection
40.01 Process PID Output actual
Value
40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection Value
Value
40.03 Process PID setpoint actual
-
40.02 Process PID feedback actual
Value
Input
x
Scale
PID
Output Scale
40.43 Set 1 sleep level Value
% scaling
40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling Value
40.97 Process PID feedback %
Value
40.32 Set 1 gain Value 40.33 Set 1 integration time Value
40.34 Set 1 derivation time Value 40.35 Set 1 derivation filter time Value 40.07 Set 1 PID operation mode Value 40.58 Set 1 increase preventation Value 40.59 Set 1 Decrease preventation Value
40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time Value 40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step Value
40.43 Set 1 sleep level 40.44 Set 1 sleep delay 40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation
Value Value Value
40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay Value
Sleep Function
40.06 bit 3 Sleep mode 40.06 bit 4 Sleep boost
40.80 Set 1 output min source
40.36 Set 1 output min Value
Selection
Control chain diagrams 535
536 Control chain diagrams
External PID setpoint and feedback source selection
71.19 Internal setpoint sel1 Selection 71.20 Internal setpoint sel2 Selection
71.21 Internal setpoint 1 71.22 Internal setpoint 2 71.23 Internal setpoint 3
Value Value Value
>
>
b0 BIN TO 0
b1 INT
SEL OUT
0
0
1
2 3
71.16 Setpoint 1 source
Selection
Value
71.62 PID internal setpoint actual
Value
71.26 Setpoint min Value
Value
71.27 Setpoint max
Value
71.03 Setpoint act value
> >
71.08 Feedback 1 source
Selection
Value
71.11 Feedback filter time
Value
Value
71.02 Feedback act value
> >
71.38 Output freeze Selection 71.40 Deadband delay Value
71.39 Deadband range Value
Compare
Delay
ABS
71.03 Setpoint act value 71.02 Feedback act value
Value Value
71.31 Deviation inversion
Selection
1 -1
-x
71.14 Setpoint scaling 71.15 Output scaling
Value Value
71.37 Output max Value
71.04 Deviation act value
Value
PID
Scale
71.32 Gain Value 71.33 Integration time Value 71.34 Derivation time Value 71.35 Derivation filter time Value 71.07 PID operation mode Value 71.58 Increase prevention Value 71.59 Decrease prevention Value
71.36 Output min Value
OR
Value
71.01 External PID act value
External PID status
71.06 PID status word
Value
External PID controller
Control chain diagrams 537
20.21 Direction = Request
20.21 Direction = Request Reverse command active
Input reference > 0
AND
AND
Reference from FB
Reference from PID
Reference from Motor potentiometer
Reference from Panel
Reference from AI
Reference from AP program
OR
Jogging Reference
Last/Safe reference
Constant reference
Reference from FB
Reference from Motor potentiometer
Reference from Panel
Last/Safe reference
OR
Reference from AI
Reference from AP program
-1
X
Reference from Network
Input reference
MAX
0
-1
X
20.21 Direction = Reverse
OR 20.21 Direction = Request
Reverse command active
AND
Output reference
538 Control chain diagrams
Direction lock
-- Further information
Product and service inquiries
Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting the type designation and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales, support and service contacts can be found by navigating to abb.com/searchchannels.
Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to new.abb.com/service/training.
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals
Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Navigate to new.abb.com/drives/manuals-feedback-form.
Document library on the Internet
You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet at abb.com/drives/documents.
abb.com/drives abb.com/drivespartners
3AXD50000047399D
� Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change without notice.
3AXD50000047399 Rev D (EN) 2019-09-16